Trailing-Edge
-
PDP-10 Archives
-
tops10and20_integ_tools_v9_3-aug-86
-
tools/crc/help/guide.lbr
There are no other files named guide.lbr in the archive.
E/
com e ry Z\eX g ALGOL 2
%+XCARCHIVE < AO|)BBREAK ACE JG O|>BASIC Oe J%+XEBATCH b/ >%+XECOBDDT tm %+XGCOBOL | %+XGCSAVE UE } iRf+DUMPER g c=%+XREDIT-PROGRAM $ gv%+XTFORK GE k
uQL4;GET NGE v +P,NFILCOM < *v%+XXFORDDT *2 *o%+XYFORTRAN U!
2%+XYLOGOUT _S ^QSIXREMARK o2 aQ[$ MACRO v n%+X\MAIL ^%+X]MAKLIB "` %^%+X^PLEASE H> '%+X_REENTER Xe Q[ PUSH `f LQU .RDMAIL p2 ;%+XaSTART m P*=UNATTACH Y m Q{i?SET | >P42qTRANSLATE :
tQ{ASET-ACCOUNT !/ P3#FREEZE "L qPLKQSYSTAT )= JQtSPTYPE B ,Q{hSET-TRAP-FILE-OPENINGS K3 SP4UNLOAD E M Q|6SVDIRECTORY X sQ|;6SET-ADDRESS-BREAK a ;P3
UDDT-PROGRAM eM /L%,gTARCHIVING "5 LuRDIRECTORY 4< fOlH~DAYTIME '" QC ENABLE CP iQD\HRESET E J:
Q[L QDIRECTORY rredirectories and their f QF Ozh
connected YM URu]ACCESS
Your currently connected `# `Q1BACKSPACE o not change.
In addit w /QASSIGN member of the same groups as t 3 O|2YCANCEL : <Q RCOMPILE 2v )Q } EXPUNGE \
]QL'$FDIRECTORY pi 6P'
LOAD | KP2GDELETE G& KPS\kHELP NUE [r +QLB:CREF a MR`
POP FY oj {QTCFRETRIEVE ~f nQ[Q#TDIRECTORY
T UQu6SAVE
#) >P*mTAKE
.g zQt[UUNDELETE
Aa Q{p#DISMOUNT
Ow +P-"MOUNT
l" M<P- ISET-LATE-CLEAR-TYPEAHEAD 9^ !P4TORY-ACCOUNT-DEFAULT = *P3=SET-FILE-EXPIRED H-ON-EXP-FILES >B ^P3rGSET-DIRECTORY-FILE-PROTECTION-DEFAULT ?! NP3EASET-DIRECTORY-GENERATION-RET-CT-DEF @o FP3JSET-FILE-ACCOUNT ARCH-ON-EXP-FILES B6 lP3g SET-DIRECTORY-ARCH-ON-EXP-FILES C" OP3VSET-DIRECTORY-OFF-EXP-DEF Dq 8P3WSET-DIRECTORY-ON-EXP-DEF F) "P3YZSET-DIRECTORY-PASSWORD GK 6P3\4SET-DIRECTORY-PROTECTION I P3`>SET-ENTRY-VECTOR L !P3b SET-FILE M-
P3duSET-FILE-GENERATION-RET-COUNT N7 uP3u SET-FILE-PROTECTION O- gP3z SET-TRAP CLEAR-TYPEAHEAD Q :P46SET-FILE-VISIBLE QN P3~~SET-FILE-RESIST Rc ^P3+SET-LOCATION TA &P4SET-TRAP-JSYS Vh nP4ISET-ALERT XV VP44SET-AUTOMATIC ], IP4bSET-CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY v <P4 {SET-DEFAULT b2 P4 FSET-MAIL-WATCH fB UP4BSET-RETRIEVAL-WAIT j P4lSET-TIME-LIMIT l( vP47SET-TRAP-PROCEED n FP4 vSET-PAGE-ACCESS oe P4 HSET-TAPE rx <P4$`SET-TAPE-DENSITY s5 =P4%`SET-TAPE-FORMAT tr DP4)SET-TAPE-PARITY v6 nP4+\SET-TAPE-RECORD-LENGTH w$ 'P4,lSET-TYPEOUT-MODE xK *P4.,SET-UUO-SIMULATION yv
Function
The ADVISE c }s :P45FINFO-ARCHIVE-STATUS ther user's terminal - P45FINFO-ARPANET ands to his job. The advis
@ ^P45GINFO-AVAILABLE o his job.
Format
6P45GINFO-BATCH-REQUESTS gument is either a
U 0P45HINFO-COMMAND-LEVEL
Characteristic
P45HINFO-DECNET-NODES or as long as the ADVI
" }P45HINFO-DEFAULTS commands you
give affec
(P45HINFO-DIRECTORY your own.
Ending A
H P45IINFO-DISK-USAGE ink that you have formed
b +P45IINFO-FILE-STATUS type CTRL/E. This CTRL
+P45JINFO-JOB-STATUS erminal.
Refused A
9 HP45JINFO-LOGICAL-NAMES advise a job unless i
P45KINFO-MAIL receive advice. However, if y
P45KINFO-MEMORY-USAGE bilities enabled, you
& 2P45LINFO-MONITOR-STATISTICS s
Advisee
X P45LINFO-MOUNT-REQUESTS than one job is loog
%p )P45LINFO-OUTPUT-REQUESTS cify, the system gi
, QP45MINFO-PROGRAM-STATUS nal
numbers and a
0j AP45MINFO-PSI-STATUS om, then prints
TTY:
4, 5P45MINFO-RETRIEVAL-REQUESTS ice of terminal
6a +P45NINFO-SPOOLED-OUTPUT-ACTION ng a Pseudote
:
`P45NINFO-STRUCTURE to advise a PTY: the syst
<l %Z\eXINFO-SUBSYSTEM-STATISTICS confirm with
A HP45OINFO-SYSTEM-STATUS
Using CTRL/^?
C[ |P45OINFO-TAPE-PARAMETERS does not seem to w
GW 3P45OINFO-TERMINAL-MODE and a VT52
If l
I
P45PINFO-VERSION terminals are established u
N P45PINFO-VOLUMES command, the VT52 may funct
Q: [P45PTERMINAL-FLAG
R 8P4nPTERMINAL-FORMFEED
SM fP4nPTERMINAL-FULLDUPLEX
U4 'P4nPTERMINAL-HALFDUPLEX
V[ P4nQTERMINAL-IMMEDIATE
Wd vP4nQTERMINAL-INDICATE
YZ P4nQTERMINAL-LA120
Zw P4nQTERMINAL-LENGTH
\ YP4nRTERMINAL-LINE-HALFDUPLEX
]g gP4nRTERMINAL-LOWERCASE
^N *P4nRTERMINAL-PAGE
`x *P4nRTERMINAL-PAUSE
c" P4nSTERMINAL-RAISE
k: P4nSTERMINAL-SPEED
l[ zP4nSTERMINAL-SYSTEM-DEFAULT
pU tP4nSTERMINAL-TABS
rI )P4nuTERMINAL-TYPE
sr mP4nuTERMINAL-VT100
ADVISE Command
w` -P4nuTERMINAL-VT125 ommand links your termina
y BP4nvTERMINAL-WIDTH
so that you can give c
zO P4nvTALK T he advisee can still give
comma
{l 7Qu0bKEEP
Format
@ADVISE argument
wh &PLKQNAME Peithertacuser name or terminal lin
Input>toLOtherKJo MANDS
,C132
iATTACH
PSQCD : Q=$NSET-SPOOLED-OUTPUT Q 7PliQORIGINAL BQE%ADVISE K &Q2APPEND /q +Q9=BUILD I KQT^CONNECT % FQ CONTINUE +k (Q"|yCOPY D (4Q#O0DEASSIGN lG :QCFDEFINE v QC(?DEPOSIT QDDIRECTORY 6!QD6^DISABLE Q1 QDNLDISCARD UB
RQDQQEND-ACCESS `
jQD}JEXAMINE j~
=EXECUTE xw 2WQL !INFORMATION +N >QLX4LOGIN 0
QT(8PRINT + ,.QU0R 2Y
:QU$|RECEIVE =
Q[USE G! *Q[BREWIND RK eQ\%SKIP ^1 +Q\:QSUBMIT m\ 5VQszPUNCH p iR
d'MERGE
Z R
jMEOF s $R
j<SET-FILE-EPHEMERAL & )RLLERUN )@ Ruex ALGOL Compiler
Function
The ALGOL compiler produces object programs from ALGOL source
programs.
Hints
To run an ALGOL program:
1. Enter your source program into a file (by using EDIT).
2. Give the EXECUTE command to compile, load and start the
program.
3. If you plan to execute the program frequently, use the LOAD
command and SAVE command instead of EXECUTE. You can now use
the RUN command, which is faster than EXECUTE, until you EDIT
the program again.
Use the ALGDDT program to debug ALGOL programs.
If you have a main program and assorted subroutines that require
special loading, refer to Section n which describes the
LOAD-class commands.
Operation
1. Enter your ALGOL program into a file.
@CREATE (FILE) SQRT.ALG
INPUT: SQRT.ALG.1
00100 BEGIN
00200 REAL X, Y;
00300 WRITE ("[2C] TYPE THE VALUE OF X: [B]");
00400 READ (X);
00500 Y := SQRT(X);
00600 WRITE ("[C] THE SQUAREROOT OF ");
00700 PRINT (X,3,3);
00800 WRITE (" IS ");
00900 PRINT (Y,3,3);
01000 END
01100 $
*E
[SQRT.ALG.1]
@
2. Give the EXECUTE command to run the program.
@EXECUTE (FROM) SQRT.ALG
ALGOL: SQRT
LINK: Loading
[LNKXCT SQRT Execution]
TYPE THE VALUE OF X: 34.889
THE SQUAREROOT OF 34.889 IS 5.907
END OF EXECUTION.
@
Characteristics
The LOAD-class commands run the ALGOL compiler to translate your
ALGOL source program, thereby destroying the contents of memory.
Depending on the operation you request, your terminal may or may
not be left at TOPS-20 command level.
Examples
The user creates and runs his ALGOL program.
@CREATE (FILE) T.ALG
INPUT: T.ALG.1
00100 BEGIN
00200 INTEGER I,J;
00300 WRITE ("[2C] TYPE THE NUMBER: [B]");
00400 READ (I);
00500 J := 2 * I;
00600 WRITE ("[C] TWICE THAT NUMBER IS: ");
00700 PRINT (J);
00900 END
*E
[T.ALG.1]
@EXECUTE (FROM) T.ALG
ALGOL: T
LINK: Loading
[LNKXCT T Execution]
TYPE THE NUMBER: 345
TWICE THAT NUMBER IS: 690
END OF EXECUTION.
@
The user runs an ALGOL program with two subroutines.
@EXECUTE (FROM) COMPAR,NEWTON,PSQRT
ALGOL: COMPAR
ALGOL: NEWTON
ALGOL: PSQRT
LINK: Loading
[LNKXCT COMPAR Execution]
TYPE A NUMBER: 4.
END OF EXECUTION.
@
ARCHIVE Command
Function
The ARCHIVE command asks that a permanent off-line copy of specified
files be made on magnetic tape, and prevents the disk copy (if retained)
from being modified.
Format
@ARCHIVE (FILES) filespec,...,
@@subcommand
where
filespec is the specification of a file of which
you want a permanent copy
,... means that, after commas, you can give
more arguments of the form already shown
@@subcommand means that after a final comma you can
type an optional subcommand. The
following subcommand is available:
RETAIN which causes the disk
copies of the files
being archived to be
retained in your
directory, rather than
deleted and expunged
Output
Whenever a file is take off line as a result of your ARCHIVE command
(i.e., when you do not also give the RETAIN subcommand), the operator
sends a MAIL message notifying the owner of the directory from which the
file was taken. For this purpose, the owner of the directory is defined
to be the user or users whose user names appear in a file of
specification DIRECTORY.OWNER in the directory. If this file does not
exist, the message is sent to MAIL.TXT in the directory. If neither
exists, no message is sent.
Characteristics
Archived Files Unalterable
You cannot change the contents of files specified in an ARCHIVE
command once the command is given, even if the files are not
immediately copied to tape. This means that you cannot alter or
add to them by using an editor or APPEND command, or overwrite
them by using the COPY or RENAME command. In general, files for
which you have requested archival must not be given as the
second filespec argument of these commands.
Archived Files Invisible
The files you specify in an ARCHIVE command ordinarily become
invisible to most TOPS-20 commands as soon as the ARCHIVE
command is given. However, if you include the RETAIN subcommand
when giving the ARCHIVE command, the files remain visible. See
Related Commands, below, for a list of commands you can use with
invisible files.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The ARCHIVE command does not affect memory and leaves your terminal at
TOPS-20 command level.
Related Commands
CANCEL ARCHIVE for canceling archival requests
DELETE (with ARCHIVE subcommand) for deleting archived files
(with CONTENTS-ONLY subcommand) for deleting only the disk copy
of files that also have a tape
copy
DIRECTORY (with ARCHIVE subcommand) for requesting information on
archived files (visible and
invisible) only
DIRECTORY (with INVISIBLE subcommand) for requesting information on
invisible files only
DISCARD for giving up the tape copy of
on-line files
INFORMATION ARCHIVE-STATUS for determining if archival for
the specified files (visible and
invisible) has been accomplished
RETRIEVE for restoring off-line files
(visible and invisible) to on-
line status
SET FILE INVISIBLE for making visible files
invisible
SET FILE VISIBLE for making invisible files
visible
Examples
1. Archive a file.
@ARCHIVE ARTEST.FIL
ARTEST.FIL.1 [Requested]
@
2. Archive a file, but keep a copy on disk. Check the archive
status of files.
@ARCHIVE ARCHEK.FIL,
@@RETAIN
@@
ARCHEK.FIL.1 [Requested]
@INFORMATION ARCHIVE-STATUS
ARCHEK.FIL.1 Archive requested, Retain contents
ARTEST.FIL.1 Archive requseted
@
BREAK Command
Function
The BREAK command clears all links that have been made to or from
your terminal.
Hints
The TALK command establishes a link between your terminal and
another user's terminal.
Format
@BREAK (LINKS WITH) argument
@
where
argument is a user name or line number. If you do not
specify an argument, all communication links
are broken.
Operation
1. Type BREA and press the ESC key; the system prints K
(LINKS).
@BREAK (LINKS)
2. Press the RETURN key. When the system breaks the links, it
prints an @ on your terminal.
@BREAK (LINKS)
@
Characteristics
The BREAK command:
Is opposite in function to the TALK command, except for the
difference that BREAK removes all links while TALK creates
only one link.
Does not require you to be logged in to the system.
Breaks only the links to or from your terminal.
Gives no error message if you do not have any links to or
from your terminal.
Does not change a program in memory.
Leaves your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Examples
The user breaks all the links to his terminal:
@BREAK (LINKS)
@
BASIC Program
Function
BASIC runs user's programs written in the BASIC language.
Hints
You may create program and data files with EDIT and use them with
BASIC. Remember to enter EU at the end of EDIT to strip the line
numbers.
Format
@BASIC
READY
command is any valid BASIC command listed in Table n.
Table n
BASIC Commands
CATALOG dev:
Prints the names and types of the files on the specified
device or logical name. If you do not give a device, the
system uses DSK:.
DELETE range,range
Deletes the specified lines from your program in memory.
A range is either a line number or two line numbers
separated by a hyphen.
HELP
Prints a list of all the BASIC commands (with
explanations) on your terminal.
LIST range, range
LISTNH range, range
Prints the specified lines. A range is either a single
line number or two line numbers separated by a hyphen.
LISTNH prints the lines without a heading.
MONITOR
Returns you to TOPS-20 command level. If you are going to
give a command that clears any previous program from
memory, before giving the MONITOR command give the SAVE or
REPLACE command to save your program, or else it is
destroyed and you cannot reclaim it.
NEW name.typ
Places BASIC in input mode and you may begin entering a
new file. To enter a line in a file, you must first type
the line number followed by a space and the contents of
the line.
OLD name.typ
Places the specified file in memory so you can change it
or run it.
REPLACE name.typ
Replaces the existing disk file (of the specified name and
type) with the file currently in memory.
RESEQUENCE n,o,i
Renumbers the lines in your current program in memory.
New line number n replaces old line number o; succeeding
lines are numbered by adding i to the previous line
number. If you give only n,the first line in the file is
changed to n and each succeeding line number is created by
successively adding 10.
RUN
RUNNH
Starts the program in memory. RUNNH does not print the
initial heading.
SAVE
Saves the program in memory on disk storage.
SCRATCH
Clears the current contents of memory.
UNSAVE name.typ
Deletes the file with the given name and type.
Operation
1. Type BASIC and press the RETURN key; the system prints
READY.
@BASIC
READY
2. Type any valid BASIC command, chosen from the list in Table
n.
NEW TEST.B20
READY
3. When you are finished, give the MONITOR command to return
you to TOPS-20 command level.
MONITOR
@
Characteristics
The BASIC program translates your BASIC programs, thereby
clearing any previous program from memory. Your terminal is
left at BASIC command level.
Examples
The user creates a new program, saves it on disk, runs it,
prints it, changes a line, replaces the previous copy of the
program, and runs the program again. The user the returns to
TOPS-20 command level.
@BASIC !The user starts
!BASIC
READY
NEW TEST.BAS !Starts inputting a
!new file - TEST.BAS
READY
10 X=6.5 !Types the program
20 Y=2.1
30 PRINT 'THE VALUE OF THE SUM IS;"; X+Y
40 END
SAVE !Saves it on disk
READY
RUN !Runs it
TEST.B20
Tuesday, March 22, 1977 12:30:20
THE VALUE OF THE SUM IS; 8.6
RUNTIME: 0.09 SECS ELAPSED TIME: 0:00:02
READY
LIST !Lists the program
TEST.B20
Tuesday, March 22, 1977 12:30:33
10 X=6.5
20 Y=2.1
30 PRINT "THE VALUE OF THE SUM IS;"; X+Y
40 END
READY
MONITOR
@
The user recalls an old program, runs it, then returns to
TOPS-20 command level.
@BASIC !The user starts
!BASIC
READY
OLD TEST.B20 !Gets his old program
READY
RUN !And runs it
TEST.B20
Tuesday, March 22, 1977 12:31:52
THE VALUE OF THE SUM IS; 8.6
RUNTIME: 0.08 SECS ELAPSED TIME: 0:00:01
READY
MONITOR !Then returns to
!TOPS-20 command
!level
@
BATCH Commands
Function
The Batch commands control the operation of a Batch job.
Hints
To create a Batch job, use EDIT to enter the commands you would
type on your terminal into a file. This file is referred to as a
Batch control file, and can also contain Batch commands (some are
listed in Table II-2). Each line may be preceded by a label (six
or less alphanumeric characters followed by two colons, the first
character must be alphabetic). After creating the control file,
give the SUBMIT command to ask the system to start the job.
Remember, the system logs your job into the system, connects the
job to your connected directory at the time you gave the SUBMIT
command, gives the commands stored in your BATCH.CMD and
COMAND.CMD files, and then starts processing your control file.
Refer to Section 3.4 for more information on Batch jobs.
Format
@name argument
name is the name of the Batch command.
argument is either a label or a character. A label is
comprised of not more than six alphanumeric
characters. When the label is used in a command,
it contains just the label name; when it is used
at the beginning of a line to indicate a position,
it is followed by a double colon. An example of a
label is BEGIN::.
Table II-2
Batch Commands
@BACKTO label
Transfers control to the line in the control file that is
preceded by the specified label. This labelled line must
be located between the beginning of the file and the
BACKTO statement. If such a line does not occur, your job
is terminated.
@ERROR character
Declares that an error has occurred whenever the system
prints the given character in the first character position
of a line. If you do not specify a character, the system
uses ?; if you specify a character it cannot be a control
character (CTRL/C, CTRL/O, etc.), an exclamation point, or
a semicolon.
@GOTO label
Transfers control to the line in the control file that is
preceded by the specified label or the label %FIN::,
whichever comes first. This labeled line must exist
between the GOTO statement and the end of the file. If
such a line does not occur, your job is terminated.
@IF (condition) statement
Tests for the given condition and if that condition has
occurred (or is true), executes the specified statement.
The statement may be a Batch command, a TOPS-20 command, a
command to a program, data, or a comment. The variable
condition may be either ERROR or NOERROR; you must include
the parenthesis.
@NOERROR
Ignores all error signals except the ?TIME LIMIT EXCEEDED
message and any Batch error.
Operation
1. Enter into a file the commands which form your job.
@CREATE (FILE) TESTV.BAT
INPUT: TESTV.BAT.1
00100 @COMPILE /CREF PRMAIN.MAC
00200 @IF (ERROR) GOTO NOLUC
00300 @COMPILE /CREF PRSUB.MAC
00400 @IF (ERROR) GOTO NOLUC
00500 @COMPILE /CREF PROUT.MAC
00600 @IF (ERROR) GOTO NOLUC
00700 @CREF
00800 @LOAD PRMAIN,PRSUB,PROUT
00900 @SAVE
01000 NOLUC::@DELETE *.TMP
01100 $
*E
[TESTV.BAT.1]
@
2. Give the SUBMIT command to enter the job into the Batch
input queue.
@SUBMIT TESTV.BAT
[INP:TESTV=/SEQ:3148/TIME:00:05:00]
@
Output
Refer to the description of the SUBMIT command for an explanation
of the output from a Batch job.
Characteristics
Batch commands can be used either in a Batch control file created
at your terminal or in a card deck and cannot be given from your
terminal.
Examples
The user creates and submits a Batch job.
@CREATE (FILE) SUBT.CTL
INPUT: SUBT.CTL.1
00100 @EXECUTE LIBRAY.FOR,LIBSUB.FOR,IO.MAC
00200 *45.
00300 *46.
00400 @PRINT LIBRAY.DAT
00500 $
*E
[SUBT.CTL.1]
@SUBMIT SUBT.CTL
[INP:SUBT=/SEQ:7002/TIME:00:05:00]
@
The user checks to see if his Batch job is running.
@INFORMATION (ABOUT) BATCH-REQUUESTS
JOB SEQ USER
--- --- ----
SUBT 7002 SARTINI NOW RUNNING
SYSERR 6898 SNYDER /AFTER:14-SEP-77 23:59:59
The user creates a control file containing a command that has a
subcommand.
@CREATE (FILE) DELGEN.CTL
Input: DELGEN.CTL.1
00100 @DELETE *.*
00200 @KEEP 1
00300 @
00400 $
*E
[DELGEN.CTL.1]
@
COBDDT Program
Function
The COBDDT program helps you debug COBOL programs.
Hints
You must load your program into memory along with COBDDT. Your
program must contain symbols, thus you must not use switch
/NOSYMBOLS.
If you type a CTRL/C, you may resume COBDDT execution by giving
the CONTINUE command.
Format
@DEBUG (FROM) /COBOL filespecs
COBOL: MAIN
LINK: Loading
[LNKDEB COBDDT Execution]
STARTING COBOL DDT
command is any valid COBDDT command listed in the
following table.
filespecs is a list of COBOL programs. If the files have
the type .CBL, you do not have to include the
/COBOL switch.
Table II-3
COBDDT Commands
Commands
After you have given the DEBUG command, and the system
prints an asterisk, you can give a COBDDT command. You
can abbreviate each command to one letter.
Data-names, Paragraph-names, and Section-names
You can abbreviate each data-name, paragraph-name, or
section-name to a unique number of characters.
Paragraph-names can be qualified by section-names;
data-names can be qualified by higher-level data names
and/or subscripted. The subscripts for a qualified
data-name must appear immediately after the first
data-name. Section-names and data-names cannot be
qualified by program-names because COBDDT uses the names
in the program specified in the MODULE command.
ACCEPT data-name
Changes the value of the specified data-item. After
giving the ACCEPT command, type the data on the next line.
If you omit data-name, the system uses the last name you
gave in the most recent ACCEPT or DISPLAY command.
BREAK paragraph-name
Sets a break point (or pause) at the beginning of the
specified paragraph. You can set twenty break points. If
you are using overlays, be careful where you place your
break points.
CLEAR paragraph-name
Removes the breakpoint at the specified paragraph. If you
omit the paragraph name, the system removes all
breakpoints.
DISPLAY data-name
Prints the value of a data item. If you omit the
data-name, the system prints the value of the data name
you specified in the most recent ACCEPT or DISPLAY
command.
MODULE program-name
Takes data names and procedure names from the specified
program. Normally, within a run unit containing more than
one program, COBDDT searches for data names and procedure
names in the current program. The MODULE command changes
the current program. All subsequent searches for data
names and procedure names will be within the specified
program until COBDDT enters the next program in the run
unit or until you give another MODULE command.
PROCEED n
Starts execution or continues execution after a
breakpoint. If you give a number n, the program continues
until completion or until it reaches n occurrences of the
preceding breakpoint.
STOP
Stops the program and closes all open files. The STOP
command is equivalent to the COBOL STOP RUN statement.
TRACE value
Starts or stops tracing, depending on whether you use ON
or OFF for value. When tracing is on, the system prints
the name of each paragraph or section (enclosed in double
angle brackets) as it is entered.
WHERE
Prints the current location, the names of all paragraphs
at which you set breakpoints, and the number of break
points which you may yet assign.
Operation
1. Type DEBU and press the ESC key; the system prints G (FROM).
@DEBUG (FROM)
2. If the source file specifications do not contain the file
type .CBL, type the /COBOL switch and leave a space;
otherwise, type (or use recognition on) the file
specifications. The system will compile the sources (if
necessary), load them into memory along with COBDDT, then
transfer control to COBDDT.
@DEBUG (FROM) NUMBER.CBL,SUMSUB.CBL
COBOL: NUMBER
COBOL: SUMSUB
LINK: Loading
[LNKDEB COBDDT Execution]
STARTING COBOL DDT
*
3. Once the system prints an asterisk, you are at COBDDT command
level and you can give any of the COBDDT commands listed
above. In the example, the user gives the PROCEED command
which starts execution of his program.
*PROCEED
4. If your program generates an error that would normally cause
abortion of execution, the system returns control to COBDDT,
printing the message:
?ENTERING COBDDT FROM: paragraph-name
*
where paragraph-name is the name of the paragraph containing
the error. You may then give any COBDDT command.
Characteristics
The DEBUG command loads your COBOL program into memory along with
COBDDT, thereby clearing any previous program from memory. Your
terminal is left at COBDDT command level.
Restrictions
You can use COBDDT to debug only COBOL programs.
Examples
The user debugs his program.
@DEBUG (FROM) COMPUT.CBL !Load the program with COBDDT
COBOL: MAIN [COMPUT.CBL]
LINK: Loading
[LNKDEB COBDDT Execution]
STARTING COBOL DDT !COBDDT starts
*BREAK NXT1 !Set a breakpoint at NXT1
*BREAK NXT2 !And also at NXT2
*WHERE !List the breakpoints
PROGRAM NOT STARTED
BREAK POINTS:
<<NXT1>>
<<NXT2>>
18 UNUSED BREAK POINTS
*TRACE ON !Enable tracing
*PROCEED !Start the program
<<ST>> !Execution has entered the
-7.0E0 ! PARAGRAPH ST.
1.0E0
BREAK AT <<NXT1>> !The program reached a break-
!point
*DISPLAY A !Print the value of A
3
*ACCEPT A !Change the value of A
4
*D A !Print the new value of A
4
*PROCEED !Resume execution
<<CC>> !Execution has entered the
!PARAGRAPH CC.
BREAK AT <<NXT2>> !The program reached a break-
!point
*WHERE !Print the current status
PROGRAM STOPPED AT <<NXT1>>
BREAK POINTS
<<NXT1>>
<<NXT2>>
18 UNUSED BREAK POINTS
*CLEAR NXT2 !Remove a break point
*PROCEED !Resume execution
<<NXT3>> !Beginning paragraph NXT3
<<ENDIT>> !Beginning paragraph ENDIT
THE RESULT IS 4.566 !Here is the answer
EXIT !The program ends
@
COBOL Compiler
Function
The COBOL compiler produces object programs from COBOL source
programs.
Hints
To run a COBOL program:
1. Enter your source program into a file (by using EDIT).
2. Give the EXECUTE command to compile, load, and start your
program.
3. If you plan to execute the proggram frequently, use the LOAD
command instead of EXECUTE. You can now use the RUN command,
which is faster than EXECUTE, until you EDIT the program
again.
Use the COBDDT program to debug COBOL programs.
If you have a main program and assorted subroutines that require
special loading, refer to Section 8.3 which describes the
LOAD-class commands.
Operation
1. Enter your program into a file using EDIT.
@CREATE (FILE) COMPUT.CBL
INPUT: COMPUT.CBL.1
00100 ID DIVISION.
00200 DATA DIVISION.
00300 WORKING-STORAGE SECTION.
00400 77 F1 COMP-1 VALUE 3.
00500 77 F2 COMP-1 VALUE 4.
00600 77 F3 COMP-1.
00700 PROCEDURE DIVISION.
00800 DISPLAY "TYPE A NUMBER: " WITH NO ADVANCING.
00900 ACCEPT F3.
01000 COMPUTE F3 = 2.0 * F3.
01100 DISPLAY "TWICE THAT NUMBER IS: " WITH NO ADVANCING.
01200 DISPLAY F3.
01300 STOP RUN.
01400 $
*E
[COMPUT.CBL.1]
@
2. Compile, load, and start your program.
@EXECUTE (FROM) COMPUT.CBL
COBOL: MAIN [COMPUT.CBL]
LINK: Loading
[LNKXCT COMPUT EXECUTION]
TYPE A NUMBER: 4
TWICE THAT NUMBER IS 6.0E0
EXIT
@
Characteristics
The LOAD-class commands run the COBOL compiler to translate your
COBOL source program, thereby clearing any program from memory.
Depending on the operation you request, your terminal may or may
not be left at TOPS-20 command level.
Restrictions
In order to use the COBOL compiler you cannot change the
definition of the logical name SYS:. Should you change the
definition and try to compile a COBOL program, the system prints
the following message, then cancel the command:
? "DSK" IS NOT THE DSK
Remove the definition of the logical name SYS: and reissue the
command.
Examples
The user creates and executes a COBOL program.
@CREATE (FILE) COMPUT.CBL !Enter the program
Input: COMPUT.CBL.1 !into COMPUT.CBL
00100 ID DIVISION.
00200 DATA DIVISION.
00300 WORKING-STORAGE SECTION.
00400 77 F1 COMP-1 VALUE 3.
00500 77 F2 COMP-1 VALUE 4.
00600 77 F3 COMP-1.
00700 PROCEDURE DIVISION.
00800 DISPLAY "TYPE A NUMBER: " WITH NO ADVANCING.
00900 ACCEPT F3.
01000 COMPUTE F3 = 2.0 * F3.
01100 DISPLAY "TWICE THAT NUMBER IS: " WITH NO ADVANCING.
01200 DISPLAY F3.
01300 STOP RUN.
01400 $
*E
[COMPUT.CBL.1]
@EXECUTE (FROM) COMPUT.CBL !Give the EXECUTE command
COBOL: MAIN [COMPUT.CBL]
LINK: Loading
[LNKXCT COMPUT Execution]
TYPE A NUMBER: 35
TWICE THAT NUMBER IS: 7.0E1
EXIT
@
The user starts debugging the NUMBER program.
@DEBUG (FROM) NUMBER.CBL
COBOL: LETTER [NUMBER.CBL]
LINK: Loading
[LNKDEB COBDDT Execution]
STARTING COBOL DDT
*
The user loads the main program TEST3 and its two subroutines
TEST1 and TEST2. The program is then saved for future use so it
can be executed by giving the RUN command. This procedure is
highly recommended because RUN uses much less time and expense
than EXECUTE.
@LOAD (FROM) TEST1,TEST2,TEST3
COBOL: TEST1 [TEST1.CBL]
COBOL: TEST2 [TEST2.CBL]
COBOL: TEST3 [TEST3.CBL]
LINK: Loading
EXIT
@SAVE
TEST3.EXE.1 SAVED
@RUN (PROGRAM) TEST3
EXIT
@
CSAVE command
The CSAVE command has been removed from the system as it has
become redundent. However if you wish to know the function of
the command, refer to TOPS-20 Command Reference manual.
DUMPER Program
Function
The DUMPER program transfers one or more files between disk and
magnetic tape.
Hints
Before starting DUMPER, set the proper magnetic tape defaults
with the system command SET TAPE.
Before restoring files, be sure to read the description of the
RESTORE command or, for simple cases, refer to the examples.
The following cookbook examples are at the end of this section:
Saving/restoring your entire directory (Examples 1, 13)
Saving/restoring a single file (Examples 2, 14)
Saving/restoring a group of files (Examples 3, 15)
Saving/restoring files from another directory (Examples 4, 16)
Saving/restoring files for a TOPS-20 system (Examples 5, 17)
Saving/restoring changed files (Examples 6, 18)
Saving/restoring accessed files (Examples 7, 19)
Saving/restoring modified files (Examples 8, 20)
Saving/restoring on a second reel of tape (Examples 9, 22)
Checking the saved files (Example 10)
Using DUMPER in a Batch job (Example 11)
Keeping information about saved files (Example 12)
Restoring files changes during a certain time period (Example 21)
Restoring files from system backup tapes (Example 23)
Examining a tape (Example 24)
Stopping DUMPER (Example 25)
Format
@DUMPER
DUMPER 3(163)
DUMPER> command arguments
command is a DUMPER action-command, tape-positioning
command, or status-command. Table II-7 contains a
list of the DUMPER commands, grouped by function.
arguments is a file specification, date, density, parity,
drive number, number, or save-set name, depending
on the command.
dates are in the form day-month-year.
Type January 16, 1975 as 16-JAN-75.
times are in 24-hour format (nn:mm:ss),
or in AM, PM form. Thus 9:23 in
the evening is either 21:23 or 9:23
PM.
filespecs
sources
destination are files in the form
dev:<dir>name.typ.gen. The *
wildcard character is permitted.
save-set name is a string of alphanumeric
characters which is used as a title
for a save set.
Table II-7
DUMPER Commands
ACTION-COMMANDS
DUMPER action commands start, stop, interrupt or continue
a file transfer or file check.
CHECK (ALL MTA FILES)
Checks the files in the current save set to make sure that
they agree with the files on disk. The system prints a
message if the files do not agree; refer to items 1 and 2
in the error section. Be sure to rewind the tape to the
beginning of the save set before giving the CHECK command.
CONTINUE
Continues a CHECK, RESTORE, SAVE or tape-positioning
command after you have typed a CTRL/E to halt it. If you
have prevented DUMPER from continuing, the system prints
?CANNOT CONTINUE on your terminal.
CTRL/E
Halts the action of a CHECK, RESTORE, SAVE, or
tape-positioning command. When the system processes the
CTRL/E, it prints a message, suspends the action, and then
prints the DUMPER prompt.
INTERRUPTING...
DUMPER>
After typing CTRL/E, you may give a CONTINUE, DIRECTORIES,
EXIT, FILES, HELP, or SILENCE command. If you give any
other command, DUMPER loses the information necessary to
continue the action you halted. If DUMPER is not
performing an action command, typing a CTRL/E returns you
to TOPS-20 command level.
EXIT
Exits immediately to TOPS-20 command level.
HELP
Prints a list of the valid DUMPER commands on your
terminal.
PRINT (DIRECTORY OF TAPE ONTO FILE) destination
Prints a directory of the entire tape in the specified
file. The destination file specification defaults to TTY:
(your terminal).
RESTORE (MTA FILES) source (TO) destination
Searches the current save set and copies the specified
magnetic tape source file(s) to disk and gives them the
specified destination file specification(s). After giving
a RESTORE command, the tape is positioned at the end of
the save set. You may specify additional source and
destination file specifications by separating each pair
with a comma.
source is a file specification identifying the files
you want copied from the tape. You may use the
* and % wildcard characters to specify a group
of files. The system restores all the files in
the save set if you omit the source file.
Defaults: dev: * (the source device)
<dir> * (the source directory)
name * (all file names)
type * (all file types)
gen * (the source generation)
destination is a file specification identifying where you
want the files copied. You may use the * and %
wildcard characters to refer to corresponding
fields in the source file specification. If you
omit the destination file specification, the
system uses the corresponding source file.
Defaults: dev: * (the source device)
<dir> * (the source directory)
name * (the source file name)
type * (the source file type)
gen * (the source generation)
Operation
After you give the RESTORE command, DUMPER prints a header
on your terminal and then starts searching the tape for
files to restore.
DUMPER TAPE # 1, save-set name, date
Once DUMPER starts restoring files to disk, it prints the
following message on your terminal:
LOADING FILES INTO <directory>
where directory specifies where the files are copied. If
this message is NOT printed, DUMPER has not found any
source files you specified and no files have been restored
to a directory. Also, if you try to restore files to a
directory in which you are not allowed to create files,
DUMPER will not print this message or attempt restoring
the files.
Give the FILES command if you want DUMPER to print the
file specification of each file as it is restored.
DUMPER prints the following message if the save set is
continued on another reel of tape:
END OF TAPE, MOUNT NEXT REEL
%FILE filespec CONTINUED ON NEXT REEL
TAPE (FILESPEC)
DUMPER rewinds the current tape. Use the TMOUNT command
to request a new tape, or mount the tape yourself. When
the new tape is mounted, type the drive name and the
restore will continue.
CTRL/C
TAPE (FILESPEC)
@TMOUNT (TAPE) NEXT: (VOLID) BLUE
[OPERATOR NOTIFIED]
[MTA0: ASSIGNED]
@CONTINUE (PROGRAM)
CTRL/R
TAPE (FILESPEC) MTA0:
DUMPER TAPE # 2, , date
DUMPER prints the following message when it reaches the
end of the current save set:
END OF SAVESET
Restoring Files Saved From Another Directory
You must specicically specify the source and destination
directory names to restore files saved from one directory
to another. Refer to Example 16. For instance, the
following command restores all the files saved from the
directory <MANUALS> to the user's connected directory,
<WILEY>:
DUMPER>RESTORE (MTA FILES) <MANUALS>*.*.* (TO) <WILEY>
Superseding Existing Files And Selecting Generation Numbers
Once DUMPER has found a tape file to restore to disk, it
examines the directory to see if a file with the same file
name and file type already exists. If such a file does
not exist, DUMPER immediately copies the tape file to a
disk.
If a disk file exists with the same file name and file
type as the tape file, DUMPER restores the file according
to the value or the SUPERSEDE parameter.
SUPERSEDE OLDER
is the default. DUMPER restores the tape
file only if it was created or written
more recently than the disk file. If the
generation number of the tape file is
ALSO less than the disk file, DUMPER
deletes the disk file and prints the
message:
%FILE filespec DELETED WHILE SUPERSEDING
Note: you can avoid trying to restore a
more recent file with a lower generation
number by using -1 as the generation
number in the destination file
specification.
SUPERSEDE ALWAYS
DUMPER restores the file to disk
(regardless of its age) using a default
generation number one greater than the
existing file.
SUPERSEDE NEVER
DUMPER does not restore the file.
Restoring Changed And Accessed Files
Refer to the description of the BEFORE, SINCE, ABEFORE,
ASINCE, MBEFORE, and MSINCE commands described under
SAVE.
SAVE (DISK FILES) source (AS) dest, source (AS) dest
Creates a save set containing all the source files
specified in the SAVE command. The source files are saved
using the destination file specification. You may use the
* and % wildcard characters to specify groups of files.
You may specify additional source and destination file
specifications by separating each pair with a comma.
source is a file specification identifying the
files you want to save. If you omit the
source file specification entirely, the
system saves all the files in your
connected directory.
Defaults: dev: * (the source device)
<dir> * (the source directory)
name * (all file names)
type * (all file types)
gen * (the source generation)
destination is the file specification that is assigned
to the tape file. The file is saved using
its current file specification if you do
not give a destination file specification.
Defaults dev: * (the source device)
<dir> * (the source directory)
name * (the source file name)
type * (the source file type)
gen * (all generations)
Operation
When you give the SAVE command, DUMPER prints a header
on your terminal and then starts the save set.
DUMPER TAPE # 1, save-set name, date
DUMPER prints the name of each file you save if you
give the FILES command before you give the SAVE
command. Give the LIST command before you give the
SAVE command if you want a list of the files you save.
DUMPER rewinds the current tape and prints the
following message when the save set must be continued
on a second reel of tape:
END OF TAPE, CONTINUE SAVE ON
TAPE (FILESPEC)
Type a CTRL/C and give the TMOUNT command, or mount the
reel yourself. Then type CONTINUE (if you gave the
TMOUNT command), and type the drive name.
END OF TAPE, CONTINUE SAVE ON
CTRL/C
TAPE (FILESPEC)
@TMOUNT (TAPE) SECOND: (VOLID) GREEN
[Operator notified]
[MTA0: assigned]
@CONTINUE (PROGRAM)
CTRL/R
TAPE (FILESPEC) MTA0:
DUMPER TAPE # 2, , date
When the save is finished, DUMPER prints the total
number of files saved and the number of pages
comprising those files.
TOTAL FILES DUMPED = 253
TOTAL PAGES DUMPED = 1751
@
Saving Changed And Accessed Files
You may find it useful to save only those files that
have been changed or read. DUMPER has commands which
select those files. To save files that have been
changed or read within a certain period use both
ABEFORE and ASINCE commands.
SINCE and BEFORE Specify files whose contents have
changed (i.e., whose write dates
are) after or before the
specified date.
ASINCE and ABEFORE Specify files that have been read
or changed after or before the
specified date and time.
MSINCE and MBEFORE Specify files which have been
modified after or before the
specified date and time. This
includes files created with the
RENAME and COPY commands. SINCE,
BEFORE, ASINCE and ABEFORE do not
include these files.
TAPE-POSITIONING COMMANDS
DUMPER tape-positioning commands control the tape you have
specified with the last TAPE command or, if you have not
given a TAPE command, the tape assigned to the logical
name MTA-DUMPER. You should have previously allocated
these drives to your job with the TOPS-20 ASSIGN command.
EOT
Skips to the end of the last save set on the tape and
prints the message: TAPE POSITIONED AT EOT. If any save
sets are encountered, the system prints the save set names
and the time and date that the save set was written.
REWIND
Rewinds the tape to the beginning of the tape (BOT).
SKIP (NUMBER OF SAVESETS) n
Skips the tape over n save sets.
SKIP (NUMBER OF SAVESETS) 0
Backspaces the tape to the beginning of the current save
set.
SKIP (NUMBER OF SAVESETS) -n
Backspaces the tape over n save sets.
STATUS-COMMANDS
DUMPER status-commands set parameters which affect the
operation of the CHECK, RESTORE and SAVE commands. Once
you set a parameter, it stays in effect until you change
it or restart DUMPER. If you want to selete only specific
files, use the ABEFORE, ASINCE, BEFORE, MBEFORE, MSINCE,
and SINCE commands. If you set multiple conditions, a
file must satisfy all the conditions in order to be
transferred.
ABEFORE (DATE AND TIME) date time
Includes only those file which were accessed (written or
read) before the given date and time. This command is
useful in transferring files that were actually used, but
not necessarily changed.
ACCOUNT (OF RESTORED FILES FROM) location
Specifies that any file being restored will get its accounts
from either the SYSTEM-DEFAULT or from TAPE. Normally, the
system uses the account that was stored with the file on
TAPE. The SYSTEM-DEFAULT specifies your current account.
ASINCE (DATE AND TIME) date time
Includes only those files which were accessed (written or
read) since the given date and time. This command is useful
in transferring files that were actually used, but not
necessarily changed.
BEFORE (DATE AND TIME) date time
Includes only those files which were created or last written
(i.e., whose contents were changed) before the given date
and time. This command is useful in transferring only those
files that have changed.
[NO] CHECKSUM (FILES) type
Prints a checksum for each file when you give a PRINT
command and includes the checksum in the log file when you
give a SAVE command. When the checksum of the disk file
disagrees with the checksum of the tape file, there has been
an error in the file transfer. DUMPER computes a checksum
for the entire file when you use the type SEQUENTIAL;
DUMPER computes a checksum for each page of the file when
the type is BY-PAGES. The SEQUENTIAL checksum is the
easiest to use.
DENSITY (OF MAGTAPE) n
Sets the tape density to the given number of bits per inch
(BPI). The density must be 200, 556, 800, 1600, or
JOB-DEFAULT (set by the system command SET TAPE DENSITY).
If you do not give the DENSITY command, DUMPER uses the
density listed in the TOPS-20 command INFORMATION (ABOUT)
TAPE-PARAMETERS.
[NO] DIRECTORIES
Starts (or stops, if you type NO) printing on your terminal
each directory name as the directory is saved or restored.
Normally, the system prints each directory name.
[NO] FILES
Starts (or stops, if you type NO) printing on your terminal
each file specification as the file is saved or restored.
Normally, the system does not print each file specification.
FORMAT (VERSION NUMBER IS) n
Allows the system to read and write DUMPER tapes that were
written with other (unsupported) versions of DUMPER. The
default format is 2; BBN-TENEX users should use 0 to read
and write tapes created by BBN-DUMPER.
[NO] INITIAL (FILESPEC) filespec
Starts (or stops, if you type NO) saving at the file
identified by filespec. This is useful for continuing
interrupted save sets.
[NO] INTERCHANGE (FORMAT)
Starts (or stops, if you type NO) using the DECsystem-10
(TOPS10 BACKUP) interchange format in reading and writing
tapes. Otherwise, DUMPER uses its own format.
[NO] LIST (LOG INFORMATION ON FILE) filespec
Makes a list of the files transferred in the file
identified by filespec. The default file specification is
LPT:DUMPER.LOG. If an existing file is specified, it is
appended to rather than rewritten.
MBEFORE (DATE AND TIME) date time
Include only those files modified (i.e., written, created,
appended, or renamed) before the specified internal date
and time.
MSINCE (DATE AND TIME) date time
Includes only those files modified (i.e., written,
created, appended, or renamed) since the specified
internal date and time.
PARITY (OF MAGNETIC TAPE) type
Sets the parity of the current magnetic tape to EVEN or
ODD. DUMPER normally uses the parity listed in the
TOPS-20 command INFORMATION (ABOUT) TAPE-PARAMETERS.
PROTECTION (OF RESTORED FILES FROM) location
Takes the protection of the restored files from the
SYSTEM-DEFAULT (usually 777700) or from the TAPE.
SET TAPE-NUMBER (DECIMAL NUMBER) n
Sets the reel number used in the next SAVE or RESTORE
command. This is useful when you are saving or restoring
files on multiple reels of tape and do not want to process
the reels in order.
[NO] SILENCE
Stops (or starts, if you type NO) printing directory names
and file specifications as the files are saved or
restored. NO SILENCE is equivalent to giving a FILES
command followed by a DIRECTORIES command.
SINCE (DATE AND TIME) date time
Includes only those files that were created or last
written (i.e., whose contents were changed) since the
specified date and time. This command is useful in
transferring only those files that have changed.
SSNAME save-set name
Identifies a save set name. This save set name is printed
on your terminal whenever you save or restore files.
SUPERSEDE condition
Sets the condition under which DUMPER will supersede a disk
file with a magnetic tape file of the same file name and
type. Use ALWAYS when you always want to supersede the disk
file with the tape file.
Use NEVER when you never want to supersede the disk file;
in this case, a file is transferred from tape only if there
is no disk file in the directory with the same file name and
type.
Use OLDER when you want the tape file to supersede only disk
files with older write dates; in this case, a tape file is
transferred to disk file. If you do not give a SUPERSEDE
command, the system uses SUPERSEDE OLDER. Refer to the
RESTORE command.
TAPE (FILESPEC) MTAn:
Uses the specified tape for the file transfers. If the
drive is not available to your job, the system prints:
?INVALID FILESPEC, DEVICE IS NOT AVAILABLE TO THIS JOB
Wait until you can assign a magnetic tape to your job. You
do not have to give a TAPE command if you assign a magnetic
tape device name to the logical name MTA-DUMPER.
Operation
1. Type DUMPER and press the RETURN key; the system prints
DUMPER, its version and the prompt DUMPER>.
@DUMPER
DUMPER 3(163)
DUMPER>
2. Give the DUMPER commands you want. (You must give a TAPE
command or assign a magnetic tape device name to the logical
name MTA-DUMPER before giving an action command.) When you
are finished, give the EXIT command.
DUMPER> TAPE (FILESPEC) MTA1:
DUMPER> REWIND
DUMPER> SSNAME TEST1
DUMPER> SAVE
DUMPER TAPE # 1, TEST1, WEDNESDAY, 12-OCT-77 0958
TOTAL FILES DUMPED = 5
TOTAL PAGES DUMPED = 95
DUMPER>EXIT
@
If you want the names of the individual files printed, give the
FILES command before the SAVE command.
Errors
1. If a file on magnetic tape does not agree with a file on
disk, the system prints the following message after you give
a CHECK command:
%COMPARE ERROR, PAGE n, FILE filespec
where n is the page in the disk file, and filespec specifies
the file in which the error occurs. This means that the
actual data differs between the file on disk and the file on
tape. Try transferring the file again, but beware that this
error is often caused by a program that updated the file
after you saved it on tape. An actual example of this error
is:
%COMPARE ERROR, PAGE 8, FILE DUMPER.EX3.1
2. The system may also print the following line:
%DIFFERENCES IN location OF FILE filespec
The location describes the entry in the file descriptor block
(refer to the Monitor Calls Manual) that differs between the
two files. (Each file has a file descriptor block which
contains information describing the history and structure of
the file.) The common locations and the differences they
describe are listed in Table II-8. After receiving a message
of this type, try transferring the file again. If the error
still occurs, contact the operator or system manager.
Table II-8
File Descriptor Block (FDB) Entries
A difference
at location: Means the files do not have the same:
.FBCTL -Temporary, permanent, not-to-be-saved-by
DUMPER, or file-class status.
.FBCRE -Dates and times they were last written.
.FBAUT -Authors name.
.FBBYV -Number of generations to retain,
byte size, mode of the last write, or the
number of pages.
.FBSIZ -Pointer to the byte beyond the
end-of-file.
.FBCRV -Creation date or time.
.FBWRT -Date or time they were last written
(modifiable by the user).
.FBREF -Date or time they were accessed by a
non-write operation.
.FBCNT -Count of writes or references.
.FBBKO -Contents of the DUMPER data area.
.FBUSW -Contents of the user-settable
data area.
.FBLWR -Last writer name.
Examples of these errors are:
%DIFFERENCE IN .FBREF OF FILE <MCKIE>ESQRT.ALG.14
%DIFFERENCE IN .FBCNT OF FILE <MCKIE>DEFER.FOR.14
%DIFFERENCE IN .FBREF OF FILE <MCKIE>LOGIN.CMD.2
3. When you are saving files on the tape, there may be bad spots
that do not record properly. If the system finds an error in
the record that was just written, it writes a duplicate
record immediately following the erroneous record and prints
the message:
%WRITE ERROR ON TAPE, RECORD n, WRITING DUPLICATE RECORD.
If there are many errors, try moving the tape to the
beginning of the save set and saving the files again. If
there are less errors, most likely your tape is dirty and
repeated saving will clean the tape and reduce errors.
When you restore the files from that tape, the system will
read the bad record first. Since normal reading operates at
higher sensitivity than write-checking, the system may be
able to read a record that was previously thought to be bad.
If this occurs, the system takes the second record and
ignores the duplicate record, while printing the message:
%DUPLICATE RECORD ENCOUNTERED, RECORD 13, IGNORED.
If there is an error in the original record, the system
prints either ?MTA DATA ERROR, ?MTA UNKNOWN ERROR, ?MTA
CHECKSUM ERROR, or another message of that type, then reads
the next record. If the next record is a duplicate record
(two records are duplicate if their sequence numbers are the
same), the system reads that record. If the duplicate record
is correct, the system prints the message, RECOVERED. If the
error is not recovered, the transfer continues after DUMPER
prints a message indicating the location of the bad record.
Due to differences in inter-record gaps between tape drives,
the same bad spot does not necessarily have to occur at the
same record number if the tape is being written by different
drives.
4. Each record on the tape has a sequence number somewhat
similar to an EDIT line number. When the system reads a
record, it makes sure that the sequence number is one greater
than the last record. If the sequence number is the same as
the last record, it prints the message %DUPLICATE RECORD
ENCOUNTERED, RECORD n, IGNORED. If the difference is not
one, the system reads the record, prints the following
message, resets the internal sequence counter to the new
number and continues with the current operation. If the
sequence number is irregular, you may receive a second
message when the numbers regain their previous value.
?SEQUENCE ERROR, RECORD 15, CONTINUING.
5. If you try to use a magnetic tape and have not given a tape
command, the system postpones the command and tries to use
the logical name MTA-DUMPER. If that logical name has no
magnetic tape definition, the system prints:
Tape specification needed,
TAPE (FILESPEC)
Type the name of the magnetic tape drive you are using, then
press the RETURN key. If you have to run the PLEASE program,
refer to the SAVE command.
6. Each DUMPER tape normally starts with a tape header. If the
system encounters a tape without a tape header, it tries to
perform the specified operation and prints the message:
%TAPE DOESN'T START WITH HEADER, CONTINUING...
You probably forgot to rewind the tape before doing a
RESTORE.
7. If the tape drive you are using is not on-line, the system
prints the following message if you try to access it:
FAILED TO OPEN MTA
?Device is not on-line
TRY AGAIN?
Type Y or N (for yes or no) if you want to try again or not.
Contact the operator if you have any questions.
8. If you try any command that reads the tape and if the system
prints the message:
?DRIVE PROBABLY OFF-LINE, TYPE CR TO TRY AGAIN.
Check with the operator to make sure that he has placed the
drive on-line. If he has, you are probably attempting to
read the tape at the wrong density. Type a CTRL/C, restart
DUMPER, then set the proper density. You can try different
densities (try 1600, 800, 556, then 200) if you cannot recall
the correct density to set.
9. If you are accessing a file and the file is not available,
the system prints one of a variety of messages explaining why
you may not use the file. Make sure that you have not
deleted the file, or that you are not over your working disk
storage limit.
?CANNOT GET JFN FOR FILE <MCKIE>DUMPER.TXT.13;P777752;A10300 BECAUSE:
No such generation number
?CANNOT OPEN FILE <MCKIE>TRANSL.CMD.10;P777752;A10300 BECAUSE:
Disk quota exceeded
Output
Whenever you give a FILES command before a SAVE command, DUMPER
normally print (as it processes the SAVE command):
-A heading,
For each directory:
-The directory name followed by the directory number (for
internal system accounting)
-A line for each file containing the file specification, date
and time the file was last written, and the size in pages.
-The total number of files and pages dumped from the directory.
For the entire SAVE command:
-The total number of files and pages dumped.
Refer to the LIST command which controls log file output.
Characteristics
Running the DUMPER program clears any program from memory and
leaves your terminal at DUMPER command level. Give the DUMPER
command EXIT to return to TOPS-20 command level.
Examples
The examples are divided into three parts. The first part
describes various ways you may save files on tape; the second
part shows how to restore files from tape to disk; and the third
part shows how to use some special DUMPER commands. Some
examples in the first two parts are keyed to each other - for
instance (A) to saving and restoring an entire directory.
SAVING FILES
1. SAVING YOUR ENTIRE DIRECTORY (A)
To save your entire directory on tape, start DUMPER, assign or
request a magnetic tape, and give the SAVE command.
@DUMPER
DUMPER 3(163)
DUMPER>TAPE (FILESPEC) MTA1:
DUMPER>REWIND
DUMPER>SSNAME FULL SAVE
DUMPER>SAVE (DISK FILES)
DUMPER TAPE # 1, FULL SAVE, WEDNESDAY, 31-AUG-77 1957
PS:<PORADA>
TOTAL FILES DUMPED = 61
TOTAL PAGES DUMPED = 162
DUMPER>EXIT
@
2. SAVING A SINGLE FILE (B)
To save a single file, type the name of the file after the SAVE
command.
@DUMPER
DUMPER 3(163)
DUMPER>TAPE (FILESPEC) MTA1:
DUMPER>REWIND
DUMPER>FILES
DUMPER>SSNAME SINGLE FILE
DUMPER>SAVE (DISK FILES) TMOUNT.TXT
DUMPER TAPE # 1, SINGLE FILE, WEDNESDAY, 31-AUG-77 1955
PS:<PORADA>
TMOUNT.TXT.1 (AS) TMOUNT.TXT.1 [OK]
TOTAL FILES DUMPED = 1
TOTAL PAGES DUMPED = 1
DUMPER>EXIT
@
3. SAVING A GROUP OF FILES (C)
To save a group of files, use the wildcard characters % and * in
the file specification after the SAVE command.
@DUMPER
DUMPER 3(163)
DUMPER>TAPE (FILESPEC) MTA1:
DUMPER>REWIND
DUMPER>FILES
DUMPER>SSNAME ALL .FOR FILES
DUMPER>SAVE (DISK FILES) *.FOR
DUMPER TAPE # 1, ALL .FOR FILES, WEDNESDAY, 31-AUG-77 1955
PS:<PORADA>
DPEX2.FOR.3 (AS) DPEX2.FOR.3 [OK]
DPEX3.FOR.3 (AS) DPEX3.FOR.3 [OK]
DPEX4.FOR.2 (AS) DPEX4.FOR.2 [OK]
DPEXP.FOR.5 (AS) DPEXP.FOR.5 [OK]
FUN.FOR.2 (AS) FUN.FOR.2 [OK]
HI.FOR.2 (AS) HI.FOR.2 [OK]
MAIN.FOR.2 (AS) MAIN.FOR.2 [OK]
SIND2.FOR.2 (AS) SIND2.FOR.2 [OK]
SIND3.FOR.2 (AS) SIND3.FOR.2 [OK]
SPEX2.FOR.2 (AS) SPEX2.FOR.2 [OK]
SPEX3.FOR.2 (AS) SPEX3.FOR.2 [OK]
SPEX4.FOR.2 (AS) SPEX4.FOR.2 [OK]
SPEXP.FOR.3 (AS) SPEXP.FOR.3 [OK]
TRIG.FOR.2 (AS) TRIG.FOR.2 [OK]
WONDER.FOR.2 (AS) WONDER.FOR.2 [OK]
TOTAL FILES DUMPED = 15
TOTAL PAGES DUMPED = 15
DUMPER>EXIT
@
4. SAVING FILES LOCATED IN ANOTHER DIRECTORY (D)
To save files located in another directory, include the
<directory> or dev:<directory> name in the file specification in
the SAVE command.
@DUMPER
DUMPER 3(163)
DUMPER>TAPE (FILESPEC) MTA1:
DUMPER>REWIND
DUMPER>FILES
DUMPER>SSNAME MANUAL FILES
DUMPER>SAVE (DISK FILES) <MANUALS>*.FOR
DUMPER TAPE # 1, MANUAL FILES, WEDNESDAY, 31-AUG-77 1955
PS:<MANUALS>
ADDEM.FOR.1 (AS) ADDEM.FOR.1 [OK]
ADDTWO.FOR.1 (AS) ADDTWO.FOR.1 [OK]
COMP.FOR.1 (AS) COMP.FOR.1 [OK]
CUBIT.FOR.1 (AS) CUBIT.FOR.1 [OK]
DIFFER.FOR.1 (AS) DIFFER.FOR.1 [OK]
MORPAY.FOR.1 (AS) MORPAY.FOR.1 [OK]
SMALL.FOR.1 (AS) SMALL.FOR.1 [OK]
SUB1.FOR.1 (AS) SUB1.FOR.1 [OK]
SUM.FOR.1 (AS) SUM.FOR.1 [OK]
TRYIT.FOR.1 (AS) TRYIT.FOR.1 [OK]
TOTAL FILES DUMPED = 11
TOTAL PAGES DUMPED = 20
DUMPER>EXIT
@
5. SAVING A FILE TO BE RESTORED TO A TOPS-10 SYSTEM (E)
To save a file so that it can be restored to a TOPS-10 file
system usinG the TOPS-10 BACKUP program, give the INTERCHANGE
command before you give the SAVE command.
DUMPER
DUMPER 3(163)
DUMPER>TAPE (FILESPEC) MTA1:
DUMPER>REWIND
DUMPER>FILES
DUMPER>SSNAME FILES FOR TOPS-10
DUMPER>INTERCHANGE (FORMAT)
DUMPER>SAVE (DISK FILES) *.OVL
DUMPER TAPE # 1, FILES FOR TOPS-10, WEDNESDAY, 31-AUG-77 1956
PS::<PORADA>
TEST.OVL.5 (AS) TEST.OVL.5 [OK]
TEST1.OVL.2 (AS) TEST1.OVL.2 [OK]
TOTAL FILES DUMPED = 2
TOTAL PAGES DUMPED = 64
DUMPER>EXIT
@
6. SAVING CHANGED FILES (F)
Use the SINCE command to save only:
a. Changed files,
b. New files, and
The example shows how to save all the files that were
changed since August 31, 1977
@DUMPER
DUMPER 3(163)
DUMPER>TAPE (FILESPEC) MTA1:
DUMPER>REWIND
DUMPER>FILES
DUMPER>SSNAME CHANGES ON 31-AUG
DUMPER>SINCE (DATE AND TIME) 31-AUG-77 0:0
DUMPER>SAVE (DISK FILES)
DUMPER TAPE # 1, CHANGES ON 31-AUG, WEDNESDAY, 31-AUG-77
1956
PS:<PORADA>
DUMPER.CTL.3 (AS) DUMPER.CTL.3 [OK]
DUMPER.EXA.3 (AS) DUMPER.EXA.3 [OK]
TMOUNT.TXT.1 (AS) TMOUNT.TXT.1 [OK]
TOTAL FILES DUMPED = 3
TOTAL PAGES DUMPED = 21
DUMPER>EXIT
@
7. SAVING ACCESSED FILES (G)
Give the ASINCE command to save all the files that were
accessed in any way (read, written, appended, accessed, or
created). The example shows how to save all the files
that were accessed since August 31, 1977. Notice that
these files include all the files that were saved using
the SINCE command.
@DUMPER
DUMPER 3(163)
DUMPER>TAPE (FILESPEC) MTA1:
DUMPER>REWIND
DUMPER>FILES
DUMPER>SSNAME USED ON 31-AUG
DUMPER>ASINCE (DATE AND TIME) 31-AUG-77 0:0
DUMPER>SAVE (DISK FILES)
DUMPER TAPE # 1, USED ON 31-AUG, WEDNESDAY, 31-AUG-77 1957
PS:<PORADA>
DUMPER.CTL.3 (AS) DUMPER.CTL.3 [OK]
DUMPER.EXA.3 (AS) DUMPER.EXA.3 [OK]
PLM.MAC.1 (AS) PLM.MAC.1 [OK]
TMOUNT.TXT.1 (AS) TMOUNT.TXT.1 [OK]
TOTAL FILES DUMPED = 4
TOTAL PAGES DUMPED = 23
DUMPER>EXIT
@
8. SAVING MONITOR-ACCESSED FILES (H)
Use the MSINCE command to save any files that have been
changed or accessed by the monitor. These files include
all the files that were saved by the SINCE command.
@DUMPER
DUMPER 3(163)
DUMPER>TAPE (FILESPEC) MTA1:
DUMPER>REWIND
DUMPER>FILES
DUMPER>SSNAME ALL CHANGES
DUMPER>MSINCE (DATE AND TIME) 31-AUG-77 0:0
DUMPER>SAVE (DISK FILES)
DUMPER TAPE # 1, ALL CHANGES, WEDNESDAY, 31-AUG-77 1957
PS:<PORADA>
DUMPER.CTL.3 (AS) DUMPER.CTL.3 [OK]
DUMPER.EXA.3 (AS) DUMPER.EXA.3 [OK]
MAIL.TXT.1 (AS) MAIL.TXT.1 [OK]
TEST.OVL.5 (AS) TEST.OVL.5 [OK]
TEST1.OVL.2 (AS) TEST1.OVL.2 [OK]
TMOUNT.TXT.1 (AS) TMOUNT.TXT.1 [OK]
TOTAL FILES DUMPED = 6
TOTAL PAGES DUMPED = 86
DUMPER>EXIT
@
9. CONTINUING A SAVE SET ON A SECOND REEL (I)
To continue a save onto a second reel, type a CTRL/C, give
a TMOUNT command, give a CONTINUE command, and then type
the logical name or tape drive number.
@TMOUNT (TAPE) REEL1: (VOLID) GREEN
[OPERATOR NOTIFIED]
[MTA1: ASSIGNED]
@DUMPER
DUMPER 3(163)
DUMPER>TAPE (FILESPEC) REEL1:
DUMPER>SAVE (DISK FILES)
DUMPER TAPE # 1, , WEDNESDAY, 31-AUG-77 2058
PS:<MCKIE>
END OF TAPE, CONTINUE SAVE ON
CTRL/C
TAPE (FILESPEC) ^C
@TMOUNT (TAPE) REEL2: (VOLID) BLUE
[OPERATOR NOTIFIED]
[MTA1: ASSIGNED]
@CONTINUE (PROGRAM)
CTRL/R
TAPE (FILESPEC) REEL2:
DUMPER TAPE # 2, , WEDNESDAY, 31-AUG-77 2100
TOTAL FILES DUMPED = 253
TOTAL PAGES DUMPED = 1751
DUMPER>EXIT
@
10. CHECKING THE SAVED FILES
If you want to check to make sure the files are correctly
saved on the tape, give a REWIND command and a CHECK
command after you give the SAVE command. This procedure
does not work if you saved the files with a different file
specification.
@DUMPER
DUMPER 3(163)
DUMPER>TAPE (FILESPEC) MTA0:
DUMPER>REWIND
DUMPER>SSNAME COBOL PROGRAMS
DUMPER>SAVE (DISK FILES) *.CBL
DUMPER TAPE # 1, COBOL PROGRAMS, THURSDAY, 1-SEP-77 2058
PS:<MCKIE>
TOTAL FILES DUMPED = 4
TOTAL PAGES DUMPED = 5
DUMPER>REWIND
DUMPER>FILES
DUMPER>CHECK (ALL MTA FILES)
DUMPER TAPE # 1, COBOL PROGRAMS, THURSDAY, 1-SEP-77 1325
PS:<MCKIE>COMPUT.CBL.1;P777752;A10300
PS:<MCKIE>NUMBER.CBL.1;P777752;A10300
PS:<MCKIE>STR.CBL.1;P777700;A10300
PS:<MCKIE>TEST3.CBL.3;P777700;A10300
END OF SAVESET
DUMPER>EXIT
@
11. USING DUMPER FROM A BATCH JOB
Place the commands you would normally type in a file and
then submit that control file to the Batch system. Use
the TMOUNT command for assigning tape drives. The
following example shows the control file and the resulting
log file from a Batch job that saves the user's entire
directory.
@TYPE (FILE) DAILY.CTL
00100 !BATCH JOB FOR SAVING FILES
00200 @TMOUNT MTA-DUMPER RED,
00300 @WRITE-ENABLED
00400 @
00500 @DUMPER
00600 *REWIND
00700 *SSNAME DAILY SAVE
00800 *LIST DAILY-SAVE.LOG
00900 *SAVE
01000 *REWIND
01100 *CHECK
01200 *EXIT
01300 @UNLOAD MTA-DUMPER
01400 @DEASSIGN MTA-DUMPER
@SUBMIT DAILY
[INP:DAILY=/SEQ:3454/TIME:00:05:000]
@
The log file from this job is shown below. Notice that
the files DAILY.LOG and DAILY-SAVE.LOG do not check
properly since they are modified between the save and
check operations.
10:36:42 BAJOB BATCON version 102(2052) running DAILY sequence 467
in stream 1
10:36:42 BAFIL Input from PS:<MCKIE>DAILY.CTL
10:36:42 BAFIL Output to PS:<MCKIE>DAILY.LOG
10:36:42 BASUM Job parameters
Time:00:04:00 Unique:YES Restarting:NO Output:NOL
10:36:42 MONTR
10:36:42 MONTR 2102 DEVELOPMENT SYS., TOPS-20 MONITOR 2(233)
10:36:42 MONTR @LOGIN MCKIE 10300
10:36:43 MONTR JOB 26 ON TTY112 6-AUG-76 10:36
10:36:44 MONTR 2102 DEVELOPMENT SYS., TOPS-20 MONITOR 2(233)
10:36:44 MONTR TOPS-20 COMMAND PROCESSOR 2(236)
10:36:44 MONTR USED 0:00:00 IN 0:00:00
10:36:44 MONTR TOPS-20: 0:00:00.2
10:36:44 MONTR SET UUO-SIMULATION (FOR PROGRAM)
10:36:44 MONTR SET NO CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY (OF PROGRAM)
10:36:45 MONTR END OF BATCH.CMD.2
10:36:46 MONTR @SET TIME-LIMIT 240
10:36:47 MONTR @
!BATCH JOB FOR SAVING FILES
10:36:47 MONTR @TMOUNT MTA-DUMPER RED,
10:36:47 MONTR @@@WRITE-ENABLED
10:36:48 MONTR @@@
10:36:49 MONTR [OPERATOR NOTIFIED]
10:42:19 MONTR [MTA1: ASSIGNED]
10:42:19 MONTR @@DUMPER
10:42:19 USER
10:42:19 USER DUMPER 3(163)
10:42:19 USER
10:42:19 USER DUMPER>*REWIND
10:42:20 USER DUMPER>*SSNAME DAILY SAVE
10:42:20 USER DUMPER>*LIST DAILY-SAVE.LOG
10:42:21 USER DUMPER>*SAVE
10:42:22 USER
10:42:22 USER DUMPER TAPE # 1, DAILY SAVE, FRIDAY, 2-SEP-77 1042
10:42:22 USER PS:<MCKIE>
10:42:54 USER
10:42:54 USER
10:44:54 USER TOTAL FILES DUMPED = 235
10:44:54 USER TOTAL PAGES DUMPED = 1223
10:44:55 USER DUMPER>*REWIND
10:44:56 USER DUMPER>*CHECK
10:44:56 USER
10:45:17 USER
10:45:17 USER DUMPER TAPE # 1, DAILY SAVE, FRIDAY, 2-SEP-77 1042
10:46:12 USER
10:46:12 USER %COMPARE ERROR, PAGE 0, FILE DAILY.LOG.1
10:46:12 USER %DIFFERENCE IN .FBCRE OF FILE DAILY.LOG.1
10:46:12 USER %DIFFERENCE IN .FBSIZ OF FILE DAILY.LOG.1
10:46:12 USER %DIFFERENCE IN .FBCRV OF FILE DAILY.LOG.1
10:46:12 USER %DIFFERENCE IN .FBWRT OF FILE DAILY.LOG.1
10:46:12 USER %DIFFERENCE IN .FBCNT OF FILE DAILY.LOG.1
10:46:13 USER
10:46:13 USER %COMPARE ERROR, PAGE 11, FILE DAILY-SAVE.LOG.1
10:46:13 USER %DIFFERENCE IN .FBCRE OF FILE DAILY-SAVE.LOG.1
10:46:13 USER %DIFFERENCE IN .FBSIZ OF FILE DAILY-SAVE.LOG.1
10:46:13 USER %DIFFERENCE IN .FBCRV OF FILE DAILY-SAVE.LOG.1
10:46:13 USER %DIFFERENCE IN .FBWRT OF FILE DAILY-SAVE.LOG.1
10:46:13 USER %DIFFERENCE IN .FBCNT OF FILE DAILY-SAVE.LOG.1
10:47:26 USER
10:47:26 USER END OF SAVESET
10:47:26 USER DUMPER>*EXIT
10:47:26 MONTR @@UNLOAD MTA-DUMPER
10:47:27 MONTR @@DEASSIGN MTA-DUMPER
10:47:28 MONTR @^C
10:47:29 MONTR LOGOUT
10:47:37 MONTR KILLED JOB 26, USER MCKIE, ACCOUNT 10300, TTY 112, AT
2-SEP-77 10:47:37
10:47:37 MONTR USED 0:0:45 IN 0:10:54
10:47:39 LPDAT [LPTLSJ LPTSPL version 102(2226) running on PDPT1,
2-Sep-77 10:47:39]
10:47:39 LPDAT [LPTSJS Starting Job DAILY, Seq #467, request created
at 2-Sep-77 09:47:38]
12. KEEPING INFORMATION ABOUT SAVED FILES
If you want to keep information about the files you have saved on
the tape, give the LIST command. If you do not specify a file
specification, the system automatically sends the information to
the line printer.
@DUMPER
DUMPER 3(163)
DUMPER>TAPE (FILESPEC) MTA0:
DUMPER>CHECKSUM (FILES) SEQUENTIAL
DUMPER>LIST (LOG INFORMATION ON FILE) TAPE.LOG
DUMPER>SAVE (DISK FILES) *.CBL
DUMPER TAPE # 1, , THURSDAY, 1-SEP-77 1251
PS:<MCKIE>
TOTAL FILES DUMPED = 4
TOTAL PAGES DUMPED = 5
DUMPER>EXIT
@TYPE (FILE) TAPE.LOG.1
DUMPER TAPE # 1, , THURSDAY, 1-SEP-77 1251
DIRECTORY (NUMBERS)
FILE LAST WRITE SIZE (PAGES) CHECKSUM
MCKIE (212)
COMPUT.CBL.1 25-JAN-76 1624 1 624555
NUMBER.CBL.1 25-JAN-76 1625 2 571212
STR.CBL.1 30-APR-75 0703 1 057514
TEST3.CBL.3 25-JAN-76 1612 1 411253
TOTAL 4 FILES, 5 PAGES
TOTAL FILES DUMPED = 4
TOTAL PAGES DUMPED = 5
@
RESTORING FILES
13. RESTORING YOUR ENTIRE DIRECTORY (A)
Type just the RESTORE command to restore the files from the tape
to your connected directory. The system restores any files that
are:
a. Not in your connected directory, or
b. Newer than an existing file with the same file name and
file type.
If the file specification on the tape does not specify that the
file came from your connected directory, it will not be restored
to your connected directory.
Use the SUPERSEDE ALWAYS command to restore all the files from
the tape regardless of their dates.
Use the SUPERSEDE NEVER command to restore only those files that
have a file name and file type not found in your directory.
@DUMPER
DUMPER 3(163)
DUMPER>TAPE (FILESPEC) MTA1:
DUMPER>REWIND
DUMPER>RESTORE (MTA FILES)
DUMPER TAPE # 1, FULL SAVE, WEDNESDAY, 31-AUG-77 1957
LOADING FILE(S) INTO <PORADA>
END OF SAVESET
DUMPER>EXIT
@
14. RESTORING A SINGLE FILE (B)
Type the file specification after the RESTORE command to restore
a single file.
@DUMPER
DUMPER 3(163)
DUMPER>TAPE (FILESPEC) MTA1:
DUMPER>REWIND
DUMPER>FILES
DUMPER>RESTORE (MTA FILES) TMOUNT.TXT
DUMPER TAPE # 1, FULL SAVE, WEDNESDAY, 31-AUG-77 1957
LOADING FILE(S) INTO <PORADA>
PS:<PORADA>TMOUNT.TXT.1;P777700;A10300 (TO) TMOUNT.TXT.1 [OK]
END OF SAVESET
DUMPER>EXIT
@
15. RESTORING A GROUP OF FILES (C)
To restore a group of files use the wildcard characters % and *,
or separate the file specifications with commas.
@DUMPER
DUMPER 3(163)
DUMPER>TAPE (FILESPEC) MTA1:
DUMPER>REWIND
DUMPER>FILES
DUMPER>RESTORE (MTA FILES) *.FOR
DUMPER TAPE # 1, FULL SAVE, WEDNESDAY, 31-AUG-77 1957
LOADING FILE(S) INTO <PORADAPS:<PORADA>
PS:<PORADA>DPEX2.FOR.3;P777700;A10300 (TO) DPEX2.FOR.3 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>DPEX3.FOR.3;P777700;A10300 (TO) DPEX3.FOR.3 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>DPEX4.FOR.2;P777700;A10300 (TO) DPEX4.FOR.2 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>DPEXP.FOR.5;P777700;A10300 (TO) DPEXP.FOR.5 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>FUN.FOR.2;P777700;A10300 (TO) FUN.FOR.2 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>HI.FOR.2;P777700;A10300 (TO) HI.FOR.2 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>MAIN.FOR.2;P777700;A10300 (TO) MAIN.FOR.2 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>SIND2.FOR.2;P777700;A10300 (TO) SIND2.FOR.2 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>SIND3.FOR.2;P777700;A10300 (TO) SIND3.FOR.2 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>SPEX2.FOR.2;P777700;A10300 (TO) SPEX2.FOR.2 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>SPEX3.FOR.2;P777700;A10300 (TO) SPEX3.FOR.2 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>SPEX4.FOR.2;P777700;A10300 (TO) SPEX4.FOR.2 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>SPEXP.FOR.3;P777700;A10300 (TO) SPEXP.FOR.3 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>TRIG.FOR.2;P777700;A10300 (TO) TRIG.FOR.2 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>WONDER.FOR.2;P777700;A10300 (TO) WONDER.FOR.2 [OK]
END OF SAVESET
DUMPER>EXIT
@
16. RESTORING FILES SAVED FROM ANOTHER DIRECTORY (D)
To restore files saved from another directory, make your
directory name the last argument of the RESTORE command. The
example restores files from the directory <MANUALS> into
<PORADA>. In this case some of the files being restored have
accounts that are invalid. Thus, the command ACCOUNT
SYSTEM-DEFAULT is used.
@DUMPER
DUMPER 3(163)
DUMPER>TAPE (FILESPEC) MTA1:
DUMPER>REWIND
DUMPER>FILES
DUMPER>ACCOUNT (OF RESTORED FILES FROM) SYSTEM-DEFAULT
DUMPER>RESTORE (MTA FILES) <MANUALS>*.FOR.* (TO) <PORADA>
DUMPER TAPE # 1, , WEDNESDAY, 31-AUG-77 2034
LOADING FILE(S) INTO <PORADA>
PS:<MANUALS>ADDEM.FOR.1;P777700;A10300 (TO) ADDEM.FOR.1 [OK]
PS:<MANUALS>ADDTWO.FOR.1;P777700;A10300 (TO) ADDTWO.FOR.1 [OK]
PS:<MANUALS>COMP.FOR.1;P777700;A10300 (TO) COMP.FOR.1 [OK]
PS:<MANUALS>CUBIT.FOR.1;P777700;A10300 (TO) CUBIT.FOR.1 [OK]
PS:<MANUALS>DIFFER.FOR.1;P777700;A10300 (TO) DIFFER.FOR.1 [OK]
PS:<MANUALS>MORPAY.FOR.1;P777700;A10300 (TO) MORPAY.FOR.1 [OK]
PS:<MANUALS>SMALL.FOR.1;P777700;A10300 (TO) SMALL.FOR.1 [OK]
PS:<MANUALS>SUB1.FOR.1;P777700;A10300 (TO) SUB1.FOR.1 [OK]
PS:<MANUALS>SUM.FOR.1;P777700;A10300 (TO) SUM.FOR.1 [OK]
PS:<MANUALS>TRYIT.FOR.1;P777700;A10300 (TO) TRYIT.FOR.1 [OK]
END OF SAVESET
DUMPER>EXIT
@
17. RESTORING A FILE SAVED FROM A TOPS-10 SYSTEM (E)
To restore a file saved from a TOPS-10 system, be sure to include
the INTERCHANGE command before your RESTORE command.
@DUMPER
DUMPER 3(163)
DUMPER>TAPE (FILESPEC) MTA1:
DUMPER>REWIND
DUMPER>FILES
DUMPER>INTERCHANGE (FORMAT)
DUMPER>RESTORE (MTA FILES) <*>*.OVL.* (TO) *.TEXT
DUMPER TAPE # 1, FILES FOR TOPS-10, WEDNESDAY, 31-AUG-77 1956
LOADING FILE(S) INTO <PORADA>
TEST.OVL.5 (TO) TEST.TEXT.5 [OK]
TEST1.OVL.2 (TO) TEST1.TEXT.2 [OK]
END OF SAVESET
DUMPER>EXIT
@
18. RESTORING CHANGED FILES (F)
Use the SINCE switch to restore only those files that changed
after a certain date.
@DUMPER
DUMPER 3(163)
DUMPER>TAPE (FILESPEC) MTA1:
DUMPER>REWIND
DUMPER>FILES
DUMPER>SINCE (DATE AND TIME) 31-AUG-77 0:0
DUMPER>RESTORE (MTA FILES)
DUMPER TAPE # 1, FULL SAVE, WEDNESDAY, 31-AUG-77 1957
LOADING FILE(S) INTO <PORADA>
PS:<PORADA>DUMPER.CTL.3;P777700;A10300 (TO) DUMPER.CTL.3 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>DUMPER.EXA.3;P777700;A10300 (TO) DUMPER.EXA.3 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>TMOUNT.TXT.1;P777700;A10300 (TO) TMOUNT.TXT.1 [OK]
END OF SAVESET
DUMPER>EXIT
@
19. RESTORING ACCESSED FILES (G)
Use the ASINCE command to restore files you accessed after a
certain date.
@DUMPER
DUMPER 3(163)
DUMPER>TAPE (FILESPEC) MTA1:
DUMPER>REWIND
DUMPER>FILES
DUMPER>ASINCE (DATE AND TIME) 31-AUG-77 0:0
DUMPER>RESTORE (MTA FILES)
DUMPER TAPE # 1, FULL SAVE, WEDNESDAY, 31-AUG-77 1957
LOADING FILE(S) INTO <PORADA>
PS:<PORADA>DUMPER.CTL.3;P777700;A10300 (TO) DUMPER.CTL.3 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>DUMPER.EXA.3;P777777;A10300 (TO) DUMPER.EXA.3 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>PLM.MAC.1;P777700;A220100 (TO) PLM.MAC.1 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>TMOUNT.TXT.1;P777700;A10300 (TO) TMOUNT.TXT.1 [OK]
END OF SAVESET
DUMPER>EXIT
@
20. RESTORING MODIFIED FILES (H)
Give the MSINCE command to transfer only those files that were
modified since a certain date.
@DUMPER
DUMPER 3(163)
DUMPER>TAPE (FILESPEC) MTA1:
DUMPER>REWIND
DUMPER>FILES
DUMPER>MSINCE (DATE AND TIME) 31-AUG-77 0:0
DUMPER>RESTORE (MTA FILES)
DUMPER TAPE # 1, FULL SAVE, WEDNESDAY, 31-AUG-77 1957
LOADING FILE(S) INTO <PORADA>
PS:<PORADA>DUMPER.CTL.3;P777700;A10300 (TO) DUMPER.CTL.3 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>DUMPER.EXA.3;P777777;A10300 (TO) DUMPER.EXA.3 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>MAIL.TXT.1;P770404;A1 (TO) MAIL.TXT.1 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>TEST.OVL.5;P777777;A10300 (TO) TEST.OVL.5 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>TEST1.OVL.2;P777752;A10300 (TO) TEST1.OVL.2 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>TMOUNT.TXT.1;P777700;A10300 (TO) TMOUNT.TXT.1 [OK]
END OF SAVESET
DUMPER>EXIT
@
21. RESTORING FILES CHANGED DURING A CERTAIN TIME PERIOD
Give both the SINCE and BEFORE commands to restore only those
files that were changed during a certain time period. The SINCE
command contains the beginning date and the BEFORE command
contains the ending date. The example shows how to restore only
those files that changed on January 21, 1977.
@DUMPER
DUMPER 3(163)
DUMPER>TAPE (FILESPEC) MTA1:
DUMPER>REWIND
DUMPER>FILES
DUMPER>SINCE (DATE AND TIME) 21-JAN-77 0:0
DUMPER>BEFORE (DATE AND TIME) 22-JAN-77 0:0
DUMPER>RESTORE (MTA FILES)
DUMPER TAPE # 1, FULL SAVE, WEDNESDAY, 31-AUG-77 1957
LOADING FILE(S) INTO <PORADA>
PS:<PORADA>FUN.FOR.2;P777700;A10300 (TO) FUN.FOR.2 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>FUN.MAP.1;P777700;A10300 (TO) FUN.MAP.1 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>HI.FOR.2;P777700;A1 (TO) HI.FOR.2 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>WONDER.FOR.2;P777700;A10300 (TO) WONDER.FOR.2 [OK]
END OF SAVESET
DUMPER>EXIT
@
22. RESTORING FILES FROM A CONTINUED SAVE SET (I)
To restore files when a save set is continued on a second reel,
mount the tape (or type a CTRL/C and give the TMOUNT command to
have the operator mount it), and then type the drive name.
@DUMPER
DUMPER 3(163)
DUMPER>TAPE (FILESPEC) MTA1:
DUMPER>RESTORE (MTA FILES) <ROMPER>*.*.* (TO) <MCKIE>*.FOO
DUMPER TAPE # 1, , WEDNESDAY, 31-AUG-77 2116
LOADING FILE(S) INTO <MCKIE>
END OF TAPE, MOUNT NEXT REEL
%FILE <ROMPER>MAKEIT.MEM.1 CONTINUED ON NEXT REEL
TAPE (FILESPEC) MTA1:
DUMPER TAPE # 2, , WEDNESDAY, 31-AUG-77 2116
END OF SAVESET
DUMPER>EXIT
@
23. RESTORING FILES FROM SYSTEM BACKUP TAPES
If you accidentlly delete some files, you may restore them by
using your system backup tapes. Usually the operator makes full
saves on a weekly basis and then saves only those files that are
new or changed on a daily basis. Mount the full save tape and
restore the proper files, then mount the incremental save tape
and restore the remainder.
@DUMPER
DUMPER 3(163)
DUMPER>TAPE (FILESPEC) MTA1:
DUMPER>REWIND
DUMPER>FILES
DUMPER>RESTORE (MTA FILES) <PORADA>
DUMPER TAPE # 1, FULL DUMP, WEDNESDAY, 31-AUG-77 2107
LOADING FILE(S) INTO <PORADA>
PS:<PORADA>COMP.FOR.1;P777700;A10300 (TO) COMP.FOR.1 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>DPEX2.FOR.3;P777700;A10300 (TO) DPEX2.FOR.3 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>DPEX2.QOR.1;P777700;A10300 (TO) DPEX2.QOR.1 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>EXAM1.MAC.1;P777700;A220100 (TO) EXAM1.MAC.1 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>FIRST.FIL.1;P777700;A220100 (TO) FIRST.FIL.1 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>FUN.FOR.2;P777700;A10300 (TO) FUN.FOR.2 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>GTJFN.MAC.1;P777700;A220100 (TO) GTJFN.MAC.1 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>MAIL.TXT.1;P770404;A1 (TO) MAIL.TXT.1 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>MAIN.FOR.2;P777700;A10300 (TO) MAIN.FOR.2 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>PLM.MAC.1;P777700;A220100 (TO) PLM.MAC.1 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>SECOND.FIL.1;P777700;A220100 (TO) SECOND.FIL.1 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>SIND2.FOR.2;P777700;A10300 (TO) SIND2.FOR.2 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>SPEX2.FOR.2;P777700;A10300 (TO) SPEX2.FOR.2 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>SQUARE.BAS.4;P777700;A220100 (TO) SQUARE.BAS.4 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>TEST.CMD.3;P777700;A10300 (TO) TEST.CMD.3 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>TEST.EXE.5;P777700;A10300 (TO) TEST.EXE.5 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>TRIG.FOR.2;P777700;A10300 (TO) TRIG.FOR.2 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>WONDER.FOR.2;P777700;A10300 (TO) WONDER.FOR.2 [OK]
END OF SAVESET
DUMPER>EXIT
@
The user mounts the incremental tape...
@DUMPER
DUMPER 3(163)
DUMPER>TAPE (FILESPEC) MTA1:
DUMPER>FILES
DUMPER>RESTORE (MTA FILES) <PORADA>
DUMPER TAPE # 1, INCREMENTAL, WEDNESDAY, 31-AUG-77 2109
LOADING FILE(S) INTO <PORADA>
PS:<PORADA>DUMPER.CTL.3;P777700;A10300 (TO) DUMPER.CTL.3 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>DUMPER.EXA.3;P777700;A10300 (TO) DUMPER.EXA.3 [OK]
PS:<PORADA>TMOUNT.TXT.1;P777700;A10300 (TO) TMOUNT.TXT.1 [OK]
END OF SAVESET
DUMPER>EXIT
@
ADDITIONAL DUMPER EXAMPLES
24. EXAMINING A TAPE
Give the PRINT command to print a list of the files that are
stored on the tape.
@DUMPER
DUMPER 3(163)
DUMPER>TAPE (FILESPEC) MTA1:
DUMPER>REWIND
DUMPER>CHECKSUM (FILES) SEQUENTIAL
DUMPER>PRINT (DIRECTORY OF TAPE ONTO FILE)
DUMPER TAPE # 1, ALL CHANGES, WEDNESDAY, 31-AUG-77 1957
FILE LAST WRITE SIZE (PAGES) CHECKSUM
DDB FOR PORADA
PS:<PORADA>DUMPER.CTL.3 4-Aug-77 1913 1 563372
PS:<PORADA>DUMPER.EXA.3 4-Aug-77 1936 19 250044
PS:<PORADA>MAIL.TXT.1 21-Jul-77 1116 1 540237
PS:<PORADA>TEST.OVL.5 3-Mar-77 1122 32 565042
PS:<PORADA>TEST1.OVL.2 26-Jan-77 1642 32 203313
PS:<PORADA>TMOUNT.TXT.1 4-Aug-77 1821 1 454061
END OF TAPE.
^L
DUMPER>EXIT
@
25. STOPPING DUMPER
Type CTRL/E to stop DUMPER. You can give the CONTINUE command to
DUMPER to resume the operation you interrupted. If you interrupt
a command and then give a command which will prevent you from
continuing the interrupted command, DUMPER prints a message and
gives you the alternative of aborting the offending command.
@DUMPER
DUMPER 3(163)
DUMPER>TAPE (FILESPEC) MTA0:
DUMPER>REWIND
DUMPER>SSNAME FULL SAVE
DUMPER>SAVE (DISK FILES)
DUMPER TAPE # 1, FULL SAVE, THURSDAY, 1-SEP-77 1326
PS:<MCKIE>
CTRL/E
INTERRUPTING...
DUMPER>FILES
DUMPER>CONTINUE
008-PTYCON.TXT.1 (AS) 008-PTYCON.TXT.1 [OK]
009-SWATCH.MEM.1 (AS) 009-SWATCH.MEM.1 [OK]
009-SWATCH.TXT.4 (AS) 009-SWATCH.TXT.4 [OK]
00IN.MEM.2 (AS) 00IN.MEM.2 [OK]
00IN.RNO.2 (AS) 00IN.RNO.2 [OK]
00TITL.MEM.4 (AS) 00TITL.MEM.4 [OK]
00TITL.RNO.34 (AS) 00TITL.RNO.34 [OK]
00TOC.RNO.32 (AS) 00TOC.RNO.32
CTRL/E
INTERRUPTING...
DUMPER>NO FILES
DUMPER>REWIND
%DO YOU REALLY WANT TO ABORT YOUR INTERRUPTED COMMAND?
YES OR NO? N
DUMPER>CONTINUE
TOTAL FILES DUMPED = 226
TOTAL PAGES DUMPED = 1179
DUMPER>EXIT
@
EDIT-program Program
Function
The EDIT program helps you create and edit files. You may also
use EDIT to peruse files.
Hints
If you need a tutorial to start learning EDIT, refer to Getting
Started With DECSYSTEM-20 or the EDIT Reference Manual.
Format
@CREATE (FILE) /switches input
or
@EDIT (FILE) /switches input (OUTPUT AS) output
Operation
1. Give either the CREATE or EDIT command to start EDIT. (Refer
to their individual desriptions.)
@CREATE (FILE) TEST.FOR
2. If you give the CREATE command, EDIT starts at input level
where you may insert lines into a new file. To stop
inputting and move to EDIT command level, press the ESC key.
The system prints an asterisk.
INPUT: TEST.FOR.1
00100 TYPE 101
00200 101 FORMAT (' This is only a test!')
00300 $
*
3. Once you are at EDIT command level, you may give any one of
the EDIT Commands listed in the following table.
Table II-10
EDIT Commands
Positions and ranges
You must specify the line or lines on which you want a
command to work. To specify a single line, type a position;
to specify a group of lines, type a range. A position
specifies a single line and has the following format:
line/page
The argument line is a line number and page is a page
number. A line number or page number is one of the
following:
A positive integer less than 2^35,
. (to indicate the current line or page),
^ (to indicate the first line or page), or
* (to indicate the last line or page).
Defaults: If you omit the line number, EDIT uses the
entire page. If you omit the slash and the page number,
EDIT uses the current page.
Examples: 300/2 specifies line 300 on page 2
^/3 specifies the first line on page 3
^/^ specifies the beginning of the file
*/* specifies the end of the file
/1 specifies all of page 1
300 specifies line 300 on the current page
A range specifies one or more lines and is in one of the two
following forms:
starting-position:ending-position
The starting-position is the first line on which the
command will work, the ending-position is the last line
on which the command will work. Any command that works
on a range of lines will also work on a single line, thus
a range may also be just a single line.
Defaults: If you omit the page number from the
ending-position, EDIT uses tha page number in the
starting-position, not your current page.
Examples: 100/1:300/3 specifies all the lines between
100/1 and 300/3 inclusive
600/5:2400 specifies all the lines between
600/5 and 2400/5
starting-position!number
The starting-position is the first line on which the
command will work. The number specifies the number of
lines (including the first) on which the command will
work.
Examples: 400/2!8 specifies line 400/2 and the following
7 lines.
300!5 specifies line 300 on the current page
and the next 4 lines.
Arange
Enters Alter command level for the specified line(s). In
Alter command level you give the special Alter commands
which allow you to edit a line, character by character.
When you are finished editing the current line, press the
RETURN key or type E and EDIT enters Alter mode for the next
line, or returns you to EDIT command level if all lines in
the range have been altered.
The Alter commands are listed below. Some Alter mode
commands are preceded by a minus sign that is optional and
reverses the direction of the command. Other commands have
an argument n, that is optional and defaults to 1 if
omitted. The arguments in angle brackets (such as <space>)
identify a specific key you are required to press.
Alter Commands
? Prints a list of the Alter commands.
nCchars Deletes n characters, then lets you type n
characters (or press the ESC key to stop
inserting).
nD Deletes the next n characters.
-nD Deletes the last n characters.
E Ends Alter mode for the current line, but does
not print the rest of the line.
nFc Finds the nth occurrence of the character c.
-nFc Finds the nth last occurrence of the character
c.
nItext$ Lets you insert text, starting at the current
position, until you press the RETURN key (to end
Altering the line) or the ESC key (to end just
the insert). If you press the linefeed key, the
system takes the remainder of the line and
places it at the beginning of a new line formed
by adding n to the current line number. If you
omit n, EDIT uses the current increment.
J Places the rest of the current line at the
beginning of the next line in the file.
nKc Deletes all the characters from the current
position up to n occurrences of the character c.
-nKc Deletes all the characters from the current
position back through n occurrences of the
character c.
L Prints the rest of the line and returns to the
beginning.
P Prints the rest of the line and the beginning of
the line up to your current position. This
command is useful for viewing the correct
contents of the line after you delete some text.
Q Ends Alter mode for this range, without saving
the changes for this line.
nRtext$ Deletes the next n characters, then gives an I
command. Stop inserting text by pressing the
ESC key.
-nRtext$ Deletes the last n characters, then gives an I
command.
nW Skips forward n words.
Xtext$ Deletes the current word, then gives an
automatic I command.
n<space> Skips ahead n characters.
-n<space> Backspaces n characters.
n<DELETE> Backspaces n characters.
<RETURN> Prints the rest of the line and returns to EDIT
command level.
<TAB> Skips to the end of the line.
-<TAB> Backspaces to the beginning of the line.
CTRL/U Restores the original line, leaving you at Alter
command level.
B (FILE) name.typ.gen
Saves the current file, but does not end the editing
session. You may use recognition on the file specification
or use the default which is a new generation of the input
file. To make a backup file that does not contain line
numbers, use the command name BU. The user makes a backup
file.
*B
[NXTONE.FOR.2]
*
Cposition,range
Copies a range of lines so that the first line being copied
starts at the specified position. The user copies the
contents of lines 600 through 3000 to just after line 300.
EDIT has used an increment of 1 to create the new lines.
*C300,600:3000
INCR=1
*
*Cposition (FILE) name.typ,range
Copies a range of lines from the specified file, so that the
first line being copied starts at the specified position.
The user copies the first three pages from the file
SUBS.SNO.
*C400/2$ (FILE) SUBS.SNO./1:/3
*
*Cposition (FILE) name.typ/S
Lets you search through the specified file before giving the
range of lines to transfer. In this mode, the ready
character is C* and you may give F and P commands only.
When you are finished examining the file, give an E command
and the system prints SOURCE LINES=. Type the appropriate
range of lines. If you do not want to copy any lines, end
search mode by giving the EQ command instead of the E
command. The user looks at the file NUMBER.MAC then copies
pages 3 through 5.
*C.$ (FILE) NUMBER.MAC.1/S
C*P^/3
00100 ;Subroutines for inputting and outputting numbers.
C*E
SOURCE LINES=/3:/5
*
Drange
Deletes a range of lines and prints a confirming message.
*D100:600
6 LINES (00100/1:00600/1) DELETED
*
E (FILE) name.typ
Ends the editing session and saves the results in the file
name.typ. You may add a letter after the E to perform some
special functions: B creates a new generation of the output
file rather than generating a .Qxx file; I inserts a line
at the beginning of your input file which includes the file
specification, date, time, and your user name; Q ends the
editing session and restores the original file; U removes
the line numbers (unsequences) your file. The user ends the
editing session and saves his file.
*E
[TEST.MAC.2]
@
The user saves his file without line numbers.
*EU
[NOBAD.ALG]
@
Fstring$range,options
Finds the next occurrence of the specified string of
characters and prints the line containing it. Note that you
press the ESC key where the $ is shown. The user looks for
the first FORMAT statement on page 1.
*FFORMAT$/1
09200 101 FORMAT ('Input file: ')
*
If you give an F command without any arguments, EDIT uses
the arguments to the last F command. The user finds the
next FORMAT statement.
*F
10400 102 FORMAT ('The file 'A10,' does not exist.')
*
You can print the saved arguments to an F command by giving
the =STRING command. An F command may include the options
and special characters described with the S command.
G (FILE) name.typ
Ends the editing session, saves the results in the file
name.typ, then executes your last COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, or
DEBUG command. If you add the letter U to the G command,
the system removes the line numbers before executing the
last LOAD-class command. Refer to the E command for the
other letters you may add. The user saves his file
TEST.FOR, then the system gives his last LOAD-class command,
which was COMPILE.
*G
[TEST.FOR.5]
FORTRAN: TEST
MAIN.
@
H
Prints a list of EDIT commands and options.
Iposition,increment
Lets you input a line or lines starting at the specified
position. The optional increment numbers subsequent lines
inserted with this command; the permanent increment is not
affected. To return to EDIT command level, press the ESC
key. The user inserts line 100. Since line 100 already
exists, EDIT selects a line halfway between line 100 and the
next line in the file.
*I100
00150 THIS IS A TEST LINE.
*
The user inserts line 350, then line 360.
*I350,10
00350 ADDI 3,.NUMPAR
00360 MOVEM 3,PERMPR
00370 $
*
There are a number of special functions which the I command
may perform:
I<CR>
Starts inserting where you last stopped inserting or
replacing lines. You can find out this location by
giving the =INSERT command. The user starts inserting
where he left off.
*I
02400 T1: HALTF
02500 JRST T1
02600 $
*
I/page
Inserts a page mark at the end of the specified page,
then starts insert mode beginning with the value of the
START parameter (the default is 100). The user starts
inserting lines on page 4.
*I/3
00100 TOP OF PAGE 4.
00200 $
*
Iposition!n
Chooses an increment which will allow you to insert n
lines starting at the specified position. The user
inserts 3 lines after line 100.
*I100!3
00120 TEST1: HRROI T1,MESSAGE
00140 PSOUT
00160 JRST RETSKP
00180 $
*
I^
Inserts a line at the top of the page, halfway between
line 0 and the first line. The user inserts a line at
the beginning of the file.
*I^/^
00050 ;This is a test program.
*
Jposition
Appends the next line in the file to the specified line,
thereby joining the two. The second line is deleted.
The user joins line 500 and 600.
*P500!2
00500 FIRST LINE!
00600 SECOND LINE
*J500
*P500
00500 FIRST LINE!SECOND LINE
*
K/page
Deletes the page mark between the specified page and the
one preceding it. This command deletes only the page
MARK, not the CONTENTS of the page. The system may print
the message %OUT OF ORDER, which tells you that the line
numbers are not in ascending order although your file is
still in the correct logical order. Given the N command
to renumber the offending page (refer also to the NA
command). The user deletes the page mark between page 1
and page 2.
*K/2
*
Note that page mark 2 is the first page mark in the file,
thus the command K/1 is illegal.
Lrange
Lists the specified range of lines on the line printer.
If you do not give a range, the system lists the entire
file. The user lists the contents of page 1.
*L/1
*
Mposition
Marks the specified line as the beginning of a new page.
Each succeeding page number is increased by one. The
user makes line 300 the first line 2 on a new page.
*M300
*
Nincrement,range,start
Renumbers the specified range of lines starting with the
specified value and adding the specified increment in
generating the line number for each succeeding line. The
user renumbers page 1, starting with 150 and adding 10
for each new line number.
*N10,/1,150
*
If you do not give a starting number, the system uses the
increment. The user renumbers page 2 starting with 50
and adding 50 for each new line number.
*N50,/2
*
If you do not give a range, the system renumbers the
entire file. The user renumbers the entire file,
starting with 10 and adding 10 for each new line.
*N10
*
If you do not specify an increment, the system uses the
value of the INCREMENT parameter (the default is 100).
The user renumbers his entire file starting with 100 and
adding 100.
*N
*
The system assigns the starting number to the first line
on each page and numbers each succeeding line by adding
the increment, unless you add the letter P to the N
command. This stops the system from reseting to the
starting number at the beginning of each page. You will
find this command useful when you want to delete some
page marks without getting the %OUT OF ORDER message.
The user numbers his file sequentially starting at 10 and
adding 10.
*NP10
*
If you want to add an increment to a range of lines, use
the command NAincrement,range. The user adds 5 to lines
100 through 400 on page 2.
*NA5,100/2:400
*
Prange,S
Prints the range of lines. If you do not specify a
range, the system prints a group of lines. The number of
lines it prints specified by the value of the PLINES
parameter (the default is 16). The user prints line 500
and the following line.
*P500!2
00500 THIS IS THE FIFTH LINE.
00600 THIS IS THE SIXTH LINE.
*
If you do not want the system to print the line numbers,
include the ,S qualifier at the end of the command. The
* prompt is not reprinted until you press the RETURN key
a second time. The user prints line 500 without its line
number, then presses the RETURN key again to get the EDIT
prompt.
*P500,S
THIS IS THE FIFTH LINE.
*
Pressing the <LF> key prints the next line in your file;
pressing the <ESC> key prints the previous line in your
file.
.position
Makes the specified position your current line. The user
moves to the line 500 on page 4.
*.500/4
*
Rrange
Deletes the specified range of lines, then enters insert
mode with the specified increment. The user replaces
line 300.
*R300
00300 THIS IS LINE 300.
1 LINE (00300/1) DELETED
*
Sexisting$new$range,options
Substitutes the new string of characters for all
occurrences of the existing string of characters
contained within the specified range. The user replaces
all occurences of SKIPA with JFCL on line 900.
*SSKIPA$JFCL$900
00900 TEST: JFCL 0
*
If you do not give a range, the S command performs the
substitution for the next occurrence of the existing
string. Should you give the S command a second time, the
system performs the substitution on the rest of the file.
*SSKIPA$JFCL$
05500 T5: JFCL 0
*S
06700 T6A: JFCL 0
09400 JFCL 0
*
In addition to the options described below, ,D lets you
check on each substitution and ,L stops the printing of
each line that contains a substitution.
You may use the following options with the F and S
commands:
,E Requires an exact match of upper and lower case
characters.
,A Enters Alter mode for each line on which the
characters are found.
You may use the following matching and replacement
characters in F and S commands if you are using the /C128
character set.
Match: '% not
') arbitrary number of
'/ any character
'7 quote next character
': separator
Replacement: '" next match string
'* '*n'* is n'th match string
'7 quote next character
The folllowing command searches for a space followed by
any two characters and a comma, then inserts an extra
space beside the first. Notice that the characters '"
supply the new string with the characters that were
matched in the existing string.
*/C128
*P300
00300 HRRI T1,40000
*S '/'/,$ '"'",$.
00300 HRRI T1,40000
*/C64
*
The following command replaces the word the at the
beginning of line 900 with the word that. Notice that '%
(not) '/ (any character) matches the beginning, or the
ending, of a line.
*/C128
*P900
00900 THE NEWEST METHOD IS USEFUL.
*S'%'/THE$THAT$900
00900 THAT NEWEST METHOD IS USEFUL.
*/C64
*
The user switches the numbers before a , with the numbers
before a . on line 600. 1')'/, matches 1 and any number
of any character until a , is reached. ')'/ matches all
the characters from the space after the comma up to the 1
in 1976. 1')'/6. matches 1 and any number of any
character until a . is reached. Now in the new string,
'*3'* supplies the characters from the third pattern:
86; '*2'* supplies the middle characters: but not in ;
and '*1'* supplies the characters from the first pattern:
97.
*/C128
*P600
00600 They were known well in 1975, but not in 1866.
*S1')'/,')'/1')'/,$1'*3'*,'*2'*1'*1'*.$600
00600 They were known well in 1866, but not in 1975.
*/C64
*
Tposition,range
Transfers the specified range of lines so the first line
being transferred starts at the specified position. If a
line already exists at the specified position, EDIT creates
a line following it and tells you what increment it uses.
The user transfers line 300 to the line just after 100.
*T100,300
INC1=50
*
The lines are deleted from their previous position after
they are transferred.
Xrange
Allows you to eXtend the specified range of lines by
printing the line and then giving an Alter I command. If
you do not want the system to print the line number, add
the ,S specifier at the end of the command. The user adds
on to line 600.
*X600
00600 T3: MOVEM T1,REFPNT ;Place in REFPNT
*
?
Prints a list of all the EDIT commands.
@name.typ
Gives the commands stored in the specified file. When the
commands are processed, EDIT prints a message. The user
gives the commands in the file T.CMD.
*@T.CMD
%End of indirect file
*
You may set the following EDIT parameters with the / command and
examine them with the = command.
Table II-11
EDIT Parameters
Default
Name Set Print Value Function
. n y --- Indicates your current position
in the file.
? n y --- /? prints the names of
settable switches; =? prints
the names of printable
switches.
BAK y y on Causes creation of .Qxx backup
files rather than new
generations of the output file.
BIG n y --- Gives the largest page number.
C64 y CASE on Causes EDIT to use the standard
64-character set.
C128 y CASE off Causes EDIT to use the extended
128-character set.
CASE n CASE --- Prints information about the
character set, terminal
characteristics, and case.
DECIDE y y off Sets decide mode for S
commands.
ERROR n y --- Print last error message.
EXPERT y n off Sets expert mode, which gives
extended capabilities and
shorter error messages.
INCREMENT y y 100 Sets the default increment in
forming new line numbers.
INSERT y y --- Prints the location of the line
inserted by a I<CR> command.
ISAVE n y off Saves your file after you
have inserted n new lines,
n is a non-zero value of ISAVE.
LOCATION n y --- Prints the location of the
first line in the buffer.
You may "backup" to this
line without using any system
resources overhead.
LOWER y CASE off In C128 mode, forces all
characters you type to be
lowercase unless preceded by an
apostrophe. All uppercase
characters are flagged on
output.
NAME y y --- Specifies the output file.
NOBAK y BAK off Forces a new generation of the
output file rather than the
creation of a .Qxx backup file.
NODECIDE y DECIDE on Turns decide mode off.
NONSEPARATORS y CASE on Declares %,$,. are not
alphanumerics.
NONUMBER y n off Inhibits line number printing.
NOVICE y n on Sets normal mode.
NUMBER y n on Starts printing of line
numbers.
OLD y n off Creates a backup file (.Zxx) if
one does not exist.
OPTION y n --- Reads the SWITCH.INI file.
PLINES y y 16 Determines the number of lines
printed by P<RET>.
READONLY y n off Sets readonly mode; you cannot
change the file.
RUN y y LOAD Sets the program to be run when
you give a G command; normally
is your last LOAD-class
command.
SAVE n y off Causes EDIT to save your file
after you give every n
commands.
n is a non-zero value of SAVE.
SEPARATORS y n off Declares %,$,. are
alphanumeric.
SEQUENCE y n off Places line numbers
in the output file.
START y y 100 Sets the line number used to
start numbering files and
pages.
STRING n y --- Prints the current default
strings for F and S commands.
UNSEQUENCE y UNSEQUENCE off Removes line numbers from the
output file.
UPPER y CASE on In C128 mode, forces all
characters you type to be
uppercase unless preceded by
an apostrophe. All lowercase
characters are flagged on
output.
WINDOW y y 10 pages Sets the amount of memory
used to store the file while
you are editing. Increase this
value if you are reading a
file.
Characteristics
After the EDIT program has printed either Input:, Edit:, or
Read:, any program in memory is cleared and you are left at EDIT
command level or EDIT input level. To return to TOPS-20 command
level, press the ESC key, type E, and press the RETURN key.
Examples
The user creates a small file and replaces a line.
@CREATE (FILE) TEST.FIL
Input: TEST.FIL.1
00100 This file will contain three lines: line 100
00200 Line 300, and
00300 Line 300.
00400 $
*R200
00200 Line 200, and
1 LINE (00200/1) DELETED
*E
[TEST.FIL.1]
@
The user edits a text file to be used with the RUNOFF program.
@EDIT (FILE) NEWRUN.RNO
Edit: NEWRUN.RNO.3
*SLEVLE$LEVEL$500
00500 THE HEADER LEVEL COMMANDS ARE ALSO VERY USEFUL.
*E
[NEWRUN.RNO.4]
@
FORK command
Function
The FORK command specifies the process (fork) of your job to which
TOPS-20 commands referencing specific processes apply. It does not
create a process.
Format
@FORK (IS) identifier
where
identifier is the process number, an octal number between 1 and
777
or the process name
Special Cases
Fork 0
If you are a user with enabled Wheel privileges you can give
the command, FORK 0. This references the command processor
(EXEC) itself.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The FORK command does not affect memory and leaves your terminal at
TOPS-20 command level.
Related Commands
INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE for examining memory of the
current process
INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS for finding out the number and
status of each process in your
job
INFORMATION FORK-STATUS for finding out the name, number
and status of each process in
your job
KEEP for preserving a process while
other programs are run, and
resisting being RESET
UNKEEP allow a process to be removed
when another program is run
FREEZE stop the execution of a process
which is running in the
background
CONTINUE continue executing a process
optionally in the background
RESET clears a process from memory
and closes its files, if any
NAME give the current process a name
Examples
1. Make the second process or your job the current process.
@FORK 2
@
2. Find out which processes exist in your job (an arrow
(=>) indicates the current process). Look at memory for the
first process, then examine a particular location. Make the
second process current, and do the same thing there.
@INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS
Used 0:00:00 in 0:00:46
TOPS-20: 0:00:00.6
SET UUO-SIMULATION (FOR PROGRAM)
SET CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY (OF PROGRAM)
=>Fork 1: HALT at 16176, 0:00:00.3
Fork 2: HALT at 472052, 0:00:00.0
@INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE
176. pages, Entry vector loc 2061 len 3
0 PS:<NEXT-RELEASE>BASIC.EXE.2 1 R, CW, E
1 Private R, W, E
2-66 PS:<NEXT-RELEASE>BASIC.EXE.2 3-67 R, CW, E
70-73 PS:<NEXT-RELEASE>BASIC.EXE.2 70-73 R, CW, E
74 Private R, W, E
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
600-637 PS:<NEXT-RELEASE>BASOTS.EXE.2 105-144 R, CW, E
@EXAMINE 3500
3500/ 202200,1136
@FORK 2
@INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE
108. pages, Entry vector loc 401 len 24
0 Private R, W, E
3-4 Private R, W, E
100 Private R, W, E
436-437 Private R, W, E
440-526 FORK 1 440-526 R, CW, E
527 No page R, CW, E
.
.
.
.
.
640-767 No page R, CW, E
@EXAMINE 3500
3500/ 0
@
GET Command
Function
The GET command clears memory, then loads an executable program.
Format
@GET (PROGRAM) filespec/switch
where
filespec is the file specification of the file containing the
executable program. If you do not specify a type, the
system assumes it is .EXE.
switch is /USE-SECTION:n
Specifies the memory section (from 0 to 37 octal) into
which your program is to be loaded. You can use this
switch only if your program can be contained in one
section.
Hints
The only type of program that you may place in memory with the
aid of this command is an executable program. To produce an
executable program, first give the LOAD command to translate the
program and load it into memory, then give the SAVE command to
save the executable program in a file with the type .EXE. Thus,
you will normally specify a file with the type .EXE when you give
the GET command.
After issuing the GET command, you may start the program by
giving the START command. You may also merge another program in
memory by giving the MERGE command.
You can give an INFORMATION (ABOUT) MEMORY-USAGE command after
the GET command to find out which memory pages comprise the
program.
Operation
1. Type GET and press the ESC key; the system prints (PROGRAM).
@GET (PROGRAM)
2. Type (or use recognition on) the file specification; then
press the RETURN key. Once your program is in memory, the
system prints an @.
@GET (PROGRAM) RTRANS.EXE.1
@
Characteristics
The GET command:
Clears memory, then inserts a new program, thereby clearing
any previous program from memory.
Leaves your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Related Commands
INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE for examining the contents of memory
LOAD for loading a source or object program
into memory
MERGE for putting an executable program into
memory without first clearing memory
SAVE for storing a copy of the program in
memory in a file in executable format
START for starting the program in memory
Examples
The user places the program DIFFER.EXE.2 in memory.
@GET (PROGRAM) DIFFER.EXE.2
@
FILCOM Program
Function
The FILCOM program compares two files line by line and outputs
the differences between them.
Hints
With FILCOM you may compare both ASCII files (i.e., normal text
files and files containing source programs) and binary files
(i.e., relocatable binary files and save files). FILCOM compares
ASCII files line by line, but it compares binary files word by
word.
If you want to list a binary file, type the first input file
specification, but do not type a comma or the second input file
specification. Be sure that either the input file specification
has a standard binary type (listed in Table II-13) or that you
use the /W switch.
Special Cases
Binary files are compared word by word, starting at word 0, with
the following exception:
1. Files with file types .SAV, .LOW, and .SVE are assumed to be
executable files and are expanded before comparing.
Format
@FILCOM
*output.typ=input1.typ,input2.typ/switches
output.typ is the name and type of the file that will contain the
differences between the two input files.
If you do not give an output file name, FILCOM uses
the second input file name (input2). But, if you omit
the second input file name (refer to input2.typ), the
output file name becomes FILCOM. If you omit the
output file type, it is .SCM if the input files are
ASCII files, or else .BCM if the input files are
binary files. If you omit the output file
specification completely, the system uses TTY:.
input1.typ is the name and type of the first input file you want
to compare.
input2.typ is the name and type of the second input file you want
to compare.
If you omit the name of the second input file, FILCOM
uses the name of the first input file. If you omit
the type of the second input file, FILCOM uses the
type of the first input file. To explicitly indicate
a null type, type a period at the end of the second
input file name.
switches are the switches following the two input file
specifications. They control the method in which
FILCOM performs the comparison. All the valid
switches are listed in Table II-13.
If you do not use the /A, /W, or /X switch, FILCOM
chooses the mode of comparison by examining the type
of the input files. If either one (or both) of the
input files has one of the types listed below, the
files are compared in binary mode; otherwise they are
compared in ASCII mode.
Binary File Types
.BAC .HGH .RMT
.BIN .LOW .RTB
.BUG .MSB .SAV
.CAL .OVR .SFD
.CHN .QUE .SHR
.DAE .QUF .SVE
.DCR .REL .SYS
.DMP .RIM .UFD
.XPN
If a conflict arises in the absence of defaults or
switches, the files are assumed to be ordinary binary
files.
Table II-13
FILCOM Switches
Switch Comparison Function
/A ASCII only Compares the two input files in ASCII mode
(i.e., FILCOM treats both files as if they
contain ASCII characters). This switch is
useful when the file specifications do not
have standard file types. Refer to Appendix
B.
/B ASCII only Considers blank lines in the comparison;
otherwise blank lines are ignored.
/C ASCII only Ignores comments (all text on a line
following a semicolon) and spacing (spaces
and tabs). If one file has a line which is
entirely a comment and the position of that
line does not correspond to a comment line in
the other file, that line is output as a
difference between the two files.
/H ASCII and Prints a list of FILCOM switches on your
binary terminal.
/nL ASCII only Specifies the number of lines that terminate
a match. A match occurs when FILCOM finds n
successive lines that are the same in both
files. Once FILCOM finds a match, it prints
all the differences discovered since the last
match. Then, FILCOM prints the first line of
the current match so that you know where the
differences are located. If you do not give
this switch, FILCOM uses the value 3.
/nL Binary only The number n is an octal number which
specifies the lower limit where a partial
binary comparison will begin. If you also
use the /nU switch, FILCOM compares the files
only within these predefined limits.
/Q ASCII and Prohibits FILCOM from printing the
binary actual differences, only ?FILES ARE
DIFFERENT, if applicable. This switch is
useful when Batch control files want to test
for differences, but do not want the log file
filled with output.
/U ASCII only Compares the files in update mode. In update
mode, the output file is the second input
file with vertical bars inserted at the left
margin on lines that differ from the first
input file. This feature is useful when
updating a document because the changes made
to the latest edition are flagged with change
bars in the left margin. The latest edition
of the file must be typed as the second input
file.
/nU Binary only Specifies the upper limit where a partial
binary comparison will stop. n is an octal
number. Refer to the /L switch.
/W Binary only Compares the two files in binary mode without
expanding the files first. This switch is
used to compare two binary files that have
non-standard file types.
/X Binary only Expands executable (.SAV) files before
comparing them in binary mode. This switch
removes differences resulting from zero
compression.
Operation
1. Type the program name FILCOM, then press the RETURN key.
When the FILCOM program has started, it prints an asterisk on
your terminal.
@FILCOM
*
2. After the asterisk, type a command comprised of an output
file, an equals sign, two input files, and any necessary
switches. Press the RETURN key. When FILCOM is finished, it
prints a second asterisk. If the files are different, FILCOM
precedes the asterisk with the message %files are different
(if you used the /Q switch, the percent sign is replaced with
a question mark).
*DIFFER.FIL=EXPONT.1,EXPONT.2
%files are different
3. After FILCOM prints the second asterisk, you can give another
command to FILCOM. If you want to stop FILCOM, type a
CTRL/C.
*^C
@
Output
ASCII mode
The output file contains a header consisting of the device,
file name, type, and creation date of each input file. This
header is omitted if you are using update mode, that is, if
you have given the /U switch.
File 1) DSK:EXPONT.1 created: 1052 22-AUG-1975
File 2) DSK:EXPONT.2 created: 1155 22-AUG-1975
Each time FILCOM encounters differences, it outputs the
number of the file and its differences. At the end of the
differences, FILCOM prints a line that is common between the
two files. Then FILCOM prints four asterisks, the number of
the second file, and its differences. Finally, FILCOM prints
the common line and fourteen asterisks. Next, FILCOM prints
a second set of differences, and so forth until all
differences are printed. In the following example, file
EXPONT.1 contains the words corresponding to the numbers 1
through 10 and EXPONT.2 contains the words corresponding to
the numbers 1 through 10, but also includes the words
TWO-AND-A-HALF and NINE-AND-A-HALF. There are two
differences listed: the first one is TWO-AND-A-HALF,
occurring in EXPONT.2, the second one is NINE-AND-A-HALF,
occurring in EXPONT.2.
@FILCOM
*=EXPONT.1,EXPONT.2
File 1) DSK:EXPONT.1 created: 1700 25-SEPT-1975
File 2) DSK:EXPONT.2 created: 1618 25-SEPT-1975
1)1 THREE
****
2)1 TWO-AND-A-HALF
2) THREE
**************
1)1 TEN
****
2)1 NINE-AND-A-HALF
2) TEN
**************
%files are different
*
If you give the /U switch, the system prints the second file
with vertical bars beside any lines that differ from the
first file.
@FILCOM
*=EXPONT.1,EXPONT.2/U
ONE
TWO
! TWO-AND-A-HALF
THREE
FOUR
FIVE
SIX
SEVEN
EIGHT
NINE
! NINE-AND-A-HALF
! TEN
%files are different
*
Binary mode
The output file contains the same header, but FILCOM compares
the two files word by word. If there is a difference, it
prints the word from the first file, the word from the second
file, then the logical exclusive OR of the two words.
@FILCOM
*=A.REL,B.REL
File 1) DSK:A.REL created: 2221 07-SEPT-1975
File 2) DSK:B.REL created: 1712
25-SEPT-1975
000006 000005 000002 000001 000006 000004 000004
000007 200000 000000 240000 000000 040000 000000
%files are different
*
Characteristics
When you start FILCOM, any previous program is cleared from
memory and your terminal is at FILCOM command level. Type a
CTRL/C to return to TOPS-20 command level.
Restrictions
You may not use recognition input in typing a FILCOM command, and
you must use a project-programmer number to reference a file in
another user's directory. Refer to Section 5.3.1 and Section
5.10.
Examples
The user compares his two FORTRAN files and places the output in
the file NEW.SCM.
@FILCOM
*NEW=ROUND1.FOR,ROUND2.FOR
%files are different
*C
@
The user compares two text files, leaving change bars next to new
and changed lines. Blank lines are not ignored.
@FILCOM
*NEWDOC.TXT=DOC1.TXT,DOC2.TXT/U/B
%files are different
*^C
@
The user prints the contents of a binary file, SUBRTN.REL.
@FILCOM
*PFILE=SUBRTN.REL/B
%files are different
*^C
@PRINT PFILE.BCM
[LPT:PFILE=/SEQ:1023/LIMIT:176, 1 FILE]
@
FORDDT Program
Function
The FORTDDT program helps you debug FORTRAN programs.
Hints
Your object program must contain symbols to be successfully
debugged with FORDDT - do not begin your debugging session by
giving the switch /NOSYMBOLS.
Format
@DEBUG (FROM) /FORTRAN filespecs
FORTRAN: name
MAIN.
LINK: Loading
[LNKDEB FORDDT Execution]
STARTING FORTRAN DDT
>command
filespecs is a list of FORTRAN programs and
subroutines. If the files have the type
.FOR, you do not have to include the /FORTRAN
switch. If you want to use line numbers,
perform tracing, include array dimension
tracing, or examine DO loops, include /DEBUG
and /COMPILE switch in your LOAD-class
command.
command is any valid FORDDT command in Table II-14.
Table II-14
FORDDT Commands
ACCEPT variable/mode value
Changes the value of the specified variable. The mode
indicates the format you will use to type the value. Refer
to the following list of the valid modes.
Modes For ACCEPT Values
Mode Meaning Example
A Left-justified ASCII characters /MIXED/
enclosed in slashes. The
system accepts only the first
five characters.
C A complex number (two floating 1.25,79.01E-5
point numbers separated by
a comma).
D A double precision number. 6.2831853072
F A floating point number. 126.67
I An integer number. 68
O An octal number. 777777
R Right-justified ASCII \TRYIT\
characters enclosed
in backslashes. The system
accepts only the first
five characters.
S A symbolic value which uses PSI(M)
the current value of the
variables. If M=3, the system
uses the value of PSI(3).
CONTINUE n
Continues the execution of your program after encountering a
label at which you have set a pause. The execution
continues until the program finishes or encounters another
pause. If you want to ignore this pause a certain number of
times, include a number after the CONTINUE command. Then
the system resumes execution of the program until either it
encounters this pause n times or until it encounters a
different pause, whichever comes first.
GROUP n list
Sets up a string of variables which a TYPE command can refer
to by number rather than by name. For example, if you give
the command: GROUP 1 A,B,C, you can then give the command
TYPE 1 which is equivalent to TYPE A,B,C. The number n is a
group number from 1 to 8 and list is a list of variable
names separated by commas.
LOCATE symbol
Lists the modules in which a given symbol is defined. You
may then give the name of this module as an argument to an
OPEN command. The symbol n can be a variable, array,
statement label, followed by a line number, or FORMAT
statement number. If you want to locate a line number, be
sure to include a /DEBUG switch in the LOAD-class command
that loads the program.
MODE list
Defines the default formats in which FORDDT prints the
values of all variables. If you give more than one value,
they must be separated by commas. With more than one mode
set, the system types out the value of a variable once in
each mode. The modes are:
Mode Meaning
F Floating point
D Double precision
C Complex
I Integer
O Octal
A ASCII (left-justified)
R RASCI (right-justified)
For example, the command MODE F,A would cause the command
TYPE X to print the value of X in floating point format,
then in left-justified ASCII format.
OPEN name
Opens a subprogram so that you may manipulate the
subprogram's local variables. When you open a subprogram,
the main program or the subprogram you previously opened is
automatically closed; you may access only global variables
and those variables defined within the currently open
subprogram. If you do not specify a name, the system opens
the main program.
PAUSE label
Causes FORDDT to temporarily stop execution of your program
at the specified label. You may resume execution by giving
the CONTINUE command. You have up to 10 pauses set at one
time. The label may be a statement label, a followed by a
line number, or a routine entry point name. If you want to
pause at a line number, be sure to include a /DEBUG switch
in the LOAD-class command that loads the program.
REMOVE label
Removes a pause at the specified label. If you do not give
a label and type the complete command name, the system
removes all pauses. The label may be a statement label, a
followed by a line number, or a routine entry point name.
START label
Starts your program at the specified label which can be a
program name or a followed by a line number. If you do
not type a label (or if you type a program name), the system
starts execution at the beginning of the program. Once you
have started your program, you may return to FORDDT command
level by encountering a breakpoint or by typing two CTRL/Cs
followed by a DDT command. If you want to start at a line
number, be sure to include a /DEBUG switch in the LOAD-call
command that loads the program.
STOP
Terminates the execution of your program, closes all files,
and returns you to TOPS-20 command level.
TYPE list
Prints the value of one or more variable or array elements
on your terminal. The variable list is one or more variable
names, array names, or group numbers. You must precede a
group number with a slash. If you do not type any arguments
to the TYPE command, the system uses the arguments you gave
in the last TYPE command.
The MODE command determines how the values are printed; if
you do not give a MODE command, the system prints all values
in floating point form.
WHAT
Prints a list of groups and modes.
Operation
1. Type DEBU and press the ESC key; the system prints G (FROM).
@DEBUG (FROM)
2. If the source file specifications do not contain the file
type .FOR, type the /FORTRAN switch and leave a space;
otherwise, type (or use recognition on) the file
specification. Include the /DEBUG and /COMPILE switches if
they are necessary. The system will compile the sources (if
necessary), load them into memory along with FORDDT, then
transfer control to FORDDT.
@DEBUG (FROM) MORPAY
FORTRAN: MORPAY
MORPAY.
LINK: Loading
[LNKDEB FORDDT Execution]
STARTING FORTRAN DDT
>>
3. Once the system prints the double angle bracket, you are at
FORDDT command level and may give any of the commands listed
in the preceding table. In the example, the user gives the
START command which starts execution of his program.
>>START
Once you have started your program, you may return to FORDDT
command level by encountering a breakpoint or by typing two
CTRL/Cs followed by a DDT command.
Characteristics
The DEBUG command loads your FORTRAN program into memory along
with FORDDT, thereby clearing any program from memory. Your
terminal is left at FORDDT command level.
Restrictions
You may use FORDDT to debug only FORTRAN programs.
Examples
The user debugs his FORTRAN program.
@DEBUG (FROM) MORPAY !Load the program with FORDDT
LINK: Loading
[LNKDEB FORDDT Execution]
STARTING FORTRAN DDT
>> PAUSE 10 !Pause at statement 10
>> PAUSE 18 !and at statement 18
>>START !Start the program
How much is the loan? 2500. !Type an amount
What is the interest rate? 12. !Type an interest rate
How long (in years) is the loan? 2. !The loan duration
The monthly payment is: $ 117.6836900
[Interest factor: 21.1433850]
PAUSE AT 10 IN MAIN PROGRAM !Execution reached statment 10
>>CONTINUE !Continue execution
1 25.00 92.68 2407.32
PAUSE AT 18 IN MAIN PROGRAM !Now statement 18
>> REMOVE 10 !Remove the pause at 10
>> C !Abbreviated continue
2 24.07 93.61 2313.71
PAUSE AT 18 IN MAIN PROGRAM
>> TYPE BALANC !Type the value of balance
BALANC = 2313.706
>> TYPE PP !And the principal payment
PP = 93.61053
>> C !Continue execution
3 23.14 94.55 2219.16
PAUSE AT 18 IN MAIN PROGRAM
>> GROUP 1,BALANC,PP,I !Set up a group 1 containing
BALANC, PP, and I, the
payment number
>> MODE F,I !Set the mode as floating
point, then integer
>> PAUSE 18 TYPING 1 !Type the values in group 1
whenever the statement 18
is encountered
>> WHAT !Print the status of FORDDT
OPEN SECTION: MAIN PROGRAM
GROUP AFTER PAUSE
1 0 18
GROUP 1: BALANC,PP,I
NO ARRAY SPECIFICATIONS
>> C !Continue execution
4 22.19 95.49 2123.67
PAUSE AT 18 IN MAIN PROGRAM
BALANC = 2123.667
= 18860070242
PP = 95.49210
= 18219524006
I =
%FRSAPR Floating underflow PC= 407713
0.0000000
= 4 !When you print an integer
value such as I in a
floating point format.
FORDDT issues a warning
>> ACCEPT BALANC/F 0.0 !Change the floating point
value of BALANC to 0.
BALANC = 0.0000000
>> C !Continue execution
5 0.00 0.00 0.00
FINAL PAYMENT IS: $ 0.00
TOTAL PRINCIPAL IS: $ 376.33
TOTAL INTEREST IS: $ 94.40
THE END !The program ends
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME: 1.76 ELAPSED TIME: 12.72
EXIT
@
FORTRAN Compiler
Function
The FORTRAN compiler produces object programs from FORTRAN source
programs.
Hints
To run a FORTRAN program:
1. Enter your source program into a file (by using EDIT).
2. Give the EXECUTE command to compile, load, and start your
program.
Use the FORDDT program to debug FORTRAN programs.
If you have a main program and assorted subroutines that required
special loading, refer to Chapter 8 which describes the
LOAD-class commands.
Operation
1. Enter your program into a file using EDIT.
@CREATE (FILE) SMALL.FOR
Input: SMALL.FOR.1
00100 TYPE 101
00200 101 FORMAT (' THIS IS A MINI FORTRAN PROGRAM.')
00300 STOP
00400 END
00500 $
*E
[SMALL.FOR.1]
@
2. Compile, load, and start your program by giving the EXECUTE
command.
@EXECUTE (FROM) SMALL.FOR
FORTRAN: SMALL
MAIN.
LINK: Loading
[LNKXCT SMALL Execution]
THIS IS A MINI FORTRAN PROGRAM.
STOP
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME: 0.08 ELASPED TIME: 0.86
EXIT
@
Characteristics
The LOAD-class commands run the FORTRAN compiler to translate
your FORTRAN source program, thereby clearing any previous
program from memory. Depending on the operation you request,
your terminal may or may not be left at TOPS-20 command level.
Examples
The user executes a FORTRAN program.
@EXECUTE (FROM) ADDTWO.FOR !Give the EXECUTE command
FORTRAN: ADDTWO
MAIN.
LINK: Loading
[LNKXCT ADDTWO Execution]
TYPE TWO NUMBERS.
23 45 !Type two numbers
ADDING 23.0000000 TO 45.0000000 GIVES 68.0000000
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME: 0.13 ELAPSED TIME: 0.72
EXIT
@
The user compiles a FORTRAN program.
@COMPILE (FROM) MORPAY.FOR
FORTRAN: MORPAY
MAIN.
@
The user combines three source programs to produce one object
program (C.REL), then loads the object program into memory.
@LOAD (FROM) A+B+C
FORTRAN: A
MAIN.
LINK: Loading
EXIT
@
The user compiles a main program (COMP) and its two subroutines
(ADDEM and DIFFER), then loads them into memory and starts them.
@EXECUTE (FROM) COMP,ADDEM,DIFFER !Give the EXECUTE command
FORTRAN: COMP
MAIN.
FORTRAN: ADDEM
ADDEM
FORTRAN: DIFFER
DIFFER
LINK: Loading
[LNKXCT COMP Execution] !Execution starts
TYPE TWO NUMBERS: 78 56 !Type two numbers
THE SUM IS: 134.0000000
THE DIFFERENCE IS: 22.0000000
STOP
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME: 0.14 ELAPSED TIME: 0.63
EXIT
@
LOGOUT or BYE Command
Function
The LOGOUT or BYE command expunges deleted files in your
connected and logged-in directory, deletes all ;T (temporary)
files created during this session in your connected and logged-in
directories, decrements the mount count for any SMOUNT commands
you have given, checks disk storage allocation, ends your job and
prints a message. You may also log out another job as long as
it is logged in under your user name.
Format
@LOGOUT n
or
@BYE n
n is the job number of the job you want to log out. If you are
logging out your current job (as is the common case), do not
type a number. (specify n only when logging out a job other
than your attached job.
Operation
1. Type LOGO and press the ESC key; the system prints UT.
@LOGOUT
or type BY and press the ESC key; the system prints E.
2. To log out your current job, press the RETURN key. (If your
connected directory is over its disk storage allocation, the
system prints a message.)
@LOGOUT
KILLED JOB 13, USER LESTER, ACCOUNT 10563, TTY 45,
AT 16-JAN-76 20:03:01 USED 0:1:46 IN 3:44:12
3. If you are logging out another job, type the job number and
press the RETURN key.
@LOGOUT 23
@
Errors
1. If you try to log out another user's job, the system ignores
the LOGOUT command and prints the message:
?WHEEL OR OPERATOR CAPABILITY REQUIRED
2. If no user is logged in under that job number, the system
ignores the LOGOUT command and prints the message:
?THAT JOB DOES NOT EXIST
Output
System Use Under Current Account
The system acknowledges a valid LOGOUT command by printing your
job number, user name, current account, terminal number, and the
current date and time. Then it shows the total amount of CPU time
you used during the terminal session and the total amount of CPU
time used under the current account and the length of time you
were logged in under the current account and the length of time
you were logged in under this account.
If you exceed your permanent disk storage allocation, the system
prints the message:
<directory> OVER PERMANENT STORAGE ALLOCATION BY n PAGES
where directory is your logged-in directory and n is the number
of pages by which you exceeded your quota. You should log in and
delete and expunge enough files to get under quota. Before you
log out, you can give the INFORMATION (ABOUT) DISK-USAGE command
to find if you are over your allocation.
Characteristics
The LOGOUT or BYE command:
Clears any program from memory and expunges the deleted files
in your connected and logged-in directory, unless you are
logging out another job, in which case it leaves your
terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Terminates any ACCESS, CONNECT and SMOUNT commands you have
given throughout your job session.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The LOGOUT command clears memory and leaves your terminal in the
state before Log-in. LOGOUT n does not effect memory and leaves
your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Restrictions
You cannot log out another user's job.
You cannot give a job number when you are logging out your own
job.
Related Commands
DETACH for disengaging a job from your terminal without
ending the job.
LOGIN for beginning your timesharing job.
UNATTACH for disengaging a job from another terminal without ending the job.
Examples
The user logs out his own job, but is over his permanent disk
storage allocation by 5 pages.
@LOGOUT
<HARDING> OVER PERMANENT STORAGE ALLOCATION BY 5 PAGES.
KILLED JOB 36, USER HARDING, ACCOUNT 34, TTY 2,
AT 16-JAN-76 3:04:01 USED 0:0:23 IN 0:5:12
The user logs out job 34 which is logged in under his user name.
@LOGOUT 34
@
REMARK command
Function
The REMARK command tells the system to regard the terminal
input that follows as comment only.
Format
@REMARK (MODE)
Type remark. End with a CTRL/Z.
Characteristics
Ending Remarks
Until you give a CTRL/Z, the system merely displays what you
type instead of trying to interpret it as commands.
Hints
Useful During TALK or ADVISE Session
If you have already established contact with another user
by a TALK or Advise command before giving REMARK, his terminal
will also display what you type. Give the REMARK command
before sending lengthy comments or demonstrating commands that
you don't want to take effect.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The REMARK command does not affect memory and leaves your
terminal at remark level.
Related Commands
ADVISE for sending commands to another user's job
TALK for sending comments to another user
Examples
1. Give the REMARK command.
@REMARK
TYPE REMARK. END WITH CTRL/Z.
2. Receive a communication link from another
user. Give the REMARK command to speak with him.
Give a CTRL/Z afterwards to end the remarks.
@
LINK FROM J-BLOGGS, TTY127
@;WHAT DID YOU MAKE AT YOUR WORDWORK EVENING CLASS LAST NIGHT?
@REMARK
TYPE REMARK. END WITH CTRL/Z.
I MADE A PORTABLE.
;A PORTABLE WHAT?
I DON'T KNOW - I'VE ONLY MADE THE HANDLE...
;HA HA. ON YOUR BIKE...
@BREAK
^Z.
@
MACRO Assembler
Function
The MACRO assembler produces object programs from MACRO source
programs.
Hints
A program written in the MACRO assembly language may contain
machine language instructions, assembler pseudo-ops and monitor
calls.
To run a MACRO program:
1. Enter your source program into a file (usually you will use
EDIT),
2. Give the EXECUTE command to assemble, load and start your
program.
3. If you do not plan to make changes to the program (EDIT) and
plan to run the program often, use the LOAD, SAVE and RUN
commands instead of EXECUTE.
If you have a main program and assorted subroutines that require
special loading, refer to Chapter 8 which describes the
LOAD-class commands. Also refer to the description of the LINK
program.
The best way to produce a listing file for a MACRO program is to
give a LOAD-class command with the /CREF switch. In addition to
your relocatable binary program, the system then produces a file
with cross-reference information about symbols. Give the CREF
command to process this file and print it. Refer to the
examples.
Operation
1. Enter your program into a file using EDIT.
@CREATE (FILE) TEST1.MAC
Input: TEST1.MAC.1
00100 TITLE TEST1
00200 SEARCH MONSYM
00300 TEST1: RESET
00400 HRROI T1,[ASCIZ /This is only a test program!
00500 /]
00600 PSOUT
00700 HALTF
00800 END TEST1
00900 $
*E
[TEST1.MAC.1]
@
2. Compile, load, and start your program.
@EXECUTE (FROM) TEST1.MAC
MACRO: TEST1
LINK: Loading
[LNKXCT TEST1 EXECUTION]
THIS IS ONLY A TEST PROGRAM!
@
Characteristics
Giving a LOAD-class command to run a MACRO program clears any
previous program from memory and, depending on the command, may
or may not leave you at TOPS-20 command level.
Examples
The user compiles his MACRO program.
@COMPILE (FROM) VTED
MACRO: VTED
EXIT
@
The user compiles his program, producing a file that is used by
the CREF command to produce a cross-reference listing on the line
printer.
@COMPILE (FROM) /CREF INOUT
MACRO: INOUT
EXIT
@CREF !Give the CREF command
CREF: INOUT
@
The user compiles two files to produce one source program, then
loads it into memory.
@LOAD (FROM) DEFS+PROMPT
MACRO: PROMPT
LINK: Loading
EXIT
@
The user loads his main program (REINIT) and two subroutines
(MEMDMP and CONFIG) into memory, saves the resulting program,
then runs the program.
@LOAD (FROM) REINIT,MEMDMP,CONFIG
MACRO: REINIT
MACRO: MEMDMP
MACRO: CONFIG
LINK: Loading
EXIT
@SAVE
REINIT.EXE.1 SAVED
@RUN REINIT
NAME OF FILE TO INITIALIZE: SYMTAP.EXT.1 !NEW FILE!
CONFIGURATION COMPLETED.
ANOTHER FILE? NO
[DONE!]
@
MAIL Program
Function
The MAIL program sends a message (commonly referred to as mail)
to another user or group of users.
Special Cases
If you have not read a message that has been sent to you since
the last time you ran RDMAIL, the system prints the line:
YOU HAVE A MESSAGE
on your terminal whenever you log in to the system.
If you are logged in at the time someone sends you a message, the
system prints the following line on your terminal:
[YOU HAVE A MESSAGE FROM sender]
(If you are refusing links, the system does not print the above
message.)
If an important new message-of-the-day has been sent to SYSTEM
since you logged in, you are notified with the message:
[NEW MESSAGE-OF-THE-DAY AVAILABLE]
You can read the new SYSTEM message with the RDMAIL program.
Type /M to the DATE AND TIME prompt.
You can send MAIL to a directory called REMARKS. This directory
has been set up to receive complaints about any miscellaneous
system problems you may have (e.g., your terminal is not working
properly or you need paper supplies). The type of complaints
that are sent usually do not require an immediate response from
the operator.
If you have WHEEL or OPERATOR capabilities, you can also send
messages to SYSTEM. Sending a message to SYSTEM generates a new
message-of-the-day to all users. Type SYSTEM to the prompt TO:.
Note that SYSTEM and REMARKS are the only files-only directories
that will accept mail.
Hints
The RDMAIL program allows you to read new system messages and
mail sent to you by another user.
You can type a ? after any one of the queries (i.e., TO:, CC:,
SUBJECT:, and MESSAGE:) and the system prints a short summary of
what you are expected to type.
Normally if you have a list of users to whom you are sending
mail, you must type their user names on the line following TO:
or CC: (for copies to). But, if you have a long list of user
names you can enter them into an indirect file using EDIT. Then,
in the place of the user names, type an at-sign and type (or use
recognition on) the file name and file type. Refer to the second
example.
You can also send mail to yourself. A convenient time to use
this facility is when you are running a Batch job and want to
know when it is done. You can send a message to yourself by
including the MAIL program commands at the end of your Batch
control file. After the last command in the control file has
been executed, you are notified that you have a message in the
form:
[YOU HAVE A MESSAGE FROM sender]
Sender, in this case, is yourself. Run RDMAIL to read your
message. (Refer to Examples.)
Operation
1. Start the program by typing (or using recognition on) the
name MAIL, then press the RETURN key. The system leaves a
blank line and prints TO:
@MAIL
TO:
2. Type (or use recognition on) the list of user names;
separate them with commas. If you are using an indirect file
(i.e., you have stored the list of user names in a file),
type an @, then type (or use recognition on) the file name
and file type. The system then prints CC:.
TO: HURLEY,MILLER,MURPHY,@USERS.LST
CC:
3. Type or use recognition on the user names to whom you want to
send copies of the mail. You may use an indirect file here
also. The system prints SUBJECT:.
CC: @MEMOS.DIR
SUBJECT:
4. Type a one-line heading for the message and press the RETURN
key. The system prints the second line below that prompts
you for your message.
SUBJECT: SYSTEM CHARGES
MESSAGE (TERMINATE WITH ESC OR CTRL/Z):
5. Type the message; when you are finished, press the key
labeled ESC.
If you wish, you can type the message into a file; if you
have done so, at this time type an @ and the file name.
Then, press the RETURN key. If the mail gets sent without
any system errors, the system prints a three-line message
confirming that the mail was sent.
MESSAGE (TERMINATE WITH ESC OR ^Z):
would you please send the list of new system charges
to the project supervisors?
thanks.
$
PROCESSING MAIL...
NO ERRORS.
-DONE-
@
Errors
1. No user will receive more than one copy of the mail. Thus,
if you include a certain name once under the TO: and another
time under CC:, the system prints the message:
%DUPLICATE NAME PURGED - user name
and removes the duplicate name from the list of users who
will receive the mail.
2. If there is an error sending a message to a particular user,
the system prints the following error message:
user name NOT SENT reason
You should try to send the message again. If the second
attempt fails, contact the operator.
3. If you give a non-existent user name, the system ignores that
name and prints the message:
?ILLEGAL USER NAME - name
However, if you have sent mail to a list of users, the list
is printed with the illegal name deleted.
4. If the recipients' directory is over its working quota, the
system refuses to send the mail and prints the following
message.
user name NOT SENT QUOTA EXCEEDED
If the user is logged in, try using the TALK command.
Characteristics
After you start the MAIL program, any previous program is cleared
from memory and your terminal is left at MAIL command level.
Answer the questions, type your message, press the ESC key and
your terminal will be left at TOPS-20 command level. If you need
to return to TOPS-20 command level immediately, type a CTRL/C.
Restrictions
You cannot send mail to a files-only directory (other than SYSTEM
or REMARKS) or to a directory on a structure other than PS:.
Examples
The user sends mail to the users COHEN, BRUCKERT, and PORADA; a
copy is sent to user RICHER.
@MAIL
TO: COHEN, BRUCKERT, PORADA
CC: RICHER
SUBJECT: SYSTEM USERS
MESSAGE (TERMINATE WITH ESC OR CTRL/Z):
PLEASE INFORM ALL NEW USERS OF THE LOCATIONS OF THE TERMINAL
ROOMS AND THE HOURS OF THEIR OPERATION.
$
PROCESSING MAIL...
NO ERRORS.
-DONE-
@
The user sends mail to two users and a list of users stored in
the file REST.FIL. One user, WYMAN, occurs twice so the system
eliminates the redundancy.
@MAIL
TO: MCCARTHY, TOLMAN, @REST.FIL
CC: LEWINE, WYMAN
%DUPLICATE NAME PURGED - WYMAN
SUBJECT: MAINTENANCE
MESSAGE (TERMINATE WITH ESC OR CTRL/Z):
PLEASE BE ADVISED THAT THE SYSTEM WILL BE DOWN FROM 0100 TO
0300 FOR MAINTENANCE.
$
PROCESSING MAIL...
NO ERRORS.
-DONE-
@
The user sends a message stored in the file MACRO.CMD to the user
ALUSIC.
@MAIL
TO: ALUSIC
CC:
SUBJECT: MACRO FILES
MESSAGE (TERMINATE WITH ESC OR CTRL/Z):
@MACRO.CMD.1
PROCESSING MAIL...
NO ERRORS.
-DONE-
@
The user sends a message-of-the-day to all users of the system.
This user has WHEEL or OPERATOR capabilities enabled.
@MAIL
TO: SYSTEM
CC:
SUBJECT: NEW MANUALS
MESSAGE (TERMINATE WITH ESC OR CTRL/Z):
THE NEW DECSYSTEM-20 MANUALS WILL BE AVAILABLE IN MY OFFICE
AFTER 2:00 PM TODAY.
$
PROCESSING MAIL...
NO ERRORS
-DONE-
@
The user sends MAIL to REMARKS.
@MAIL
TO: REMARKS
CC:
SUBJECT: SUPPLIES
MESSAGE (TERMINATE WITH ESC OR CTRL/Z):
I NEED TWO BOXES OF TERMINAL
PAPER, SIZE 97/8 X 11.
$
PROCESSING MAIL...
NO ERRORS
-DONE-
@
The user sends a message to inform himself when his Batch job is done
by placing the MAIL commands in his control file. Note that he uses a
dot (or period) for the first program command TO:.
@CREATE (FILE) TEST.CTL
INPUT: TEST.CTL
00100 @FILCOM
00200 *TEST.FOR=DIFFER.FOR,ADDEM.FOR/A
00300 @PRINT TEST.FOR
00400 @MAIL
00500 *.
00600 *
00700 *BATCH JOB IS DONE
00800 *^Z
00900 $
*E
MAKLIB Program
Function
The MAKLIB program updates files containing one or more object
programs and manipulates the individual programs within these
files.
Hints
Languages that produce object programs are MACRO, FORTRAN, COBOL,
ALGOL, and BLISS-10.
A program can be complete, or can be just a set of subroutines.
One reason for collecting a group of object programs into one
file is to enable LINK to use the file as a library (see the LINK
Reference Manual). The updating process employs three files:
1. A master file containing the file to be updated,
2. A transaction file containing the object programs to be used
when updating, and
3. An output file containing the updated file.
All three files can be on the same device if it is DSK.
Format
@MAKLIB
*output dev:file.typ=master dev:file.typ/switch:(object-programs),
transaction dev:file.typ/switch:(object-programs)
output dev: is the device name or logical name to which
the updated file is written. If you omit the
device, MAKLIB assumes DSK: (currently
connected structure).
master dev: is the device name or logical name that
specifies the location of the file to be
updated. If you omit the device, MAKLIB
assumes DSK: (currently connected
structure). To separate the master file and
transaction file, use a comma.
transaction dev: is the device containing the object programs
that MAKLIB will use in updating.
Note that the default for the device is DSK:
(currently connected structure).
file.typ is the name and type of each file. You must
specify file names for directory devices, but
you may omit the types. If you omit a type,
MAKLIB assumes it is .REL unless you include
the /L switch in the command string. In this
case, MAKLIB assumes the output file type is
.LST.
Project-programmer numbers appearing after a
file name apply to that file only. If the
project-programmer number appears before the
file name, it applies to all subsequent files
until you specify another device.
MAKLIB gives the master file's protection
number to the output file.
You may use the asterisk wildcard character
in input file specifications.
(object-programs) are the names of programs that MAKLIB will
use in updating. Group these within
parentheses in the same order in which they
appear in the file, and separate them by
commas. While you are manipulating all the
programs in a file, you need specify only the
file name. You may not specify program names
for the output file.
/switch specifies a function you wish MAKLIB to
perform. Each function causes the updated
file to be output to the specified device.
Table II-17
MAKLIB Switches
/APPEND Appends the specified object programs in
the transaction file(s) to the master file,
and adds these programs to the end of the
output file.
/NOLOCAL Compresses the master file by deleting
local symbols. These symbols are included
in object programs primarily because they
are useful in debugging.
NOTE
Local symbols cannot be deleted
from .REL files; for these files,
the /NOLOCAL switch will be
ignored. Large libraries of
debugged routines, such as LIBOL,
frequently have the local symbols
deleted in order to save disk space
and reduce the amount of I/O
required during the loading
process.
/DELETE Deletes the specified object programs from
the master file.
/EXIT Returns you to TOPS-20 command level.
/EXTRACT Extracts the specified files and/or object
programs from the input files. If you do
not specify program names, MAKLIB extracts
the entire file.
/HELP Types the commands and switches available.
/INSERT Inserts object programs from the specified
transaction files into the master file.
MAKLIB inserts the programs in the
transaction files immediately before those
programs specified by /M in the master
file. A comma is used to separate the
transaction files.
/INDEX Writes index blocks into a library file on
disk. Indexes cannot be written on
magnetic tape. Index blocks are used in a
direct access library search. (See the
LINK Reference Manual)
/LIST Lists the names of the modules that are in
the MASTER file.
The name of the master file is the default
file name for spooled output.
/MASTER Specifies which programs in the master file
are to be used in inserting and replacing.
/POINTS Lists all the entry points within an object
program. These are listed across the page.
The name of the master file is the default
file name for the spooled output.
/REPLACE Replaces the specified object programs in
the master file with the specified object
programs in the transaction file. The
number of replacing programs must be the
same as the number of programs to be
replaced.
Operation
1. Type the program name MAKLIB, then press the RETURN key.
When the MAKLIB program has started, it prints the asterisk
prompt on your terminal.
@MAKLIB
*
2. After the asterisk, type a command comprised of an output
file, an equals sign, a master and file, any necessary
switch, a colon if the switch requires one, and any necessary
object programs followed by a comma. (If the switch you use
requires you to specify a transaction device, see the next
paragraph.) Then press the RETURN key. MAKLIB prints any
output your switch has requested: in this case, a list of
programs and their segment breaks. When MAKLIB is finished,
it prints a second asterisk.
*TTY:=TSTLB2/LIST
SORT 401745 007136
MAIN 000444 001400
TESTER 011473 001400
*
If you have used a switch that requires you to specify a
transaction device and/or file, continue your command by
typing this information after the comma; then type any
necessary switch, a colon if the switch requires one, and any
necessary object programs. Press the RETURN key. When
MAKLIB is finished, it prints a second asterisk.
*LIBRY=LIBRY/MAS:TESTER, TSTBL1/INSERT:DUMP
*
3. After MAKLIB prints the second asterisk, you can give another
command to MAKLIB. If you want to stop MAKLIB, type a
CTRL/C.
*^C
@
NOTE
To end a command line, press the RETURN key. To
continue the command on the next line, type a hyphen
on your current line and then press the RETURN key.
You may include comments on the MAKLIB command string by
preceding each comment with a semicolon. MAKLIB ignores all
characters after the semicolon--except for escape--until the
next line feed, vertical tab, or form feed character.
Characteristics
After you start the MAKLIB program, any previous program is
cleared from memory and your terminal is at MAKLIB command level.
Restrictions
The MAKLIB program does not allow you to use recognition input in
typing file specifications. File specifications may not contain
the characters -, $, or _ and the wildcard characters are * and
?. The comment character is ; instead of !. Refer to Chapter
5. To access a file in another user's directory, use a
project-programmer number. Refer to Section 5.3.1.
Examples
@MAKLIB
*TTY:=TSTLB2/LIST !List the programs in
!TSTLB2.REL on the terminal.
SORT 401745 007136
OVRLAY 402736 000544
MAIN 000444 001400
TESTER 011473 001400
*LIBRY=TSTLB2,POLSTR/APP:PS !Create a library containing
!TSTLB2.REL and the program PS
!from the file POLSTR.REL.
!List the contents of the
!library.
*TTY:=LIBRY/LIST
SORT 401745 007136
OVRLAY 402736 000544
MAIN 000444 001400
TESTER 011473 001400
PS 000414
*LIBRY=LIBRY/MAS:(SORT,MAIN),TSTBL1/REP:EDITOR,-
!Replace SORT with the program
!EDITOR and replace the program
!MAIN with the program INPUT.
!List the entry points in the
!new library.
POLSTR/REP:INPUT
*TTY:=LIBRY/POINTS
EDITOR
OVRLAY GETOV. INIOV. LOGOV. REMOV. RUNOV. .OVRLA .OVRLU
INPUT INPBYT INPUT STRING
TESTER TESTER
PS
*LIBRY=LIBRY/MAS:TESTER,TSTBL1/INSERT:DUMP
!Insert the program DUMP from
!the file TSTBL/-.REL into the
!library before TESTER.
*TTY:=LIBRY/LIST
EDITOR 000130
OVRLAY 402736 000544
INPUT 000043
DUMP 000206
TESTER 011473 001400
PS 000414
*LIBRY=LIBRY/DELETE:(EDITOR,OVRLAY,PS)
!Delete EDITOR, OVERLAY and
!PS. Delete local symbols.
!Index the library.
*LIBRY=LIBRY/NOLOC
*LIBRY=LIBRY/INDEX
*/EXIT
@
PLEASE Program
Function
The PLEASE program helps you communicate with the operator.
After starting the PLEASE program, you may communicate with the
operator in a two-way conversation.
Hints
To send a one-way message to the operator, type your message on a
line, but press the ESC key before you press the RETURN key. If
you use this method, you do not have to wait for the operator to
respond.
If you type CTRL/T while you are running the PLEASE program, the
system prints a message telling you where you are in the waiting
list. If the operator can service your request, the message
contains the text: You are the current user.
Operation
1. Start the program by typing PLEASE, then press the RETURN
key. The system prints WHAT IS THE OPERATOR'S ID?.
@PLEASE
WHAT IS THE OPERATOR'S ID?
2. Type the operator's identification. In many cases the
operator's ID is not required. In this case, simply type
PLEASE and a space and enter the text of your message. If
the operator's identification is required, it can be obtained
from the system manager or by contacting the operator in
person. Most of the time, just pressing the RETURN key will
link your terminal with the main operator's terminal. The
system prints ENTER TEXT:.
WHAT IS THE OPERATOR'S ID?
ENTER TEXT:
3. Type the message you want to send to the operator, ending the
first line by pressing the RETURN key. If the operator is
not busy, the system prints [OPERATOR HAS BEEN NOTIFIED];
otherwise it prints [OPERATOR IS BUSY. PLEASE WAIT.].
ENTER TEXT: HOW CAN I GET SOME MORE PAPER FOR MY TERMINAL?
[OPERATOR HAS BEEN NOTIFIED.]
4. If you get the message [OPERATOR HAS BEEN NOTIFIED.],
continue typing your message to the operator. Whatever you
type is printed on the operator's terminal, and whatever the
operator types is printed on your terminal.
When you are finished typing, press the ESC key. The system
prints [FINISHED AT hh:mm:ss], where hh:mm:ss is the current
time.
[OPERATOR HAS BEEN NOTIFIED.]
DID YOU LOOK IN THE STORAGE ROOM BEHIND YOU?
NO, WAIT A MINUTE I'LL SEE... OK THERE IS SOME,
THANKS.
$
[FINISHED AT 23:54:15]
@
5. If you get the message [OPERATOR IS BUSY. PLEASE WAIT.],
continue typing; your message is stored inside the system
until the operator is available. When the operator is
available, he receives your message and a two-way
communication, as described in step 4, starts. The system
prints [OPERATOR HAS BEEN NOTIFIED.] to tell you that you are
in two-way communication. When you are done, press the ESC
key. The system prints the FINISHED message.
[OPERATOR IS BUSY. PLEASE WAIT.]
[OPERATOR HAS BEEN NOTIFIED.]
I LOOKED IN THE SUPPLY ROOM NEAR THE WINDOW AND
THERE IS NO PAPER.
HI. SORRY FOR THE WAIT. DID YOU LOOK IN THE STORAGE ROOM
BEHIND YOU?
NO, WAIT A MINUTE AND I WILL. THANKS, ITS THERE. BYE.
$
[FINISHED AT 23:59:10]
@
6. If the program that the operator uses to service your request
is not running, you will get the message:
?OPERATOR JOB TO SERVICE PLEASE
REQUESTS IS NOT RUNNING
Exit the program by typing a CTRL/C and try again later.
Characteristics
After you start the PLEASE program, any previous program is
cleared from memory and your terminal is left at PLEASE command
level. Type your message and press the ESC key to finish; at
that time you are returned to TOPS-20 command level. If you must
return to TOPS-20 command level immediately, type a CTRL/C.
Examples
The user sends a message to the operator telling him that his
terminal needs a new ribbon.
@PLEASE
WHAT IS THE OPERATOR'S ID?
ENTER TEXT: COULD YOU INSTALL A NEW RIBBON IN TERMINAL S/N 64?
[OPERATOR HAS BEEN NOTIFIED]
OK, IN ABOUT AN HOUR.
THANKS$
[FINISHED AT 11:04:58]
@
REENTER Command
Function
The REENTER command runs the program in memory, starting it at
the reenter address specified within the entry vector.
Hints
The REENTER command provides an easy way for you to start a
program at a place other than the beginning.
Format
@REENTER (PROGRAM)
There are no arguments to the REENTER command.
Operation
1. Type REEN and press the ESC key; the system prints TER
(PROGRAM).
@REENTER (PROGRAM)
2. Press the RETURN key, the system restarts the program in
memory.
@REENTER (PROGRAM)
CLOSING ALL FILES.....
FINISHED.
@
Errors
1. If the program does not have a reenter address, the system
ignores the command and prints the message:
?NO REENTER ADDRESS
2. If you do not have a program in memory, the system ignores
the command and prints the message:
?NO PROGRAM
Characteristics
The REENTER command starts your program at the address specified
by the second word in the program's entry vector. For most programs
this address is contained in location 124. usually the REENTER and
START commands start the program at the same point, but another
re-entry point can be provided to avoid initialization procedure,
perform error recovery, or to use the program in a different way.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The REENTER command continues the program in memory at the
reentry address specified in its entry vector. Your terminal is
left under control of the program.
Related Commands
GET for placing an executable program in memory
LOAD for loading a source or object program into memory
START for entering a program at its normal entry point
Examples
The user starts BASIC, exits to command level, gives the DAYTIME
command, and REENTERs BASIC.
@BASIC
READY, FOR HELP TYPE HELP
MONITOR
@DAYTIME
Friday, JANUARY 16, 1976 11:10
@REENTER
READY
PUSH Command
Function
The PUSH command preserves the contents of memory at the current
command level and creates a new command level. After creating
the new command level the system prints a message and takes
commands from the file COMAND.CMD (if it exists).
Format
@PUSH (COMMAND LEVEL)
There are no arguments to the PUSH command.
Hints
You can type two CTRL/Cs to stop your program, then give a PUSH
command to create a new command level. Run programs to create
new files or perform other functions, then give a POP command to
return to the original command level. Then, if you give a
CONTINUE command, you will resume execution of your original
program.
The POP command performs the exact opposite function of the PUSH
command. The POP command terminates the current command level.
Using CONTINUE STAY With PUSH
You can use the PUSH command to run two programs at once or to
do other work that requires more than one copy of memory.
Simply use the CONTINUE STAY command to continue execution of
your current program before using PUSH. After PUSH you can run
another program or otherwise alter memory without affecting
memory for the first program. See Warning, below!
Restrictions
Number of Successive PUSH Commands
You can give as many pairs of PUSH & POP commands as necessary
to complete your task. Although there is a limit to the number
of times you can give PUSH without giving intervening POP
commands, this limit is large enough (c.24, although smaller for
a heavily loaded system) not to interfere with most applications
Witheld Log-out Capability
You can usually log out from a lower level of TOPS-20 than the
one to which you logged in. By doing so, you simultaneously
conclude all processes of your job. However, if a program
(e.g. PTYCON) has initialised a level of the TOPS-20 command
processor but has witheld log-out capability from it, you must
use the POP command, followed if necessary, by a program command
to exit from the program and return to a higher level of TOPS-20
before you can log out.
Warning
Competition Between Processes
If you have two programs running at once after using CONTINUE
STAY & PUSH commands, they may try to access the same files at
the same time. Or, TOPS-20 commands given at the lower level
may be intercepted by a program running at the higher level.
For a discussion of those possibilities, see the Restrictions
section of the CONTINUE command description.
Operation
1. Type PUSH and press the ESC key; the system prints (COMMAND
LEVEL).
@PUSH (COMMAND LEVEL)
2. Press the RETURN key; the system prints a message followed
by an @ when it has created a new command level.
@PUSH (COMMAND LEVEL)
TOPS-20 Command processor 2(236)
@
Errors
1. If another command level is not available from the system
resources, the system ignores your command and prints the
message:
?INSUFFICIENT RESOURCES AVAILABLE
Characteristics
The PUSH command preserves the contents of memory, and leaves
your terminal at a new TOPS-20 command level with a fresh copy of
memory. Give the POP command to terminate this new command level
and return to the old one, restoring the preserved contents of
memory. The POP command destroys the contents of the memory
associated with the TOPS-20 command level it terminates. You can
not retrieve its contents after giving a POP command.
Related Commands
CONTINUE STAY for beginning execution of a program before giving the
PUSH command
POP for returning to a previous level of TOPS-20
Examples
The user creates a new command level.
@PUSH (COMMAND LEVEL)
TOPS-20 Command processor 2(236)
@
RDMAIL Program
Function
The RDMAIL (for ReaDing MAIL) program prints any messages which
you have received.
Hints
If you have been sent a message since the last time you logged
in, the line:
YOU HAVE A MESSAGE
is printed when you log in to the system.
If someone sends you a message while you are logged in, the
system rings the terminal bell and prints the line:
[YOU HAVE A MESSAGE FROM sender]
on your terminal. If you are refusing links, you will not
receive this message.
If an important new system message of the day has been sent since
you logged in, you are notified with the message:
[NEW MESSAGE-OF-THE-DAY AVAILABLE]
You can read the new SYSTEM message with the RDMAIL program by
typing /M to the DATE AND TIME prompt.
To send a message, run the MAIL program.
Operation
1. Start the program by typing (or using recognition on) RDMAIL
and then press the RETURN key. The system prints DATE AND
TIME (/H FOR HELP).
@RDMAIL
DATE AND TIME (/H FOR HELP)
2. To receive all messages which you have not seen before, just
press the RETURN key. If you want to see all the messages
after a certain date and time, type the date and time in the
standard TOPS-20 format of month/day/yr hr:min (where the
time is in 24-hour format). If you type just the date, the
system uses a time of 00:01 to avoid any confusion of the
meaning of 0:0:0.
There are switches to perform special operations, which you
may type following the date and time. The switches and their
functions are outlined in Table II-19. If you omit the date
when giving a /M, /P, or /S switch the system uses only the
messages you have not read.
Table II-19
RDMAIL Switches
/A Prints all the messages, regardless of their
date.
/H Prints a message outlining the format for the
date and listing the explanations of the
switches.
/L Prints the messages on the line printer instead
of your terminal.
/M Instructs RDMAIL to look at the system
Message-of-the-day file (normally new entries
from it are printed on your terminal when you
log in), rather than your own message file.
/P Peruses your mail by inhibiting the printing of
each message; RDMAIL prints only the DATE:,
FROM:, TO:, CC:, and SUBJECT: lines.
/S Stops printing after each message. To make
RDMAIL continue, press the RETURN key.
You may add any switches together that you want; for instance,
/A/P lets you peruse all your messages.
After you type the date and time and/or any switches you want,
RDMAIL prints out the messages you requested.
DATE AND TIME (/H FOR HELP)
--------
DATE: 25-AUG-75 13:11
FROM: OPERATOR
TO: BOSACK
-----
SUBJECT: MAGNETIC TAPES
PLEASE REMOVE YOUR EXTRA MAGNETIC TAPES FROM THE OPERATOR'S TABLE
AS SOON AS YOU CAN.
========
@
Output
Each message starts with eight hyphens, then five hyphens precede
the subject line, and eight equals end the message.
Characteristics
When you run the RDMAIL program, any previous program is cleared
from memory and your terminal is left at RDMAIL command level.
Type the necessary RDMAIL command and your terminal will be left
at TOPS-20 command level. If you need to return to TOPS-20
command level immediately, type two CTRL/C's.
Examples
The user reads all his mail since 3PM today.
@RDMAIL
DATE AND TIME (/H FOR HELP) 25-AUG-75 15:00
--------
DATE: 25-AUG-75 15:32
FROM: SYSTEM-MANAGER
TO: BOSACK
CC: OPERATOR
-----
SUBJECT: YOUR MAGTAPES
PLEASE REMOVE YOUR MAGNETIC TAPES FROM THE OPERATOR'S TABLE
IMMEDIATELY.
========
@
The user reads the system message-of-the-day file, but only
those messages made on or after March 2, 1976.
@RDMAIL
DATE AND TIME (/H FOR HELP) 2-MAR-76 /M
--------
DATE: 2-MAR-76 13:11
FROM: IVAS
TO: SYSTEM
-----
SUBJECT: MULTIPLE GENERATIONS
PLEASE TRY TO KEEP ONLY ONE GENERATION
OF A FILE. THANKS.
========
@
START Command
Function
The START command starts the program currently in memory.
Format
@START (PROGRAM) location
where
location is the octal address where you want the program to
start
Default location - the normal starting address,
i.e. the first word in the
program's entry vector
Effect on Memory & Terminal
The START command starts the program in memory at the specified address,
and leaves your terminal at whatever mode the program puts it in.
Related Commands
CONTINUE for resuming execution of a halted program in memory
GET for placing executable programs in memory
LOAD for loading source or object programs into memory
REENTER for starting the program in memory at its alternative
entry point (if any)
SAVE for saving a loaded program in an .EXE file
Restrictions
You may not give a START command to restart a COBOL program after
it has already executed. To run it again, you must reload it.
Example
The user loads and starts his program. This example is
equivalent to the command EXECUTE (FROM) DUMPER.REL.
@LOAD (FROM) DUMPER.REL
LINK: Loading
EXIT
@START (PROGRAM)
DUMPER>
@
UNATTACH command
Function
The UNATTACH command, given at one terminal, disengages another job from
its terminal.
Format
@UNATTACH (USER) name (JOB #) number
Password: password
where
name is the user name of the job's number
number is the job number
Default number - the only job, or only job
besides your current (attached)
job, logged in under the user
name you give
password is the associated password (not requested if you are
currently logged in under the same user name as the job
that you are disengaging)
Characteristics
Log-in Not Necessary
You do not have to be logged in to give the UNATTACH command.
Hints
Freeing Hung Terminals
The UNATTACH command is useful for freeing a terminal that,
because of program of hardware errors, is no longer under
control of the user. The command UNATTACH n can be more
effectivwe than LOGOUT n for this purpose.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The UNATTACH command does not affect memory and leaves your own terminal
at TOPS-20 command level. The other job is left in its current state
(usually suspended) and the disengaged terminal is left in the state
before log-in.
Related Commands
ADVISE for sending commands to another job
ATTACH for joining another job to you terminal
DETACH for disengaging your own job from its terminal
Examples
1. Disengage another user's job from its terminal.
@UNATTACH A-MOLE
Password:
@
2. From a terminal on which you have not yet logged in, give the
UNATTACH command for two of them (you must specify a job number
for the first one so the system will know which one you mean),
and check them with another SYSTAT command.
@SYSTAT A-MOLE
28 26 EXEC A-MOLE
36* 230 EXEC A-MOLE
40 27 EXEC A-MOLE
@UNATTACH A-MOLE
[Attached to TTY26, confirm]
@UNATTACH A-MOLE
@SYSTAT A-MOLE
28 DET EXEC A-MOLE
36* 230 EXEC A-MOLE
40 DET EXEC A-MOLE
@
SET Command
Function
The SET command sets the value of various job parameters.
Hints
The INFORMATION command prints the values of many of the
parameters you can set with the SET command.
The TERMINAL command sets various terminal parameters which you
can examine with the INFORMATION (ABOUT) TERMINAL-MODE command.
Format
@SET argument(s) setting(s)
where
argument is a keyword from the list below.
setting is a word or number, required to complete the meaning
of most SET commands
Summary of SET Command Arguments
ACCOUNT ADDRESS-BREAK ALERT
AUTOMATIC CARD-READER-INPUT-SET COMMAND-TRACE
CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY DEFAULT DIRECTORY
ENTRY-VECTOR FILE INTEGER-VARIABLE
LATE-CLEAR-TYPEAHEAD LOCATION MAIL-WATCH
NO PAGE-ACCESS PROGRAM
RETRIEVAL-WAIT SESSION-REMARK SPOOLED-OUTPUT
STRING-VARIABLE TAPE TIME-LIMIT
TRAP TYPEOUT UUO-SIMULATION
Operation
1. Type SET and leave a space.
@SET
2. Type (or use recognition on) the rest of the arguments to the
SET command, then press the RETURN key.
@SET ACCOUNT (TO) 10400
Time used on previous account: 10300
0:00:57 in 4:31:08
@
Characteristics
The SET command does not change a program in memory and leaves
your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Examples
The user changes the protection of his files named TEST.
@SET FILE PROTECTION (OF FILES) TEST.* (TO) 775500
TEST.EXE.1 [OK]
TEST.MAC.1 [OK]
TEST.REL.1 [OK]
@
The user changes the default magnetic tape density to 1600 bpi.
@SET TAPE DENSITY (TO) 1600
@
The user changes his account number to 10500.
@SET ACCOUNT (TO) 10500
Time used on previous account: 10300
0:0:22 in 1:05:02
@
TRANSLATE Command
The command TRANSLATE has currently been removed from use as it has
became redundent. it will be incorporated again if the need arises.
However, the function and discription of the command is as below.
Function
The TRANSLATE command translates between directory names and
project-programmer numbers.
Format
@TRANSLATE (DIRECTORY) dev:<directory> or project-programmer-number
dev: is the file structure that contains the directory.
You do not need to specify the structure if the
currently connected structuure is used.
<directory> is the directory name or the project-programmer
number. If you type a directory name, the system
prints the corresponding project-programmer number.
If you type a project-programmer number, the system
prints the corresponding directory name.
You must include angle brackets around the directory
name. You can use recognition on directory names.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The TRANSLATE command does not effect memory and leaves your
terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Hints
Avoiding Project-programmer Numbers
To avoid project-programmer numbers, define a logical name
(of 6 or fewer characters) as the directory in question.
Then use this logical name in place of the directory
when giving file specifications. The system program will
accept the logical name as a device name, and will then
be using the correct directory.
Related Commands
DEFINE for defining a logical name as a directory, to
avoid using a project-programmer number.
Operation
1. Type TRANSLATE and press the ESC key; the system prints
(DIRECTORY).
@TRANSLATE (DIRECTORY)
2. Type (or use recognition) on the directory name or type the
project-programmer number and press the RETURN key. On the
following line, the system prints the corresponding
project-programmer number or directory name.
@TRANSLATE (DIRECTORY) PS:<FORTRAN>
PS:<FORTRAN> (IS) PS:[4,772]
3. You can translate directory names and project-programmer
numbers on different structures by including the structure
name with the directory name or project-programmer number.
@TRANSLATE (DIRECTORY) SNARK:<SARTINI>
SNARK:<SARTINI> (IS) SNARK:[4,23]
or
@TRANSLATE (DIRECTORY) SNARK:[4,23]
SNARK:[4,23] (IS) SNARK:<SARTINI>
Examples
The user translates the project-programmer number [4,226] to its
corresponding directory name.
@TRANSLATE (DIRECTORY) [4,226]
PS:[4,226] (IS) PS:<BROWN>
SET ACCOUNT Command
Function
Sets the account to charge for your use of the computer
and file storage.
Format
@SET ACCOUNT (TO) account (SESSION REMARK) remark
where
account may consist of up to 39 alphanumeric characters.
remark up to 1 line of text.
FREEZE command
Function
The FREEZE command stops a process (fork) which is running in the
background. It has the same effect as control-C does on your current
process. It may be continued with the CONTINUE command.
The FREEZE command does not reset a process.
Format
@FREEZE (FORK) identifier
where
identifier is the name of a fork
or
the number of the fork to be "frozen"
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The FREEZE command does not affect memory and leaves your terminal at
TOPS-20 command level.
Related Commands
INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE for examining memory of the
current process
INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS for finding out the number and
status of each process in your
job
INFORMATION FORK-STATUS for finding out the name, number
and status of each process in
your job
FORK Set the process which is to be
referenced by TOPS-20 commands
KEEP for preserving a process while
other programs are run, and
resisting being RESET
UNKEEP allow a process to be removed
when another program is run
CONTINUE continue executing a process
optionally in the background
RESET clears a process from memory
and closes its files, if any
NAME give a process a name
Example
@comPILE (FROM) john.mAC /stay
@MACRO: John
@iNFORMATION (ABOUT) foRK-STATUS
=> MACRO (1): Background, Running at SRCH3, 0:00:08.0
@freEZE (FORK) mACRO
@i fo
=> MACRO (1): Background, ^C from Running at MREADC, 0:00:08.1
@cONTINUE (FORK) mACRO
14:16:32 Running at GETCS3+2 Used 0:01:06.0 in 0:57:14, Load 4.46
:
:
SYSTAT Command
Function
The SYSTAT command prints information about the current state of
the system.
Format
@SYSTAT in-line subcommands (Refer to "Hints" section below)
OR
@SYSTAT,
@@subcommand
@@ .
.
.
where
@@ means that, after a comma, you can give one or more
@@ . subcommands on successive lines
.
.
subcommand is a keyword, chosen from the list below, indicating
your choice of SYSTAT command options
Defaults - as indicated
SYSTAT Command Subcommands
ALL gives all available SYSTAT information
CLASS prints the scheduler class in which each job is
running; the share of total CPU time allotted to the
job, expressed as a decimal fraction; & the fraction of
total CPU time actually used by the job. A job's actual
use may be larger than its allotted share if some jobs
in its class are inactive; it can be larger still if
other classes are inactive and this unused fraction of
CPU time is being allocated among active jobs.
CONTROLLING prints, in the column headed CJB, the number of the
controlling job (if any), i.e. a job owning a pseudo-
terminal that controls the job being described; when
used in a SYSTAT command requesting descriptions of
particular jobs, this subcommand causes jobs controlled
by these jobs to be described also.
DIRECTORY requests the name of the directory to which each job is
connected, if not the job's log-in directory.
HEADER calls for a headline identifying the columns of info
Default (unless you are requesting information
about specific users, jobs or lines
only; in such cases the default is NO
HEADER)
JOB n restricts output to description of job number n; can
be used more than once.
LIMIT prints any time limit set for each job
LINE octal line number or DETACHED
restricts output to description of the job attached to
the given line number, or to descriptions of all
detached jobs; cna be used more than once.
LPT send output to the line printer instead of to your
terminal
NO . (period) eliminates the indicated category of info, when used
CLASS with one of the kewords shown (. refers to your own
CONTROLLING job)
DIRECTORY
HEADER
LIMIT
OPERATOR
STATE
SYSTEM
TIME
WHAT
WHERE
WHO
OUTPUT filespec sends the output info to the file you specify, instead
of to your terminal
Default filespec - SYSTAT.LST
PROGRAM program name
Restricts SYSTAT output to descriptions of jobs
using the program (or TOPS-20 command)
specified. The argument you supply must be 6
or fewer characters.
STATE is the state of the user's job. It is either
running (RUN) or waiting for the user to type
some input on his terminal (TI).
SYSTEM begins output with system-wide info, i.e. the first 2
lines of regular output. If SYSTEM is the only sub-
command given SYSTAT output is restricted to this.
Default (unless you give subcommands requesting
information about specific users, jobs,
or lines only; in such cases the default
is NO SYSTEM.)
TIME is the total central processor time the job
has used.
USER user name is the name of the user under which the job
is logged in.
WHAT prints the name of the program that each job is
running; given explicitly only with subcommand NO, to
restrict SYSTAT output
Default
WHERE prints the line number associated with each job; given
explicitly only with the subcommand NO, to restrict
SYSTAT output
Default
WHO prints the user name under which each job is logged in;
given explicitly only with subcommand NO, to restrict
SYSTAT output
Default
Characteristics
The SYSTAT command does not change any program in memory and
leaves your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Log-in is not necessary to give the SYSTAT command.
Hints
Giving Subcommands as Arguments on tne Command line
To simplify typing, SYSTAT accepts subcommands as arguments
given on the same line as the command, subject to these rules:
There will be no @@ prompt: simply type a space between
successive subcommands & between subcommand names &
arguments.
To get info about 1 or more specific job numbers, give
the numbers only; do not type JOB.
To get info about 1 or more specific user names, give
the names only; do not type USER. If the user name
coincides with a SYSTAT argument, you must use the
subcommand mode to request info about his job.
To get info about 1 or more specific log-in directories
give the directory name
To get info about your own (attached) job only, give
a period (.) as argument.
To get info about all other jobs logged in under your
user name, give your user name and NO . as arguments.
The system will not accept the OUTPUT subcommand in this
format; use the subcommand mode instead.
Examples
The user prints all the information about the user EIBEN.
@SYSTAT EIBEN ALL
2 3 TV TI 0:05:51 EIBEN, <1EIBEN>
24 7 107 STATUS RUN 0:00:03 0:20:01 EIBEN
@
The user gives the SYSTAT command without any arguments.
@SYSTAT
WED 4-FEB-76 10:56:10 UP 1:34:36
16+5 JOBS LOAD AV 2.57 1.69 1.29
JOB LINE PROGRAM USER
2 3 EXEC EIBEN
4 14 EXEC MILLER
9 41 FORTRA EKLUND
10 43 EXEC POTTINGER
11 32 EXEC CLARK
12 73 EXEC BROWNE
13 50 EXEC CONNOR
14 4 EXEC NOT LOGGED IN
15 15 EXEC KIRSCHEN
16 61 EXEC EDU-SERV
19* 110 EXEC MCKIE
20 74 PTYCON LIEMAN
21 23 PTYCON MCKIE
22 115 EXEC LIEMAN
23 114 EXEC LIEMAN
24 107 STATUS EIBEN
25 10 EXEC LEWINE
1 101 EXEC OPERATOR
3 106 EXEC OPERATOR
5 105 OPLEAS OPERATOR
6 103 LPTSPL OPERATOR
7 104 BATCON OPERATOR
@
TYPE Command
Function
The TYPE command prints the contents of a file(s) on your
terminal.
Format
@TYPE (FILE) filespecs
filespecs is a single file specification or a string of file
specifications (separated by commas) that indicate
the files you want printed on your terminal.
Output
Entire Contents of Files
In responce to the TYPE command the system prints entire contents
of a file (up to the EOF (end-of-file) pointer), including blank
lines and line numbers if there are any. If you specify more than
one file, the filespec precedes the contents of each file.
Hints
The TYPE command is useful for quickly examining the contents of
a file, although printing an entire file may become tiresome. In
the latter case, use the PRINT command to send the output to the
line printer which operates at a much higher speed.
Stopping TYPE output
If you want to stop the printing of a file, type two CTRL/Cs.
A CTRL/O will also stop the output, but will not stop the
processing of the command or the output, but will not stop
the processing of the command or the acumulation of CPU
charges. Note that a pair of CTRL/Os causes the system to
skip over part of the output and continue printing.
Operation
1. Type TYPE and press the ESC key; the system prints (FILE).
@TYPE (FILE)
2. Type (or use recognition on) the file specifications, then
press the RETURN key. The system prints the file(s) on your
terminal.
@TYPE (FILE) TRANSL.MAC.5
;<MCKIE>TRANSL.MAC.5, 2-OCT-75 09:46:48, Edit by MCKIE
TITLE TRANSLATE
COMMENT \
1. Translates a <directory> into a [ppn] and indicates if it
is files only, or
2. Tr ^O...
@
Output
If you type more than one file with a single TYPE command, the
system prints the proper file specification followed by a blank
line, before it prints the file.
Characteristics
The TYPE command does not change any program in memory and leaves
your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Examples
The user prints the files ONE.FIL and TWO.FIL.
@TYPE (FILE) ONE.FIL,TWO.FIL.1
ONE.FIL.1
THIS FILE HAS JUST ONE LINE!
TWO.FIL.1
THIS FILE IS A LITTLE BIT BIGGER;
IT HAS TWO LINES
@
SET TRAP FILE-OPENINGS Command
Function
@SET TRAP FILE-OPENINGS
Sends a message to your terminal when any
program attempts to open a file. Check with
INFO PROGRAM-STATUS.
@SET NO TRAP FILE-OPENINGS
Nullifies the effects of the SET TRAP FILE-
OPENINGS command, disabling the TOPS-20 feature
that causes you to be notified when a program
tries to open a file.
Default
UNLOAD Command
Function
The UNLOAD command rewinds a magnetic tape until it is completely
on the source reel, and puts the associated tape drive off line
Use UNLOAD only for tapes mounted on drives having device names
of the foem MTAn:.
Format
@UNLOAD (DEVICE) dev:
dev: is the magnetic tape device name in the form MTAn:
where n is the drive number.
Restrictions
Unload With Open Files
If you have given a CTRL/C to exit from a program that has opened
a magnetic tape drive and you then gave the UNLOAD command for
that tape drive, the system will first ask if you want to close
the associated file. You must do so for UNLOAD to succeed, but
you will probably be unable to continue the program from that
point because the file will now be closed.
Tape Drive Only
The UNLOAD command works only for magnetic tapes.
Warning
Cannot Access Tape again
The UNLOAD command makes it impossible to access the tape unless
it is reloaded by the operator.
Operation
1. Type UNLO and press the ESC key; the system prints AD
(DEVICE).
@UNLOAD (DEVICE)
2. Type the magnetic tape device name followed by a colon and
press the RETURN key. The system prints an @ when the tape
is unloaded.
@UNLOAD (DEVICE) MTA0:
@
Errors
1. If the device is not on line, the system ignores the command
and prints the message:
?Device is not on-line
Use the PLEASE program to contact the operator, then reissue
the command.
2. If you type a CTRL/C to exit from a program that has opened
the magnetic tape drive, and then you give the UNLOAD
command, the system prints the following message:
?Device MTAn: open on JFN m
%Close JFN? YES
If you answer YES (or just press the RETURN key), the system
closes the file, prints a confirming message, unloads the
tape, and leaves you at TOPS-20 command level. Continuing
the program that previously opened the magnetic tape may
produce an error because the file has been closed.
@UNLOAD (DEVICE) MTA1:
?Device MTA1: open on JFN 3
%Close JFN? YES
3 MTA1: [OK]
@
If you answer NO, the system prints the message ?Command
aborted... and does not close the file or unload the tape.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The UNLOAD command does not change any program in memory and
leaves your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Related Commands
DISMOUNT for unloading tapes mounted on devices of the form MTn:
REWIND for rewinding a mag tape volume or tape set to its load
point (logical beginning)
Examples
The user unloads his tape on drive 3.
@UNLOAD (DEVICE) MTA3:
@
VDIRECTORY Command
Function
The VDIRECTORY (for verbose directory) command prints the file
specification, protection number, number of pages, number of
bytes (including byte size), and date and time the file was most
recently written.
Format
@VDIRECTORY (OF FILES) filespecs
filespecs is a list of the file specifications about which
you want the information. If you omit the file
specifications, the system prints information
about all the files in your connected directory.
Hints
Giving the VDIRECTORY command is exactly like giving the
DIRECTORY command with the subcommands LENGTH, NO HEADING,
PROTECTION, SIZE, and TIMES (AND DATES OF) WRITE.
Refer to the DIRECTORY command for more information; you can
give any of the DIRECTORY subcommands with VDIRECTORY.
Operation
1. Type VDIR and press the ESC key; the system prints ECTORY
(OF FILES).
@VDIRECTORY (OF FILES)
2. Type (or use recognition on) the file specifications; then
press the RETURN key. The system prints the directory
information.
@VDIRECTORY (OF FILES) EDIT
<MCKIE>
EDIT.EXE.1;P777752 61 31232(36) 17-NOV-75 16:32:48
@
Output
The system lists the files in alphabetical order. The following
information is listed for each file:
1. Name, type, generation number,
2. Protection code,
3. Size (in pages),
4. Length (in bytes) and byte size (in parentheses), and
5. The date and time the file was last written,
6. A line summarizing the total size (in pages) and number of
the listed files.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The VDIRECTORY command does not change a program in memory and
leaves your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Examples
The user obtains the information about all his files with the
name DUMPER.
@VDIRECTORY (OF FILES) DUMPER
<MCKIE>
DUMPER.MEM.2;P777752 5 12658(7) 6-NOV-75 20:28:49
.RNO.2;P777752 5 2389(36) 27-JUL-66 05:00:00
.TXT.4;P777752 4 9672(7) 6-NOV-75 19:18:30
TOTAL OF 14 PAGES IN 3 FILES
@
SET ADDRESS-BREAK Command
Function
@SET ADDRESS-BREAK octal or symbolic memory location,
causes the program in memory to be suspended and
@@AFTER n a message to be printed on your terminal when
@@ALL the memory location you specify is referenced
@@EXECUTE for the indicated operation - execute, read,
@@NONE write, or any of these (ALL). With the AFTER
@@READ subcommand you determine how many times it must
@@WRITE be referenced before the address break occurs;
with NONE you cancel address breaks for the
specified location, just as with the SET NO
ADDRESS-BREAK command. Each SET ADDRESS-BREAK
command cancels any previous address break.
Check your current address break with
INFORMATION ADDRESS-BREAK.
Default subcommands - ALL, and AFTER 1
Operation
@SET ADDRESS-BREAK (AT) ? Location on which to break
@SET ADDRESS-BREAK (AT) 1627 ? Confirm with carriage return or comma to enter su
bcommands
@SET ADDRESS-BREAK (AT) 1627 ,
@@? confirm with carriage return
or one of the following:
AFTER ALL EXECUTE NONE READ WRITE
DDT Program
Function
The DDT program helps you debug your program by providing
commands which control the execution of a program, without
reassembling or recompiling the source program.
Hints
To use DDT, you must first load your object program into memory,
then transfer control to DDT. There are three ways of doing
this. The first method entails giving the DEBUG command which
produces an up-to-date object program, loads it into memory, then
starts DDT. (Remember to give the /DDT switch if your file type
is other than .ALG, .FAI, .MAC, or .SAI.).
@DEBUG (FROM) TEST.MAC
MACRO: TEST
LINK: Loading
[LNKDEB DDT EXECUTION]
DDT
The second method entails loading an object program into memory,
then giving the DDT command.
@LOAD (FROM) TEST.MAC
LINK: Loading
EXIT
@DDT
DDT
The third method entails placing an .EXE file in memory, then
giving the DDT command.
@GET (PROGRAM) TEST.EXE
@DDT
DDT
In all cases, once the system prints DDT, you may give any DDT
command.
You may use DDT to change the contents of an executable program.
To do this, place the program in memory, make the changes using
DDt, then save the altered program in a file. You may also save
a program with breakpoints. Refer to the examples.
Operation
The following pages contain a brief description of how to use
DDT. You may give any of these commands after you have loaded
your program with DDT using one of the methods described in the
previous paragraph.
Opening The Symbol Table - name$:
To open the symbol table of the program or module you are
debugging, type the name, press the ESC key and type a colon. If
DDT can find the symbol table, the system prints a tab; if it
cannot find the symbol table, it prints a U. This should be the
first DDT command you give.
TRANSL$:
The name is the name following the TITLE statement in a MACRO
program or a FORTRAN SUBROUTINE or FUNCTION statement.
Examining Storage Words - location/ , <TAB>, <LF>, ^, =
To print the contents of a location in memory, type the location
and a slash. The system prints the contents preceded and
followed by tabs. A variable "location" can be a variety of
things including a symbol name such as PNTUSR, . (an
abbreviation for the current position), a symbol name and an
offset such as PNTUSR 5 (the offset is an octal number), or an
octal value such as 453.
PNTUSR/ MOVE 1,6
U
If the system prints a U, it cannot find
the symbol name. Check your spelling of
the symbol. You must retype the
instruction and the symbol. After the U
is printed, DDT has forgotten everything
you typed to DDT since the last
characters DDT typed out. For example,
if you type MOVE A, and A is undefined,
which causes DDT to type U, and you
meant to type MOVE B, you will have to
retype MOVE.
If you want to examine the contents of the address part (right
half) of an instruction, press the TAB key. The system prints
the contents of that location and it becomes your current
location.
INFIL/ HRROI T1,MESAGE <TAB>
MESAGE/ 64252,,252634
To examine the next location, press the LINEFEED key:
MESAGE/ 64252,,252634 <LF>
MESAGE+1/ 65242,,115622
To examine the previous location, type an up-arrow:
MESAGE+1/65242,,115622 ^
MESAGE/ 64252,,252634
To print the octal half-words corresponding to the current
symbolic instruction, type an equals sign:
INFIL/ HRROI T1,MESAGE =561040,,640
Changing Typeout Modes - $$C, $$F, $$T, $$nO, $$S
You may change the typeout mode to print numeric constants ($$C),
floating-point numbers ($$F), ASCII text ($$T), SIXBIT text
($$6T), and n-bit bytes ($$nO). DDT initially prints the
symbolic instruction associated with each memory location you
examine. If you change the typeout mode, you can return to this
initial state by typing $$S ($ means press the ESC key, not type
a dollar-sign). The $$C command prints numbers in the current
radix; if you want to change the current radix, type $$nR where
n is a decimal number specifying the radix you want.
$$C USRFLG/ 600000
$$10R USRFLG/ 196608.
$$F STRSWT/ 45.599999
$$T PRMPT/ .SPAC
$$6T P6BIT/ .HL 4
$$7O PRMPT/ 56,123,120,101,103,0
$$S RTRANS+23/ PUSHJ P,MESOUT
To reprint the current line in the new mode, type a semicolon.
$$C USRFLG/ 600000 $$10R;196608.
Modifying Storage Words
Once you have examined a storage word, you can change its
contents by typing its new contents, and pressing the RETURN key.
To enter Type
An octal number - 23 The octal number -23
A decimal number - 109 The decimal number, followed
by a decimal point - 109.
Floating point number - The floating point number,
.0078 optionally in E-notation:
7.8E-3, or .0078.
ASCII text - HELLO a double quote, a delimiter,
the text, the same delimiter -
"/HELLO/. The delimiter
may be any character not in
the text.
An instruction - The instruction - MOVEI T2,4
MOVEI T2,4
Setting And Removing Breakpoints - location$B, $nB/ , 0$nB
Once you have started your program, you may want to stop at a
particular location. Type two CTRL/Cs and give the DDT command.
If you have not already opened the symbol table, open it, Next,
set a breakpoint at that location by typing the location,
pressing the ESC key and typing a B. The system prints a tab
when the breakpoint is set.
TRANSL+34$B
Whenever, during execution, your program encounters an
instruction where you have set a breakpoint, the system prints
the number of the breakpoint, two greater-than signs and the
location. The system has not executed the instruction containing
the breakpoint. To proceed from the breakpoint, type $P.
$1B>>TRANSL+34 $P
While at a breakpoint, you may examine storage words, set and
remove breakpoints, and change the contents of memory.
Each time you assign a breakpoint, the system assigns it a
number. You can find out what location each breakpoint is set at
by pressing the ESC key, typing the number of the breakpoint,
typing a B and pressing the slash key.
$1B/ TRANSL+34
To remove a breakpoint, type a 0, press the ESC key, type the
number of the breakpoint and type a B. The system prints a tab.
The next example shows how to remove breakpoint 1.
0$1B
Controlling Execution - $$G, $X, $$X, $P, n$P
To start your program, press the ESC key twice and type a G. DDT
starts your program and its execution continues until it has a
fatal error, the program terminates, or until it reaches a
breakpoint instruction.
$$G
INPUT FILE: TEST1.FIL
$1B>>TRANSL+34
To continue from a breakpoint, press the ESC key and type a P.
Execution resumes until the program finishes, encounters an
irrecoverable error, or reaches a breakpoint. If you want to
procede through the breakpoint a number of times and stop the nth
time the breakpoint is encountered, type n$P instead of just $P.
$1B>>TRANSL+34 5$P
OUTPUT FILE: TEST2.DAT
$3B>>DATA5
To proceed through your program statement-by statement, press the
ESC key and type an X. The system executes the instruction,
prints the results of the instruction and prints the contents of
the next instruction to be executed and stops.
$3B>>DATA5 ./ PUSHJ P,PUTCHR $X
<JMP>
GETCHR/ MOVE GETPNT
To proceed through an entire subroutine, press the ESC key twice
and type an X.
$3B>>DATA5 $$X
DATA5+1/ CAIN C,N
Leaving DDT - CTRL/Z
To halt the debugging session, type a CTRL/Z to return to command
level. You may continue DDT by giving the CONTINUE command. If
you want to save your program with the modifications you have
made, give the system command SAVE.
Characteristics
After you start DDT, your terminal is at DDT command level. Type
a CTRL/Z to return to TOPS-20 command level.
Examples
The user debugs a MACRO program. Refer to Section 2.2.5 of the
Monitor Calls Reference Manual.
@LOAD (FROM) FILEIO.MAC !Load the program into memory
MACRO: FILEIO
LINK: Loading
EXIT
@SAVE !Save it for reference
FILEIO.EXE.1 SAVED
@DDT !Start DDT
DDT
FILEIO$: !Open the symbol table
OUTFIL$B LOOP$B DONE$B !Set breakpoints at the
!labels OUTFIL, LOOP, and DONE
$$G !Start the program
INPUT FILE: T.FIL !Type the input file name
$1B>>OUTFIL !Execution stops at the first
!breakpoint you hit
./ HRROI 1,ZAP+12 !Examine this location, it
!contains an instruction
<TAB> !Press the TAB key to look at
!the location ZAP+12
ZAP+12/ 64251,,752650 !It must contain text
$$T !Tell DDT to print ASCII
!characters
./ !Check this location again
OUT <LF> !It contains a new line and OUT
!Examine the next location by
!pressing the LF key
ZAP+13/ PUT F <LF> !And the following location
ZAP+14/ ILE:
OUTFIL/ "R@ !Look at the contents of OUTFIL
$$S !But change to symbolic
!instruction printout
./ HRROI 1,ZAP+12 !And look again
$P !Let the program continue
!execution
OUTPUT FILE: O.FIL !Type the output file
$2B>>LOOP !Execution stops at the next
!breakpoint
$X !Execute the instruction at the
!current location - the system
1/ 5 INJFN/ 5 !prints the results
LOOP+1/ BIN $X !Execute this instruction
LOOP+2/ JUMPE 2,DONE =322100,,203
!Print the contents
!of this location in octal
!numbers
$X !Then execute the instruction
2/ 15 DONE
LOOP+3/ MOVE 1,OUTJFN $X
1/ 6 OUTJFN/ 6
LOOP+4/ BOUT
$1B/ OUTFIL !Find the location of the first
!breakpoint
$2B/ LOOP !And the location of the second
0$2B !Remove the breakpoint at LOOP
$P !And continue execution
$3B>>DONE !Execution stops at the last
!breakpoint
JRST CLOSIF$X !Execute this instruction and
!continue
[DONE]
@
The user places an executable program in memory, changes an
instruction, then saves the altered program.
@GET (PROGRAM) RTRANS
@DDT
DDT
RTRANS$: PUTTAB/ MOVE PT,PDLEN MOVEM PT,PDLEN
^Z
@SAVE
RTRANS.EXE.2 SAVED
@
The user places an executable program in memory, sets a
breakpoint, then saves the program. Whenever the program
encounters the breakpoint, it will stop and wait for a $P.
@GET (PROGRAM) RTRANS
@DDT
DDT
RTRANS$: COMDSP$B ^Z
@SAVE
RTRANS.EXE.3 SAVED
@
Archiving files
---------------
The archiving system is a method of storing files which are not used
very often on tape, allowing them to be retrieved easily for use when needed.
Archiving a file removes the file from disk, but leaves an entry in your
directory describing the file. Thus, only one simple command is needed to get
a disk copy of the file back.
N O T E
Archiving is intended only for files whose contents will not change.
Once archived on tape, a file cannot be altered in any way. If your files
do not fit this category, they are not suitable for archiving.
In the following list of commands, "file-names" stands for a single
file name, or a wilcard filename (eg *.DAT, A*.TXT), or a list of names.
To archive a file, or group of files:
@ARCHIVE file-names
To get the files back:
@RETRIEVE file-names
You will be notified by electronic mail when the files are
placed on disk. Depending on the workload, it may take minutes to hours to do.
Files are not retrieved outside normal office hours.
To find out what state your archive requests are in:
@INFORMATION ARCHIVE-STATUS file-names
This tells you which files have been archived, which files have
been requested for archive but not yet done, and which files are in the process
of being archived. There is a time lag of one to two weeks between an archive
request and the eventual disappearance of the file to tape.
To get a directory of your archived files:
@DIRECTORY file-names ,
@@ARCHIVE (files only)
@@
Archived files normally do not appear in a directory listing.
If the file is on tape, the word ;OFFLINE will appear after the name. If you
currently have a copy of the file on disk, this will not appear after the name.
To delete a disk copy of an archived file:
@DELETE file-names,
@@CONTENTS-ONLY
@@
This leaves the copy on the tape. It just removes the disk copy.
The system will not let you do this until the file is properly archived.
To really delete an archived file (when, for instance, you realise
the information it contains will never be any use again):
@DELETE file-names,
@@ARCHIVE (files included)
@@
The operating system will send you mail when you delete an archived
file telling you what tapes the file is on and where. This still allows
the file to be restored with the DUMPER program if you wish, although the
RETRIEVE command no longer functions.
Two copies of each archived file are made on separate tapes, to guard
against the possibility of accidental erasure or destruction of a tape. Thus,
archiving is a very secure and automatic system for file storage on tape.
For shorter term storage of files, or to store files that may need
to be modified, COLLECTION is more useful. We will be implementing this
in the near future at the CRC, at which time more info will be provided.
RDIRECTORY Command - defined locally at CRC using PCL
Function
The RDIRECTORY (for read directory) command prints the file
specification, the number of pages, and the date and time the file
was most recently read.
Format
@RDIRECTORY (OF FILES BY TIME OF READ) filespecs
filespecs is a list of the file specifications about which
you want the information. If you omit the file
specifications, the system prints information
about all the files in your connected directory.
Operation
1. Type RD and press the ESC key; the system prints IRECTORY
(OF FILES BY TIME OF READ).
@RDIRECTORY (OF FILES BY TIME OF READ) TEST*.*
2. Type (or use recognition on) the file specifications; then
press the RETURN key. The system prints the rdirectory
information:-
PS:<A-MOLE>
PGS READ
TEST.FOR.100030 1 14-Aug-83 11:54:21
TEST.LBR.100016;T 1 25-Sep-85 10:32:51
Total of 2 pages in 2 files
@
Output
The system lists the files in reverse chronological order ( i.e. the most
recently-read files appear first ). The following
information is listed for each file:
1. Name, type, generation number
2. Size (in pages)
3. The date and time the file was last read
4. A line summarizing the total size (in pages) and number of
the listed files.
Characteristics
The RDIRECTORY command does not change a program in memory and
leaves your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
The RDIRECTORY command does NOT support the use of sub-commands,
i.e.:-
@RD,,
?Not confirmed - ",,"
@
DAYTIME Command
Function
The DAYTIME command prints the day, date, and time on your
terminal.
Format
@DAYTIME
There are no arguments to the DAYTIME command.
Operation
1. Type DA and press the ESC key; the system prints YTIME.
@DAYTIME
2. Press the RETURN key; the system prints the day, date and
time.
@DAYTIME
FRIDAY, JANUARY 16, 1976 9:10:06
@
Characteristics
The DAYTIME command;
Does not require you to be logged-in to the system.
Does not change a program in memory.
Leaves your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Example
The user finds the day date and time.
@DAYTIME
FRIDAY, JANUARY 16, 1976 9:11:05
@
BLANK Command
Function
The BLANK command clears your video terminal screen. It has no effect
on a hard copy terminal.
Format
@BLANK (SCREEN)
@
Characteristics
This command moves the cursor to line 1 or the screen, providing you
with a clean area for typing commands and receiving system output.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The BLANK command does not affect memory and leaves your terminal at
TOPS-20 command level.
WDIRECTORY Command - defined locally at CRC using PCL
Function
The WDIRECTORY (for write directory) command prints the file
specification, the number of pages, the date and time the file
was most recently written, the name of the file creator, and
the name of the most recent writer.
Format
@WDIRECTORY (OF FILES BY TIME OF WRITE) filespecs
filespecs is a list of the file specifications about which
you want the information. If you omit the file
specifications, the system prints information
about all the files in your connected directory.
Operation
1. Type WD and press the ESC key; the system prints IRECTORY
(OF FILES BY TIME OF WRITE).
@WDIRECTORY (OF FILES BY TIME OF WRITE) TEST*.*
2. Type (or use recognition on) the file specifications; then
press the RETURN key. The system prints the wdirectory
information:-
PS:<J-BLOGGS>
PGS Write Creator Writer
TEST.COM.100034 1 25-Sep-85 12:01:12 J-BLOGGS J-BLOGGS
TEST.FOR.100030 1 14-Aug-83 11:54:21 OPERATOR J-BLOGGS
TEST.LBR.100016;T 1 25-Sep-85 10:32:51 J-BLOGGS A-MOLE
Total of 3 pages in 3 files
@
Output
The system lists the files in reverse chronological order ( i.e. the most
recently-written files appear first ). The following
information is listed for each file:
1. Name, type, generation number
2. Size (in pages)
3. The date and time the file was last written
4. The file creator
5. The most-recent file writer
6. A line summarizing the total size (in pages) and number of
the listed files.
Characteristics
The WDIRECTORY command does not change a program in memory and
leaves your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
The WDIRECTORY command does NOT support the use of sub-commands,
i.e.:-
@WD,,
?Not confirmed - ",,"
@
DETACH command
Function
The DETACH command disengages your current job from your terminal.
Format
@DETACH (AND) argument
where
argument can be one of these:
CONTINUE - directs the current program
to proceed, just as if you
had typed the CONTINUE
command
REENTER - reenters the current program,
just as if you had typed the
REENTER command
START - starts the current program,
just as if you had typed the
START command
Defaulting "argument" leaves the
program in its present state
(usually suspended)
Characteristics
Effects of Detached Jobs
Detached jobs use scarce system resources (e.g., swapping
space, process slots, job slots) and can prevent new users
from logging in.
Warning
Programs Writing to the Controlling Terminal (Device TTY:)
If a program running in a detached job attempts to write to
device TTY:, the job will wait until it is again attached to
a terminal.
Effect on Memory, Job, and Terminal
The DETACH command affects your job according to the argument you
select, and leaves your terminal disengaged from the system in
the state before log-in. It does not affect memory for the
detached job.
Related Commands
ATTACH for joining a detached job to your terminal
SYSTAT for finding out which jobs are detached
SUBMIT for running independant jobs
UNATTACH for disengaging another job from its terminal
Examples
1. Detach your job.
@DETACH
Detaching job 16
2. Detach your job while starting the program in memory, then
log in again.
@DETACH START
Detaching job 29
RETURN
Clinical Research Centre 2060 (V5.1), TOPS-20 MONITOR 5.1(5746)
Type HELP & press RETURN if you are unsure how to proceed.
@LOGIN (USER) J-BLOGGS (PASSWORD)
Job 22 on TTY44 24-Sep-85 10:09:14
@
3. Log in and put a program in memory; detach the job while
starting this program, and repeat the entire procedure. Log
in a third time and begin execution of a third program.
Interrupt this execution with CTRL/C, then detach this third
job while continuing theprogram. Now you have three jobs
running at once. Instead of loggin again, attach the
first job (specifying the job number) and verify the system's
action.
RETURN
Clinical Research Centre 2060 (V5.1), TOPS-20 MONITOR 5.1(5746)
Type HELP & press RETURN if you are unsure how to proceed.
@LOGIN (USER) J-BLOGGS (PASSWORD)
Job 5 on TTY230 24-Sep-85 10:09:14
@GET PSTAT8
@DETACH START
Detaching job 5
RETURN
Clinical Research Centre 2060 (V5.1), TOPS-20 MONITOR 5.1(5746)
Type HELP & press RETURN if you are unsure how to proceed.
@LOGIN (USER) J-BLOGGS (PASSWORD)
Job 22 on TTY222 24-Sep-85 10:13:14
@GET MYTEST
@DETACH START
Detaching job 22
RETURN
Clinical Research Centre 2060 (V5.1), TOPS-20 MONITOR 5.1(5746)
Type HELP & press RETURN if you are unsure how to proceed.
@LOGIN (USER) J-BLOGGS (PASSWORD)
Job 53 on TTY222 24-Sep-85 10:15:14
@EXECUTE MYTEST
FORTRAN: MYTEST
MAIN.
LINK: Loading
[LNKXCT MYTEST Execution]
^C
@DETACH CONTINUE
Detaching job 53
RETURN
Clinical Research Centre 2060 (V5.1), TOPS-20 MONITOR 5.1(5746)
Type HELP & press RETURN if you are unsure how to proceed.
@ATTACH J-BLOGGS
?Job number required - J-BLOGGS has more than one detached job
@ATTACH J-BLOGGS 5
Password:
Exit
@INFORMATION JOB
Job 5, User J-BLOGGS, Account CRC, TTY222
@SYSTAT J-BLOGGS
5* 222 EXEC J-BLOGGS
22 DET MYTEST J-BLOGGS
53 DET MYTEST J-BLOGGS
@
SET SESSION-REMARK Command
Function
@SET SESSION-REMARK remark
Lets you insert a note or reminder of up to 39
characters into system accounting data. Check
with INFO JOB-STATUS
ENABLE command
Function
The ENABLE command activates any special capabilities,such as
those of Wheel or Operator, that the system manager has given
you.
Format
@ENABLE (CAPABILITIES)
$
Characteristics
Dollar Sign Prompt
The ENABLE command causes the system to print a dollar sign
prompt ($), indicating enabled capabilities, in place of the
standard at sign prompt (@). The dollar sign prompt is
printed after ENABLE even if you have not been granted any
capabilities.
Capabilities of Log-in Directory Only
The ENABLE command activates only these capabilities that
have been granted to the owner of your log-in directory.
You do not receive any capabilities as a result of CONNECT
or ACCESS commands or group memberships.
Special Cases
Dollar Sign Prompt in Batch Jobs
Because a dollar sign placed in the location of a TOPS-20
prompt could be confused with a batch command, the system
precedes the enabled prompt with a space for batch jobs.
Warning
Disabling Capabilities Promptly
Because your commands are much more powerful if you have
capabilities enabled, you should disable them as soon as you
have finished using them. Otherwise you or a program that
you run could accidentally damage the system.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The ENABLE command does not affect memory and leaves your
terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Related Commands
DISABLE for suspending any capabilities that the system
manager has given you
INFORMATION DIRECTORY for finding out which capabilities, if
any, have been granted to the owner of
a directory.
Examples
1. Enable your capabilities.
@ENABLE
$
RESET Command
Function
The RESET command clears the contents of memory. By clearing the
momory all the current process and all inferior process are terminated.
Format
@RESET (FORK) argument
Where argument is one of the following :-
RETURN key to reset all processes for which the KEEP command has
not been given
* to reset all processes, including those for which the
KEEP command has been given
. to reset the current process, even if "kept"
Fork name to reset a specific process, even if "kept"
Fork number to reset a specific process, even if "kept"
Special Cases
The RESET command closes files that are open and still mapped
into memory.
If you try to expunge a file that is mapped into memory (you can
find this out by giving the INFORMATION command with
MEMORY-STATUS parameter), the expunge will not succeed unless you
give a RESET command first.
Hints
The RESET command does not deassign any input-output devices
which are assigned to your job, nor does it change any logical
name assignments.
Operation
1. Type RESE and press the ESC key; the system prints T (FORK). Press
the RETURN key; when your memory is reset the system prints
an @.
@RESET (FORK)
@
Characteristics
The RESET command clears memory for the current process and leaves your
terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Related Commands
INFORMATION FILE-STATUS for determining which files are
currently open
INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE for determining contents of memory
Examples
The user clears memory and checks the contents of memory.
@RESET (FORK)
@INFORMATION (ABOUT) MEMORY-USAGE
No program
@
QDIRECTORY Command - defined locally at CRC using PCL
Function
The QDIRECTORY command prints the deleted file specification,
protection number, number of pages, number of bytes (including byte
size), and date and time the file was most recently written.
Format
@QDIRECTORY (OF DELETED FILES) filespecs
filespecs is a list of the deleted file specifications about which
you want the information. If you omit the deleted file
specifications, the system prints information
about all the deleted files in your connected directory.
Warning
The QDIRECTORY command gives information about DELETED files only. If
the connected directory has been expunged, then the deleted files cannot
be listed using the QDIRECTORY command.
Operation
1. Type Q and press the ESC key; the system prints DIRECTORY
(OF DELETED FILES).
@QDIRECTORY (OF DELETED FILES)
2. Type (or use recognition on) the file specifications; then
press the RETURN key. The system prints the directory
information.
@QDIRECTORY (OF DELETED FILES) EDIT
<MCKIE>
EDIT.EXE.1;P777752 61 31232(36) 17-NOV-75 16:32:48
@
Output
The system lists the files in alphabetical order. The following
information is listed for each file:
1. Name, type, generation number,
2. Protection code,
3. Size (in pages),
4. Length (in bytes) and byte size (in parentheses), and
5. The date and time the file was last written,
Characteristics
The QDIRECTORY command does not change a program in memory and
leaves your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Examples
The user obtains the information about all his files with the
name DUMPER.
@QDIRECTORY (OF DELETED FILES) DUMPER
<MCKIE>
DUMPER.MEM.2;P777752 5 12658(7) 6-NOV-75 20:28:49
.RNO.2;P777752 5 2389(36) 27-JUL-66 05:00:00
.TXT.4;P777752 4 9672(7) 6-NOV-75 19:18:30
@
RUN Command
Function
The RUN command places in memory and starts an executable program.
Format
@RUN (PROGRAM) filespec/switch
where
filespec is the file specification of any executable program
Default dev:<dir> - DSK:
Default .typ - .EXE
/switch is /USE-SECTION:n
specifies the memory section (from 0 to 37
octal) in which your program is to run. You
can use this switch pnly if your program can
be contained in one section.
Hint
It is possible to be able to run your own programs just by typing the
program name (i.e. without using the RUN command). This is achieved
by including the following line in your LOGIN.CMD & BATCH.CMD files:
DEFINE SYS: SYS:,DSK:
Characteristics
Efficiency of RUN
The RUN command does the work of the pair of commands GET &
START. It is a faster & less expensive means of executing
programs that EXECUTE, or than LOAD & START. Therefore you
should store frequently-run programs in .EXE files & run them
with this command.
Effect on Memory & Terminal
The RUN command terminates the current process & clears its memory,
places in memory & starts the specified program, & leaves your terminal
at command level in the program (if any), or at TOPS-20 command level.
Related Commands
EXECUTE for running source or object programs
GET for placing an executable program in memory
R for running executable programs stored on SYS:
SAVE for saving a program in executable (.EXE) format
START for starting the program currently in memory
Example
Run one of your executable programs
@RUN TESTF1.EXE
ACCESS Command
Function
The ACCESS command obtains ownership rights to a directory and the
group rights of its user-group list
Format
@ACCESS (TO DIRECTORY) dev:<directory>
PASSWORD:password
@
where
dev: is the name of the file structure that contains
the directory you are accessing. The ACCESS
command will only accept a file structure name in
the dev: field.
Default dev: - your connected structure
<directory> is the name of the directory you are accessing.
The brackets must be included in directory names.
You can use recognition provided you type the
left angle bracket.
Default <directory> - the directory (on the specified
structure) of the same name as
your connected directory
password is the password of the directory you wish to
access. The password is not required if you own
the directory (you own a directory if your user
name is the same as the directory name), or if
the directory protection allows you access
without giving a password.
Hints
Your currently connected directory and structure do not change.
In addition to the owner privileges you are granted for the
directory you are ACCESSing, you are also considered to be a
member of the same groups as the real owner of the directory.
To ACCESS a directory on another structure, you should have mounted
it with the MOUNT STRUCTURE command first.
Operation
1. Type ACC and press the ESC key. The system prints ESS (TO
DIRECTORY) .
@ACCESS (TO DIRECTORY)
2. Type the file structure name and a colon. (You do not have
to type the file structure name if the directory you are
accessing is located on your currently connected structure.)
3. Type (or use recognition on) the directory name. Press the
RETURN key. The system prints PASSWORD: on the next line.
@ACCESS (TO DIRECTORY) ACCTG:<ESTEY>
PASSWORD:
4. Type the password and press the RETURN key. (If you own the
directory or if the directory protection gives you the proper
access, you do not have to give a password; just press the
RETURN key.) When the ACCESS command succeeds, the system
prints an @ on your terminal.
@ACCESS (TO DIRECTORY) ACCTG:<ESTEY>
PASSWORD:
@
Errors
1. If you do not enter the correct password, the system pauses
and prints the message:
?INVALID PASSWORD
and cancels the command. You should obtain the correct
password and reissue the command.
2. If you did not give the SMOUNT command before the ACCESS
command and you specify a non-existent file structure or a
file structure that is not on line, the system prints the
message:
?STRUCTURE IS NOT MOUNTED
and cancels the command. Check to see if you entered the
correct structure name first, i.e., spelling. Then, if you
have, give the MOUNT STRUCTURE command to request that the structure
be put on line.
3. If you enter the structure name in an incorrect format, the
system responds:
?INVALID STRUCTURE NAME
Perhaps you have omitted the brackets in the directory name
or the colon after the structure name.
4. If you give a non-existent directory name, the system prints
the message:
?NO SUCH DIRECTORY
and cancels the command.
5. If you attempt to given an ACCESS command to a files-only
directory, the system responds:
?DIRECTORY IS "FILES-ONLY" AND CANNOT BE ACCESSED
If you require ownership privileges to that directory, use
the CONNECT command.
Characteristics
The ACCESS command:
Leaves your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Does not change any program in memory.
Owner and group privileges gained through the ACCESS command
remain in effect until you log out, the structure is dismounted
or you give the ACCESS command to a different directory on the
same structure or you use the END-ACCESS command.
Restrictions
You can only give the ACCESS command to user directories. If you
require owner access to files-only directories, use the CONNECT
command.
If you access another directory on the public structure you give up
your own group rights on the public structure. These are restored
when you give an ACCESS command for your log-in directory.
Related Commands
CONNECT for making a directory your connected directory
END-ACCESS for surrendering rights to an accessed directory
MOUNT STRUCTURE for making a structure available for access, and
ensuring the continued availability of an
accessed structure
Examples
The user accesses the directory <ESTEY> on his currently
connected structure.
@ACCESS (TO DIRECTORY) <ESTEY>
PASSWORD:
The user accesses directory <SMITH> on file structure ACCTG:. He
type ACC, leaves a space, types ACCTG:<SMITH>, and presses the
RETURN key. On the next line, the user then types the password.
@ACC ACCTG:<SMITH>
PASSWORD:
The user gives the ACCESS command followed by his directory name,
(here it is <MCELMOYLE>) to eliminate his group privileges for a
previously accessed directory.
@ACCESS (TO DIRECTORY) <MCELMOYLE>
@
BACKSPACE Command
Function
The BACKSPACE command moves a magnetic tape backward over a
specified number of files or records.
Hints
Remember to assign the tape drive to your job and have the
operator load your tape.
Be sure you have the correct tape parameter set (check them with
the INFORMATION (ABOUT) TAPE-PARAMETERS command); if necessary,
give the SET TAPE command.
Format
@BACKSPACE (DEVICE) dev: n units
dev: specifies the magnetic tape you want to backspace.
The device name is in the form MTAn: where n is
the drive number.
n is the number of files or records over which you
want to backspace.
Default n - 1
units is either FILES or RECORDS.
Default units - FILES
Operation
1. Type BACK and press the ESC key; the system prints
SPACE (DEVICE).
@BACKSPACE (DEVICE)
2. Type the device name and leave a space.
@BACKSPACE (DEVICE) MTA2:
If the device is not a magnetic tape, the system ignores the
command and prints the message:
?dev: Device is not a magtape
where dev: is the device name you typed.
If you typed a non-existent device, the system ignores the
command and prints the message:
?No such device
3. Type the number of files or records and leave a space.
@BACKSPACE (DEVICE) MTA1: 5
If you type a number greater than 67777777777(octal), the
system ignores the command and prints the message:
?NUMBER OUT OF RANGE
4. Type (or use recognition on) the word FILES or RECORDS and
press the RETURN key.
@BACKSPACE (DEVICE) MTA1: 5 FILES
@
Errors
1. If the device is not on line, the system ignores the command
and prints the message:
?Device is not on-line
2. If a tape is not mounted on the drive, the system may print
the message:
?Device or data error
Use the PLEASE program to contact the operator, then reissue
the command.
3. If you type a CTRL/C to exit from a program that has opened
the magnetic tape drive, and then give the BACKSPACE command,
the system prints the following message:
?Device MTAn: open on JFN m
%Close JFN? YES
If you answer YES (or just press the RETURN key), the system
closes the file, prints a confirming message, backspaces the
tape, and leaves you at TOPS-20 command level. Continuing
the program that previously opened the magnetic tape may
produce an error because the file has been closed.
@BACKSPACE (DEVICE) MTA1: 3 FILES
?Device MTA1: open on JFN 3
%Close JFN? YES
3 MTA1: [OK]
@
If you answer NO, the system prints the message ?Command
aborted... and does not close the file or backspace the
tape.
RECORDS Argument Used for Unlabeled Tapes Only
You cannot BACKSPACE RECORDS on a labeled tape, because read and write
operations for labeled tapes always move the tape to the beginning of
a file first.
Characteristics
The BACKSPACE command does not change any program in memory and
leaves your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Restrictions
The BACKSPACE command works only for magnetic tapes.
Related Commands
SKIP for moving a mag tape set forward
REWIND for backspacing a tape volume or tape set to its
logical beginning (the beginning of the first file)
Examples
The user backspaces his tape 3 files.
@BACKSPACE (DEVICE) MTA2: 3 FILES
@
The user backspaces MTA0: 5 records.
@BACKSPACE (DEVICE) MTA0: 5 RECORDS
@
ASSIGN Command
Function
The ASSIGN command allocates an input-output (I/O) device for the
exclusive use of your job. Your job retains control over the
device until you give a DEASSIGN command or until you log off the
system.
Hints
Before giving an ASSIGN command, give the INFORMATION (ABOUT)
AVAILABLE DEVICES command to obtain a list of the available
devices. After selecting an available device, give the ASSIGN
command to allocate that device to your job.
You can give a second INFORMATION (ABOUT) AVAILABLE DEVICES
command to confirm that the device has been assigned to your job.
Use the DEFINE command to assign a logical name to a device.
Format
@ASSIGN (DEVICE) dev:
dev: specifies the device that you want to assign. The
standard input/output devices and their device names are
listed in Table 5-1.
Operation
1. Type ASSI and press the ESC key; the system prints GN
(DEVICE).
@ASSIGN (DEVICE)
2. Type the name of the device that you wish to assign (you
cannot use recognition).
@ASSIGN (DEVICE) MTA1:
3. Press the RETURN key. When the device is assigned to your
job, the system prints an @ on your terminal.
@ASSIGN (DEVICE) MTA1:
@
Errors
1. If the device is already assigned to another job, the system
prints the message ?dev: ALREADY ASSIGNED TO JOB n and
returns you to TOPS-20 command level. If you want to know
who is using the device, give the SYSTATn command (where n is
the job number).
2. If you have already assigned the device to your job, the
system prints the message [ALREADY ASSIGNED TO YOU]
immediately following the ASSIGN command.
Characteristics
The ASSIGN command does not change any program in memory and
leaves your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Restrictions
Assigning Magnetic Tape Drives
You can use the ASSIGN command to assign tape drives only if
they are of the form MTAn:. Tape device names of the form MTn:
are logical device names only, and are assigned automatically at
the time of MOUNT TAPE commands.
You cannot assign structure names. Therefore you cannot assign
the device DSK: (your currently connected structure).
You cannot ASSIGN various other devices such as LPT: and NUL:.
Logical names cannot be assigned to devices by using the ASSIGN
command; refer to the DEFINE command.
You cannot assign a device that is already assigned to another
job, or that you have already assigned to your job.
Related Commands
DEASSIGN for surrendering a previously assigned
device
MOUNT for mounting a structure of magnetic
tape set without assigning a specific
drive
INFORMATION AVAILABLE DEVICES for finding out which devices can be
assigned or have been assigned to your
job
Examples
1. The user assigns magnetic tape drive number three to his job:
@ASSIGN (DEVICE) MTA3:
@
2. Find out which devices are available for timesharing use, then
assign one to your job.
@INFORMATION AVAILABLE DEVICES
Devices available to this job:
DSK, PS, US, MELON, LPT, LPT0, LPT1, PLPT1, CDR, PCDR0, CDP,
PCDP0, FE0-15, PTY11-61, NUL, PLT, PLT0, DCN, SRV
Devices assigned to/opened by this job: TTY20, PTY11
@ASSIGN PCDR0:
@
CANCEL Command
Function
The CANCEL command withdraws requests made with a previous queue-class
command
Format
@CANCEL (REQUEST TYPE) queue (ID) identifier/switch(es)
where
queue is the name of the queue, chosen from the following
list:
ARCHIVE for requests made using the ARCHIVE
command
BATCH for requests made using the SUBMIT
command
MOUNT for requests made using the MOUNT
STRUCTURE or MOUNT TAPE command
PLOT for requests made using the PLOT
command
PRINT for requests made using the PRINT
command
RETRIEVE for requests made using the RETRIEVE
command
identifier is one of the following:
request ID number the unique number
assigned by the system
to your request. This
is the number appearing
under the heading "Req#"
in the list of requests
shown by the appropriate
INFORMATION command (see
Related Commands, below)
To cancel archival
requests, use "filespec"
argument instead.
jobname the jobname of the
request, either the
first six characters of
the first filename in
the request or the argu-
ment you supplied to a
/JOBNAME switch when
making the request (for
output and batch
requests), or the first
six characters of each
filename in the request
(for retrieval requests)
or the first six
characters of the
structure alias or tape
set name (for mount
requests). This is the
name appearing under the
heading "Name", "Req
Name", or "Job Name" in
the list of requests
shown by the appropriate
INFORMATION command (see
Related Commands, below)
filespec the specification of a
file. Use this argument
to cancel archival
requests.
Use an asterisk (*) as identifier to cancel all
your requests in to specified queue.
/switch is one or more of the following switches:
/JOBNAME: jobname which gives you the
jobname of the request
you want to cancel. See
Special Cases - /JOBNAME
Switch, below
/SEQUENCE:n which gives the sequence
number of the batch or
output request you want
to cancel. The INFORM-
ATION BATCH-REQUESTS or
INFORMATION OUTPUT-
REQUESTS command with
the /ALL switch gives
the sequence number
assigned to these
requests. Use this
switch in CANCEL
commands placed within
batch jobs: then you can
cancel requests made
earlier in the batch job
even though you do not
know the request ID
number.
/USER:user name which cancels the
specified request
entered under the given
user name. Use an
asterisk (*) both for
request ID number and as
argument to this switch
to cancel all requests
of all users in the
specified queue. For
privileged users only.
Output
When you complete a CANCEL command removing a request, the system
responds with "[1 Job Canceled]" and makes the appropriate deletion
from the indicated queue. If the job is being processed, the reponse
is "[1 Job Canceled (1 was in progress)]", but if the job is already
finished, it is simply "[No Jobs Killed]"
Characteristics
Request ID or Jobname as Argument to CANCEL
You can cancel a single queue request (those made with Queue-
class commands - MOUNT, PLOT, PRINT, RETRIEVE, or SUBMIT) by giving
either its request ID number or its jobname as the second argument of a
CANCEL command. This argument is interpreted as a request ID number
unless it includes one or more non-numeric characters. If the argument
includes non-numeric characters it is interpreted as a jobname. By
giving a jobname as the second argument of a CANCEL command, you cancel
all your requests of that jobname in the specified queue. But see also
Special Cases - /JOBANEM Switch, below.
Special Cases
/SPOOLED-OUTPUT Switch
You can give the special switch, /SPOOLED-OUTPUT, after the
PAPER-TAPE, PLOT, or PRINT argument to the CANCEL command. By
doing so you cause any accumulated requests in the spooler queue
for the appropriate output device (PTP:, PLT:, or LPT:
respectively) to be canceled, rather than filled when you log
out. Do not give any further arguments to a "CANCEL queue
/SPOOLED-OUTPUT" command.
/JOBNAME Switch
In the singular case when you want to cancel several queue
requests of the same jobname using a single command, and that
jobname is purely numerical (for example, 5045), you must use
the /JOBNAME:jobname switch as the second argument to the
CANCEL command. Do not also give the request ID or jobname as a
command argument if you give the /JOBNAME:jobname switch.
Restrictions
Cannot Cancel Filled Tape-Mount Requests
You cannot use the CANCEL command to withdraw a MOUNT TAPE
request once the first volume of tape has been mounted (i.e.,
once you have received a message of the form, [setname defined
as Mtn:]). Use the DISMOUNT command to give up your tape
resource in this case. Note that the DEASSIGN or LOGOUT command
will also dismount the tape set.
Cannot Cancel Certain Archival Requests
You cannot use the CANCEL command to withdraw an archival
request once the operator has initiated archival procedures.
Thus, even though files remain on disk between the operator's
first and second archive runs, you cannot cancel a request
during this time. If you try to cancel a request after
archiving has begun, you receive the error message:
?File has archive status: filename
Note that this error does not terminate a multifile CANCEL
ARCHIVE command (for example, CANCEL ARCHIVE *.*); the TOPS-20
command processor continues processing each remaining filename
in the request. Cancel requests for these remaining files
are judged individually.
Related Commands
ARCHIVE for requesting archival of a file
INFORMATION ARCHIVE-STATUS for finding out the archival status of
files
INFORMATION BATCH-REQUESTS for examining requests in the batch
input queue
INFORMATION MOUNT-REQUESTS for examining requests in the
structure- and tape-mount queue
INFORMATION OUTPUT-REQUESTS for examining requests in the line
printer, plotter, and paper tape queues
INFORMATION RETRIEVAL REQUESTS for examining requests in the retrieval
queue
MODIFY for changing requests without removing
them
MOUNT for placing requests in the structure-
or tape-mount queue
PLOT for placing requests in the plot queue
PRINT for placing requests in the print queue
RETRIEVE for placing requests in the retrieval
queue
SUBMIT for placing requests in the batch
input queue
Examples
1. Cancel one of your jobs.
@CANCEL BATCH SAMPLE
[1 JOB CANCELED]
2. Cancel one of your jobs by using the sequence number and
omitting the jobname.
@INFORMATION (ABOUT) OUTPUT-REQUESTS
QUEUE JOB SEQ LIMIT USER
LPT SAMPLE 3980 1000 SARTINI
LPT SAMPLE 3990 1000 SARTINI
LPT SAMPLE 4002 1000 SARTINI
@CANCEL PRINT /SEQUENCE:3990
[1 JOB CANCELED]
COMPILE Command
Function
The COMPILE command translates one or more source files,
producing one or more object files.
Format
@COMPILE (FROM) /switch(es) source/switch(es) object,...
where
switches are keywords chosen from the list below.
indicationg your choice of compile command
options. They have different effects depending
on their position in the command line: placed
before all files in the command, they act as
defaults for all; otherwise they affect only
the nearest preceding file.
source is the file specification of a source program.
The filename must be of 6 or fewer characters,
and the file type of 3 or fewer characters; you
cannot use a generation number.
Default - arguments you give in your last
LOAD-CLASS command
object is the filename you choose for the object file;
it must be 6 or fewer characters.
Default - filename of source file (file type
is .REL)
,... means that, after commas, you can give more arguments
of the form already shown
COMPILE Command Switches
/68-COBOL compiles the file using the COBOL-68 compiler
Default for files of type .CBL
/74-COBOL compiles the file using the COBOL-74 compiler
/ALGOL
Compiles the file using ALGOL. This is the default for
sources with the extension .ALG.
/BINARY
Generates a binary (object) file for each source program.
Normally the system generates object files, so this switch
is useful in reversing a global /NOBINARY switch.
/COBOL
Compiles the program using COBOL-68. This is the default for
sources with the extension .CBL.
/COMPILE
Compiles the program regardless of whether the object file
is up-to-date or not. use this switch along with the /LIST
or /CREF switch to obtain listings when you have current
object files. (The /NOCOMPILE switch causes compilation
only if the object file is out-of-date).
/CREF
Creates a file containing cross-reference information for
each source file you compile. The name of the file is the
name of the object file and the file type is .CRF.
Use the CREF command to obtain a listing of the file.
/DEBUG
Provides additional debugging information in the object
program (For FORTRAN only, and only if you have not given
the /OPTIMIZE switch).
/FORTRAN
Compiles the file using FORTRAN. This is the default for
sources with the extension .FOR or a nonstandard type.
/LANGUAGE-SWITCHES:"/switch(es)"
passes the specified switches to the compiler that will process
the file(s) to which this switch applies. You must include the
switches in double quotation marks (" ").
/LIST
Prints a listing of each program you compile. The listing
name is the name of the object file. Unless you
specify this switch, the system does not print a listing
of your program. If you also include a /CREF switch, the
system ignores the /LIST switch.
/MACRO
Assembles the file using MACRO. This is the default for
sources with the extension .MAC.
/NOBINARY
Inhibits the generation of a binary (object) file. This
switch is useful along with the /CREF or /LIST switch to
produce listings without additionally producing an object
file.
/NOCOMPILE
Compiles a file only if it is out-of-date. Since the
system normally does this, the /NOCOMPILE switch is usful
for turning off a global /COMPILE or /RELOCATABLE switch.
/NODEBUG
Omits loading debugging information with the program
(FORTRAN only).
/NOLIST
Inhibits the generation of a listing file. Normally, the
system does not generate a listing file.
/NOOPTIMIZE
Inhibits the generation of optimized object files (FORTRAN
programs only).
/OPTIMIZE
Produces optimized object files (FORTRAN programs only).
/STAY
Returns your terminal to TOPS-20 command level so that you can
perform other work while the system continues to compile your
program. You immediately receive the TOPS-20 prompt (@ or $)
and can then issue any user command. But be careful with
commands that run programs, because those commands may clear
memory and terminate the current process. Also, you could
easily send incorrect data to programs expecting terminal input.
This switch saves you from having to: issue a ^T to make sure
the compile has begun; give a ^C to halt compilation; and issue
a CONTINUE STAY command to remain at command level during
compilation.
Characteristics
Compiling New sources Only
The system usually compiles only those sources for which there
are no current object files, i.e. sources whose write dates are
more recent than those of the object files of the same name.
However, sources for which you supply a new object filename are
compiled even if there are current object files. You can always
force compilation with the /COMPILE switch.
Using Standard File Types
If you specify source files with standard types (.FOR, .MAC,
.CBL, or .ALG) in a COMPILE command, the system automatically
calls the appropriate compile when compilation is necessary. If
you specify source files by filename only, the system searches
your connected directory in the above order for a file of this
name and a standard type. To compile programs from sources that
have nonstandard file types, give a switch to indicate the
proper compiler (/FORTRAN, /MACRO, /COBOL, or /ALGOL). A switch
will take precedence over a standard file type if they indicate
different languages. If no compiler is indicated with either a
switch or a standard file type, the FORTRAN compiler is used.
Hints
Plus Signs Between Filespecs
If you give two or more filespecs seperated by plus signs (+) as
arguments to COMPILE, they are compiled together as if they were
a single file. Their object module is stored under any filename
given as the "object" argument of the command, or (if none)
under the last filename in the group and file type .REL.
Indirect Files as Arguments
You can store the arguments (source and object filespecs,
switches) of a COMPILE command in an indirect file, and specify
them by typing an at sign (@) and its filespec as a COMPILE
command argument.
Establishing Default Arguments with the SET Command
You can issue the SET DEFAULT COMPILE-SWITCHES command to set up
default global arguments to the COMPILE command. Insert this
SET command in your COMAND.CMD file to change your own defaults
permanently.
Restrictions
Switches Assuming Compilation
/CREF
/DEBUG
/LANGUAGE-SWITCHES
/LIST
/NODEBUG
/NOLIST
/NOOPTIMIZE
/OPTIMIZE
The above switches will not take effect unless the COMPILE
command causes a new compilation of the relevant source file.
See Characteristics - Compiling New Sources Only, above, for
more information.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The COMPILE command clears memory and loads the appropriate compiler.
After the compilation your terminal is left at TOPS-20 command level.
Related Commands
LOAD, EXECUTE, and DEBUG other LOAD-class commands for performing
related functions
Operation
1. Type COMP and press the ESC key; the system prints ILE
(FROM).
@compILE (FROM) ? one of the following:
/68-COBOL /74-COBOL /ALGOL
/ABORT /BINARY /CHECK
/COBOL /COMPILE /CREF
/CROSS-REFERENCE /DDT /DEBUG
/FAIL /FLAG-NON-STANDARD /FORTRAN
/LANGUAGE-SWITCHES: /LIBRARY /LIST
/MACHINE-CODE /MACRO /MAP
/NOBINARY /NOCHECK /NOCOMPILE
/NOCREF /NOCROSS-REFERENCE /NODEBUG
/NOFLAG-NON-STANDARD /NOLIBRARY /NOLIST
/NOMACHINE-CODE /NOOPTIMIZE /NOSEARCH
/NOSYMBOLS /NOWARNINGS /OPTIMIZE
/PASCAL /RELOCATABLE /SAIL
/SEARCH /SIMULA /SNOBOL
/STAY /SYMBOLS /WARNINGS
or File name
or "@"
or "%"
@COMPILE (FROM)
2. Type (or use recognition on) the sets of sources
specifications, object specifications and switches. Press
the RETURN key. The system translates the specified files.
@COMPILE (FROM) TEST.FOR,SUB1.FOR
FORTRAN: TEST
FORTRAN: SUB1
@
Errors
1. If you give a command and one of the source files is missing,
the system continues processing the command and prints the
message:
%SOURCE FILE MISSING - name.typ
where name.typ is the name and type of the source file.
Examples
1. The user compiles a simple MACRO program.
@COMPILE (FROM) TRANSL.MAC
MACRO: TRANSL
@
2. The user compiles three FORTRAN programs into one main program,
and the entire subroutine package TYPE2.
@COMPILE (FROM) 1+2+3,TYPE2
FORTRAN: 1
MAIN.
FORTRAN: TYPE2
TYPE2
@
3. The user assembles a MACRO program, producing a cross-
reference
listing.
@COMPILE (FROM) /CREF INIT.MAC+CONTRL.MAC+SUBS.MAC
MACRO: INIT
MACRO: CONTRL
MACRO: SUBS
@
4. The user compiles his programs, using the arguments in
an indirect file.
@COMPILE (FROM) @TYP.CMD
FORTRAN: 1
MAIN.
FORTRAN: TYPE2
TYPE2
@
5. Compile a FORTRAN program, using a switch to indicate the proper
compiler. Use the /STAY switch to return immediately to TOPS-20
command level.
@COMPILE TEST/FORTRAN/STAY
@PUSH
@EDIT LOGIN.CMD
6. Create an indirect file, use it to compile several programs,
forcing a compilation of the last one and storing its object
file under a new name.
Using an Editor, insert the following 2 lines into UPDATE.CMD:-
/COBOL FSTQ,SNDQ,THDQ,FTHQ/COMPILE ANNUAL
$
@COMPILE @UPDATE.CMD
COBOL: DMN [FSTQ.CBL]
COBOL: DMN [SNTQ.CBL]
COBOL: DMN [THTQ.CBL]
COBOL: DMN [FTTQ.CBL]
EXIT
@DIRECTORY,
@@CHRONOLOGICAL WRITE
@@REVERSE
@@
PS:<A-MOLE>
ANNUAL.REL.1
THDQ.REL.1
SNDQ.REL.1
FSTQ.REL.1
UPDATE.CMD.1
017CRE.TMP.100017;T
FTHQ.CBL
THDQ.CBL
SNDQ.CBL
FSTQ.CBL
Total of 10 files
@
EXPUNGE Command
Function
The EXPUNGE command erases all your deleted files from disk
storage.
Format
@EXPUNGE (DIRECTORY) dev:directory,
@@subcommand
@@ .
.
.
where
dev:<directory> is the name of the directory you wish to
expunge; you may use wildcard characters
to expunge more than one directory.
Default dev: - your connected structure
Default <directory> - the directory (on
the specified
structure) of the
same name as your
connected
directory
Defualt (if no arguments are given)
- your connected directory
@@ means that, after a final comma, you can
@@ . give one or more (optional) subcommands
@@ . on successive lines
.
subcommand is a key word chosen from the list below
EXPUNGE Command Subcommands
DELETE deletes and expunges temporary files, i.e., those with
the Temporary (;T) attribute, created by some system
programs to hole interim data. Do not use if you will
have any further need of these files.
PURGE expunges all files which you have opened but not closed
REBUILD rebuilds the symbol table of the directory named
Output
After a successful EXPUNGE command, the system reports the number
of disk pages freed. If the expunged files are small, there may
be no pages freed. Also, if deleted files are mapped, they
will not be expunged, and so will not contribute to the number
of pages freed. Occasionally the system will report a negative
number. This can mean that files were being written in the directory
during the EXPUNGE, or (especially if you include the REBUILD
subcommand) that previous computations of directory size has not
adequately accounted for some files, e.g files written near the
time of a system crash and reload.
Hints
Using the REBUILD Subcommand
The REBUILD subcommand is not needed under usual conditions, as
the system performs this action automatically. Use REBUILD if
a message is printed on your terminal advising you to rebuild
the symbol table of a directory, or if the "Pages assigned"
parameter reported by an INFORMATION DISK-USAGE command shows
two page counts (one within parentheses) differing by more than
say, two pages. Note that in this last case REBUILD will merely
reduce the difference, not eliminate it, expecially if the
directory has subdirectories beneath it.
Using the PURGE Subcommand
The PURGE subcommand is useful mainly for removing the remains
of files that were being created at the time of a system crash
or a structure dismount. Do not give it while anyone might be
using the directory, because that user's program might be
deprived of necessary files as a result.
After you expunge your files, you cannot access them again. If
you have inadvertently expunged a file you actually need, contact
your operator and ask if your files can be obtained from the
system backup operations.
Use the EXPUNGE command to stay under your disk storage quota.
Special Cases
Files with the "Premanent" Attribute
The system erases only the contents of any files that have the
Permanent attribute (e.g., MAIL.TXT in your login directory)
when you try to expunge them. Their file specifications remain
among your deleted files, and cannot be removed by TOPS-20
commands.
Operation
1. Type EXP and press the ESC key; the system prints UNGE
(DIRECTORY).
@EXPUNGE (DIRECTORY)
2. If you want to expunge the deleted files in your connected
directory, press the ESC key and the RETURN key. (or just
press the RETURN key). You can type a structure name (dev:)
if the directory for which you want to expunge files is not
on your connected structure. However, you must have the
proper access privileges. Type (or use recognition on) the
directory name, and press the RETURN key. The system prints
the name of the structure, the name of the directory and the
number of pages freed.
@EXPUNGE (DIRECTORY) <MANUALS>
PS:<MANUALS> [34 PAGES FREED]
@
Characteristics
The EXPUNGE command does not change any program in memory and
leaves your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Restrictions
You may not expunge deleted files in a directory to which you do
not have the proper access.
If you have deleted a file and a program still has it opened, the
system will not expunge the file.
Related Commands
DELETE for marking files to be lter expunged
DIRECTORY-class commands for obtaining lists of file specs
INFORMATION DISK-USAGE for finding out the size of a directory
Examples
The user (here it is SARTINI) expunges deleted files in his
connected directory.
@EXPUNGE (DIRECTORY)
PS:<SARTINI> [4 PAGES FREED]
@
The user tries to expunge a directory to which he does not have
the proper access.
@EXPUNGE (DIRECTORY) <COHEN>
?WHEEL or OPERATOR capabilities required - PS:<COHEN>
@
FDIRECTORY Command
Function
The FDIRECTORY command prints all the information about a file or
group of files. No headings are printed and the output is
compressed.
When used with magnetic tapes, the FDIRECTORY command is equivalent
to DIRECTORY for magnetic tapes.
Hints
Giving the FDIRECTORY command is exactly like giving the
DIRECTORY command with the subcommands CRAM (OUTPUT), EVERYTHING,
and NO HEADING.
Refer to the DIRECTORY command for more information; you can
give any of the DIRECTORY subcommands with FDIRECTORY.
Format
@FDIRECTORY (OF FILES) filespecs
filespecs is a list of the file specifications about which
you want to obtain the information. If you omit
the file specifications, the system prints
information about all the files in your connected
directory.
Operation
1. Type FDIR and press the ESC key; the system prints ECTORY
(OF FILES).
@FDIRECTORY (OF FILES)
2. Type (or use recognition on) the file specifications, then
press the RETURN key. The system prints the directory
information.
@FDIRECTORY (OF FILES) TEST.FOR.*
<MCKIE>
TEST.FOR.4;P777752;A10300 1 15(36) 2 18-SEP-75 18:51:14
18-SEP-75 18:51:27 18-SEP-75 18:51:44 MCKIE MCKIE
@
Output
The system lists the files in alphabetical order. The following
information is listed for each file:
1. Name, type, generation number,
2. Protection number,
3. Account number,
4. Size (in pages),
5. Length (in bytes) and byte size (in parentheses),
6. File retention count,
7. The date and time the file was created,
8. The date and time the file was last written,
9. The date and time the file was last read,
10. The user who created the file,
11. The user who last wrote the file
After the entries for the individual files, the system prints a
line summarizing the total size (in pages) and number of the
listed files.
Characteristics
The FDIRECTORY command does not change any program in memory and
leaves your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Examples
The user obtains all the information about any files with the
name FILEIO.
@FDIRECTORY (OF FILES) FILEIO
<MCKIE>
FILEIO.EXE.2;P777752;A10300 3 2048(36) 2 20-AUG-75 15:16:25
20-AUG-75 15:16:25 9-SEP-75 16:12:50 MCKIE MCKIE
.MAC.55;P777752;A10300 2 1005(36) 2 19-SEP-75 10:54:00 19-
SEP-75 10:54:06 19-SEP-75 10:54:05 MCKIE MCKIE
.REL.1;P777752;A10300 1 170(36) 1 16-MAY-75 02:57:16 16-MA
7-75 02:57:16 16-MAY-75 02:57:18 MCKIE MCKIE
TOTAL OF 6 PAGES IN 3 FILES
@
LOAD Command
Function
The LOAD command places one or more object files in memory,
forming a runnable program.
Format
@LOAD (FROM) /switch(es) source/switch(es) object,...
where
switches are keywords chosen from the list below.
source is one or more source file specifications preceded
and/or followed by switches. You must separate
the source files with plus signs. No spaces or
tabs are allowed. If you do not give a file type
in a file specification, the system looks for a
source file with one of the standard types.
object is an object file specification. If you do not
give an object file specification, the system uses
the name of the last file in the corresponding
sources and the type .REL.
,... means that, after commas, you can give more arguments
of the form already shown
Hints
Having loaded a runnable program, you may then start it (by
giving the START command) or save it on disk (by giving the SAVE
command).
The INFORMATION (ABOUT) MEMORY-STATUS is useful for checking the
size and placement of your program in memory.
The LOAD command runs the LINK program. Refer to the LINK
Reference Manual for more information on this program.
If you intend to run the program often, you should use, in order,
the LOAD, SAVE and RUN commands. (You will find this process
faster than loading the program each time you run it.)
Establishing Default Arguments with the SET Command
You can issue the SET DEFAULT COMPILE-SWITCHES command to
set up default global arguments to the LOAD command. Insert
this SET command in your COMAND.CMD file to change your own
defaults permanently.
Special Cases
If you give only LOAD-command switches as arguments to a LOAD
command, the system appends the arguments you gave in the last
LOAD-class command that contained a file specification or LINK
switch, then executes the command. If there are no arguments to
recall, the system prints the message ?No saved arguments. Refer
to Section 8.3.4 which describes the manner in which arguments
are recalled.
The system will update the object file if it is older than any
one of the corresponding source files. Suppose you give the
command:
@LOAD (FROM) NXTLAT.FOR
If NXTLAT.REL does not exist, or if it is older than the most
recent NXTLAT.FOR (i.e., it has a write date before the write
date of NXTLAT.FOR), then the system compiles NXTLAT.FOR to
produce an up-to-date NXTLAT.REL. After producing NXTLAT.REL,
the system loads it into memory.
LOAD Command Switches
/ALGOL
Compiles the file using ALGOL. This is the default for
sources with the extension .ALG.
/BINARY
Generates a binary (object) file for each source program.
Normally the system generates object files, so this switch
is useful in reversing a global /NOBINARY switch.
/COBOL
Compiles the program using COBOL. This is the default for
sources with the extension .CBL.
/COMPILE
(or an object file older than any one of its source files)
Compiles the source program regardless of whether the
object file is up-to-date or not. The /NOCOMPILE switch
causes compilation only if the object file is out-of-date;
the /RELOCATABLE switch causes the system to use an
existing object file, regardless of its date. Normally,
the system assumes the action of the /NOCOMPILE switch.
/CREF
Creates a file containing cross-reference information for
each source file you compile. The name of the file is the
name of the last source file and the file type is .CRF.
Give the CREF command to run the CREF program which reads
this file and prints a listing. If the object file is not
out of data, include the /COMPILE switch in your LOAD
command. When a source file contains a COBOL program, the
system produces a listing file (the file type is .LST
instead of .CRF) containing the cross-reference
information; give the PRINT command (instead of CREF to
print the .LST file.
/DDT
Loads the DDT debugger along with the program.
/DEBUG
Provides additional debugging information in the object
program (FORTRAN only).
/FORTRAN
Compiles the file using FORTRAN. This is the default for
sources with the extension .FOR or a non-standard type.
/LIBRARY
Loads only the routines from the object file that are
called by the main program or another subroutine. The
system libraries are always searched.
/LIST
Prints a listing of each program you compile. The listing
name is the name of the last source file. Unless you
specify this switch, the system does not print a listing
of your program. If you also include a /CREF switch, the
system ignores the /LIST switch.
/MACRO
Assembles the file using MACRO. This is the default for
sources with the extension .MAC.
/MAP:name.typ
Produces loader maps during the loading process and stores
them in the file name.typ. If you do not give a file name
and type, the system uses nnnLNK.MAP, where nnn is your
job number. The /MAP switch applies to the entire
command, not to just one file. If you use recognition
input in typing the file specification, the system creates
a new generation of the recognized file.
/NOBINARY
Inhibits the generation of a binary (object) file. This
switch is useful along with the /CREF or /LIST switch to
produce listings without additionally producing an object
file.
/NOCOMPILE
Compiles a file only if it is out-of-date. Since the
system normally does this, the /NOCOMPILE switch is useful
for turning off a global /COMPILE or /RELOCATABLE switch.
/NODEBUG
Omits loading debugging information with the program
(FORTRAN only).
/NOLIST
Inhibits the generation of a listing file. Normally, the
system does not generate a listing file.
/NOOPTIMIZE
Inhibits the generation of optimized object files (FORTRAN
programs only).
/NOSEARCH
Loads all routines in a file, regardless of whether the
routines are called by another module. Normally, the
system loads all the routines in an object file, therefore
this switch is useful in reversing a global /SEARCH
switch.
/NOSYMBOLS
Inhibits loading symbols with the program. Normally, the
system loads symbols with all programs.
/OPTIMIZE
Produces optimized object files (FORTRAN programs only).
/RELOCATABLE
Uses the specified object files, even though they may be
out-of-date, or have extensions other than .REL. For
example, the command LOAD FILE.FOR/REL would cause
FILE.FOR to be treated as a relocatable file and load it.
It would normally be regarded as a FORTRAN source file.
/SEARCH
Is identical to the /LIBRARY switch.
/STAY
Returns your terminal to TOPS-20 command level so that you can
perform other work while the system continues to compile your
program. You immediately receive the TOPS-20 prompt (@ or $)
and can then issue any user command. But be careful with
commands that run programs, because those commands may clear
memory and terminate the current process. Also, you could
easily send incorrect data to programs expecting terminal input.
This switch saves you from having to: issue a ^T to make sure
the compile has begun; give a ^C to halt compilation; and issue
a CONTINUE STAY command to remain at command level during
compilation.
/SYMBOLS
Loads the program with its appropriate symbol table.
Normally, the system loads all programs with symbols.
Operation
1. Type LOAD and press the ESC key; the system prints (FROM).
@LOAD (FROM)
2. Type (or use recognition on) the sets of source
specifications, object specifications and switches. Press
the RETURN key. The system loads the specified files.
@LOAD (FROM) TEST.FOR,SUB1.FOR
FORTRAN: TEST
FORTRAN: SUB1
LINK: Loading
@
Errors
1. If you give a command and one of the source files is missing,
the system continues processing the command and prints the
message:
%SOURCE FILE MISSING - name.typ
where name.typ is the name and type of the source file.
Characteristics
The LOAD command runs the LINK program, thereby clearing any
previous program from memory and leaving your terminal at TOPS-20
command level.
Examples
The user loads a simple MACRO program.
@LOAD (FROM) TRANSL.MAC
MACRO: TRANSL
LINK: Loading
EXIT
@
The user combines three FORTRAN programs into one main program
and includes the entire subroutine package TYPE2.
@LOAD (FROM) 1+2+3,TYPE2
FORTRAN: 1
MAIN.
FORTRAN: TYPE2
TYPE2
LINK: Loading
EXIT
@
The user loads a MACRO program and obtains a cross-reference
listing. Note that you must use the /CREF switch to receive the
listing.
@LOAD (FROM) /CREF INIT.MAC+CONTRL.MAC+SUBS.MAC
MACRO: INIT
MACRO: CONTRL
MACRO: SUBS
LINK: Loading
EXIT
@
The user loads his programs using an indirect file.
@LOAD (FROM) @TYP.CMD
FORTRAN: 1
MAIN.
FORTRAN: TYPE2
TYPE2
LINK: Loading
EXIT
@
The user loads his FORTRAN programs, but loading the library file
TYPE2 in library mode.
@LOAD (FROM) 1+2+3,TYPE2/LIBRARY
LINK: Loading
EXIT
@
COMPILE Command
Function
The COMPILE command translates one or more source files,
producing one or more object files.
COMPILE Command Switches
/68-COBOL compiles the file using the COBOL-68 compiler
Default for files of type .CBL
/74-COBOL compiles the file using the COBOL-74 compiler
/ALGOL
Compiles the file using ALGOL. This is the default for
sources with the extension .ALG.
/BINARY
Generates a binary (object) file for each source program.
Normally the system generates object files, so this switch
is useful in reversing a global /NOBINARY switch.
/COBOL
Compiles the program using COBOL-68. This is the default for
sources with the extension .CBL.
/COMPILE
Compiles the program regardless of whether the object file
is up-to-date or not. The /NOCOMPILE switch causes
compilation only if the object file is out-of-date.
/CREF
Creates a file containing cross-reference information for
each source file you compile. The name of the file is the
name of the last source file and the file type is .CRF.
Give the CREF command to run the CREF program which reads
this file and prints a listing. If the object file is not
out of date, include the /COMPILE switch in your COMPILE
command. When a source file contains a COBOL program, the
system produces a listing file (the file type is .LST
instead of .CRF) containing the cross-reference
information; give the PRINT command in the form PRINT
name.LST (instead of CREF) to print the .LST file.
/DEBUG
Provides additional debugging information in the object
program (FORTRAN only).
/FORTRAN
Compiles the file using FORTRAN. This is the default for
sources with the extension .FOR or a nonstandard type.
/LANGUAGE-SWITCHES:"/switch(es)"
passes the specified switches to the compiler that will process
the file(s) to which this switch applies. You must include the
switches in double quotation marks (" ").
/LIST
Prints a listing of each program you compile. The listing
name is the name of the last source file. Unless you
specify this switch, the system does not print a listing
of your program. If you also include a /CREF switch, the
system ignores the /LIST switch.
/MACRO
Assembles the file using MACRO. This is the default for
sources with the extension .MAC.
/NOBINARY
Inhibits the generation of a binary (object) file. This
switch is useful along with the /CREF or /LIST switch to
produce listings without additionally producing an object
file.
/NOCOMPILE
Compiles a file only if it is out-of-date. Since the
system normally does this, the /NOCOMPILE switch is usful
for turning off a global /COMPILE or /RELOCATABLE switch.
/NODEBUG
Omits loading debugging information with the program
(FORTRAN only).
/NOLIST
Inhibits the generation of a listing file. Normally, the
system does not generate a listing file.
/NOOPTIMIZE
Inhibits the generation of optimized object files (FORTRAN
programs only).
/OPTIMIZE
Produces optimized object files (FORTRAN programs only).
Characteristics
Compiling New sources Only
The system usually compiles only hose sources for which there
are no current object files, i.e. sources whose write dates are
more recent than those of the object files of the same name.
However, sources for which you supply a new object filename are
compiled even if there are current object files. You can always
force compilation with the /COMPILE switch.
Using Standard File Types
If you specify source files with standard types (.FOR, .MAC,
.CBL, or .ALG) in a COMPILE command, the system automatically
calls the appropriate compile when compilation is necessary. If
you specify source files by filename only, the system searches
your connected directory in the above order for a file of this
name and a standard type. To compile programs from sources that
have nonstandard file types, give a switch to indicate the
proper compiler (/FORTRAN, /MACRO, /COBOL, or /ALGOL). A switch
will take precedence over a standard file type if they indicate
different languages. If no compiler is indicated with either a
switch or a standard file type, the FORTRAN compiler is used.
Hints
Plus Signs Between Filespecs
If you give two or more filespecs seperated by plus signs (+) as
arguments to COMPILE, they are compiled together as if they were
a single file. Their object module is stored under any filename
given as the "object" argument of the command, or (if none)
under the last filename in the group and file type .REL.
Indirect Files as Arguments
You can store the arguments (source and object filespecs,
switches) of a COMPILE command in an indirect file, and specify
them by typing an at sign (@) and its filespec as a COMPILE
command argument.
Establishing Default Arguments with the SET Command
You can issue the SET DEFAULT COMPILE-SWITCHES command to set up
default global arguments to the COMPILE command. Insert this
SET command in your COMAND.CMD file to change your own defaults
permanently.
Restrictions
Switches Assuming Compilation
/CREF
/DEBUG
/LANGUAGE-SWITCHES
/LIST
/NODEBUG
/NOLIST
/NOOPTIMIZE
/OPTIMIZE
The above switches will not take effect unless the COMPILE
command causes a new compilation of the relevant source file.
See Characteristics - Compiling New Sources Only, above, for
more information.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The COMPILE command clears memory and loads the appropriate compiler.
After the compilation your terminal is left at TOPS-20 command level.
Related Commands
LOAD, EXECUTE, and DEBUG other LOAD-class commands for performing
related functions
Operation
1. Type COMP and press the ESC key; the system prints ILE
(FROM).
@compILE (FROM) ? one of the following:
/68-COBOL /74-COBOL /ALGOL
/ABORT /BINARY /CHECK
/COBOL /COMPILE /CREF
/CROSS-REFERENCE /DDT /DEBUG
/FAIL /FLAG-NON-STANDARD /FORTRAN
/LANGUAGE-SWITCHES: /LIBRARY /LIST
/MACHINE-CODE /MACRO /MAP
/NOBINARY /NOCHECK /NOCOMPILE
/NOCREF /NOCROSS-REFERENCE /NODEBUG
/NOFLAG-NON-STANDARD /NOLIBRARY /NOLIST
/NOMACHINE-CODE /NOOPTIMIZE /NOSEARCH
/NOSYMBOLS /NOWARNINGS /OPTIMIZE
/PASCAL /RELOCATABLE /SAIL
/SEARCH /SIMULA /SNOBOL
/STAY /SYMBOLS /WARNINGS
or File name
or "@"
or "%"
@COMPILE (FROM)
2. Type (or use recognition on) the sets of sources
specifications, object specifications and switches. Press
the RETURN key. The system translates the specified files.
@COMPILE (FROM) TEST.FOR,SUB1.FOR
FORTRAN: TEST
FORTRAN: SUB1
@
Errors
1. If you give a command and one of the source files is missing,
the system continues processing the command and prints the
message:
%SOURCE FILE MISSING - name.typ
where name.typ is the name and type of the source file.
Examples
1. The user compiles a simple MACRO program.
@COMPILE (FROM) TRANSL.MAC
MACRO: TRANSL
@
2. The user compiles three FORTRAN programs into one main program,
and the entire subroutine package TYPE2.
@COMPILE (FROM) 1+2+3,TYPE2
FORTRAN: 1
MAIN.
FORTRAN: TYPE2
TYPE2
@
3. The user assembles a MACRO program, producing a cross-
reference
listing.
@COMPILE (FROM) /CREF INIT.MAC+CONTRL.MAC+SUBS.MAC
MACRO: INIT
MACRO: CONTRL
MACRO: SUBS
@
4. The user compiles his programs, using the arguments in
an indirect file.
@COMPILE (FROM) @TYP.CMD
FORTRAN: 1
MAIN.
FORTRAN: TYPE2
TYPE2
@
5. Compile a FORTRAN program, using a switch to indicate the proper
compiler. Use the /STAY switch to return immediately to TOPS-20
command level.
@COMPILE TEST/FORTRAN/STAY
@PUSH
@EDIT LOGIN.CMD
6. Create an indirect file, use it to compile several programs,
forcing a compilation of the last one and storing its object
file under a new name.
Using an Editor, insert the following 2 lines into UPDATE.CMD:-
/COBOL FSTQ,SNDQ,THDQ,FTHQ/COMPILE ANNUAL
$
@COMPILE @UPDATE.CMD
COBOL: DMN [FSTQ.CBL]
COBOL: DMN [SNTQ.CBL]
COBOL: DMN [THTQ.CBL]
COBOL: DMN [FTTQ.CBL]
EXIT
@DIRECTORY,
@@CHRONOLOGICAL WRITE
@@REVERSE
@@
PS:<A-MOLE>
ANNUAL.REL.1
THDQ.REL.1
SNDQ.REL.1
FSTQ.REL.1
UPDATE.CMD.1
017CRE.TMP.100017;T
FTHQ.CBL
THDQ.CBL
SNDQ.CBL
FSTQ.CBL
Total of 10 files
@
DELETE Command
Function
The DELETE command marks a disk file(s) for eventual
erasure.
Format
@DELETE (FILES) filespec,...,
@@subcommand
where
filespec is a single file specification or a string of file
specifications (separated by commas) that indicate
the files to be deleted. A file specification has
the form:
dev:<dir>name.typ.gen
If you omit dev: or <dir>, the system uses your
connected structure and/or directory. You must
give a file name. You can use wildcard
characters.
Default - .gen All generations of the specified file
@@ means that after a final comma you can give subcommands
on the next line
subcommand is a keyword, chosen from the list below, indicating
your choice of DELETE command options.
DELETE command subcommands
ARCHIVE
this both deletes the disk copy (if any0 and gives up the tape copy of
specified archive files.
CONTENTS-ONLY
deletes and immediately expunges only the disk copies of files that
also have a tape copy. Note that you must use the RETRIEVE command, not
UNDELETE, to retore such files to disk.
DIRECTORY
deletes and immediately expunges directory files without making their
disk space available to the files of other users; for users with
enabled Wheel or Operator capabilities only.
EXPUNGE
immediately and permanently erases the specified files from the
directory so that UNDELETE has no effect.
FORGET
deletes and immediately expunges the specified fiels without making
their disk space available to the files of other users; for users with
enabled Wheel or Operator capabilities only.
KEEP n
saves the n most recent generations of the specified files while
deleteing the rest.
Default n = 1
Hint
Removing open files
If DELETE with the EXPUNGE subcommand fails to erase a file,
it may be that some job in the system has opened it. The
INFORMATION FILE-STATUS command tells whether your own job
has done so. If it has, give the CLOSE or (if the file is
mapped) RESET command before repeating DELETE and EXPUNGE.
Recovering deleted archived files
If you have given the DELETE command with the ARCHIVE
subcommand to delete an archived file, and the disk copy has
already been expunged, you may still be able to recover the
tape copy. The operator will send a MAIL message concerning
the discarded tape copy of the deleted file. Use this
information, along with Hints - undoing DISCARD command
description, to attempt recovery of the deleted file.
Files with the 'Permanent' attribute
The system erases only the contents of any files that have
the 'Permanent' attribute (eg. MAIL.TXT in your log-in
directory) when you include them in a DELETE command. Their
file specifications remain among your deleted files, and
cannot be removed by TOPS-20 commands.
Operation
1. Type DELE and press the ESC key; the system prints TE
(FILES).
@DELETE (FILES)
2. Type (or use recognition on) the file specification(s)
(separated by commas) that you want to delete; then press
the RETURN key. If you want to give a subcommand, do not
press the RETURN key; proceed to step 3.
@DELETE (FILES) ADDTWO.REL.3
ADDTWO.REL.3 [OK]
@
3. To give a subcommand, type a comma, then press the RETURN
key. The system prints @@.
@DELETE (FILES) *.FIL,
@@
4. Type the subcommand and press the RETURN key once to
terminate the subcommand and a second time to terminate the
entire command.
@DELETE (FILES) *.FIL,
@@KEEP 1
@@
SORT.FIL.3 [OK]
T.FIL.1 [OK]
TAP.FIL.2 [OK]
@
Output
As the system starts to delete each file, it prints the file
specification and leaves a space. When the file is deleted, the
system prints the success message [OK].
Characteristics
The DELETE command does not change any program in memory and
leaves your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Examples
The user deletes the file TEST.FIL:
@DELETE (FILES) TEST.FIL
TEST.FIL.2 [OK]
@
The user deletes all the files with the file type .QOR:
@DELETE (FILES) *.QOR
ADDEM.QOR.2 [OK]
RESULT.QOR.1 [OK]
TEST.QOR.1 [OK]
ZEROS.QOR.5 [OK]
@
The user keeps two generations of every file in his directory.
@DELETE (FILES) *.*,
@@KEEP 2
@@
ADDTWO.REL.2 [OK]
NUMBER.FOR.4 [OK]
SQRT.ALG.1 [OK]
@
Related commands
DIRECTORY-class commands for obtaining lists of file
specifications
DISCARD for deleteing only the tape copy of
on-line files
EXPUNGE for permanently removing deleted files
INFORMATION DISK-USAGE for finding out how much disk-space
is available, and how much is
associated with deleted files
UNDELETE for recovering deleted files
HELP Command
Function
The HELP command prints information about system features.
Format
@HELP name
name is the name of the program you need information
for (default name: HELP).
Hints
If you want a list of features you can obtain information about,
type the HELP command followed by a question mark in place of a
name.
The text displayed by the HELP command are stored in system
logical name HLP: under the name of the program and file
type .HLP. Use the PRINT command to request your own copy.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The HELP command does not effect memory and leaves your terminal
at TOPS-20 command level.
Operation
1. Type HELP and leave a space.
@HELP
2. Type the name of the feature or a question mark then press
the RETURN key. The system prints the information.
@HELP EDIT
3. If you want to stop the printout, type two CTRL/C's.
Errors
1. If the system does not have any information on the particular
feature, it prints the message:
?INVALID HELP REQUEST, TRY HELP <RET>
Examples
The user prints information about the EDIT program.
@HELP EDIT
SUMMARY OF EDIT COMMANDS
@
CREF Command
Function
The CREF command runs the CREF program, which produces
Cross-reference listings from files of type .CRF
(these .CRF files are produced by LOAD-class commands).
Format
@CREF/switch destinaton filespec=source filename, source filename
where
destinaton filespec is the name of the file or device to
which you want to send the processed
contents of the .CRF file.
All input files for each command
are combined to produce one output
cross reference listing file.
Default = send to line printer
source filename is the name of the .CRF file you want
to process.
Default = the names of all files of
type .CRF produced during the current
terminal session
switches
A Advance magtape by one file mark (may be repeated).
B Backspace magtape one file mark (may be repeated).
C Cancel SWITCH.INI switch defaulting.
D Default switches a la SWITCH.INI.
H Help - type this text.
K Kill user-defined symbol table listing.
M Suppress user macro's, OPDEF's, etc. symbol table.
O List the opcodes.
P Preserve (i.e., don't delete) input files.
R Restart listing - will prompt for line number.
S Suppress program listing - list only symbol tables.
W Rewind tape.
Z Zero DECtape directory.
Effect om Memory and Terminal
The CREF command runs the CREF program to produce the listing,
thereby clearing any previous program from memory, and leaves
your terminal at TOPS-20 command level. If you forget to precede
the CREF command with the LOAD-class command containing a /CREF
switch, the system prints an asterisk and leaves your terminal at
CREF command level. Type a CTRL/C to return to TOPS-20 command
level.
Hints
Preserving .CRF Files After Processing
Give /P switch immediately after the CREF command to preserve .CRF
files. Ordinarily they are deleted after being sent to an output
device or copied into another file.
Producing .CRF Files
To create a listing of your program, first give a LOAD-class
command with the /CREF switch and then give the CREF command. A
cross-reference listing contains your source program plus a list
of all the symbols in the program and the locations that
reference them.
If you want to place the listing in a file, do the following.
Type R CREF and press the RETURN key; the system prints an
asterisk. Type the file specification of the output file, an =,
and the name of the .CRF file. Press the RETURN key; the system
prints a message and a second *. Type a CTRL/C to return to
TOPS-20 command level. If you want to print this file, give the
PRINT command. Refer to the second example.
Further Information
For more detailed information about the CREF program, including
all available switches, give the HELP CREF command.
Restrictions
If the .CRF file is in your logged-in directory but was created
before you logged in, the system will not produce a listing file
from it. To produce the listing file in this case, refer to the
second example.
Examples
The user produces a cross-referenced listing.
@CREF
CREF: TMAC
@
The user forces the production of a .CRF file, then runs the CREF
program and keeps the file without printing it.
@COMPILE (FROM) /COMPILE /CREF FILEIO
MACRO: FILEIO
EXIT
@R CREF
*FILEIO.REF=FILEIO
[CRFXKC 3K CORE]
*^C
@
POP Command
Function
The POP command terminates the current command level and returns
you to the next higher level.
Format
@POP (COMMAND LEVEL)
There are no arguments to the POP command.
Hints
After giving the POP command, you can give the CONTINUE command
to resume execution of a program you had previously stopped by
typing two CTRL/Cs.
The PUSH command performs the exact opposite function by creating
a new copy of the command language. Therefore, you can interrupt
one program with 2 CTRL/Cs, do a PUSH command, run another
program, do a POP command, and successfully continue the first
program.
Operation
1. Type POP and press the ESC key; the system prints (COMMAND
LEVEL).
@POP (COMMAND LEVEL)
2. Press the RETURN key; when the system has terminated the
current command level, it prints an @.
@POP (COMMAND LEVEL)
@
Characteristics
POP the Opposite of PUSH
You can do only and only one POP command for every previous PUSH
command. Giving too many POP commands will cause an error message
to be printed on your terminal (see errors).
Job Parameters Affected by POP
AS soon as you complete a valid POP command at some level of
TOPS-20, you give up the copy of memory for that level of
TOPS-20 and any program you were running. Any defaults
established at that level (e.g., default filespecs for LOAD-
class and EDIT-class commands, defaults specified by SET DEFAULT
commands) are cancelled as well. If POP returns you to a higher
level of TOPS-20, all these parameters revert to any value
established at that higher level.
Errors
1. If there is no previous level, the system ignores the command
and prints the message:
?NO HIGHER COMMAND LEVEL
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The POP command clears any program from memory, terminates the
current TOPS-20 command level, and returns your terminal to the
TOPS-20 command level from which you gave the most recent PUSH
command. Note that this previous copy of memory is generally not
disturbed by any command (except LOGOUT) you may give between the
PUSH and POP commands.
Special Cases
Returning to Other Programs with POP
The POP command usually returns you to the level of TOPS-20
from which you gave a pervious PUSH command. But a few system
programs (e.g. PTYCON and OPR) also allow you to give PUSH to
get a new level of TOPS-20. Giving the POP command to this
level of TOPS-20 returns you to that program.
Related Commands
CONTINUE for resuming execution of a program in memory
PUSH for obtaining a new level of TOPS-20
Examples
The user terminates the current command level.
@POP (COMMAND LEVEL)
@
The user runs his compute-bound program for almost an hour and
receives an error because he has forgotten to create a simple
file. The user types a CTRL/C, gives the PUSH command, creates
the file, gives the POP command, and returns to the original
TOPS-20 command level. The user gives the CONTINUE command to
continue his program exactly where he left off.
@RUN (PROGRAM) CHKERR
DATA FILE: RUN54.DAT
COMPARISON FILE: RUN20.DAT
%FRSOPN File was not found
Unit=1 DSK:PARAM.R20/ACCESS=SEQIN/MODE=ASCII
Enter new file specs. End with an $ (ALT)
*^C
@PUSH (COMMAND LEVEL)
TOPS-20 Command processor 2(236)
@CREATE (FILE) PARAM.R20
Input: PARAM.R20.1
00100 35 CHECKS
00200 $
*E
[PARAM.R20.1]
@POP (COMMAND LEVEL)
@CONTINUE
$
STOP
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME: 36:8.94 ELAPSED TIME: 59:14.58
EXIT
@
RETRIEVE Command
Function
The RETRIEVE command restores an off-line file (magnetic tape copy of a
file) to disk.
Format
@RETRIEVE (FILES) filespec,...
where
filespec is the specification of any off-line file
(archived or not, visible or invisible) to which
you have access; you may include wildcard
characters (% and *).
,... means that, after a comma, you can give more
arguments of the form already shown
Output
Acknowledgment of Request
As soon as you complete a valid RETRIEVE command, the system
responds by printing on your terminal the specification of
each off-line file for which you requested retrieval, followed
by [OK].
Notice of Retrieval Sent to Requestor
When the files for which you have requested retrieval have been
restored to their directory on disk, a message is sent to the
file MAIL.TXT in your log-in directory. This message gives the
complete specification of each retrieved file. Read it using
the RDMAIL or MS program. Remember that, depending on how
frequently your site processes retrieval requests, this message
may not be sent until one or more days after your request.
Characteristics
Invisibility of Retrieved Files
If you retrieve invisible files, they will remain invisible
(whether archived or not) when restored to disk. Use the SET
FILE VISIBLE command to make invisible files visible. Until
you do so, they will be inaccessible to most TOPS-20 commands.
Hints
Using Retrieved Archived Files
As long as a retrieved archived file is visible, you can inspect
using the TYPE or PRINT command, or list its specifications
using DIRECTORY-class commands. However, you cannot add to it
or change it (e.g. by using APPEND or an EDIT). To make
changes to a retrieved copy of an archived file, first use the
COPY command to copy it to a new specification. If you wish,
you can then request archival for this new file (using the
ARCHIVE command) and delete the old one (using the DELETE
command with the ARCHIVED subcommand). You can return an
(unchanged) on-line archived file to off-line status by using
the DELETE command with the CONTENTS-ONLY subcommand, or
withdraw archive status from the file (i.e. make it an ordinary
disk file) by using the DISCARD command.
Using Retrieved Non-archived files
As long as a retrieved non-archived file is visible, you can
use TOPS-20 commands with it as with any other disk file. The
only difference is that after any command that has changed the
file, the tape copy of the file is no longer valid. This means
that you cannot give the DELETE command with the CONTENTS-ONLY
subcommand to return the file to off-line status.
Special Cases
Implied Retrieval Requests
If your system has enabled the "automatic retrieval-wait"
feature (give the INFORMATION SYSTEM-STATUS command to find out
whether it has), and the SET RETRIEVAL-WAIT command is in
effect for your job, any command that attempts to use an off-
line file will create an automatic retrieval request for that
file. Under these conditions, commands such as TYPE or COPY
for which you specify off-line files will not be executed until
those files are retrieved. Implied retrieval requests are most
useful to batch jobs.
Related Commands
ARCHIVE for requesting archival
of specified files
CANCEL RETRIEVE for canceling retrieval
requests before are
filled
DELETE (with CONTENTS-ONLY subcommand) for deleting the disk
contents only of
retrieved (i.e. on-
line files
DIRECTORY (with OFFLINE subcommand) for listing the specs
of visible off-line
files
DIRECTORY (with OFFLINE and INVISIBLE subcommands) for listing the
specs of invisible
off-line files
DIRECTORY (with TIMES TAPE-WRITE subcommand) for finding out the
write date of the tape
copy of files
DISCARD for giving up the tape
copy of retrieved files
INFORMATION RETRIEVAL-REQUESTS for finding out the
status of retrieval
requests
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The RETRIEVE command does not affect memory and leaves your terminal at
TOPS-20 command level.
Examples
1. Retrieve an off-line file.
@RETRIEVE BRCHIVE.TXT
BRCHIVE.TXT.1 [OK]
@
2. Attempt to use a file. Upon discovering that it is off-line,
retrieve the file. When it has been restored to your directory
discard the tape copy of the file, and then have it printed on
your terminal.
@TYPE FILBRK.HLP
?File is off-line:FILBRK.HLP.1
@RETRIEVE FILBRK.HLP
FILBRK.HLP.1 [OK]
.
.
.
@DISCARD FILBRK.HLP
FILBRK.HLP.1 [OK]
@TYPE FILBRK.HLP
!THIS IS JUST A TEST
@
3. Get a listing of your archived files. Retrieve one that is
off line, examine it & return it to off-line status.
@DIRECTORY,
@@ARCHIVE
@@
US:<A-MOLE>
ARCHEK.FIL.1
ARCHIVE.ALSO.1;OFFLINE
.NOT.1;OFFLINE
.TOO.1;OFFLINE
.ZOTH.1
ARTEST.QUL.1
BRCHIVE.TST.1;OFFLINE
Total of 7 files
@RETRIEVE BRCHIVE TXT
BRCHIVE.TXT.1 [OK]
.
.
.
@TYPE BRCHIVE.TXT
!A TEST FILE
@DELETE BRCHIVE.TXT,
@@CONTENTS-ONLY
@@
US:<A-MOLE>BRCHIVE.TXT.1 [OK]
US:<A-MOLE>[1 page freed]
@
4. Get an inclusive listing of off-line files, including the date
the tape copy was written. Retrieve three of them, and check
the requests in the retrieval queue. Cancel 1 or the requests.
@DIRECTORY,
@@OFFLINE
@@TIMES TAPE-WRITE
@@
PS:<A-MOLE>
Tape-write
FACS.DIC.22;OFFLINE 27-Feb-85 11:12:06
FACSCURRENTSYSTEM.RNO.40;OFFLINE 15-Feb-85 14:09:08
FACSERRORS.CPY.1;OFFLINE 15-Feb-85 14:09:11
.RNO.21;OFFLINE 15-Feb-85 14:09:13
FACSNEWSYSTEM.RNO.124 27-Feb-85 11:12:08
Total of 5 files
@DIRECTORY,
@@OFFLINE
@@INVISIBLE
@@TIMES TAPE-WRITE
@@
PS:<A-MOLE>
Tape-write
HALE1.EDGES.2;OFFLINE 31-Aug-83 10:21:57
KIRSCH.EDGES.2;OFFLINE 31-Aug-83 10:22:09
LAP1.EDGES.2;OFFLINE 31-Aug-83 10:22:11
MAGISCAN.TXT.7;OFFLINE 27-Feb-85 11:12:11
PREWIT.EDGES.2;OFFLINE 31-Aug-83 10:22:19
RFELD.EDGES.2;OFFLINE 31-Aug-83 10:22:24
ROBRTS.EDGES.2;OFFLINE 31-Aug-83 10:22:35
SOBEL.EDGES.2;OFFLINE 31-Aug-83 10:22:37
Total of 8 files
@RETRIEVE FACENEWSYSTEM.RNO,LAP1.EDGES
FACSNEWSYSTEM.RNO.124 [OK]
LAP1.EDGES.2 [OK]
@INFORMATION RETRIEVAL-REQUESTS
RETRIEVAL QUEUE:
Name Req# Tape1 Tape2 User
---- ---- ----- ----- ----
FACSNE 507 5329 5520 A-MOLE
TESTIT 505 5307 3847 PANDORA
LAP1 508 2958 3847 A-MOLE
RATFOR 506 3485 3958 A-USER
There are 4 jobs in the Queue (None in progress)
@CANCEL RETRIEVE 507
[1 job canceled]
@
TDIRECTORY Command
Function
The TDIRECTORY (Time-ordered DIRECTORY) command prints a list of your
files, ordered by the date and time the files were most recently
written to the least recently written.
When used with magnetic tapes, the TDIRECTORY command is
equivalent to DIRECTORY for magnetic tapes.
Format
@TDIRECTORY (OF FILES) filespecs
filespecs is a list of the file specifications about which
you want to obtain the information. If you omit
the file specifications, the system prints
information about all the files in your connected
directory.
Hints
Giving the TDIRECTORY command is exactly like giving the
DIRECTORY command with the subcommands CHRONOLOGICAL (BY) WRITE,
REVERSE (SORTING), and TIMES (AND DATES OF) WRITE. Refer to the
DIRECTORY command for more information; you can give any of the
DIRECTORY subcommands with TDIRECTORY.
Operation
1. Type TDIR and press the ESC key; the system prints ECTORY
(OF FILES).
@TDIRECTORY (OF FILES)
2. Type (or use recognition on) the file specifications, then
press the RETURN key. The system prints the directory
information.
@TDIRECTORY (OF FILES) EDIT
<MCKIE>
WRITE
EDIT.EXE.1 17-NOV-75 16:32:48
@
Output
The system lists the files in the order of the most recently
written file to the least recently written file. The following
information is listed for each file:
1. Name, type, generation number,
2. The date and time the file was last written, and
3. A line summarizing the number of listed files (if greater
than 1).
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The TDIRECTORY command does not change any program in memory and
leaves your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Examples
The user obtains the information about all his files with the
name DUMPER.
@TDIRECTORY (OF FILES) DUMPER
<MCKIE>
WRITE
DUMPER.MEM.2 6-NOV-75 20:28:49
.TXT.4 6-NOV-75 19:18:30
.RNO.2 27-JUL-66 05:00:00
TOTAL OF 3 FILES
@
SAVE Command
Function
The SAVE command saves the program in memory in a disk file or on
magnetic tape.
Format
@SAVE (ON FILE) filespec (PAGES FROM) loc1 (TO) loc2, loc3, loc4, ...
where
filespec is the file spec under which you want to store the
program
Default filespec - program name.EXE
loc1 loc2, are pairs of octal numbers or symbolic expressions that
loc3 loc4, specify the span(s) of memory pages you want to save
Default loc1 loc2 - all assigned pages of memory
from 0 to the highest page
number of the highest
existing section
Hints
After giving the LOAD command to load an object program into
memory, you may give the SAVE command to store a copy of the
resulting executable program in a disk file or on magnetic tape.
To run the stored program, give the RUN command instead of the
EXECUTE command. You will notice that the RUN command is much
faster and cheaper than the EXECUTE command.
The file containing the copy of memory is called an EXE file
because its file type is .EXE and because it contains an
executable program.
Operation
1. Type SAVE and press the ESC key; the system prints (ON
FILE).
@SAVE (ON FILE)
2. Type (or use recognition on) the file specification, then
press the RETURN key. In using recognition on the file type,
the system defaults the output file type to .EXE. If you
want to use the default (the name of the current program and
the file type .EXE), press the RETURN key without typing a
file specification.
@SAVE (ON FILE) TEST.EXE.1 !New file! (PAGES FROM)
TEST.EXE.1 SAVED
@
The guide words (PAGES FROM) indicate a field which allows
you to save only a portion of memory. Generally you will not
have to use this portion of the command, so ignore it.
Errors
1. If you have no program in memory, the system ignores the
command and prints the message:
?No program
Load a program into memory using the LOAD command or the LINK
program.
Characteristics
The SAVE command does not change the contents of memory and
leaves your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Related Commands
GET for putting a saved into memory
LOAD for putting a source or object file into memory
RUN for running a saved program
START for starting the program in memory
Examples
The user saves his program using the default file specification.
@SAVE (ON FILE)
PTYCON.EXE.1 SAVED
@
The user saves his program, giving his own file specification.
@SAVE (ON FILE) FINLK.EXE.2
FINLK.EXE.2 SAVED
@
The user saves the DUMPER program on magnetic tape drive 1.
@SAVE (ON FILE) MTA1:
MTA1: DUMPER SAVED
@
TAKE Command
Function
The TAKE command tells ths system to process TOPS-20 commands stored
in the specified file.
Format
@TAKE (COMMANDS FROM) filespec1 (LOGGING OUTPUT ON) filespec2,
@@subcommand
where
filespec1 is the spec of the file containing the commands
to be processed
Default file type - .CMD
filespec2 is the name of the file or device you want to
receive any output of the commands. This field
will be removed in the next major release of
TOPS-20. Start to use the LOG-FILE subcommand
(see below)
Default filespec2 - TTY:
@@ means that, after a comma, you can type 1 of the
subcommands below.
subcommand can be 1 of these:
ALLOW which tells the current level
of TOPS-20, for the remainder
of the terminal session (not
merely the current command), to
continue processing a command
file if it encounters errors
DISALLOW which tells the current level
of TOPS-20, for the remainder
of the terminal session (not
merely the current command), to
ignore any remaining commands
in a command file if it
encounters an error in the file
Default
ECHO which tells the system to print
(on you terminal or in the
specified file) the commands
that it carries out while
executing the current TAKE
command. Ordinarily only the
output, if any, produced by the
commands is printed.
NOECHO which tells the system not to
print the commands
that it carries out while
executing the current TAKE
command. A final message is
sent, however, indicating
whether all the commands were
executed. See also Hints -
Suppressing the Final Message
Default
LOG-FILE filespec which tells the system to save
the output from the current TAKE
command in the specified file.
Note that use of this subcommand
in place of "filespec2" is
optional in TOPS-20 V5;
"filespec2" will be removed in a
future software release, and use
of LOG-FILE will then be
required.
Output
The output from a TAKE command consists of the output for each command
in the command file you specify as argument, followed by the message
"End of filespec" that indicates successful execution of all the
commands in the file.
Characteristics
Running Programs From a Command File
If you put commands that run programs (including the PUSH
command) int a command file, and these programs ask for
arguments, you must be ready to type in these arguments at your
terminal. Only TOPS-20 commands and command arguments can be
put into a command file executed by the TAKE command.
Hints
Suppressing the Final Message
If you want to suppress the final message that indicates
successful execution of a command file by TAKE, give a TAKE
command with no arguments as the last line of your command
file.
Special Cases
Nested TAKE Commands
In the case of nested TAKE commands (those given as commands
within command files), the destination for output of commands
given in an inner command file will default to that specified
or assumed for the output of commands given in the nearest
surrounding command file.
Effect on Memory & Terminal
The TAKE command affects memory and your terminal according to the
commands stored in the command file you specify as argument.
Related Commands
INFORMATION commands (when put into a command file) for tracing the
progress of TAKE
LOGIN for logging in; reads LOGIN.CMD then COMAND.CMD
in your log-in directory.
PUSH for obtaining a new level of TOPS-20; reads
COMAND.CMD in your log-in directory.
SUBMIT for processing command files that run programs
and contain program commands as well as TOPS-20
commands; reads BATCH.CMD, then COMAND.CMD in
your log-in directory.
Examples
1. Process a command file.
@TAKE BACKUP.CMD
End of BACKUP.CMD.1
@
2. Create a command file to report system statistics, then give
the TAKE command with this filename as argument; send the output
to the line printer. Check for this listing as is it being
printed.
Put the following lines into file STATUS.CMD using an editor:
INFORMATION DISK-USAGE
INFORMATION MONITOR-STATISTICS
INFORMATION SYSTEM-STATUS
INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE
SYSTAT ALL
$
@TAKE STATUS LPT:
End of STATUS.CMD.1
@INFORMATION OUTPUT-REQUESTS/USER
Printer Queue:
Job Name Req# Limit User
-------- ---- ----- ----
EXEC 507 27 A-MOLE
There is 1 Job in the Queue (None in Progress)
@
UNDELETE Command
Function
The UNDELETE command restores previously DELETEd disk files to
their normal status.
Format
@UNDELETE (FILES) filespecs
filespecs is a single file specification or a string of file
specifications (separated by commas) that indicate
the files to be undeleted. If you do not give a
generation number, all the files with the
specified name and type will be undeleted.
Hints
If you use the default for the UNDELETE command, the system
undeletes all the available generations of that file. Thus,
after the UNDELETE command you may have more than one generation
of a file. The next time you create a new generation of that
file or append to the highest generation, the system deletes all
but one (or the number specified by your file-retention-count, if
it is different from one) generation(s) of that file. (To change
the file-retention-count, refer to the SET command; to print the
file-retention-count of a file, give the FDIRECTORY command.) Be
sure that a file you need is not accidentally deleted (and
consequently expunged).
Operation
1. Type UNDE and press the ESC key; the system prints LETE
(FILES).
@UNDELETE (FILES)
2. Type (or use recognition on) the file specifications you want
undeleted, then press the RETURN key. The system prints a
line for each file, indicating whether it can be undeleted or
not.
@UNDELETE (FILES) T.FIL.*
T.FIL.2 [OK]
T.FIL.3 [OK]
@
Errors
1. If any one of the files you are trying to undelete does not
exist, the system ignores the entire command and prints one
of the following messages:
?File not found
?No such file type
?No such generation number
Characteristics
The UNDELETE command prints no error message when it cannot
restore a set of files you have specified with the wildcard
construction.
The UNDELETE command does not change a program in memory and
leaves your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Restrictions
You cannot undelete files that have been expunged (i.e., actually
removed from disk storage). At no time does the system guarantee
that you can undelete a previously deleted file - it is a feature
available only when there is enough system disk space available.
If your attempt to UNDELETE a file fails, ask the operator (via
the PLEASE program) to restore the file from the system backup
tapes.
If MAIL.TXT is deleted, its contents are immediately expunged.
Therefore, a subsequent UNDELETE command to MAIL.TXT will return
the filename but none of its contents.
Special cases
Restoring Files Deleted With CONTENTS-ONLY Subcommand
Any files deleted by a DELETE command with s CONTENTS-ONLY
subcommand are immediately expunged. You must use the RETRIEVE
command to restore these to disk.
Related Commands
DELETE for deleting files
DIRECTORY-class commands for obtaining lists of deleted files
(with DELETED subcommand)
EXPUNGE for permanently erasing deleted files
RETRIEVE for restoring off-line files to disk
Examples
The user undeletes a single file.
@UNDELETE (FILES) OUTPUT.TXT.4
OUTPUT.TXT.4 [OK]
@
The user undeletes all the files with the name T.
@UNDELETE (FILES) T.*
T.MEM.4 [OK]
T.RNO.2 [OK]
T.TXT.5 [OK]
@
DISMOUNT Command
Function
The DISMOUNT command gives up access to the specified structure or tape
set.
Format
@DISMOUNT medium (NAME) dev: /switch(es)
where
medium is one of the following:
STRUCTURE - for dismounting file structures (disk packs)
TAPE - for dismounting mag tapes
dev: is either the structure identification (or alias), or a
logical name referring to the tape set, e.g. the tape
setname specified in your previous MOUNT command, or a
logical device name of the form MTn:. It must be of 39
or fewer alphanumeric characters & must be terminated by
a colon.
/switches are keywords chosen from the list below, indicating
your choice of ISMOUNT command options.
DISMOUNT Command Switches
(for use with the argument STRUCTURE only)
/NOWAIT tells the system to return your terminal to TOPS-20
command level as soon as you give the DISMOUNT command
& to send a message to your terminal when the request
has been processed. Otherwise, your terminal waits for
the message.
/REMARK:"remark"
sends the specified remark (up to 119 characters, which
must be enclosed in quotation marks (" ")) to the
operator when he/she is notified of your request. The
remark is sent only if you also include the /REMOVE
switch.
/REMOVE tells the operator that you want him/her to physically
dismount the structure from the drive; makes the
structure unavailable for further mount requests. See
also Hints - Action of DISMOUNT Command including
/REMOVE Switch, below.
/STRUCTURE-ID:structure identification
gives the name of the structure as recorded in the
disk(s); used when you give some alias as argument dev:,
above. See Hints - Using the /STRUCTURE-ID Switch
below.
Characteristics
Action of DISMOUNT STRUCTURE Command
Ordinary DISMOUNT STRUCTURE
The DISMOUNT STRUCTURE command reduces by 1 the mount
count of the specified structure (i.e. the number of
users who have given a MOUNT but not a DISMOUNT command
for the structure) if you had given a previous MOUNT
command for it. An ordinary DISOMUNT STRUCTURE command
does not withdraw the structure from system use.
Including /REMOVE Switch
If you include the /REMOVE switch when giving the
DISMOUNT STRUCTURE command, the specified structure is
made unavailable for further mount requests. The
operator is informed of your dismount request & any
further action depends on him/her. If he/she denies
your request, the structure is again made available to
other users; if he/she grants your request, the
structure remains unavailable for further mount requests
& is taken offline & physically removed. Under extreme
conditions the operator may take a structure off line &
physically remove it even though some users have not
dismounted the structure. Before doing so, he/she will
usually send a message to such users to allow them to
close their files.
Action of DISMOUNT TAPE Command
The DISMOUNT TAPE command unloads the currently mounted volume
of the specified tape set (i.e. rewinds it completely onto its
source reel) so that it can be physically removed by the
operator, & returns the tape drive to the pool of available
resources. (Note that if the /NOUNLOAD switch was given in your
original MOUNT command, no volumes are unloaded by the system or
removed by the operator, even after your DISMOUNT command is
completed.) If a logical name (e.g the setname of the tape set)
is used in the DISMOUNT command to specifiy the tape set, the
system also withdraws the definition of the logical name. Use
DISMOUNT TAPE only for tape drives having device names of the
form MTn:, i.e. drives obtained using the MOUNT command. Use
UNLOAD to unload tapes from drives having device names of the
form MTAn:
Hints
Omitting "medium" argument
If the dev: argument of your DISMOUNT command will be unambig-
uous (i.e. you do not have both a structure and a tape set
mounted using the same device name), you need not specify the
medium. The shortened command, DISMOUNT dev:/switch(es), is
sufficient.
Using the /STRUCTURE-ID Switch
The /STRUCTURE-ID switch gives the name of the structure as
recorded in the disk(s) of the pack itself, where it is used by
the system for identification. You may use this switch to
dismount a structure that had been mounted using an alias
different from its structure identification. (See Hints - Using
the /STRUCTURE-ID Switch, in the MOUNT command description.)
Using INFORMATION VOLUMES before DISMOUNT TAPE
If you give the INFORMATION VOLUMES command before dismounting
the tape set, the system will respond with a list of the volids
for mounted volumes, including volids for any volumes newly
added to the set. You should keep an up-to-date record of these
for use with further MOUNT commands.
Effect on Memory & Terminal
The DISMOUNT command does not affect memory &, if you have included the
/NOWAIT switch, leaves your terminal at TOPS-20 command level. If you
have not given the /NOWAIT switch, your terminal waits until the system
has processed your request, or until you give a CTRL/C to return to
TOPS-20 command level. This CTRL/C does not cancel your request.
Related Commands
CANCEL for withdrawing mount requests before they are processed
I AVAIL DEV for finding which tape drives (if any) have been
assigned to your job
I MOU for finding out information about pending mount requests
for structures & tape sets & currently mounted tape sets
I STRUCTURE for finding out info about the specified mounted
structure, including its mount count & the names of
users who have given the MOUNT, CONNECT, & ACCESS
commands for the structure
I VOLUMES for finding out the volids of all mounted volumes
(including newly created volumes)of a tape set
Examples
1. Dismount a mag tape set you have been using.
@DISMOUNT TAPE MT1:
[Tape dismounted]
@
2. DISMOUNT the same tape set, referring to it by its setname.
@DISMOUNT TAPE LAT:
[Tape dismounted, logical name LAT: deleted]
@
3. Find out the volids of your tape set before dismounting it, in
case the tape set has been extended to another volume.
@INFORMATION VOLUMES MT2:
Volumes of tape set LAT: LAT,00J16
@DISMOUNT TAPE MT2:
[Tape dismounted]
@
4. Find out if you have any mount requests pending, or any
currently mounted tape sets. Dismount a currently mounted tape
set (these display the actual device name in the column headed
"Status").
@INFORMATION MOUNT-REQUESTS/USER
Tape/Disk Mount Queue:
Volume Status Type Write Req Name Req# Job# User
------ ------ ---- ----- -------- ---- ---- ----
UNLBLD MTA0 Tape Locked UNLBLD 128 55 A-MOLE
There is 1 Request in the Queue
@DISMOUNT TAPE UNLBLD:
[Tape dismounted, logical name UNLBLD: deleted]
@
MOUNT Command
Function
The MOUNT command requests that the specified file structure or
magnetic tape set be made available for your job's use.
Format
@MOUNT medium (NAME) dev: /switch(es)
where
medium is one of the following:
STRUCTURE - for mounting file
structures (disk packs)
TAPE - for mounting magnetic
tapes
dev: is either the structure identification (or
alias), or the tape setname. It must be of
six or fewer alphanumeric characters and must
be terminated by a colon.
/switches are keywords, chosen from the list below,
indicating your choice of MOUNT command options
Summary of MOUNT Command Switches (defaults as indicated)
/CHECK-SETNAME
/DENSITY: 200
556
800
1600
6250
SYSTEM-DEFAULT
/DRIVE-TAPE:7-TRACK
9-TRACK
/LABEL-TYPE:ANSI
BYPASS
EBCDIC
TOPS-20
UNLABELED
/NEW
/NOUNLOAD
/NOWAIT
/OPERATOR
/PROTECTION:octal protection code Default code - 770000
/READ-ONLY Default - /READ-ONLY unless /NEW or
/SCRATCH specified
/REMARK:119-character remark
/SCRATCH
NUMBER number
/START:VOLID volid Default number - 1
/STRUCTURE-ID:structure identification
/VOLIDS:list of volids
/WRITE-ENABLED Default - /WRITE-ENABLED if /NEW or
/SCRATCH specified
The switches /NOWAIT and /REMARK are useful with either the STRUCTURE
or TAPE medium, while /STRUCTURE-ID is for STRUCTURE only; the other
switches are for TAPE only.
MOUNT Command Switches
/CHECK-SETNAME ensures that the setname of the mounted
tapes matches the setname you specify
as the "dev:" argument to the MOUNT
command; otherwise an error will be
generated. For labeled tapes only.
/DENSITY: 200 specifies the density, in bits per inch,
556 at which the tape set is to be read or
800 written. Densities 200 and 556 are for
1600 unlabeled tapes only. SYSTEM-DEFAULT,
6250 one of the values shown (usually 1600),
SYSTEM-DEFAULT is established at system start-up time.
/DRIVE-TYPE:7-TRACK specifies the type of drive on which the
9-TRACK tape set is to be mounted. Labeled
tapes must be mounted on 9-track tape
drives.
/LABEL-TYPE:ANSI tells the system to read and write the
BYPASS tape set according to the specified
EBCDIC label standard: ANSI; EBCDIC - IBM types
TOPS-20 (in read-only mode); TOPS-20 - a
UNLABELED superset of ANSI used in TOPS-20 systems
UNLABELED - for unlabeled tapes only.
BYPASS (for privileged users only) lets
you read and write any tape, labeled or
unlabeled, without any label processing.
/NEW tells the system that you are creating
a new file set on an existing tape set,
whose setname is then changed to be the
name you specify as the dev: argument
to the MOUNT command. (if the tape set
has more than one volume, remember to
specifiy their volids using the /VOLIDS
or /OPERATOR switch.) The /READ-ONLY
and /CHECK-SETNAME switches are ignored
if present, and /WRITE-ENABLED is
assumed. Do not give the /START switch
if you give /NEW.
/NOUNLOAD asks the system not to unload a
volume (reel) of tape from its tape
drive when the drive is released by
a volume switch (change of volumes
required by a read or write operation)
or DISMOUNT command. Use this switch
to facilitate processing when
sufficient drives are available.
/NOWAIT tells the system to return your
terminal to TOPS-20 command level
as soon as you give the MOUNT
command, and to send a message to
your terminal when the request has
been processed. Otherwise, your
terminal waits for the message.
/OPERATOR asks the operator to specify to the
system the volids of the tape set
you wish to mount. Do not use if
you have given the /VOLIDS switch.
/PROTECTION:code specifies a 6-digit octal
protection code for new volumes of
tape written during the current
mount request. The owner always
has full access to his tapes, so
the first two digits are always
interpreted as "77"; also, user
groups and directory groups have no
effect on tape access, so the
middle two digits are always
interpreted as "00". Therefore,
although six digits can be
specified, only the last two digits
affect the tape's protection code.
(If you specify only two digits,
these will be used as the last two
digits of the protection code.)
These two digits should be the sum
of the values corresponding to the
modes of access you want to allow,
chosen from the following list:
40 - read files in the file set
10 - overwrite or modify files
in the file set
04 - append files to the end of
the file set
For tapes of label-type TOPS-20
only.
Default code - 770000
/READ-ONLY ensures that all volumes in the
tape set will be mounted without
write rings, to prevent accidental
erasures
Default except when /NEW or
/SCRATCH is specified
/REMARK:"remark" sends the specified remark (of 119
or fewer characters, which must be
enclosed in quotation marks (" ))
to the operator when he is notified
of your mount request. For
structures, the remark will be sent
only if the structure must be put
on line or physically mounted to
satisfy your mount request.
/SCRATCH same as /NEW, except that the
volumes in the file set you create
will be drawn from the pool of
scratch tapes (tapes not presently
owned by a particular user), rather
than from volumes you specify. Use
this switch to create a new file
sent when you are not supplying the
volumes of tape to be used.
/START:VOLID volid tells the system which volume
(reel) of tape to mount first when
satisfying your request. (You must
also give the /VOLIDS switch,
specifying the group of volumes you
will be using.) Use the NUMBER
argument to give the order of this
volume within the group (e.g., 1
for first, 2 for second), or give
the VOLID argument to repeat the
volid explicity. You can use this
switch to save time and expense
when you know which volume you will
be using first.
Default - NUMBER 1
/STRUCTURE-ID:structure
identification gives the name of the structure as
recorded in the disk(s); used when
you gave an alias different from
the structure identification as
argument "dev:", above. See Hints-
Using the /STRUCTURE-ID Switch,
below. For priveleged users only
/VOLIDS:volid, volid,... specifies the volids (volume
identifiers) of the volumes (reels)
of tape you want to access. These
must be consecutive volumes, usually
of the tape set specified as the
"dev:" argument to the MOUNT command.
Although you need not specify every
volume in the set, any volume not
specified will not be accessible.
Do not use this switch if you have
given the /OPERATOR switch. See also
Characteristics - Using the /VOLIDS
Switch, below.
/WRITE-ENABLED ensures that all volumes in the
tape set will be mounted with write
rings
Default when /NEW or /SCRATCH
is specified
Characteristics
Action of MOUNT STRUCTURE Command
If the Structure Has Already Been Mounted
If the structure for which you give the MOUNT command
is currently mounted, the system simply increases by 1
the mount count, i.e., the number of users who have
given the MOUNT but not the DISMOUNT command for the
structure, and returns your terminal to TOPS-20 command
level. A structure is not ordinarily dismounted until
its mount count is 0.
If the Structure Has Not Yet Been Mounted
If the structure for which you give the MOUNT command
is not currently mounted, your request stays in the
mount request queue until it is acted upon by the
operator or until you cancel the request.
Setnames (File Set Identifiers)
The setname, or file set identifier of a set of tapes, is
part of the label information written into each volume of
the set. It is rewritten every time the /NEW or /SCRATCH
switch is included in a MOUNT command. The "dev:" argument
of the MOUNT command becomes the setname in this case. If
you add volumes to an existing tape set, the system uses the
setname of the old volumes as the setname of the new ones.
Using the /CHECK-SETNAME Switch
If you give the MOUNT command to use an existing file
set (i.e., you do not specify the /NEW or /SCRATCH
switch), you can give the /CHECK-SETNAME switch to be
sure that the setname written on the tapes matches the
setname you specify as the "dev:" argument to the MOUNT
command. However, because more than one set of tapes
can have the same setname, the /CHECK-SETNAME switch
does not ensure that the correct tape set will be
mounted. For information about ensuring that the correct
tapes are mounted, see Characteristics - Using the
/VOLIDS Switch, below.
Volids (Volume Identifiers)
The volid, or volume identifier of a volume (reel) of
labeled tape, is part of the label information written into
each volume of tape. It is written only once, by the operator
during the tape's initialization procedure, and is not changed
during the life of the tape. (You should also affix a paper
label displaying the volid onto each reel of tape.) You can
get a list of volids for previously specified or newly
written volumes in any mounted tape set by giving the
INFORMATION VOLUMES command for that set.
Using the /VOLIDS switch
If you give the MOUNT command to use an existing
multi-volume tape set (i.e., you do not specify the
/SCRATCH switch), you can give the volid of each volume
you want to use an argument to the /VOLIDS switch.
The system ensures that the correct volumes of a
labeled tape will be mounted for your job as long as
you use the /VOLIDS switch to specify them. (If the
tape set does not consist of labeled tape, the system
does not ensure that the correct tapes are mounted.)
The volids must represent consecutive volumes and must
be specified in the order written (oldest first). Note
that in general you cannot rely on any apparent
alphanumerical order when specifying the volids but
must maintian your own list of the volids in each tape
set. (See Hints - Keeping Track of Volids, below.)
You need not specify every volid in the tape set, but
any volume not specified will not be accessible through
the current MOUNT command. See also Characteristics -
Using the /OPERATOR Switch, and Special Cases - Single-
volume Tape Sets, below.
Using the /OPERATOR switch
You can use the /OPERATOR switch instead of the /VOLIDS
switch when asking the system to mount a multi-volume
set of tapes. The /OPERATOR switch sends a message to
the operator asking him to specify the volid of each
volume himself. You must be sure to supply the
operator with a list of the volids you want him to
specify before giving a MOUNT command that contains the
/OPERATOR switch.
Hints
Checking whether Operator is present
You can give the INFORMATION SYSTEM-STATUS command to find
out whether the operator is in attendance and can process
your mount request. Even if the operator is not in
attendance, your request remains valid until he returns and
deals with it in some way.
Using the /STRUCTURE-ID Switch
The /STRUCTURE-ID switch (available only to users with
enabled Wheel or Operator capabilities) gives the name
of the structure as recorded in the disk(s) of the
structure itself, where it is used by the system for
identification. Be sure that the structure identification
is also written with a felt-tip marker on the upper
surface of each disk pack, and on a gummed label on the
pack cover. Unless you give this switch, the system
mounts the structure with its structure identification as
alias. (The alias is the name you use when specifying
the structure in file specifications and commands, the
INFORMATION STRUCTURE and INFORMATION AVAILABLE DEVICES
commands list structures by alias only.) The /STRUCTURE-
ID switch allows an enabled Wheel or Operator to mount
a structure under a name different from the one recorded
in the structure. Use this switch for mounting a structure
whose structure identification is the same as the alias
of a currently mounted structure. In such cases give the
MOUNT STRUCTURE command with any unique alias as the "dev:"
argument, and specify the structure identification with the
/STRUCTURE-ID switch. In subsequent file specifications and
commands referring to the structure, use the alias only.
Dummy "dev:" Arguments for Mounting Tapes
If you want to use different tape sets on successive
runnings of a single program, you can refer to those tape
sets as a logical name in the program, and use this logical
name as the "dev:" argument of your MOUNT command when
mounting tapes. As long as you also specify the volid of
each volume of tape with the /VOLIDS switch (or use the
/OPERATOR switch to ask the operator to do so), you need
not give the actual setname of the tape set as the "dev:"
argument to the MOUNT command. The system considers the
"dev:" argument you supply to be a logical name defined
as the mounted tape set. Therefore, your program can
access the tape set using this logical name.
Keeping Track of Volids
Unless your site has a tape cataloging facility, you must
keep your own record of the volids in each of your tape
sets. After creating a file set on a new tape set, i.e.,
one not previously owned by you (by giving the MOUNT
command and including the /SCRATCH switch), you should
give the INFORMATION VOLUMES command for the set before
giving the DISMOUNT command. The system will respond by
printing a list at your terminal of the volids of all
volumes in the tape set. Similarly, if you mount an old
tape set and then perform write operations, you should
give INFORMATION VOLUMES before giving DISMOUNT to learn
the volids of any volumes added to the set. Keep an
ordered list of these volids in a disk file in your
directory, for use in subsequent MOUNT commands when you
give the /VOLIDS switch.
Special Cases
Single-volume Tape Sets
If the tape set you want to mount consists of a single
volume of tape, you need not give the /VOLIDS or /OPERATOR
switch to specify its volid. You can give the volid as the
"dev:" argument to the MOUNT command.
Structures Unavailable for Mounting
If the operator has given the OPR program command, SET
STRUCTURE UNAVAILABLE for a specified structure, the system
sends an error message including the phrase, "Structure
unavailable for mounting" in response to subsequent MOUNT
commands for the structure.
Restrictions
Using SET TAPE Commands
The TOPS-20 SET TAPE DENSITY and SET TAPE PARITY commands
are applicable to unlabeled tapes only (but see also
Warnings - /DENSITY Switch Has Limited Effect for Unlabeled
Tapes, below). The SET TAPE FORMAT and SET TAPE RECORD-
LENGTH commands are applicable to both labeled and unlabeled
tapes, but to labeled tapes only if they are mounted using
the /LABEL-TYPE:ANSI or /LABEL-TYPE:TOPS-20 switch.
In addition, the files that you read from or write to such
a labeled type must be in 36-bit format, and they must
not have the ;FORMAT attribute as part of their specification.
Warnings
POP Command Cancels Unsatisfied Mount Requests
If you have given a PUSH command to obtain a new level of
TOPS-20 and then give a MOUNT command within that new level,
a subsequent POP command will cancel your mount request.
However, if the specified structure or tape set has already
been mounted, it will remain mounted despite your POP
command.
/DENSITY Switch Has Limited Effect for Unlabeled Tapes
The /DENSITY switch, when given in a MOUNT command for an
unlabeled tape, ensures only that your tape set will be
mounted on a drive that supports the specified density.
It does not ensure that the tape set will be read or
written at this density. To specify the density at which
unlabeled tapes are to be read and written, give the
SET TAPE DENSITY command.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The MOUNT command does not affect memory, and, if you have
included the /NOWAIT switch, leaves your terminal at TOPS-20
command level. If you have not given the /NOWAIT switch,
your terminal waits until the system has processed your
request, or until you give CTRL/C to return to TOPS-20
command level. This CTRL/C does not cancel your request.
Related Commands
CANCEL for withdrawing mount requests
before they are processed.
DISMOUNT for giving up access to a
particular tape drive or
disk drive
INFORMATION AVAILABLE DEVICES for finding out just the names
of structures available for
mounting (these are listed
after DSK AND PS, and before
the line printers (LPT, LPTO,
etc.))
Examples
1. Mount a structure (is is already physically mounted).
@MOUNT STRUCTURE MELON:
Structure MELON: mounted
@
2. Mount a structure that is not yet physically mounted. After
completing the command, give CTRL/Cs to return to TOPS-20
command level.
@MOUNT STRUCTURE CONAN:
[Mount Request CONAN: Queued, Request-ID 205]
[MOUNT request remaining in queue]
^C
@
3. Mount a structure, then give CTRL/Cs to return to TOPS-20
command level and cancel the mount request.
@MOUNT STRUCTURE CONAN:
[Mount Request CONAN: Queued, Request-ID 136]
[MOUNT request remaining in queue]
^C
@
[1 mount request canceled]
@
4. Find out what structures are available for mounting (these are
listed after DSK and PS and before the line printers), and
mount one of these.
@INFORMATION AVAILABLE DEVICES
Devices available to this job:
DSK, PS, US, MELON, HCCP, LPT, LPT0, LPT1, PLPT1, CDR, PCDR0, CDP,
PCDP0, FE0-15, PTY15-61, NUL, PLT, PLT0, DCN, SRV
Devices assigned to/opened by this job: TTY20, PTY15
@MOUNT STRUCTURE MELON: /NOWAIT
Structure MELON: mounted
@
SET LATE-CLEAR-TYPEAHEAD Command
Function
@SET LATE-CLEAR-TYPEAHEAD
Instructs the system to disregard all terminal
input made aftera line that causes an error &
before the next prompt. Check the setting for
your current level of TOPS-20 with INFO COMMAND-
LEVEL.
@SET NO LATE-CLEAR-TYPEAHEAD
Instructs the system to accept terminal input
made after an error message is sent to your
terminal & before the next prompt. Check the
setting for your current level of TOPS-20 with
INFORMATION COMMAND-LEVEL
Default
SET DIRECTORY Command
Function
@SET DIRECTORY ? one of the following:
ACCOUNT-DEFAULT ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES
FILE-PROTECTION-DEFAULT GENERATION-RETENTION-COUNT-DEFAULT
NO OFFLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT
ONLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT PASSWORD
PROTECTION
SET DIRECTORY ACCOUNT-DEFAULT Command
Function
Sets the account of 39 or fewer characters to charge for your terminal
session whenever you log in to this directoru without specifying an
account. Check with INFO DIRECTORY.
Format
@DIRECTORY ACCOUNT-DEFAULT dev:<directory> default account
PASSWORD: password
SET FILE EXPIRED Command
Function
@SET FILE EXPIRED filespecs
Establishes today as the expiration date for
the specified on-line files. Check with
DIRECTORY.
SET DIRECTORY FILE-PROTECTION-DEFAULT Command
Function
@SET DIRECTORY FILE-PROTECTION-DEFAULT (OF DIRECTORY) dev:<directory>
(TO) octal code protection number
PASSWORD:password
Sets a protection default on the files created in the
directory. This default allows access to these files
according to the protection you give.
Default code - 777700
SET DIRECTORY GENERATION-RETENTION-COUNT-DEFAULT Command
Function
@SET DIRECTORY GENERATION-RETENTION-COUNT-DEFAULT (OF DIRECTORY)
dev:<directory> (TO) a number
PASSWORD:password
Specifies how many generations of each file are to be
retained. The valid numbers are between 0 and 63, where 0
means an infinite number. The default is 1.
SET FILE ACCOUNT Command
Function
@SET FILE ACCOUNT (OF FILES) filespec (TO) account name
Charges the accounts of the specified files to the given
account. Chech with FDIRECTORY.
SET DIRECTORY ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES Command
Function
@SET DIRECTORY ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES dev:directory
Causes on-line files that have expired to be automatically
archived. Check with INFORMATION DIRECTORY.
@SET DIRECTORY NO ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES dev:directory
Prevents on-line files that have expired from being
automatically archived.
Default
SET DIRECTORY OFFLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT Command
Function
DIRECTORY OFFLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT dev:<directory> data or +n
Sets the tape expiration date for files that are to go off-line
because of archiving or migration. If you specify "+n", the
expiration date is n days from the date the files were moved
off line
Default n - 90
SET DIRECTORY ONLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT Command
Function
DIRECTORY ONLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT dev:<directory> date or +n
Sets the disk expiration date for files that are to be created
in the directory. If you specify "+n", the expiration date is
n days from the creation date.
Default n - 60
SET DIRECTORY PASSWORD Command
Function
@SET DIRECTORY PASSWORD (OF DIRECTORY) dev:<directory>
OLD PASSWORD: old password
NEW PASSWORD: new password
RETYPE NEW PASSWORD: new password
Allows you to change the password of the directory. Be
sure you remember the new password. Check with INFO DIRECTORY.
SET DIRECTORY PROTECTION Command
Function
@SET DIRECTORY PROTECTION dev:<directory> octal protection code
PASSWORD: password
Establishes for the directory a protection code constructed
(by addition) from the values shown below. Check with INFO
DIRECTORY.
77 full access to the directory
40 access to files in the directory (including expunging individual
files), consistent with the file protection of the files.
10 connect to the directory without giving a password, undelete
files, expunge the entire directory, & change times, dates, &
accounting info for files. All other access is governed by the
file protection of each file.
04 create files in the directory
00 no access to the directory
Default code - 777700
SET ENTRY-VECTOR Command
Function
@SET ENTRY-VECTOR octal or symbolic octal or symbolic length
memory location from 1 to 777
Lets you change the entry vector of the program
in memory. Check the current setting with
INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE
Default length - 1
SET FILE Command
Function
$SET FILE ? one of the following:
ACCOUNT EPHEMERAL
EXPIRED GENERATION-RETENTION-COUNT
INVISIBLE NO
OFFLINE-EXPIRATION ONLINE-EXPIRATION
PROHIBIT PROTECTION
RESIST VISIBLE
SET FILE GENERATION-RETENTION-COUNT Command
Function
@SET FILE GENERATION-RETENTION-COUNT (OF FILES) FILESPECS (TO) n
Sets the number of generations of a file that will be
kept.
Default n - 1
SET FILE PROTECTION Command
Function
@SET FILE PROTECTION filespecs octal protection code
Sets, for the specified files, a protection code constructed
(by addition) from the values shown below. Check with
FDIRECTORY.
77 full access to the file
40 read the file
20 write & delete the file
10 execute the program conatined in the file
04 append to the file
00 no access to the file
Default code - 777700
SET TRAP Command
Function
@SET TRAP ? one of the following:
FILE-OPENINGS JSYS NO PROCEED
SET FILE VISIBLE Command
Function
@SET FILE VISIBLE filespecs
Makes the specified file accessible to all
programs and TOPS-20 commands
Default
@SET FILE INVISIBLE filespecs
Makes the specified file inaccessible to
most programs & TOPS-20 commands.
SET FILE RESIST Command
Function
@SET FILE RESIST filespecs
Offers nonprivileged users limited protection
against migration. The specified files will be
forced off-line only when absolutely necessary.
@SET FILE NO RESIST filespecs
Cancels the effect of the SET FILE
RESIST command. This switch allows the
system to move the specified files to
off-line storage without hesitating.
Default
SET LOCATION Command
Function
@SET LOCATION node name::
Sets the DECnet network node at which your job
is considered to be running. Your PLEASE
requests and MOUNT command requests are sent to
this node, as well as any line printer output
not directed elsewhere (e.g. by the /DESTINATION
-NODE switch). You must terminate the node name
with 2 colons (::). Check available nodes with
INFO DECNET, & check your current setting (if
different from your host node (log-in node))
with INFO JOB-STATUS.
Default node name - your host node
SET TRAP JSYS Command
Function
@SET TRAP JSYS /ALL
name
number
Causes trapping to ocuur for all or for the
specified JSYS. You can specify a JSYS by its
name or its octal value. Check with INFO
PROGRAM-STATUS.
@SET NO TRAP JSYS/ALL
name
number
Nullifies the effects of the SET TRAP JSYS
command, disablimg the TOPS-20 feature that
causes traps to occur whan a JSYS is executed.
Default
SET ALERT Command
Function
@SET ALERT causes the system to buzz your terminal and type
date & time a line at the specified date & time. This line
time contains the time of day & your message. If
+hh:mm the SET AUTOMATIC command is in effect, this
day of week message is sent no matter what you are doing
TODAY at the terminal. Otherwise, you are alerted
only when your terminal is about to type a TOPS
20 prompt. ALert settings are erased when you
log out. Therefore, you should enter this
command in your COMAND.CMD file if you want to
be alerted in the distant future or on a regular
basis. Check the setting of this command with
INFORMATION ALERTS.
@SET NO ALERT date/time
Removes settings that were established with the
SET ALERT command. You can specify date & time
in the same formats as with SET ALERT. Also
you can enter BEFORE or AFTER the date & time to
indicate a time period in which alerts are to be
suppressed. If you specify no dat or time
argument, all alert settings are erased. This
command takes effect when you log out.
Default
SET AUTOMATIC Command
Function
@SET AUTOMATIC (MAIL AND ALERT CHECKS)
Allows you to be notified by the system (as a
result of a SET ALERT or SET MAIL-WATCH command)
whether or not your job is at TOPS-20 command
level. Every 5 minutes, the system checks to
see if you should be notified. It is
recommended that you enter this command in the
COMAND.CMD file to ensure coverage from the time
you log in.
@SET NO AUTOMATIC
Causes you to be alerted by the system (as a
result of a SET ALERT or SET MAIL-WATCH command)
only when your terminal is about to type a TOPS-
20 prompt.
Default
SET CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY Command
Function
@SET CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY (OF PROGRAM)
Allows any program executed at the current
command level to handle CTRL/C interrupts itself
You cannot use this command in a batch job.
Check the current setting with INFORMATION
PROGRAM-STATUS.
Default
@SET NO CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY
Removes the ability of programs at the current
level of TOPS-20 to prevent your terminal from
returning to the TOPS-20 command processor
whenever you type a CTRL/C. Check the setting
for your current level of TOPS-20 with
INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS.
SET DEFAULT Command
Function
@SET DEFAULT COMPILE-SWITCHES
PLOT /switch(es)
PRINT /switch(es)
SUBMIT /switch(es)
TAKE ALLOW
DISALLOW
ECHO
NO ECHO
Sets up, as default global arguments to the command selected, the
arguments you specify. These arguments are switches, except for SET
DEFAULT TAKE, which allows arguments ALLOW/DISALLOW (errors during the
execution of a command file), ECHO, & NO ECHO. You can specify any
switch valid for the given command, preceding each switch with a slash
(/). For COMPILE-SWITCHES you must precede the switches with the file
type (exluding the period (.)) to which you want the switches to apply;
then the switches behave as if typed immediately after each file of this
type. Check current settings with INFORMATION DEFAULTS.
@SET NO DEFAULT COMPILE-SWITCHES file type
PLOT
PRINT
SUBMIT
Nullifies all default arguments (established with a previous SET DEFAULT
command) for the indicated command.
SET MAIL-WATCH Command
Function
@SET MAIL-WATCH user name
Checks the MAIL file for the specified user
immediately & every 5 minutes whenever your
terminal is about to type a TOPS-20 prompt,
& sends a message notifying you that the user
has new mail if this file contains unread mail.
If the SET AUTOMATIC command is in effect, this
message is sent no matter what you are doing at
your terminal.
Default user name - your user name
@SET NO MAIL-WATCH USER
Disables periodic checking of the MAIL file
associated with the specified user, although
you see the notice, YOU HAVE A MESSAGE, at log-
in time; you see [YOU HAVE A MESSAGE FROM useru]
whenever someone sends you mail, unless you have
given the REFUSE SYSTEM-MESSAGES or REFUSE LINKS
command. You can always check the status of
your MAIL file at any time by giving the INFO
MAIL command
Default
SET RETRIEVAL-WAIT Command
Function
@SET RETRIEVAL-WAIT
Tells the system that your job is willing to
wait for retrieval of off-line files. Retrieval
is then requested implicitly whenever you or a
program you run attempts to access off-line
files. Use INFO SYSTEM-STATUS to be sure that
automatic retrieval waits are enabled for the
system before giving this command.
@SET NO RETRIEVAL-WAIT
Tells the system to send an error message if
your job attempts to use off-line files.
Default
SET TIME-LIMIT Command
Function
@SET TIME-LIMIT n
Tells the system to stop any program or terminal
printout when the given amount of additional CPU
time (in seconds) has been used, & to inform you
with a fatal error message. This command is
used by the batch system to limit the runtime of
batch jobs.
@SET NO TIME-LIMIT
Removes any time-limit set by a previous SET
TIME-LIMIT command. You cannot use this command
in a batch job.
SET TRAP PROCEED Command
Function
@SET TRAP PROCEED
Directs the system to continue a program
after a trap has occurred as a result of a SET
TRAP command. Check with INFO PROGRAM-STATUS
@SET TRAP NO PROCEED
Directs the system to terminate the program
after a trap has occurred as a result of a SET
TRAP command. Check with INFO PROGRAM-STATUS
SET PAGE-ACCESS Command
Function
@SET PAGE-ACCESS range of octal numbers type of access
COPY-ON-WRITE
provides programs with private copies of the
specified pages (e.g. 13:17, 21 specifies pages
13 through 17 & page 21, 6 pages in all) of
current memory whenever they try to change
(write to) them
EXECUTE allows programs accessing these pages to execute
the instructions they may contain
NO COPY-ON-WRITE
WRITE
prevents programs from performing the indicated
operation on the specified pages
NONEXISTENT
removes the indicated pages from memory
READ permits programs to examine the indicated pages
of memory
WRITE permits programs to change as well as examine
the indicated pages
SET TAPE Command
Function
$SET TAPE ? one of the following:
DENSITY FORMAT PARITY RECORD-LENGTH
SET TAPE DENSITY Command
Function
@SET TAPE DENSITY (TO) density
Declares the default density for magnetic tape operations.
The valid densities are 200, 556, 800, and 1600 bpi (bits
per inch). To return to the usual density, type
SYSTEM-DEFAULT. The INFORMATION (ABOUT) TAPE-PARAMETERS
prints the current value of the density.
SET TAPE FORMAT Command
Function
@SET TAPE FORMAT (TO) ANSI-ASCII
CORE-DUMP
HIGH-DENSITY
INDUSTRY-COMPATIBLE
SIXBIT
SYSTEM-DEFAULT
Sets the default format for magnetic tape operations. To return
the usual format, type SYSTEM-DEFAULT.
The INFORMATION (ABOUT) TAPE-PARAMETERS command prints the current
format.
SET TAPE PARITY Command
Function
@SET TAPE PARITY (TO) EVEN
ODD
Sets the default parity for magnetic tape operations. The
usual setting is ODD. Check with INFO TAPE-PARAMETERS.
SET TAPE RECORD-LENGTH Command
Function
@SET TAPE RECORD-LENGTH (TO) bytes
Sets the default record length for magnetic tape
operations. The argument, bytes, is the decimal number of
bytes in a record. Setting the record length to a large
number (such as 1000) works for most applications.
SET TYPEOUT MODE Command
Function
@SET TYPEOUT MODE NUMERIC
SYMBOLIC
Establishes the mode in which memory addresses
and contents are to be typed on your terminal
in reponse, for example, to a CTRL/T or a
command such as EXAMINE or INFORMATION. Check
with INFO PROGRAM-STATUS.
Default - NUMERIC
SET UUO-SIMULATION Command
Function
@SET UUO-SIMULATION
Allows the system to execute programs originally
writeen for the TOPS-10 operating system, by
calling the TOPS-10 compatibility package
PA1050.EXE. Check the current setting with INFO
PROGRAM-STATUS.
Default
@SET NO UUO-SIMULATION
Disables the feature of TOPS-20 monitor that
makes it possible to use programs originally
written for the TOPS-10 operating system.
Check the current setting with INFO PROGRAM-
STATUS.
INFORMATION (ABOUT) ADDRESS-BREAK
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This command gives the location (in numeric or symbolic format -
depending upon previous specification of the SET TYPOUT MODE command) and mode
of any address breaks for the program currently in memory. The address-breaks
are set with the SET ADDRESS-BREAK command.
Address-breaks are positions in a program at which normal execution of
the program is forced to stop for debugging purposes.
INFORMATION (ABOUT) ALERTS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This command lists the dates and times that the system is to signal you
at the terminal. The last line of the display indicates whether alerts are to
be sent unconditionally to your terminal (depending upon previous specification
of the SET AUTOMATIC command). Set alerts with the SET ALERT command.
INFORMATION (ABOUT) ARCHIVE-STATUS filespecs
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This command prints the archive status of all specified files for which
archival has been requested or for which migration has been prohibited.
Default filespec is *.*.* in your connected directory.
INFORMATION (ABOUT) ARPANET
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This command gives information about ARPANET.
The CRC is not connected to this network, so no information is given.
INFORMATION (ABOUT) AVAILABLE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This command has two arguements :
@INFORMATION (ABOUT) AVAILABLE LINES
@INFORMATION (ABOUT) AVAILABLE DEVICES
It lists the devices or terminal lines available to you or already
assigned to your job. Use ASSIGN to obtain devices (use MOUNT for structures).
The default is DEVICES.
INFORMATION (ABOUT) BATCH-REQUESTS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This command takes the following switches:
/ALL /FAST /PROCESSING-NODE:node-name:: /USER:user-name
It lists the jobs being processed by the batch system. The list
includes:
- the jobname and request ID number of the request (an asterisk (*)
appears before the jobname if the job is currently being processed)
- the scheduled run time of the request
- the name of the user who initiated the request
- the values of the switches /AFTER and /DEPENDENCY-COUNT, if values
were given in the original SUBMIT or subsequent MODIFY command. Use SUBMIT,
MODIFY, or CANCEL to change this list.
The /ALL switch adds the switches /ASSISTANCE, /PRIORITY, /RESTARTABLE,
/SEQUENCE, and /UNIQUE to this list.
/FAST eliminates the display of all switches and column headings.
/PROCESSING-NODE specifies the DECNET network node about whose batch
jobs you want information.
/USER restricts descriptions to jobs of the user named, and can be
given with any of the other three switches.
The default user-name is your own.
INFORMATON (ABOUT) COMMAND-LEVEL
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This command prints the status of the LATE-CLEAR-TYPEAHEAD parameter,
which pevents you from giving another TOPS-20 command until any error message
resulting from a prevous command has been printed. Set with
SET LATE-CLEAR-TYPEAHEAD.
INFORMATION (ABOUT) DECNET NODES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This command displays the DECnet network nodes accessible to your
system. The first line provides your local node name. Check your current node
with INFORMATION JOB-STATUS.
INFORMATION (ABOUT) DEFAULTS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This command takes the following arguments:
@INFORMATION (ABOUT) DEFAULTS ALL
@INFORMATION (ABOUT) DEFAULTS CARDS
@INFORMATION (ABOUT) DEFAULTS COMPILE-SWITCHES
@INFORMATION (ABOUT) DEFAULTS PAPER-TAPE
@INFORMATION (ABOUT) DEFAULTS PLOT
@INFORMATION (ABOUT) DEFAULTS PRINT
@INFORMATION (ABOUT) DEFAULTS SUBMIT
@INFORMATION (ABOUT) DEFAULTS TAKE
It displays, in a format suitable for entering them, default arguments
established at the current level of TOPS-20 for the specified command.
CARDS and PUNCH-TAPE refer to the PUNCH CARDS and PUNCH PAPER-TAPE
commands, respectively; COMPILE-SWITCHES refers to LOAD-class commands. The ALL
argument displays the defaults for all these categories. Set with SET DEFAULT.
The default argument is ALL.
INFORMATION (ABOUT) DIRECTORY dev:<directory>,
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This command lists the current parameter values set for the indicated
directory by the SET DIRECTORY or BUILD commands, or by default.
If a comma is put after the specified directory, then the following
subcommands may be specified:-
@@FAST gives a short list of non-default values
@@VERBOSE gives a complete list including defaults
@@NAME-ONLY gives a listing of directory names only. The directory should
be specified as <directory.*>, <*directory*>, or <*>.
The categories of information include:-
The directory's password (shown only to privileged users or to owner of
superior directory). Working and permanent storage limits. Capabilities
(assigned or withheld). Whether you can establish DECnet or ARPANET network
connections. Whether expired files should be automatically archived. Directory
number. Default file protection. Default account. Directory protection. Default
number of generations maintained for files. Maximum number of subdirectories
allowed. Date and time of last login. Off-line and on-line expiration defaults.
Group memberships. User group numbers assignable to subdirectories.
Set with SET DIRECTORY or (for subdirectories) BUILD.
The default for the directory is your connected directory.
INFORMATION (ABOUT) DISK-USAGE dev:<directory>
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This command prints, for the specified directory:-
- the number of pages of assigned disk storage, and the number of deleted
pages, if any
- working and permanent page limits
- total number of unused pages on the file structure containing the directory.
The default directory is your connected directory.
You can use percent signs and asterisks in the <directory> field (for
example, <%directory*>, <directory.*>, or <*>) to get information about all
matching directories or subdirectories.
INFORMATION (ABOUT) FILE-STATUS octal-JFN
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This command gives, for the specified JFN (an internal number
identifying each file opening) :-
- the associated file specification
- the mode of access (Append, Execute, Read, or Write) for which the JFN is
open (or was opened last, if NOT OPENED precedes the access mode).
- special access conditions, namely DATA ERROR if an error is made in accessing
the file, or EOF if the file pointer is at the end of the file.
- if appropriate, byte pointer and byte size, which tell the number of bytes
transferred to or from the file.
- a list of devices ciurrently assigned to or opened by this job.
But if a file has been opened by another process for its sole use, you
see only the message, "Restricted JFN".
The default JFN is all JFNs for your job.
INFORMATION (ABOUT) JOB-STATUS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This command prints your :-
- job number
- user name
- connected directory (if not your log-in directory)
- account; sesson remark (if any)
- terminal number
- network node (if not your host node (log-in node))
You can set some of these parameters with CONNECT, SET ACCOUNT,
SET LOCATION, and SET SESSION-REMARK.
INFORMATION (ABOUT) LOGICAL-NAMES
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
INFORMATION (ABOUT) LOGICAL-NAMES ALL
INFORMATION (ABOUT) LOGICAL-NAMES JOB
INFORMATION (ABOUT) LOGICAL-NAMES SYSTEM
INFORMATION (ABOUT) LOGICAL-NAMES logical-name:
This command prints the logical names and definitions which have been
established for your job, for the system, or for both; or prints the job-wide
and system wide definitons of the specified logical name. Establish and
withdraw logical names with DEFINE.
The default is JOB.
INFORMATION (ABOUT) MAIL user-name
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This command tells whether there is unread mail for the user if you
have read access to it; otherwise you see only the message,
"Mailbox protected". Send and read mail with the MS program.
The default user-name is your own.
INFORMATION (ABOUT) MEMORY-USAGE
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This command prints, for the current process of your job:- the number
of pages of memory assigned and the location (in numeric or symbolic format -
depending on previous specification of the SET TYPEOUT MODE command) and length
of the current program's entry vector (see with SET ENTRY-VECTOR). Then on each
succeeding line :-
- the page numbers of pages occupied by a file or program
- the file specification if the pages are file pages; the process specification
if the pages are mapped from another process; PRIVATE otherwise.
- the page numbers of file pages or process pages. If a page is mapped by
indirect pointers, the file specification is printed to which it is mapped;
"Fork n" means that these pages are mapped indirectly through another process
(process n) of the job; "No page" can mean either of these conditions, when the
destination page does not yet exist.
- the permitted accesses to the pages (set with SET PAGE-ACCESS):
R - read access
W - write access
CW - copy-on-write access
E - execute access
INFORMATION (ABOUT) MONITOR STATISTICS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This command gives you :-
- the length of time (in hours, minutes and seconds) since the monitor was
reloaded
- an analysis of the monitor overhead time, by percentages
- the number of swap-reads and -writes
- the umber of pages of memory available to user programs
- the number of terminal wake-up (occasions when a terminal "wakes up" after
waiting for terminal input or output to finish, and of terminal interrupts
(occasions when a program is interrupted by a CTRL-C, CTRL-O, or CTRL-T (or
other, user-enabled control characters) typed at a user's terminal)
- the average time of processes in the balance set - these are runnable and
each receives a share of total CPU time) and in the remainder of the run set
(NRUN - these are waiting to be run)
- the number of seconds of CPU time given to each of the four scheduler queues
(where the leftmost listing describes the highest priority queue,for
interactive processes and the rightmost listing is for CPU-bound processes
- the allotted share and actual use of the system (expressed as a percentage of
total CPU-time) by by each class, and the 1-, 5-, and 15-minute load averages of
each class
All averages and totals are computed for the time since system start-up.
INFORMATION (ABOUT) MOUNT-REQUESTS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This command can take the switches:- /ALL /FAST /USER:user-name
It prints a list, at your terminal, of pending structure-mount and tape-mount
requests, and of tape-mount requests currently being satisfied. The list
includes :-
- the volid of each volume of tape that will be mounted, or the structure
identification of each disk pack that will be mounted
- the status of each volume of tape (either the number of the tape drive in the
form MTAn, on which it is mounted, or Waiting)
- the type of request (either Disk or Tape)
- the tape density specified in the Tape-mount request
- the mode (either Enabled, if the /WRITE-ENABLED switch was specified or
assumed in the original MOUNT-TAPE command, or locked if /READ-ONLY applies) in
which each volume of tape is to be mounted
- the request number (ie. request ID number) of each request
- the number of the job that made the request
- the user-name of the owner of the job that made the request
Use the MOUNT, CANCEL (for pending requests), and DISMOUNT (for
satisfied requests) commands to change this list.
The /ALL switch adds the /REMARK switch and its argument if specified
in the original MOUNT command. It als adds the request name (setname) of each
tape-mount request, or or the alias of each structure-mount request. The /FAST
switch eliminates column headings and the sum of the number of requests; /USER
restricts descriptions to jobs of the user named, and can be given with either
of the other two switches. The default user-name is your own.
INFORMATION (ABOUT) OUTPUT-REQUESTS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This command can take the switches:- /ALL /FAST /USER:user-name
It prints a listing, at your terminal, of the requests being sent or waiting to
be sent to an output device. The list includes:-
- the name of the queue (card punch, paper tape punch, plotter or line printer)
- the job name and request ID number of the request (an asterix (*) appears
before the jobname if the request is currently being processed)
- the output limit, in appropriate units (number of pages, minutes of plotter
time, feet of paper tape, or number of cards)
- the name of the user who initiated the request
- values of the switches /AFTER, /FORMS, and /UNIT if given non-default values
in the original PRINT, PLOT, PUNCH or subsequent MODIFY command
Use PRINT, PLOT, PUNCH, MODIFY or CANCEL to change the list.
The /ALL switch adds the /NOTE and /SEQUENCE switches to this list,
while the /FAST switch eliminates the display of all switches and column
headings; /USER restricts descriptions to jobs of the user named, and can be
given with either of the two switches. The default user-name is your own.
INFORMATION (ABOUT) PROGRAM-STATUS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This command gives the following information for the current level of
the TOPS-20 command processor (EXEC).:-
- the amount of CPU-time you have used, and total elapsed time since you logged
in
- the amount of TOPS-20 command processor time used.
- SET UUO-SIMULATION (set with SET UUO-SIMULATION) if the TOPS-10 compatibility
package is enabled to simulate TOPS-10 monitor calls issued by a program you
are running
- SET CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY (set with SET CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY) if your program
is allowed to handle CTRL-C interrupts itself
- the settings established with the SET TRAP and SET TYPEOUT commands
- a summary of the status of each process belonging to the current copy of the
TOPS-20 command processor, including total CPU-time used so far
An arrow (=>) indicates your current process.
INFORMATION (ABOUT) PSI-STATUS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This command tells you :-
- whether the PSI (Programmed software interrupt) system is in use (ON) or not
(OFF)
- the memory address of the level table and of the channel table - 0 if none
was set
- the numbers of the priority levels for which there are no interrupts in
progress (1 and/or 2 and/or 3), where 1 is the highest priority
- the numbers of channels enabled (ready) to accept interrupts, and of channels
with pending interrupts
For further discussion of the interrupt system see the TOPS-20 Monitor
Calls Reference Manual
INFORMATION (ABOUT) RETRIEVAL-REQUESTS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This command can take the switches:- /ALL /FAST /USER:user-name
It prints a list, at your terminal, of pending retrieval requests. Each file
for which you request retrieval constitutes a seperate request, even if
specified within a single RETRIEVE command. The list includes:-
- the name of the request (the first six characters of the filename)
- the request ID number
- the volids of each tape containing the file
- the name of the user who made the request
The /ALL switch includes the complete specification (up to 49
characters of the file, while the /FAST switch eliminates column headings;
/USER restricts descriptions to requests of the user named and can be used with
either of the other two switches. The default user name is your own.
INFORMATION (ABOUT) SPOOLED-OUTPUT-ACTION
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This command tells you whether the system processes your spooled output
requests immediately, or defers them until you log out. Set with
SET SPOOLED-OUTPUT-ACTION. You make spooled output requests not with the PLOT,
PRINT or PUNCH command (these are always processed immediately), but with a
command or program that writes files to a spooled output device (for example, a
line printer - LPT:, plotter - PLT:, or card punch - CDP:). The COPY command,
the /LIST switch for LOAD-class commands, and the LPT and OUTPUT subcommands
for the DIRECTORY-class and STSTAT commands make spooled output requests.
INFORMATION (ABOUT) STRUCTURE dev:
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This command gives, for each structure named :-
- informaton as to whether the system performs checking operations while writing
to the swapping or data areas of the structure. The system would perform this
checking by immediately reading the data that it has just written. If the
system manager has enabled thes functions, the following lines appear at the
top of the display: "Write verification for data", and "Write verification for
swapping".
- the number of users who have mounted the structure, the number of open files
on the structure, and the number of disks in the structure.
- kind of structure, Public or Private, Domestic or Foreign (see the TPS-20
User's Guide)
- names of users who have mounted the structure
- names of users who have accessed the structure
- names of users who have connected to the structure
Use an asterix (*) for dev: to specify all mounted structures. Mount and
dismount structures with the MOUNT and DISMOUNT commands. The default dev: is
your connected structure.
INFORMATON (ABOUT) SUBSYSTEM-STATISTICS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This command gives, for each subsystem (any name specified by the SETSN
JSYS), the following information:-
- its name and total runtime since the system last started - SNAMES, STIMES
- the average number of page faults per second it has caused - SPFLTS
- the number of long-term waits it has caused - SNBLKS
- its avreage working-set size (the number of pages it occupies in memory) -
SSIZE
- the number of times a SETSN JSYS has been executed for it (excluding the EXEC
subsystem)
See the TOPS-20 Monitor Calls Reference Manual for more information.
INFORMATION (ABOUT) SYSTEM-STATUS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This command tells you:-
- whether the operator is present
- what kinds of log-ins are allowed - local, remote, pseudo-terminal, network,
or console.
- whether accouting (assessing and recording charges for system use) is being
done
- whether account validation (checking accounts against lists of authorised
users) is enabled
- whether working set pre-loading is enabled (see System Manager's Guide and
the Software Installation Guide)
- whether tape driven allocation (automatic assignment of tape drives) is
enabled
- whether automatic file retrieval-waits (the delaying of a command's executon
until specified off-line file are (automatically) retrieved) are enabled
- the system's expiration default date for off-line files
- the current setting of the scheduler bias control
- whether class-scheduling is enabled, and, if it is enabled, the special class
(if any) for batch jobs, and the default class (if any)
INFORMATION (ABOUT) TAPE-PARAMETERS
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This command gives the default settings of these parameters for
magnetic tapes:-
- tape density, in bits per inch
- tape parity (ODD or EVEN)
- format (ANSI-ASCII, CORE-DUMP, INDUSTRY-COMPATIBLE, or STSTEM-DEFAULT)
- tape record length, in bytes
Set with SET TAPE.
INFORMATION (ABOUT) TERMINAL-MODE number
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This command gives the following informatoin about the specified :-
- its type (eg. LA36, VT52, or SYSTEM-DEFAULT)
- its speed (baud rate), in bits per second
- whether it is set to receive or refuse links, advice and system messages
- whether it is set to pause in printing output when you type the pause
character, and/or at the end of each full page of output.
- the pause and continue characters that you may have set with the TERMINAL
PAUSE CHARACTER command (only if TERMINAL PAUSE END-OF-PAGE and TERMINAL PAUSE
COMMAND are in effect, and if CTRL-S and CTRL-Q were not the specified
characters)
- the length (in number of lines) and width (in number of chatacters) of its
page
- whether it is capable of printing lowercase characters, whether it is set to
raise lowercase letters you type to uppercase, and whether it will mark (flag)
capital letters with a single quotation mark (')
- whether it has a formfeed mechanism, and whether it is set to only indicate
formfeeds or to perform them
- whether it has mechanical tab stops, whether it is set to immediately echo
input you type
- whether it is operating in FULLDUPLEX or HALFDUPLEX mode
Set with TERMINAL. The SYSTAT command displays terminal numbers.
INFORMATION (ABOUT) VERSION
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This command tells you:-
- the TOPS-20 operating system's name and version number
- the version of the TOPS-20 command processor in use
- the names (and versions, if any) of all programs currently in memory for
which programdata vectors (PDVs) exist and that are associated with the current
process
- the version of the UUo simulation package in use (if a TOPS-10 programis in
memory)
The format of the version number is : a.b(c)-d
where a and b are respectively incremented for major and minor changes in the
software, c gives a rough indication of the number of times the software
component has been edited, d is a holdover from earlier versions of TOPS-20 and
is now rarely used and identifies the programmer responsible for the software
INFORMATOIN (ABOUT) VOLUMES setname:
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
This command gives the volids of currently mounted and newly created
volumes in the specified tape set.
TERMINAL FLAG Command
Function
@TERMINAL FLAG (UPPER CASE OUTPUT)
Instructs the system to print a single quote before it
prints an uppercase character. This works only if you
have set the NO LOWERCASE parameter. To stop the
flagging, set the NO FLAG parameter. The system does not
ordinarily flag uppercase.
TERMINAL FORMFEED Command
Function
@TERMINAL FORMFEED (EXISTS ON TERMINAL)
Informs the system that your terminal has a formfeed
mechanism; otherwise the system simulates formfeeds by
printing the correct number of blank lines if you have set
TERMINAL NO INDICATE, or by printing an ^L you have set
TERMINAL INDICATE. To inform the system that a formfeed
does not exist, set the NO FORMFEED parameter.
TERMINAL FULLDUPLEX Command
Function
@TERMINAL FULLDUPLEX (MODE FOR TERMINAL)
Instructs the system to repeat each character as you type
it; your terminal does not print what you type until the
system sends the character back to the terminal. The
system normally sets the FULLDUPLEX parameter.
TERMINAL HALFDUPLEX Command
Function
@TERMINAL HALFDUPLEX (MODE FOR TERMINAL)
Inhibits the system from repeating each character as you
type it; your terminal must print each character itself.
The system normally sets FULLDUPLEX parameter.
TERMINAL IMMEDIATE Command
Function
@TERMINAL IMMEDIATE (ECHO MODE)
Instructs the system to immediately echo each character as
you type it; normally the system waits until the proper
program (or the command language interpreter) receives the
character (i.e., NO IMMEDIATE is the default). To turn
off immediate mode echoing, set the NO IMMEDIATE
parameter. IMMEDIATE echoing works only when the
FULLDUPLEX parameter is set.
TERMINAL INDICATE Command
Function
@TERMINAL INDICATE (FORMFEED)
Instructs the system to print a ^L instead of advancing
the proper number of lines whenever outputting a formfeed
(or CTRL/L). The system normally advances the proper
number of lines as in NO INDICATE.
TERMINAL LA120 Command
Function
@TERMINAL LA120
Informs the system that your terminal is a Digital
Equipment Corporation LA120. The system assumes an LA120:
1. Prints lowercase letters
2. Has a line width of 132, and
3. Has a page length of 66.
TERMINAL LENGTH Command
Function
@TERMINAL LENGTH (OF PAGE IS) n
Sets the number of lines you have on a page. If you have
terminal PAGE mode set, the system stops after printing n
lines and waits for you to type a CTRL/Q. If you set the
page length to 0, the system stops printing only when you
type a CTRL/S; it does not automatically stop at the end
of a page.
Default n - 66
TERMINAL LINE-HALFDUPLEX Command
Function
@TERMINAL LINE-HALFDUPLEX (MODE FOR TERMINAL)
Inhibits the system from printing each character as you
type it. Same as HALFDUPLEX.
TERMINAL LOWERCASE Command
Function
@TERMINAL LOWERCASE (EXISTS ON TERMINAL)
Tells the system that your terminal handles lowercase
characters properly. (Handling lowercase properly means
either printing the lowercase character or printing the
proper uppercase character.) If your terminal does not
handle lowercase properly, use the NO LOWERCASE parameter.
When NO LOWERCASE is set, the system converts lowercase
letters to the appropriate uppercase letters. Also refer
to the FLAG parameter and the RAISE parameter.
Default
TERMINAL PAGE Command
Function
@TERMINAL PAGE (MODE) n
Instructs the system to stop printing whenever it either
reaches the end of a page or you type a CTRL/S. To
continue the printout, type a CTRL/Q. To set the page
length, give the number n or set the LENGTH parameter. If
you set the page length to 0, the system stops printing
only when you type a CTRL/S; it does not automatically
stop at the end of a page. To turn off page mode, use the
NO PAGE parameter. The system does not normally set the
page parameter.
TERMINAL PAUSE Command
Function
@TERMINAL PAUSE CHARACTER x y
END-OF-PAGE
COMMAND
Instructs the system to stop sending output
whenever it has sent a full page (END-OF-PAGE)
or whenever you type CTRL/S (COMMAND) or x
(CHARACTER).
For argument END-OF-PAGE to stop yout output,
argument COMMAND must also be in effect. You
continue the output by typing CTRL/Q or the y
parameter of the CHARACTER argument.
For argument CHARACTER to stop your output, the
COMMAND and END-OF-PAGE arguments must be in
effect. With the CHARACTER argument, ^1 you
can continue output by typing the y parameter.
You can specify x and y in various ways: as the
octal ASCII code for any character or control
key; as any printing character in double quotes
(" "); as the word "control" followed by the
printing representation of a control character
in double quotation marks (e.g. CONTROL "A");
and as the word "space" to specify the space
bar. If you specify x & y to be the same, or
if you omit y, you get a toggle effect. You can
specify CTRL/S & CTRL/Q as x & y parameters
only on local terminals. (Network terminal
connections do not allow for CTRL/S & CTRL/Q)
But even some local terminal require that you
select characters other than CTRL/S & CTRL/Q
e.g. the VT125 and the VT100 with the printer
port option.
The default values for x & y are CTRL/S & CTRL/Q
for local terminals, & CTRL/A/CTRL/A for network
terminals. You can achieve consistency between
local and network terminals by placing the same
TERMINAL PAUSE CHARACTER command in your
LOGIN.CMD files on the various TOPS-20 systems.
To set the page length, use the TERMINAL LENGTH
command. If you set the page length to 0, the
system stops sending output only when you type
CTRL/S or the x parameter of the CHARACTER
argument.
Default - COMMAND (for all
terminal types)
- END-OF-PAGE (for display
terminals)
- CHARACTER (for all
terminal types)
TERMINAL RAISE Command
Function
@TERMINAL RAISE (TERMINAL INPUT)
Instructs the system to change all lowercase characters
(which you type on your terminal) into the corresponding
uppercase character. To revert to the condition of not
raising input, use the NO RAISE parameter.
TERMINAL SPEED Command
Function
@TERMINAL SPEED (OF INPUT) rate (AND OUTPUT) rate
Sets the rate at which your terminal does input and
output. Your installation sets the rate at which your
terminal starts at. If you want to change that rate, set
the SPEED parameters, then change the baud rate switch on
your terminal. If you do not give an output speed the
system uses the input speed. The valid speeds are: 50,
75, 110, 134, 150, 200, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, and
9600. Hints: Most hard-copy terminals run at either 110
or 300 baud; display terminals usually run at a variety
of speeds up to 9600 baud; a 2741 terminal runs at 134
baud (actually 134.5); the maximum speed you can use over
a conventional telephone line is 300 baud. If you set a
baud rate your terminal cannot handle, obtain your line
number (if possible) and ask the operator to set the baud
rate to an appropriate value.
TERMINAL SYSTEM-DEFAULT Command
Function
@TERMINAL -DEFAULT
Informs the system that your terminal has
these characteristics (ensuring an acceptable
minimum level of performance for all terminal
types):
does not have a formfeed or tab
mechanism
prints lowercase letters
needs extra time to perform a carriage
return, linefeed, tab & formfeed
has a line width of 72
has a page length of 66
Default for terminal type
TERMINAL TABS Command
Function
@TERMINAL TABS (EXIST ON TERMINAL)
Informs the system that your terminal has mechanical tab
stops every eight columns; otherwise, the system
simulates the tabs by printing the correct number of
spaces. To invoke simulation, set the NO TABS parameter.
TERMINAL TYPE Command
Function
@TERMINAL TYPE n
Instructs the system to treat your terminal as terminal
type n. The following table describes the characteristics
of the different terminal types.
Terminal
Type Characteristics
0 Same as Model 33.
1 Same as Model 35.
2 Same as Model 37.
3 Same as EXECUPORT and TI.
4-7 Reserved for customer use.
8 Same as TERMINET. (This is the default type.)
9 Has a TAB and FORMFEED mechanism, prints
lowercase, infinite line width, infinite page
length.
10 Same as VT05.
11 Same as VT50.
12 Same as LA30.
13 Same as VT52, except with a page length of 30.
Used for a Digital Equipment Corporation GT40.
14 Same as LA36.
15 Same as VT52.
16 VT100
17 LA38
19-34 reserved for cutomer use
35 VT125
36 VK100
Default - 8
TERMINAL VT100 Command
Function
@TERMINAL VT100
Informs the system that your terminal is a Digital
Equipment Corporation VT100. The system assumes a VT100:
1. Does not have a formfeed mechanism
2. Prints lowercase letters
3. Has a line width of 80, and
4. Has a page length of 24.
TERMINAL VT125 Command
Function
@TERMINAL VT125
Informs the system that your terminal is a Digital
Equipment Corporation VT125. The system assumes a VT125:
1. Does not have a formfeed mechanism
2. Prints lowercase letters
3. Has a line width of 80, and
4. Has a page length of 24.
5. Has capability of B & W graphics
TERMINAL WIDTH Command
Function
@TERMINAL WIDTH (OF LINE IS) n
Tells the system the width of your terminal line. When
the system prints a line longer than your terminal width,
it prints the first n positions, then advances a line and
prints the rest.
Default Width - 72
TALK Command
Function
The TALK command links your terminal to another terminal
(referred to as the linked terminal). Whatever you type is
printed on both your terminal and the linked terminal; whatever
a user types on the linked terminal appears both on his terminal
and your terminal.
Format
@TALK (TO) identifier
identifier is either a user name or a line number.
Characteristics
Other job not effected
The linkage affects only the output of the terminals; the input
of the terminals is left intact. For example, if your program is
waiting for a command and a user types a command on the linked
terminal, that command works only for his job, not yours - you
see only the resulting typescript.
Ending TAlk
The BREAK command breaks any links you have established with the
TALK command.
Refused TALK
Ordinarily you cannot contact a user with TALK if his terminal is
set to refuse links. In such a case your TALK command causes a
series of CTRL/G signals at both terminals - usually ringing bells
of high-pitched beeps. However, if you have wheel or operator
capabilities enabled, you can talk to any user.
Maximum of Four Terminals
By using TALK commands you can join up to four terminals at once
for sharing displays or printout.
Hints
Signalling a Linked User
Once you have established links with another user's terminal via
the TALK command, you can get his attention by typing a series
if CTRL/Gs. Depending on the kind of terminal he has, these will
be reproduced as ringing bells or high-pitched beeps. This action
can be especially usefull when establishing links with the
owner of a display terminal, as display terminals are silent
in ordinary operation.
Using TALK when Teaching
The TALK command is useful when you are teaching another user
about a system feature. By using the TALK facility, the teacher
and pupil do not have to physically be in the same location.
Sending Messages
To avoid getting the message ?UNRECOGNIZED COMMAND, precede your
comments with an !.
Operation
1. Type TALK and press the ESC key; the system prints (TO).
@TALK (TO)
2. Type a user name or a terminal number and press the RETURN
key. You may use recognition in typing user names. If you
type a valid user name or terminal number, the system prints
a message on both terminals.
@TALK (TO) WATERS
LINK FROM MCKIE, TTY 23
@
3. If there is more than one job logged in under a user name,
the system prints out a list of terminal numbers. Select the
job you want and type the appropriate terminal number.
@TALK (TO) MACK
TTY35, EXEC
TTY110, BLIS10
TTY: 35
LINK FROM MCKIE, TTY 23
@
4. If the job you are linking to is logged in on a
pseudo-terminal (as are Batch jobs and jobs logged in under
the PTYCON job controller), the system prints a message after
which you must press the RETURN key. If you should link to a
Batch job, remember that if you type a ? or a %, the Batch
system may interpret this as an error within the job.
@TALK (TO) KIRSCHEN
[PSEUDO-TELETYPE CONFIRM]
LINK FROM MCKIE, TTY 23
@
Errors
1. If the user is not logged in, the system ignores the command
and prints the message:
?USER IS NOT LOGGED-IN
USE "MAIL" TO SEND MAIL TO USER
Use the MAIL program to send the message to the user.
2. If the user is not allowing anyone to establish a link to his
terminal, the system rings both terminal bells five times,
then prints the following message on your terminal.
?REFUSED, USE "MAIL" TO SEND MAIL TO USER
Use the MAIL program or wait until a later time.
Warning
Talking to a BATCH Job
Use caution when communicating through a PTY (pseudo-terminal)
that is controlling a batch job: do not send question mark (?)
or percent sign(%), because these characters can be attributed
to errors occuring within the job. Also, if an error actually
does occur in the batch joband the batch system's question mark
is displayed (by your remarks) from the beginning of a line, the
system may not recognize it as an error.
Talking Between a VT100 and a VT52
If links between VT100 and VT52 terminals are established using
a TALK (or ADVISE) command, the VT52 may function improperly
during or after the linked interval (e.g., by requiring frequent
CTRL/Q commands to print multiple lines of output). Turning
the terminal off and then on again (after the linked interval)
will correct this problem.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The TALK command does not change any program in memory and leaves
your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Restrictions
You may not link to a detached job.
The TALK command does not print a password onto any linked
terminals. If, however, you type a CTRL/R while giving a command
containing a password, the password is printed.
Related Commands
ADVISE for sending commands to another user's job
BREAK for ending commnications links involving your terminal
RECEIVE LINKS for allowing other users to talk to you
REFUSE LINKS for preventing other users from talking to you
REMARK for telling the system to regard your terminal
input as comments only
Examples
The user TALKs to user POMFRET then BREAKS the link.
@TALK (TO) POMFRET
LINK FROM MCKIE, TTY 23
@! Did you update the FORTRAN sources?
@! Yes, they are in <FORLIB>
@! Thanks....
@BREAK (LINKS)
@
KEEP command
Function
The KEEP command specifies that a process (fork) should be retained
when other programs are run. Normally the act of running a program
would remove any other program from memory.
The KEEP command does not create a process.
Format
@KEEP (FORK) identifier
where
identifier is the name of a fork
or
the number of the fork to be "kept"
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The KEEP command does not affect memory and leaves your terminal at
TOPS-20 command level.
Related Commands
INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE for examining memory of the
current process
INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS for finding out the number and
status of each process in your
job
INFORMATION FORK-STATUS for finding out the name, number
and status of each process in
your job
FORK Set the process which is to be
referenced by TOPS-20 commands
UNKEEP allow a process to be removed
when another program is run
FREEZE stop the execution of a process
which is running in the
background
CONTINUE continue executing a process
optionally in the background
RESET clears a process from memory
and closes its files, if any
NAME give a process a name
Example
Whilst running the CRC radioimmunoassay program,we decide to do some
editing :-
@cria
file of standard concentrations>^C
@iNFORMATION (ABOUT) foRK-STATUS
=> CRIA (1): ^C from IO wait at STD1+13, 0:00:00.0
@keeP (FORK) cRIA
@edIT (File) riasTD.DAT
:
:
@i fo
CRIA (1): Kept, ^C from IO wait at STD1+13, 0:00:00.0
=> SED (2): HALT at 3251, 0:00:00.3
@conTINUE (FORK) cRIA
^Rfile of standard concentrations>^C
@i fo
=> CRIA (1): Kept, ^C from IO wait at STD1+13, 0:00:00.0
SED (2): HALT at 3251, 0:00:00.3
@unkeEP (FORK) cRIA
@ed
:
:
@i fo
=> SED (1): HALT at 3251, 0:00:00.3
NAME command
Function
The NAME command specifies a name for the current process (fork) of
your job, so that other TOPS-20 commands may refer to it by that name.
It does not create a process.
Format
@NAME (CURRENT FORK AS) identifier
where
identifier is the name for the fork.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The FORK command does not affect memory and leaves your terminal at
TOPS-20 command level.
Related Commands
INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE for examining memory of the
current process
INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS for finding out the number and
status of each process in your
job
INFORMATION FORK-STATUS for finding out the name, number
and status of each process in
your job
FORK Set the process which is to be
referenced by TOPS-20 commands
KEEP for preserving a process while
other programs are run, and
resisting being RESET
UNKEEP allow a process to be removed
when another program is run
FREEZE stop the execution of a process
which is running in the
background
CONTINUE continue executing a process
optionally in the background
RESET clears a process from memory
and closes its files, if any
Example
Make the second process or your job the current process and
give it a name
@TV
:
:
@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
=> TV (1): HALT at HALTED, 0:00:01.3
Fork 2: HALT at HALTED, 0:00:00.3
@FORK (IS) 2
@NAME (CURRENT FORK AS) TV-SUB
@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
TV (1): HALT at HALTED, 0:00:01.3
=> TV-SUB (2): HALT at HALTED, 0:00:00.3
@FORK (IS) TV
@RESET TV-SUB
@CONTINUE (FORK) TV
^L$$
?Illegal instruction PMAP% at SFW+16 - JSYS error:
?Invalid process handle
@
You get this error as you have just destroyed half the program!!
UNKEEP command
Function
The UNKEEP command specifies that a process (fork) should be reset
when other programs are run. This is what would normally happen. The
command reverses the effect of the KEEP command.
The UNKEEP command does not reset a process itself.
Format
@UNKEEP (FORK) identifier
where
identifier is the name of a fork
or
the number of a fork to be "unkept"
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The UNKEEP command does not affect memory and leaves your terminal at
TOPS-20 command level.
Related Commands
INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE for examining memory of the
current process
INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS for finding out the number and
status of each process in your
job
INFORMATION FORK-STATUS for finding out the name, number
and status of each process in
your job
FORK Set the process which is to be
referenced by TOPS-20 commands
KEEP for preserving a process while
other programs are run, and
resisting being RESET
FREEZE stop the execution of a process
which is running in the
background
CONTINUE continue executing a process
optionally in the background
RESET clears a process from memory
and closes its files, if any
NAME give a process a name
Example
Whilst running the CRC radioimmunoassay program, we decide to do some
editing :-
@cria
file of standard concentrations>^C
@iNFORMATION (ABOUT) foRK-STATUS
=> CRIA (1): ^C from IO wait at STD1+13, 0:00:00.0
@keeP (FORK) cRIA
@edIT (File) riasTD.DAT
:
:
@i fo
CRIA (1): Kept, ^C from IO wait at STD1+13, 0:00:00.0
=> SED (2): HALT at 3251, 0:00:00.3
@conTINUE (FORK) cRIA
^Rfile of standard concentrations>^C
@i fo
=> CRIA (1): Kept, ^C from IO wait at STD1+13, 0:00:00.0
SED (2): HALT at 3251, 0:00:00.3
@unkeEP (FORK) cRIA
@ed
:
:
@i fo
=> SED (1): HALT at 3251, 0:00:00.3
Multi-forking Commands
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
There are several commands to facilitate running more than one program
at one time from your terminal. Each program takes up what is called a fork
or a process, and each process can use the full memory address space of the
DEC 20. Some programs do in fact use two (or more) processes. The editor TV
has one fork which is only involved with input from the keyboard, and a
separate fork, which actually performs the editing. Basic runs in one fork and
compiles your program into a separate fork.
You may wish to compile a large program in the background, while you
examine a few files. You would give the compile command with the switch /STAY
and you would return to the Tops 20 command processor (or "exec"), so that you
could give some commands to Tops 20, or run another program, thus :-
@comp fred /stay
@minitab
:
:
You will receive the output from all the sources intermingled !!
The commands which may be of use to you are :-
INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE for examining memory of the
current process
INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS for finding out the number and
status of each process in your
job
INFORMATION FORK-STATUS for finding out the name, number
and status of each process in
your job
FORK Set the process which is to be
referenced by TOPS-20 commands
KEEP for preserving a process while
other programs are run, and
resisting being RESET
UNKEEP allow a process to be removed
when another program is run
FREEZE stop the execution of a process
which is running in the
background
CONTINUE continue executing a process
optionally in the background
RESET clears a process from memory
and closes its files, if any
NAME give a process a name
CLOSE Command
Function
The CLOSE command closes any open files.
Hints
Each time you open a file, the system assigns this opening a
unique number called a Job File Number (JFN). The INFORMATION
(ABOUT) FILE-STATUS command lists all your open files and their
associated JFNs.
If you stop a program by typing two CTRL/Cs, you may examine any
file which it has opened by immediately giving the CLOSE command
and then typing or printing that file's contents. After closing
the files, you generally will not be able to give the CONTINUE
command to resume execution of the program.
Format
@CLOSE (JFN) n
n is a JFN of an open file. If you want to close
all open files, do not specify this argument.
Output
When the close command is completed, the system prints a
message on your terminal for eacf JFN it has closed or
attempted to close.
Operation
1. Type CLOS and press the ESC key; the system prints E (JFN).
@CLOSE (JFN)
2. Type the JFN (to close one specific opening) and press the
RETURN key, or simply press the RETURN key (to close all open
files). The system prints a message about every file it
tries to close.
@CLOSE (JFN) 3
3 NXTFIL.FOR.2 [OK]
@
Characteristics
The close command is used to preserve the contents of a file
after the abnormal termination of the program that opened it.
Under ordinary conditions you do not need to use the close
command.
Restrictions
The CLOSE command cannot close files which are mapped into
memory. Give the RESET command, remembering that RESET clears
the contents of memory. (Note, however, that RESET will delete
and expunge a mapped file if the file is new, rather than save
it as CLOSE would. to save a new mapped file, give the SET
PAGE-ACCESS 0:777 NONEXISTENT command, and follow this with close).
If RESET does not suceed, you may have done a PUSH command.
Give the POP command, the RESET command and finally, the CLOSE
command again.
Effect on memory and terminal
The CLOSE command does not change a program in memory and leaves
your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Related commands
INFORMATION FILE-STATUS for determining which file are open
in your job
INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE for determining which files are mapped
RESET for closing mapped files and clearing
memory
Examples
The user gives the INFORMATION command, then closes all his open
files.
@INFORMATION (ABOUT) FILE-STATUS (OF JFN)
CONNECTED TO <MCKIE>. JFNS:
5 024EDI.TEM.1 WRITE, NEW FILE, 0.(36)
4 COMPILE.TXT.6 READ, 1555.(36)
3 <SUBSYS>PA1050.EXE.362 READ, EXECUTE
2 <NEW>EDIT.EXE.15 READ, EXECUTE
1 <SYSTEM>EXEC.EXE.287 READ, EXECUTE
DEVICES ASSIGNED TO/OPENED BY THIS JOB: TTY16
@CLOSE (JFN)
5 024EDI.TEM.1 [OK]
4 COMPILE.TXT.6 [OK]
3 <SUBSYS>PA1050.EXE.362 CAN'T CLOSE FILE - FILE STILL MAPPED
2 <NEW>EDIT.EXE.15 CAN'T CLOSE FILE - FILE STILL MAPPED
1 <SYSTEM>EXEC.EXE.287 CAN'T CLOSE FILE - FILE STILL MAPPED
@
The user closes the file COMPILE.MAC.6.
@CLOSE (JFN) 5
5 COMPILE.MAC.6 [OK]
@
The user tries to close a file, but finds the file is still
mapped into memory. After giving the RESET command, the file is
successfully closed.
@CLOSE (JFN) 5
5 T.FOR.7 CAN'T CLOSE FILE - File still mapped
@INFORMATION (ABOUT) MEMORY-USAGE
504. PAGES, ENTRY VECTOR LOC 435 LEN 2
0-1 PRIVATE R, W, E
2-10 <OLD>VTED.EXE.34 5-13 R, CW, E
20-137 @ T.FOR.7 0-117 R, W, E
140-141 T.FOR.7 120-121 R, W, E
142-767 @ T.FOR.7 122-747 R, W, E
770-775 <SUBSYS>UDDT.EXE.3 1-6 R, CW, E
777 PRIVATE R, W, E
@RESET
@INFORMATION (ABOUT) FILE-STATUS (OF JFN)
CONNECTED TO <MCKIE>. JFNS:
1 <SYSTEM>EXEC.EXE.298 READ, EXECUTE
DEVICES ASSIGNED TO/OPENED BY THIS JOB: TTY107
@DIRECTORY (OF FILES) T.FOR.*
<MCKIE>
T.FOR.7
@
LIGHT command
(Defined locally at the CRC using PCL)
Function
Sets VT100 terminal so that screen displays dark characters on a
light background.
Format
@LIGHT (background)
Characteristics
The effect of this command lasts for the current terminal session,
unless the DARK command is given.
Related Commands
DARK sets VT100 to display light characters on dark
background.
Examples
1. Type LI & press the ESC key; the system prints GHT (background)
@liGHT (background)
DARK command
(Defined locally at the CRC using PCL)
Function
Sets VT100 terminal so that screen displays light characters on a
dark background.
Format
@DARK (background)
Characteristics
The effect of this command lasts for the current terminal session,
unless the LIGHT command is given.
Related Commands
DARK sets VT100 to display dark characters on light
background.
Examples
1. Type DAR & press the ESC key; the system prints K (background)
@darK (background)
C80 command
(Defined locally at the CRC using PCL)
Function
Sets the VT100 screen to a width of 80 columns.
Format
@C80 (columns on the terminal)
Characteristics
The effect of this command lasts for the current terminal session,
unless the C132 command is given.
Related Commands
C132 sets the VT100 screen to a width of 132 columns.
Examples
1. Type c8 & pres the ESC key; the system prints 0 (columns
on the terminal)
@c80 (columns on the terminal)
C132 command
(Defined locally at the CRC using PCL)
Function
Sets the VT100 screen to a width of 132 columns.
Format
@C132 (columns on the terminal)
Characteristics
The effect of this command lasts for the current terminal session,
unless the C80 command is given.
Related Commands
C80 sets the VT100 screen to a width of 80 columns.
Examples
1. Type c1 & press the ESC key; the system prints 32 (columns
on the terminal)
@c132 (columns on the terminal)
ATTACH Command
Function
The ATTACH command engages a job to your terminal.
Format
@ATTACH (USER) name (JOB #) number
PASSWORD: password
where
name is the user name of the job's owner
number is the job number
Default the only job, or only
detached job,or only job
other than your current
job, logged in under the
user name you give
password is the associated password (not requested
if you are currently logged in under the
same user name as the job that you are
attaching)
Characteristics
Current Job Detached
If you give the ATTACH command while logged in, your current
job is detached. You can use the LOGOUT n command to log out
this detached job.
Hint
Using ATTACH to Restore Phoned-in Jobs
If you log in to the system by telephone lines and service is
interrupted for any reason, use the ATTACH command to restore
the connection. If you do not do this within five minutes,
your job will be logged out automatically and you will have to
log in again.
Warning
Attaching Attached Jobs
The system will ask you to confirm your choice with a carriage
return before attaching to your terminal a job that is attached
elsewhere. If you attach an attached job that is running a
program, that program may be sent one or more CTRL/Cs, which
can affect programs that handle CTRL/C themselves. To avoid
this possibility you must give a DETACH command from the
terminal to which the program's job is attached, then attach
this job to your terminal with an ATTACH command.
Effect on Memory, Terminal and Job
The ATTACH command affects neither memory nor the job that you are
attaching (but see Warning, above), and leaves your terminal at TOPS-20
command level unless a program is being run by the job. If a program
is being run, your terminal is left at command level, if any, in the
job. Your terminal's characteristics will be those established in the
job from which you gave tha ATTACH command; if you were not logged in,
they will be reset to system default characteristics.
Related Commands
SYSTAT for finding out the user name and job number associated
with any job
DETACH for disengaging a job from your own terminal
UNATTACH for disengaging a job from any other terminal
Examples
1. Attach your only job, which is presently detached.
@ATTACH A-MOLE
Password:
@
2. Attach one of several detached jobs.
@ATTACH A-MOLE
?JOB # REQUIRED - A-MOLE HAS MORE THAN ONE DETACHED JOB
@SYSTAT A-MOLE
37 DET EXEC A-MOLE
54 DET TEST A-MOLE
@ATTACH A-MOLE 37
PASSWORD:
@
3. Check your jobs (your current job is marked with an asterisk),
then attach the only detached job. Verify the system's action.
@SYSTAT A-MOLE
37 26 PNDORA A-MOLE
58 DET EXEC A-MOLE
59* 231 EXEC A-MOLE
@ATTACH A-MOLE
DETACHING JOB # 59
@INFORMATION JOB
JOB 58, USER A-MOLE, ACCOUNT PANDORA, TTY231
@
4. Start a program in one job. Then detach and continue it,and
attach another of your jobs.
@INFORMATION JOB
JOB 9, USER A-MOLE, ACCOUNT PANDORA, TTY26
@RUN PIMPLE
^C
@DETACH CONTINUE
DETACHING JOB # 9
^C
RETURN
Clinical Research Centre 2060 (V5.1), TOPS-20 Monitor 5.1 (5746)
Type HELP & press RETURN if you are unsure how to proceed.
@LOGIN (USER) A-MOLE (PASSWORD)
JOB 45 ON TTY41 25-SEP-85 14:26:29
@SYSTAT A-MOLE
9 DET PIMPLE A-MOLE
45 41 EXEC A-MOLE
@ATTACH A-MOLE 45
[ATTACHED TO TTY41, CONFIRM]
PASSWORD:
@
CMD Command
(Defined locally at the CRC using PCL)
Function
The CMD command runs IND-20 which offers enhanced, programmable
command file facilities.
Format
@CMD (File of commands to be executed) filespec (parameters) parameters,
one line of text
where
filespec is a .CMD or .IND file
parameters are the user-inputs to the IND command file &/or the
programs the .IND file may be running
Hint
See HLP:IND.DOC for more info on IND
BYE ( or LOGOUT ) Command
( BYE is a synonym for LOGOUT )
Function
The BYE ( or LOGOUT ) command expunges deleted files in your
connected and logged-in directory, deletes all ;T (temporary)
files created during this session in your connected and logged-in
directories, decrements the mount count for any SMOUNT commands
you have given, checks disk storage allocation, ends your job and
prints a message. You may also log out another job as long as
it is logged in under your user name.
Format
@BYE n
[or LOGOUT n]
n is the job number of the job you want to log out. If you are
logging out your current job (as is the common case), do not
type a number.
Operation
1. Type BY and press the ESC key; the system prints E.
@byE
2. To log out your current job, press the RETURN key. (If your
connected directory is over its disk storage allocation, the
system prints a message.)
@bye
KILLED JOB 13, USER LESTER, ACCOUNT 10563, TTY 45,
AT 16-JAN-76 20:03:01 USED 0:1:46 IN 3:44:12
3. If you are logging out another job, type the job number and
press the RETURN key.
@bye 23
@
Errors
1. If you try to log out another user's job, the system ignores
the BYE command and prints the message:
?LOGOUT
?WHEEL OR OPERATOR CAPABILITY REQUIRED
2. If no user is logged in under that job number, the system
ignores the BYE command and prints the message:
@BYE 1873
?LOGOUT 1873
?THAT JOB DOES NOT EXIST
Output
If you exceed your permanent disk storage allocation, the system
prints the message:
<directory> OVER PERMANENT STORAGE ALLOCATION BY n PAGES
where directory is your logged-in directory and n is the number
of pages by which you exceeded your quota. You should log in and
delete and expunge enough files to get under quota. Before you
log out, you can give the INFORMATION (ABOUT) DISK-USAGE command
to find if you are over your allocation.
Characteristics
The BYE ( or LOGOUT ) command:
Clears any program from memory and expunges the deleted files
in your connected and logged-in directory, unless you are
logging out another job, in which case it leaves your
terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Terminates any ACCESS, CONNECT and SMOUNT commands you have
given throughout your job session.
Restrictions
You cannot log out another user's job.
You cannot give a job number when you are logging out your own
job.
Examples
1. The user logs out his own job, but is over his permanent disk
storage allocation by 5 pages.
@bye
<HARDING> OVER PERMANENT STORAGE ALLOCATION BY 5 PAGES.
KILLED JOB 36, USER HARDING, ACCOUNT 34, TTY 2,
AT 16-JAN-76 3:04:01 USED 0:0:23 IN 0:5:12
2. The user logs out job 34 which is logged in under his user name.
@bye 34
@
CD or CONNECT Command
( CD is a synonym for CONNECT)
Function
The CD ( or CONNECT ) command connects you to another directory
and disconnects you from the current directory.
Hints
Connecting to a directory grants you owner privileges to that
directory and files. Whenever you give a command without
specifying a directory, the system uses the files in this
connected directory.
If you omit the structure or directory name from the CD
( or CONNECT ) command,the system defaults to your currently connected
connected structure or directory. But, if you omit both the
structure and directory name, i.e., CD ( or CONNECT ) , the
system defaults to the public structure (PS:) and your logged-in
directory.
The first time you give a CD ( or CONNECT ) command to a directory
that is on a file structure other than the public structure
(PS:), you should give the MOUNT STRUCTURE command before the
CD ( or CONNECT ) command.
Format
@CD (CONNECT TO DIRECTORY) dev:<dir>
[or CONNECT (TO DIRECTORY) dev:<dir>]
PASSWORD:password
dev: is the name of the file structure that contains
the directory to which you are connecting. The
CD ( or CONNECT ) command will only accept a file
structure name in the dev: field.
<dir> is the name of the directory to which you are
connecting. The brackets must be included in
directory names. You can use recognition on
directory names. Remember to type the left angle
bracket.
password is the password of the directory to which you wish
to connect. The password is not required if you
own the directory (you own a directory if your
user name is the same as the directory name), or
if the directory protection allows you to connect
without giving a password.
Operation
1. Type CD and press the ESC key. The system prints (CONNECT TO
DIRECTORY).
@CD (CONNECT TO DIRECTORY)
or type CONN and press the ESC key.
The system prints ECT (TO DIRECTORY)
2. Type the file structure name and a colon. (You do not have
to type the file structure name if the directory you are
connecting to is on the currently connected structure.)
@CD (CONNECT TO DIRECTORY) ADMIN1:
3. Type (or use recognition on) the directory name. Press the
RETURN key. The system prints PASSWORD: on the next line.
@CD (CONNECT TO DIRECTORY) ADMIN1:<BERLITZ>
PASSWORD:
4. Type the password belonging to the directory and press the
RETURN key. (If you own the directory or if the directory
protection gives you the proper access, you do not have to
give a password; just press the RETURN key.) When the
CD command succeeds, the system prints an @ on your
terminal.
@CD (CONNECT TO DIRECTORY) ADMIN1:<BERLITZ>
PASSWORD:
@
Errors
1. If you do not enter the correct password or if you do not
give a password and it is required, the system pauses and
then prints the message:
?INCORRECT PASSWORD or ?PASSWORD IS REQUIRED
and cancels the command. You should obtain the correct
password and reissue the command.
2. If you did not give the MOUNT STRUCTURE command and you
specify a file structure that is not on line, the system
prints the message:
?STRUCTURE IS NOT MOUNTED or ?NO SUCH DEVICE
and cancels the command. First, check to see if you entered
the name correctly. If you did, give the SMOUNT command to
request that the file structure be placed on line.
3. If you give a non-existent directory name, the system prints
the message:
?NO SUCH DIRECTORY
and cancels the command.
Characteristics
The CD ( or CONNECT ) command:
Leaves your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Does not change any program in memory.
Causes an allocation check for the directory you were
originally connected to and the directory to which you are
now connecting. If either directory contains more space than
is allowed, the system prints a warning message.
Related Commands
ACCESS for obtaining group as well as ownership rights equal to those
of the owner of a directory
MOUNT for making a structure available for connecting and ensuring
the continued availability of the structure
Examples
The user connects to the directory <INSTRUMENTATION> on his
currently connected structure.
@CD (CONNECT TO DIRECTORY) <INSTRUMENTATION>
PASSWORD:
The user connects to the directory <SHELDON> on file structure
ACCTG:. He types CONN, leaves a space, types ACCTG:<SHELDON>,
and press the RETURN key. On the following line the system
prints PASSWORD:, then the user types the password and presses
the RETURN key.
@CD ACCTG:<SHELDON>
PASSWORD:
EDIT Command
Function
The EDIT command lets you edit a file using the EDIT program.
Here at the CRC, the EDIT program is either TV or SED. TV is the
system default( defined) editor. You can set the default editor
to be SED by giving the command:
@DECLARE PCL SYS:SED
^
|
|
TOPS-20 prompt
Format
1). TV editor
@EDIT (FILE) input (OUTPUT AS) output
2). SED editor
@EDIT (FILE) /switches input (OUTPUT AS) output
/switches is any combination of switches separated by space
To get the list of the switches type ? after EDIT
command. The system will display all available switches
you can use.You may use recognition on the switch
name and switch value. For the detail description of the
switches refer to SED editor reference manual.
input specifies the file you want to change.
the system recognizes the highest generation.
output specifies the output file. The system always
recognizes a new generation of the output file. If
you do not specify an output file, the system uses an
output file with the same name and type as the input
file, but with a new generation number. The output
file is always placed in your currently connected
structure and directory unless you explicitly type in
an alternative structure or directory in the output
specification.
Special Cases
The EDIT command starts TV or SED as long as you give a legal
file specification as an argument. If the file exists, Both
editor TV or SED will enter EDIT mode for the file.
if the file does not exist, and your defined editor is TV
(also system default editor) , the editor will print an error
message and then ask you to reinput the filespec. If your defined
editor is SED the editor will print error message and the EDIT
command will be aborted.
If you do not give any arguments to the EDIT command, the system
uses the arguments you gave in the last CREATE or EDIT command.
If you have not given a CREATE or EDIT command since you have
logged in, the system cannot recall any arguments and prints the
message:
1). TV editor
*no saved filespec
TV will assume that you wish to create a new file and you
will have to input file name at the end of edit session
(see comand CREATE).
2). SED editor
Unfortunately SED editor will not display any error message
and also will start the SED program.
Hints
Refer to the description of the TV or SED program for a list of all
the EDIT commands.
Operation
1. Type EDIT and press the ESC key; the system prints (FILE).
@EDIT (FILE)
2. Type (or use recognition on) the input file specification.
press the ESC key. The system prints (OUTPUT AS).
@EDIT (FILE) TEST.FOR.4 (OUTPUT AS)
3. Press the RETURN key if you want a new generation of the
input file as your output file. If you want, press the ESC
key and the system will print this default output file. Then
press the RETURN key. Otherwise type (or use recognition on)
the output file, then press the RETURN key. The system
always chooses a new generation if you use recognition.
@EDIT (FILE) TEST.FOR.4 (OUTPUT AS) TEST.FOR.5
You can, provided you have the appropriate access privileges,
edit a file in another directory or a file in a directory on
another file structure by giving the complete file
specification (dev:<dir>filename.type). You can also specify
the placement of the output file in another directory on
another structure. For example:
@EDIT (FILE) HSTRY:<ESTEY>TEST.COB (OUTPUT AS) ADMIN:<GREEN>TEST.COB
If your defined editor is SED and you want to give switches--
1. Type the letters EDIT and press the ESC key; the system
prints (FILE).
@EDIT (FILE)
2. Type a slash and type (you may type ? for list of switches) the
switch name. If the switch has a value, type a colon
followed by the value. You can use recognition on the switch
by pressing the ESC key.
@EDIT (FILE) /READ
@EDIT (FILE) /WRITE
3. Type (or use recognition on) as many switches as you need,
then follow the directions in steps 2 and 3 under Operations.
Characteristics
The EDIT command starts the EDIT program, thereby clearing any
program from memory. Your terminal is left at EDIT command
level.
CREATE Command
Function
The CREATE command lets you create a file using the EDIT program.
Here at the CRC, the EDIT program is either TV or SED. TV is the
system default( defined) editor. You can set the default editor
to be SED by giving the command:
@DECLARE PCL SYS:SED
^
|
|
TOPS-20 prompt
Format
@CREATE (FILE) filespec
filespec specifies the file you want to create.
If you have defined your editor to be SED then you may use
switches with CREATE command. The format of the CREATE
command will then be as follow:
@CREATE (FILE) /Switch(es) filespec
To get the list of the switches type ? after CREATE command.
The system will display all available switches you can use.
For the detail description of the switches refer the SED
editor reference manual.
Operation
1. Type CREATE and press the ESC key; the system prints (FILE).
@CREATE (FILE)
2. Type the input file specification; then press the
RETURN key. You may use recognition while inputing file
spec.
@CREATE (FILE) TEST.FOR
If you are using TV, the CREATE command will put you into
EDIT mode by prompting you with an asterisk (*), just as if
you have typed the EDIT command with the specifications of the
newly-created file as argument. You can now create the file
using all the EDIT command.
If you are using SED, the first line of the new file will contain
the message:
;This file is Filespec
Where filespec is the filespec specified in the CREATE command.
You can now create the file using SED editng commands.
Hints
Refer to the description of the apropriate EDIT program (SED or TV)
for a list of all the EDIT commands.
The CREATE command starts EDIT as long as you give a legal file
specificationi as an argument. If you give just a file name and
type, the system creates a new generation of that file.
If you specify a file name whereby the file already exist
and your defined editor is SED then the system recognizes
the highest generation and assumes you want to edit the file;
if the file does not exist, the system allows you to
create the file.
However if your default editor is TV then the system will
not assumes you wont to edit the file but you wish to create
a new file. The system will recognize the highest generation
number and will create a new file of that number.
If you are using SED and give a file name, type and existing
generation number, EDIT sets the output file generation number
to one higher than the highest existing generation number,
even though it prints the generation number you gave.
If you are using system default TV editor, the file created
will contain the generation number as specified in the CREATE
command.
If you do not give any arguments to the CREATE command, the
system uses the arguments you gave in the last CREATE or EDIT
command. If you have not given a CREATE or EDIT command since
you have logged in, the system cannot recall any arguments and
prints the message:
1). TV editor
*No saved filespec
You will then have to specify filespec at end of Create/Edit
session.
2). SED editor
sys:sed=
unable to create file
SED will also display short description of SED editor.
Characteristics
The CREATE command starts the EDIT program, thereby clearing any
previous programI from memory. Your terminal is left at EDIT
command level.
SET SPOOLED-OUTPUT Command
Function
@SET SPOOLED-OUTPUT IMMEDIATE
DEFERRED
Directs the system either to begin processing
your spooled output requests (e.g. those made
using the COPY or CREF command) as soon as you
make them, or to defer them until log-out.
Check with INFO SPOOLED-OUTPUT-ACTION.
Default - IMMEDIATE
ORIGINAL Command
Function
The ORIGINAL command invokes the command as it was before it was
redefined using PCL (the programmable command language).
Format
@ORIGINAL (EXEC COMMAND) command
where command is an Exec command which was not defined using PCL.
Characteristics
You may only execute original commands if you redefined them yourself.
Those commands which have been redefined in the system-wide Exec,
cannot be accessed by users.
The EDIT command normally uses the TV editor. If you have redefined it
to use SED then you may use TV by giving the command ORIGINAL EDIT (or
O ED).
ADVISE Command
Function
The ADVISE command links your terminal with another user's terminal
so that you can give commands to his job. The advisee can still give
commands to his job.
Format
@ADVISE argument
where
argument is either a user name or terminal line number
Characteristics
Input to Other Job
For as long as the ADVISE command is in effect, the commands you
give affect the advisee's job instead of your own.
Ending Advice
To end an advising link that you have formed between terminals,
you must type CTRL/E. This CTRL/E is not echoed on either
terminal.
Refused Advice
Ordinarily, you cannot advise a job unless its terminal is set
to receive advice. However, if you have Wheel or Operator
capabilities enabled, you can advise any job.
Special Cases
Advisee Has More Than One Job
If more than one job is looged in under the user name you
specify, the system gives you a list of that user's terminal
numbers and associated programs to choose from, then prints
TTY: to prompt your response. Type your choice of terminal
number after the prompt.
Advising a Pseudoterminal (PTY:)
It you try to advise a PTY: the system informs you of this
and asks you to confirm with a carriage return.
Help during ADVISE
Using CTRL/^? for HELP
Using CTRL/^? for help does not seem to work!
Warnings
BREAK command
Issuing a BREAK command does not seem to prevent the advisor's
terminal from printing what either user types.
Talking Between a VT100 and a VT52
If links between VT100 and VT52 terminals are established using
an ADVISE (or TALK) command, the VT52 may function improperly
during or after the linked interval (e.g., by requiring frequent
CTRL/Q commands to print multiple lines of output). Turning the
terminal off and then on again (after the linked interval) will
correct this problem.
Restrictions
Compatible Terminals
Unless the terminals involved in an advising link have
compatible characteristics (e.g., terminal width, ability to
handle tabs and lowercase letters), some information can be
lost or overprinted. To avoid this problem, the user of the
faster or more capable terminal should adjust his terminal's
characteristics, if possible before the ADVISE command is given.
Detached Jobs
You cannot advise detached jobs.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The ADVISE command does not affect memory and leaves your terminal at
the advisee's terminal's command level, controlling his job.
Related Commands
RECEIVE ADVICE for allowing other users to advise you
REFUSE ADVICE for preventing other users from advising you
REMARK for sending comments only
TALK for linking terminals so that your comments
affect only your own job
Examples
1. Advise a user, then immediately type CTRL/E to end advice.
@ADVISE J-BLOGGS
ESCAPE CHARACTER IS <CTRL>E, TYPE <CTRL>^? FOR HELP
J-BLOGGS JOB 51 EXEC
LINK FROM A-MOLE, TTY 228
[ADVISING]
[ADVICE TERMINATED]
@
2. Advise a user's job and access a directory for him.
@ADVISE J-BLOGGS
ESCAPE CHARACTER IS <CTRL>E, TYPE <CTRL>^? FOR HELP
J-BLOGGS JOB 48 EXEC
LINK FROM A-MOLE, TTY 226
[ADVISING]
!I'LL ACCESS THE DIRECTORY FOR YOU. THEN YOU CAN USE IT.
@ACCESS <PANDORA>
Password:
@!OK, NOW YOU CAN USE IT.
@!THANKS.
[ADVICE TERMINATED]
@
3. Advise a user who is logged in at more than one terminal.
Choose one of them.
@ADVISE J-BLOGGS
TTY25, EXEC
TTY41, EXEC
TTY27, EXEC
TTY: 27
ESCAPE CHARACTER IS <CTRL>E, TYPE <CTRL>^? FOR HELP
J-BLOGGS JOB 22 EXEC
LINK FROM A-MOLE, TTY 225
[Advising]
...
[Advice terminated]
@
APPEND Command
Function
The APPEND command adds the contents of one or more source files
to the end of a destination file. The destination file can be an
existing file or a new file. The contents of the original source
files are not changed.
Format
@APPEND (SOURCE FILE) source filespec(s) (TO) destination filespec,
@@subcommand
where
source filespec(s) is a single file specification, or a
series of them separated by commas
destination filespec is the specification of the destination
file on disk; this can be a new file
@@subcommand means that after a final comma you can
type an optional keyword, modifying the
mode or format of information transfer,
as described below
APPEND Command Subcommands
ASCII PARITY specifies that the files being appended
NOPARITY are written in ASCII mode, with 36-bit
words each consisting of five 7-bit
bytes and a parity bit; the PARITY
argument is not currently in use;
NOPARITY (the default) means that the
least significant bit is set to 0 on
input and is lost on output.
BINARY calls for a direct transfer of data in
36-bit bytes
BYTE n specifies that the byte size of the
destination file is to be n (any decimal
number). If you do not give the BYTE
subcommand, the destination file will
have the same byte size as the source
file.
IMAGE same as BINARY
IMAGE BINARY same as BINARY
Output
As each file is appended, the system prints its specification and the
word [OK]. Also, if recognition is used on the destination file
specification, the system prints its status (Old generation, New
generation, New file, or Superseding, for disk files; or OK, if the
files are appended to a non-disk device).
Characteristics
Files Appended in Order Specified
The APPEND command attaches source files to the destination
file in the order you specify them; the contents of the last
specified source will appear at the end of the destination
file whan APPEND is finished.
Subcommands Optional
For most purposes you do not need to use subcommands when
transferring information with the APPEND command. These
subcommands, specifying the format of the appended files, are
required only when using certain devices (for example, devices
of the form MTn: (tape drives) using labeled tapes) or under
particular conditions (for example, when transferring files over
network facilities). If you are appending information from disk
files or from your terminal and you do not use any sub-
commands, the data will be appended as written, whether in a
standard format(usually ASCII or binary) or not.
Special Cases
Wildcard Characters
Wildcard characters (* and %) can be used in source file
specifications only. The files are then appended in
alphabetical order.
Appending Information from your terminal
The APPEND command leaves your terminal at TOPS-20 command
level when TTY: is not the source device. If the source
device is your terminal, the system transfers anything you type
(following the termination of the command) to the
destination file. The transfer continues until you type
a CTRL/Z (^Z). CTRL/Z completes the execution
of the APPEND command and leaves your terminal at TOPS-20
command level. CTRL/U, CTRL/R, CTRL/W and the Delete key can
be used to edit the current line of terminal input.
Restrictions
Source Files With Differing Formats
You can use the APPEND command to transfer data from a magnetic
tape, terminal, card reader, paper tape reader, or other device
to disk files. If source files written in differing formats are
specified within the same command, some data can be lost in the
transfer.
Appending to Archived Files
You can append the contents of an archive file to another file
by specifying it as the first (or source) argument of a APPEND
command. You can then edit the resulting file, because it does
not gain archive status although part of its contents are the
same as those of the archived file; the archived file remains
unchanged. However, you cannot give the specification of an
archived file as the second (or destination) argument of an
APPEND command, as this would change the file's contents.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The APPEND command does not affect memory, and leaves your terminal at
TOPS-20 command level.
Related Commands
COPY for making copies of files.
Examples
1. The user appends all the files with the extension
.DAT (R2.DAT, TSTAT.DAT, ROOT.DAT and WALDS.DAT)
to the new file MASTER.DAT.
@APPEND (SOURCE FILE) *.DAT (TO) MASTER.DAT.1 !NEW FILE!
R2.DAT.1 [OK]
TSTAT.DAT.2 [OK]
ROOT.DAT.1 [OK]
WALDS.DAT.3 [OK]
@
2. The user appends the file RASTER.SCA.1 to the highest
generation of the file SCREEN.LAY.
@APPEND (SOURCE FILE) RASTER.SCA.1 (TO) SCREEN.LAY
RASTER.SCA.1 [OK]
@
3. The user appends the file SMALL.FOR on the public structure
(PS:) to the file LARGE.FOR on the structure STU:.
@APPEND (SOURCE FILE) PS:<PORADA>SMALL.FOR (TO)
STU:<PORADA>LARGE.FOR
PS:<PORADA>SMALL.FOR.2 [OK}
@
4. The user appends a number of source files to a destination
file by placing a comma between the source files.
@APPEND (SOURCE FILE) MAIN.DAT.1,HEADED.FRM.1 (TO) NEW.FIL
MAIN.DAT.1 [OK]
HEADER.FRM.1 [OK]
The source files will appear in the given order from left
to right in NEW.FIL.
5. Use a wildcard character (%) to append several files to the
end of another file.
@APPEND %ORT.FOR HIL.FOR
FORT.FOR.8 [OK]
GORT.FOR.3 [OK]
HORT.FOR.1 [OK]
MORT.FOR.2 [OK]
@
6. Use a wildcard character with the APPEND command to create a
new file.
@APPEND *.TXT BACKUP.TXT
MAIL.TXT.1 [OK]
NEWRUN.TXT.4 [OK]
NX.TXT.4 [OK]
@
7. Append a message from your terminal to the beginning of the
file created in Example 6. Use the symbolic generation number
-1 to specify this action.
@APPEND TTY:BACKUP.TXT BACKUP.TXT.-1
TTY:
!THIS IS A BACKUP FILE FOR ALL TEXT FILES.
^Z
BACKUP.TXT.1 [OK]
@
BUILD Command
Function
The BUILD command creates, modifies, or deletes a directory subordinate
to a directory to which you have write access.
Format
@BUILD (DIRECTORY NAME) str:<directory>
@@subcommand
@@ .
.
.
@@
@
where
str: is the name of the (mounted) structure
containing the directory you are building.
directory is the name of the directory you are building;
it must be of 39 or fewer characters.
@@ . indicates that you automatically enter sub-
. command mode after completing the BUILD command
. line
@@
subcommand is a keyword, chosen from the list below,
indicating your choice of BUILD command options
Summary of BUILD Command Subcommands
ABORT
ABSOLUTE-ARPANET-SOCKETS (ARPANET not installed at CRC)
ACCOUNT-DEFAULT account
ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES
ARPANET-ACCESS (ARPANET not installed at CRC)
ARPANET-WIZARD (ARPANET not installed at CRC)
DECNET-ACCESS
DEFAULT-FILE-PROTECTION octal protection code
Default code - 777700
DIRECTORY-GROUP group number n
DISABLE
ENABLE
ENQ-DEQ
FILES-ONLY
GENERATIONS n
Default n - 1
IPCF
KILL
LIST NAME-ONLY
FAST
VERBOSE
MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES n
Default n - 0
NOT ABSOLUTE-ARPANET-SOCKETS (ARPANET not installed at CRC)
ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES
ARPANET-ACCESS (ARPANET not installed at CRC)
ARPANET-WIZARD (ARPANET not installed at CRC)
CONFIDENTIAL
DECNET-ACCESS
DIRECTORY-GROUP group number n
ENQ-DEQ
FILES-ONLY
IPCF
KILL
OPERATOR
REPEAT-LOGIN-MESSAGES
SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP group number n
USER-GROUP group number n
WHEEL
NUMBER octal directory number
OFFLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT date or +n
Default n - 90
ONLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT date or +n
Default n - 60
OPERATOR
PASSWORD 1- to 39-character word
PERMANENT n
Default n - 250
PROTECTION octal protection code
Default code - 777700
PUSH
REPEAT-LOGIN-MESSAGES
SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP group number n
USER-GROUP group number n
WHEEL
WORKING n
Default n - 250
BUILD Command Subcommands
ABORT cancels all work done during current BUILD command. IF
directory was new, it does not exist, if old, it remains
unchanged.
ABSOLUTE-ARPANET-SOCKETS
ARPANET not installed at CRC therefore command
irrelevant.
ACCOUNT-DEFAULT account
causes the specified account to be charged for a
terminal session whenever the user does not include an
account in his LOGIN command.
ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES
causes on-line files that have expired to be marked for
archiving.
ARPANET-ACCESS
ARPANET-WIZARD
ARPANET not installed at CRC therefore commands
irrelevant.
DECNET-ACCESS allows the directory owner to establish DECNET
connections. This subcommand works in conjunction
with pre-established system manager controls.
DEFAULT-FILE-PROTECTION octal protection code
assigns this number as default for the protection code
of each file subsequently placed in the directory. The
protection code is constructed (by addition) from the
octal values shown below:
77 full access to the file
40 read the file
20 write & delete the file
10 execute the program contained in the file
04 append to the file
02 list the files specification using DIRECTORY-
class commands
00 no access to the file
Default code - 777700
DIRECTORY-GROUP group number n
places the directory in a group, thereby allowing users
in the same group access to it according to the middle 2
digits of the protection code, & access to files in the
directory according to the middle 2 digits of each
file's protection code. You can assign up to 19
directory group numbers to each directory, with values
ranging from 1 through 262143 (2**18 - 1).
DISABLE suspends any special capabilities that you may have.
ENABLE allows you to activate any privileged capabilities.
ENQ-DEQ grants the directory owner the ability to perform global
Enqueue & Dequeue functions.
FILES-ONLY declares the directory to be a files-only directory,
i.e. one not associated with a user.
GENERATIONS n specifies a default for the number of successive
generations of files to be retained in the directory.
This number must be from 0 to 15, with 0 meaning an
infinite number.
Default n - 1
IPCF allows the directory owner to execute all privileged
IPCF functions
KILL eliminates the directory & any files it contains from
the system; you must confirm this subcommand with an
extra carriage return.
LIST NAME-ONLY provides a listing at your terminal of parameter values
FAST set for the directory by TOPS-20 commands, BUILD
VERBOSE subcommands, or by default. The FAST listing always
includes the subdirectory's name, some mention of the
password, working & permanent storage limits, &, if they
have been set, directory number, account default,
maximum number of subdirectories allowed to this
directory, the date & time of last log-in, group
memberships, & user group numbers assignable by this
directory. The VERBOSE listing adds the other values
that can be assigned by BUILD subcommands, while NAME-
ONLY restricts output to the directory name.
Default - FAST
MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES n
allows the owner of this directory to build up to n
subdirectories of his own, & subtracts an equal number
from the value of this parameter for the superior
directory.
The following subcommands withdraw the specified subcommand:
NOT ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES
DECNET-ACCESS
DIRECTORY-GROUP group number n
ENQ-DEQ
FILES-ONLY
IPCF
KILL
OPERATOR
REPEAT-LOGIN-MESSAGES
SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP group number n
USER-GROUP group number n
NUMBER octal directory number
assigns a specific directory number (note: usually the
default is adequate). Directory numbers 1 through 17
must never be assigned by users, as they are reserved
for system use.
Default directory number - assigned by system
OFFLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT date or +n
establishes the tape expiration date for files that are
to go off-line because of migration or archiving. If
you specify "+n", the expiration date will be n days
from the date the files are moved off-line.
ONLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT date or +n
establishes the disk expiration date for files that are
to be created in the directory. If
you specify "+n", the expiration date will be n days
from the date the files are moved off-line.
OPERATOR grants Operator capabilities to the owner of the
directory.
PASSWORD 1- to 39-character word
assigns a password, consisting of alphanumeric
characters & possibly including hyphens (-), to the
directory.
PERMANENT n allocates permanent disk storage capacity n (in pages)
to the directory, & subtracts an equal number from the
permanent disk storage capacity of the superior
directory.
Default n - 250
PROTECTION octal protection code
assigns this number as default for the protection code
of the directory. The
protection code is constructed (by addition) from the
octal values shown below:
77 full access to the directory
40 access to files in the directory (including
expunging individual files), consistent with
the file protection of files
10 connect to the directory without giving a
password, undelete files, expunge the entire
directory, & change times, dates, & accounting
info for files. All other access is governed by
the file protection of each file.
04 create files in the directory
00 no access to the directory
Default code - 777700
PUSH create a level of TOPS-20 inferior to the one
from which you issued the BUILD command & leaves
your terminal at this new level. You can then
issue TOPS-20 commands to create conditions or
obtain info that you may need during the BUILD
session. Give the POP command to return to
BUILD.
REPEAT-LOGIN-MESSAGES causes all system messages (mail sent by
privileged users to all users, contained in the
file PS:<SYSTEM>MAIL.TXT) to be printed on the
user's terminal each time he logs in to this
directory. If this subcommand is not given,
only those system messages created since the
last time he logged in are printed.
SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP group number n
allows propagation of any or all of the group numbers
in a directory's user group list to the subdirectories
of that directory. Issuing this subcommand is the first
step required in establishing subdirectory group rights.
You complete the process by issuing the USER-GROUP sub-
command for each subdirectory. You can assign up to
19 subdirectory user group numbers to each directory,
with values ranging from 1 to 262143 (2**18 - 1).
USER-GROUP group number n
assigns the directory owner to the given user group.
You can assign up to 19 subdirectory user group numbers
to each directory, with values ranging from 1 to 262143.
WORKING n allocates working disk storage capacity n (in pages) to
the directory, & subtracts an equal number from the
working disk storage capacity of the superior directory.
Odinarily, working & permanent storage limits are equal.
Default n - 250
Characteristics
BUILD and ^ECREATE
The BUILD command is identical in format to the ^ECREATE command
If you use BUILD with capabilities enabled, it has the same
power as ^ECREATE, namely, to create directories & modify the
parameters of any directory on the system. Without these
capabilities, you can use BUILD to modify a more restricted set
of directories: you can modify a directory if you have write
access to the immediately superior directory. The LOGIN,
CONNECT, or ACCESS command obtains write access to the superior
directory; or, if you have sufficient group rights to the
superior directory, you can use BUILD to modify its sub-
directories.
Quotas Subtracted from the Superior Directory's Allotments
Working & permanent disk storage limits, & the maximum number of
subdirectories allowed to a subdirectory are subtracted from the
quotas allocated to the immediately superior directory. This
subtraction occurs at the time of their allotment to a sub-
directory. If the superior directory's quota is not sufficient
the BUILD command will fail. To increase the superior
directory's quota or any of these quantities you must either
kill some of its subdirectories or reduce their allotments of
the quantity. Or you can ask the system manager to increase the
allotment of the superior directory. Remember that unless you
specify working & permanent page limits, they will assume a
default value of 250 pages. The BUILD command will fail in this
case if there are not at least 250 pages free in the immediately
superior directory.
Assigning Infinite Quotas
If you have enable capabilities, you can assign the maximum
storage limit of 34359738367 (i.e. 2**35-1) to a directory.
This will appear in the response to an INFO DIR command as +INF
denoting infinite storage capacity. If you then use the BUILD
command to construct subdirectories to this directory, any disk
storage capacity assigned, even the maximum, will not be
subtracted from the superior directory. You can use this
feature to assign infinite storage capacity to a number of users
sharing a private structure. Then these users may use storage
space on the structure without limit until the disk pack fills
up.
Hints
Keeping Track of Subdirectories
Subdirectories appear as files of the type .DIRECTORY in the
immediately superior directory, so the DIR *.DIRECTORY command
for the superior directory will indicate any existing sub-
directories. To suppress the listing of these files you can use
the SET FILE PROTECTION command to give them a protection of
000000, but then you must specify the files completely (incl.
generation number) to access them in the future.
If there are 2 or more levels of subdirectories below a superior
directory, you can do something else to allow listing of them:
put each subdirectory into a group of which the owner of the
highest-level superior directory is a member. Then, if you
obtain the group rights of this owner (e.g. by using the LOGIN
or ACCESS command if the superior directory is on PS:, or ACCESS
if it is on another structure), the INFO DIR <directory.*>
command with the NAME-ONLY subcommand will produce a listing of
subdirectories at every level beneath the superior directory.
For this feature to operate properly the group field of each
subdirectory's protection code must be at least 40.
Modifying Subdirectories Easily
By following the above procedure, i.e. by making subdirectories
at every level members of groups of which the owner of the
highest-level superior directory is also a member, you make the
modification of these subdirectories mucn easier. You can use
the BUILD command to modify these subdirectories or read & write
to them, as long as you have the group memberships of this
owner. You need not connect to each subdirectory's immediate
superior to make modifications.
Restrictions
Giving Capabilities to Subdirectory Owners
In order to give capabilities to a subdirectory owner, you must
have these capabilities yourself, & they must be enabled at the
time of the BUILD command. The INFORMATION DIRECTORY command
for your log-in directory tells you which capabilities you
have, if any.
Modifying Other Directories
Unless you have enabled capabilities, you can use the BUILD
command to modify parameters of only those directories sub-
ordinate to a directory to which you have write access. If your
installation allows it, you can use the SET DIR command to
change some parameters of these directories.
Files-only Directories
By giving the FILES-ONLY subcommand you make the directory a
files-only directory. A files-only directory is not associated
with a user so should not be given capabilities or user group
memberships. Although a files-only directory can have sub-
directories, none of these can be a user directory. You cannot
give the ACCESS command or LOGIN command for a files-only
directory.
Killing Directories
You cannot kill a directory that has subdirectories; first you
must kill those subdirectories one by one. (When you kill a
directory, the files it contains are deleted & expunged.) Also,
you cannot kill a directory if you are logged into it, or there
are open files on it.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The BUILD command does not affect memory & leaves your terminal at BUILD
command level.
Related Commands
INFO DIR for examining the parameters established for a
directory
INFO DISK-USAGE for determining how much of a directory's disk
space is already assigned to files
SET DIRECTORY for changing certain directory parameters
Examples
The examples show how a user with a directory named <CHEM> builds
subdirectories in the pattern shown:
<CHEM>
|
|
|
-------------------------------------------------------------
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
<CHEM.ALLEN> <CHEM.BLAKE> <CHEM.LAB-NOTES> <CHEM.TESTS>
| | (files-only) (files-only)
| |
| |
<CHEM.ALLEN.LAB> <CHEM.BLAKE.LAB>
(files-only) (files-only)
1. Build subdirectories for 2 of your students or employees,
assigning disk space & passwords & placing them in one of your
directory groups; check their parameters.
@BUILD <CHEM.ALLEN>
[NEW]
@@WORKING 50
@@PERMANENT 50
@@PASSWORD 619JIM
@@DIRECTORY-GROUP 2391
@@LIST
NAME <CHEM.ALLEN>
Password 619JIM
Working disk storage page limit 50
Permanent disk storage page limit 50
Account default for LOGIN - none set
Directory groups 2391
@@
@BUILD <CHEM.BLAKE>
[NEW]
@@WORKING 50
@@PERMANENT 50
@@PASSWORD 127BIL
@@DIRECTORY-GROUP 2391
@@LIST
Name <CHEM.BLAKE>
Password 127BIL
Working disk storage page limit 50
Permanent disk storage page limit 50
Account default for LOGIN - none set
Directory groups 2391
@@
@
2. Modify Blake's directory to allow him to create 2 subdirectories
@BUILD <CHEM.BLAKE>
[Old]
@@MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES 2
@@
@
3. Build a files-only directory to store exam questions.
@BUILD <CHEM.TESTS>
[New]
@@FILES-ONLY
@@WORKING 10
@@PERMANENT 10
@@PASSWORD MINERVA
@@DIRECTORY-GROUP 2391
@
4. Build a files-only directory as a library directory for your
subdirectory owners. Place the directory & these users in the
same group.
@BUILD <CHEM.LAB-NOTES>
[New]
@@FILES-ONLY
@@WORKING 25
@@PERMANENT 25
@@PROTECTION 77400
@@DEFAULT-FILE-PROTECTION 775200
@@DIRECTORY-GROUP 2392
@@
@BUILD <CHEM.ALLEN>
[Old]
@@USER-GROUP 2392
@@
@@BUILD <CHEM.BLAKE>
[Old]
@@USER-GROUP 2392
@@
@
5. User Blake quits. Delete his directory.
@BUILD <CHEM.BLAKE>
[Old]
@@KILL
[Confirm]
@@
@
6. Modify a subdirectory so that the subdirectory's owner will
have 350 disk pages available.
@BUILD (DIRECTORY NAME) <TUCKER.TEST> (PASSWORD) EXAMPLES
[Old]
@@PERMANENT (DISK STORAGE PAGE LIMIT) 350
@@
?Request exceeds superior directory parmanent storage quota.
Please fix incorrect subcommands.
The action above produced an error message. To correct the
error, PUSH out of the BUILD session to learn what the superior
directory's permanent quota is.
@@PUSH
@INFORMATION (ABOUT) DISK-USAGE (OF DIRECTORY) <TUCKER>
PS:<TUCKER>
70 Pages assigned
261 Working pages, 261 permanent pages allowed
7546 Pages free on PS:, 144454 pages used.
Then return to the BUILD session, & specify a permanent quota
that is less than the superior directory's quota of 261 disk
pages.
@POP
[Continuing BUILD of directory PS:<TUCKER.TEST>]
@@PERMANENT (DISK STORAGE PAGE LIMIT) 170
@@
@
CONNECT or CD Command
( CD is a synonym for CONNECT)
Function
The CONNECT ( or CD ) command connects you to another directory
and disconnects you from the current directory.
Hints
Connecting to a directory grants you owner privileges to that
directory and files. Whenever you give a command without
specifying a directory, the system uses the files in this
connected directory.
If you omit the structure or directory name from the CONNECT
( or CD ) command,the system defaults to your currently connected
connected structure or directory. But, if you omit both the
structure and directory name, i.e., CONNECT ( or CD ) , the
system defaults to the public structure (PS:) and your logged-in
directory.
The first time you give a CONNECT ( or CD ) command to a directory
that is on a file structure other than the public structure
(PS:), you should give the MOUNT STRUCTURE command before the
CONNECT ( or CD ) command.
Format
@CONNECT (TO DIRECTORY) dev:<dir>
[or @CD (CONNECT TO DIRECTORY) dev:<dir>]
PASSWORD:password
dev: is the name of the file structure that contains
the directory to which you are connecting. The
CONNECT ( or CD ) command will only accept a file
structure name in the dev: field.
<dir> is the name of the directory to which you are
connecting. The brackets must be included in
directory names. You can use recognition on
directory names. Remember to type the left angle
bracket.
password is the password of the directory to which you wish
to connect. The password is not required if you
own the directory (you own a directory if your
user name is the same as the directory name), or
if the directory protection allows you to connect
without giving a password.
Operation
1. Type CONN and press the ESC key. The system prints ECT (TO
DIRECTORY).
@CONNECT (TO DIRECTORY)
or type CD and press the ESC key.
The system prints (CONNECT TO DIRECTORY)
2. Type the file structure name and a colon. (You do not have
to type the file structure name if the directory you are
connecting to is on the currently connected structure.)
@CONNECT (TO DIRECTORY) ADMIN1:
3. Type (or use recognition on) the directory name. Press the
RETURN key. The system prints PASSWORD: on the next line.
@CONNECT (TO DIRECTORY) ADMIN1:<BERLITZ>
PASSWORD:
4. Type the password belonging to the directory and press the
RETURN key. (If you own the directory or if the directory
protection gives you the proper access, you do not have to
give a password; just press the RETURN key.) When the
CONNECT command succeeds, the system prints an @ on your
terminal.
@CONNECT (TO DIRECTORY) ADMIN1:<BERLITZ>
PASSWORD:
@
Errors
1. If you do not enter the correct password, the system pauses and
then prints the message:
?can't connect to specified directory
and cancels the command. You should obtain the correct
password and reissue the command.
2. If you do not specify the password and just press return key,
the system will prompt for the password again.
3. If you did not give the MOUNT STRUCTURE command and you
specify a file structure that is not on line, the system
prints the message:
?STRUCTURE IS NOT MOUNTED or ?NO SUCH DEVICE
and cancels the command. First, check to see if you entered
the name correctly. If you did, give the MOUNT command to
request that the file structure be placed on line.
4. If you give a non-existent directory name, the system prints
the message:
?does not match directory or user name -
and cancels the command.
Characteristics
The CONNECT ( or CD ) command:
Leaves your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Does not change any program in memory.
Causes an allocation check for the directory you were
originally connected to and the directory to which you are
now connecting. If either directory contains more space than
is allowed, the system prints a warning message.
Restrictions
Your capabilities are associated with your log-in user name only
and not your connected directory.
For some system features, CONNECT does not affect the directory
used:
Mail
The mail program inserts messages addressed to you into
a file in your log-in directory only. The RDMAIL program
reads messages from this file only.
System Accounting
The set command allows arguments valid for your log-in
user name only. Generally, charges for system use are
made to your log-in user name.
Queue-class Commands
The Queue-class commands charge processing requests to
your log-in user name only.
Related Commands
ACCESS for obtaining group as well as ownership rights equal to those
of the owner of a directory
MOUNT for making a structure available for connecting and ensuring
the continued availability of the structure
Examples
The user connects to the directory <INSTRUMENTATION> on his
currently connected structure.
@CONNECT (TO DIRECTORY) <INSTRUMENTATION>
PASSWORD:
The user connects to the directory <SHELDON> on file structure
ACCTG:. He types CONN, leaves a space, types ACCTG:<SHELDON>,
and press the RETURN key. On the following line the system
prints PASSWORD:, then the user types the password and presses
the RETURN key.
@CONN ACCTG:<SHELDON>
PASSWORD:
CONTINUE Command
Function
The CONTINUE command restores execution of a program that is
halted. If you have preserved several processes, then you may select
which one you wish to continue.
Hints
Stopping your program or providing input after CONTINUE STAY
If you have given the CONTINUE STAY command and you then
wish to stop your continued program or send terminal input
to it, you must first give a CONTINUE NORMALLY command, to
restore your terminal to program command level. Then you
can give CTRL/Cs to stop the program, or type the input that
is required.
Monitoring your program.
CONTINUE STAY, by keeping your terminal at TOPS-20 command
level, lets you use TOPS-20 commands to monitor the progress
of your program (see Related Commands, below) while it is
running. You can also do other work as long as the commands
you use do not affect memory.
Using PUSH to get a new TOPS-20 command level
To use commands that call a program or otherwise affect
memory, or to start a second program while the first one is
running, give a PUSH command immediately after CONTINUE
STAY. You receive a fresh copy of memory (address space)
and can then give commands that affect memory or call
programs. These commands do not affect the program that is
already running.
Using KEEP to preserve your program
You may use the KEEP command to allow you to run other programs
at the same time, without destroying the "kept" program
Format
@CONTINUE (FORK) argument
where
argument is one of the following keywords :-
NORMALLY which directs your program to resume
executing and restores your terminal
to command level (if any) within the
program
STAY which directs your program to resume
executing but keeps your terminal at
TOPS-20 command level
Default - NORMALLY
or one of :-
fork name the name of the process to be continued
fork number the number of the process to be continued
Operation
1. Type CONT and press the ESC key. The system prints INUE
(FORK). Press the RETURN key and the program resumes
execution.
@CONTINUE (FORK)
Characteristics
The CONTINUE command continues the program in memory and leaves
your terminal under its control.
Restrictions
Similar programs competing for files
If you have two similar programs running at once after using
CONTINUE STAY and PUSH commands (see Hints, above), they may
try to access the same files at the same time (e.g.,
temporary files labeled by job number, used by compilers).
This may cause unpredictable situations to develop. To
avoid the possibility, run different kinds of program or
give different kinds of command (e.g., a LOAD-class comand
and an EDIT-class command) at the different levels in your
job.
Programs competing for terminal input
If you have two programs running at once after CONTINUE STAY
(see Hints - Using PUSH, above), it is possible for the program
running at the higher (first) TOPS-20 command-level to intercept
TOPS-20 commands given at the lower level. These can be interpreted
as commands or data directed at the higher-level program. If
you suspect that this is happening, you can stop it by first
typing CTRL/Cs to be sure you are at the lower TOPS-20
command level. Then give POP commands to return to the
higher TOPS-20 level. You may have to type more than one
POP command because terminal input is being divided
arbitrarily between the two levels. POP stops the
lower-level program and erases its copy of memory. Finally,
give CTRL/Cs followed by a CONTINUE NORMALLY command; this
puts you at program command level in the higher-level
program so you can give the commands or data it requires.
Commands that affect context of job
Certain commands, by altering the context of your job, can
affect programs you are running without changing memory.
ACCESS, CONNECT, and DEFINE are examples. Give these
commands with caution after CONTINUE STAY, even if you have
given a PUSH command.
Effect on memory and Terminal
The CONTINUE NORMALLY command does not affect memory, resumes
processing the program in memory, and leaves your terminal at
program commnd level (if there is one). The CONTINUE STAY
command also does not effect memory and resumes processing the
program in memory, but leaves your terminal at TOPS-20 command
level.
Related commands
DETACH CONTINUE for disengaging your current job
from your terminal and continuing
the program that the job is
running
INFORMATION FILE-STATUS for monitoring files being written
by your program
INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE for monitoring your program's use
of memory
INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS for monitoring your program's use
of CPU time
PUSH for obtaining a lower TOPS-20
command level (and a fresh copy of
memory)
REENTER for starting your current program
at its alternate entry point (if
any)
START for starting your current program
at the begining
Examples
1) Continue a program that you have halted.
@CONTINUE
2) Run a program,then halt it by typing CTRL/Cs. Give the
CONTINUE command and proceed.
@RUN QUOTNT
type two numbers: 312. ^C
@CONTINUE
45, 6.675
the quotient of 312.450 over 6.675 is 46.809
STOP
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME:0.14 ELAPSED TIME: 35.62
EXIT
@
3) Start compiling a long file. After compilation has begun,
give a CTRL/C to stop and return to the TOPS-20 command
proccessor. Use CONTINUE STAY to resume compilation, amd then
PUSH to receive a new TOPS-20 command level. Do a calculation
at this lower level, then give the POP and CONTINUE
commands to return to the compilation in progress. The
compiler finishes, in this case, after you have done so.
@COMPILE DUMPER.MAC
MACRO: DUMPER
^C
@CONTINUE STAY
@PUSH
TOPS-20 Command processor 5.1(1356)-2
@EVAL 25698/(126*76)
2
@POP
@CONTINUE
EXIT
@
COPY Command
Function
The COPY command copies the contents of one or more source files
to one or more destination files.
Format
@COPY (FROM) source filespec (TO) destination filespec,
@@subcommand
source is a single file specification or a string of file
filespec specifications (separated by commas) that
designate the source file(s). A file
specification has the form:
dev:<dir>name.typ.gen
If you omit dev:, the system uses DSK: (your
currently connected file structure). If you omit
<dir> the system uses your connected directory.
The wildcard characters are permitted.
destination is the destination file specification. If you
filespec press the ESC key at the beginning of this field,
the system copies the source files to your
connected directory using the same file name and
type, but with a generation new to the destination
directory. The * wildcard character is permitted.
The destination file specification takes the form:
dev:<dir>name.typ.gen
If you omit dev:, the system uses DSK: (your
currently connected file structure). If you omit
<dir>, the system uses your connected directory.
If you omit the file type (or use an asterisk in
its place), the system uses the type of the
appropriate source file. If you omit the
generation, the system uses a generation number
new to the destination directory.
@@subcommand means that after a final comma you can
type an optional keyword, specifying the
mode or format of information transfer,
as described below
COPY Command Subcommands
ASCII PARITY specifies that the file being copied is
ASCII NOPARITY written in ASCII mode, with 36-bit words each
consisting of five 7-bit bytes and a parity
bit; the PARITY argument is not currently in
use; NOPARITY (the default) means that the
least significant bit is set to 0 on input
and is lost on output.
BINARY calls for a direct transfer of data in 36-bit
bytes.
BYTE n specifies that the byte size of the
destinatoin file is to be n (any decimal
number). If you do not give the BYTE
subcommand, the destination file will have
the same byte size as the source file. See
also Hints - Viewing Display Screen Data,
below.
IMAGE same as BINARY
IMAGE BINARY same as BINARY
Hints
Use the RENAME command instead of the COPY command if you are
moving files from one name to another or one directory to
another. RENAME is faster than COPY. However, to move files
from one structure to another, use the COPY command. RENAME will
not work across structures.
Use the wildcard construction in the source file specification to
copy multiple files. For example, the source file specification
*.FOR would copy all the files with the type .FOR to the
destination. The source file specification EXPAND.* would copy
all the files with the file name EXPAND.
When you use wildcard characters in the source file
specification, carefully select the destination file
specification:
-If you are copying the files from another directory, just
press the ESC key at the beginning of the destination file
specification. The system copies the files to the destination
using the same names and file types, but creating new
generations if any files with the same name and type already
exist. The following command copies all the files with the
type .FOR from the directory <MOSLER> and gives them the same
name in your directory.
@COPY (FROM) <MOSLER>*.FOR.* (TO) *.FOR.-1
-If you are copying the files within a directory, you probably
want to make another copy with a different name or type. For
the destination file specification, use a wildcard character.
The following command copies all the files with the type .FIL
to files with the same name, but with the type .LIB.
@COPY (FROM) *.FIL.* (TO) *.LIB
-If you want to change the file name as you are copying files,
specify the new name as the destination file specification.
The following command copies all the source files to the
destination using the source file type and the new file name
NEWTST.
@COPY (FORM) TESTFL.*.* (TO) NEWTST.*
Copying to or from TTY:
You can simulate the action of the CREATE command for
creating files by copying from device TTY: to a new
filespec ending your input with a CTRL/Z; use CTRL/U,
CTRL/R, CTRL/W, and the DELETE key to edit the current
line of terminal input. You can simulate the action of
the TYPE command for displaying files by copying from
an existing filespec to device TTY:.
Viewing display screen data
If you specify TTY: as the destination filespec and
then give the BYTE 8 subcommand, characters in the
source file will be sent literally to your terminal.
Do this to examine special display screen data.
Operation
1. Type COPY and press the ESC key; the system prints (FROM).
@COPY (FROM)
2. Type (or use recognition on) the source file specification
and press the ESC key (if you did not use recognition). The
system prints (TO).
@COPY (FROM) LISTFL.ALG.1 (TO)
3. Type (or use recognition on) the destination file
specification, then press the RETURN key. If you want the
default of creating a new file of the same name and type as
the source file specification, just press the RETURN key. If
you copy one or more files, the system prints a running
record of the files it is copying. It prints the source file
specification followed by an arrow and the destination file
specification. When the transfer is complete, the system
prints [OK] and proceeds to the next source file.
@COPY (FROM) LISTFL.ALG.1 (TO) NEWPRG.ALG
LISTFL.ALG.1 => NEWPRG.ALG.1 [OK]
@
Characteristics
Normal Operation - No subcommands
For most purposes you do not need subcommands when
copying files. When you do not use subcommands the
information is copied as written whether in a
standard format (usually in ASCII or BINARY) or not.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The COPY command does not change a program in memory and leaves
your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Restrictions
You may use the COPY command to transfer files to the line
printer and magnetic tape, but refer to the PRINT command and the
DUMPER program for a description of the additional features they
provide.
You cannot continue a COPY command that you stop by typing
CTRL/Cs.
Copying Archived files
You can make a copy of an archived file by specifying it
as the first (or source) argument in a COPY command, and
specifying a file of different name or type as destination.
You can edit the new file, because it does not have archive
status although it has the same contents as the original file.
However, you cannot give the specification of an archived file
as the second (or destination) argument of a COPY command, as
this would replace the file's contents. If you attempt to do
so, whatever source argument you supply will be copied into
the next higher generation of the archived file, leaving the
archived file intact. However, if you include the generation
number when supplying an archived file as the second argument
of a COPY command, the command will fail.
Files of type .DIRECTORY
You cannot copy subdirectories which appear as files of type
.DIRECTORY in the immediately superior directory.
Warning
Destroying the previous Contents of Files
If you give a destination file specification that includes
a generation number, the source file will be copied into
that file, replacing any previous contents if that generation
of the file already exists. Those contents cannot be recovered.
Examples
The user copies a file from the user <PORADA>.
@COPY (FROM) <PORADA>LETTER.CBL.1 (TO) LETTER.CBL.1 !NEW FILE!
<PORADA>LETTER.CBL.1 => LETTER.CBL.1 [OK]
@
The user copies all the files with the file type .FOR from the
directory <MOSLER> to his connected directory.
@COPY (FROM) <MOSLER>*.FOR.2 (TO) *.FOR.-1
<MOSLER>ADDTWO.FOR.2 => ADDTWO.FOR.1 [OK]
<MOSLER>CUBIT.FOR.1 => CUBIT.FOR.1 [OK]
<MOSLER>GRADES.FOR.1 => GRADES.FOR.1 [OK]
<MOSLER>NETFLO.FOR.3 => NETFLO.FOR.1 [OK]
<MOSLER>PLAYER.FOR.31 => PLAYER.FOR.1 [OK]
<MOSLER>T.FOR.1 => T.FOR.1 [OK]
<MOSLER>TEST.FOR.2 => TEST.FOR.1 [OK]
@
The user makes an additional copy of all his files with the file
type .FIL, giving them the same name, but with the file type
.LIB.
@COPY (FROM) *.FIL.1 (TO) *.LIB
FOO.FIL.1 => FOO.LIB.1 [OK]
LIST.FIL.1 => LIST.LIB.1 [OK]
LOC.FIL.1 => LOC.LIB.1 [OK]
REMEM.FIL.1 => REMEM.LIB.1 [OK]
RUN3.FIL.1 => RUN3.LIB.1 [OK]
SYMBOL.FIL.1 => SYMBOL.LIB.1 [OK]
@
The user is connected to a directory on a structure other than
PS:. He copies the file DIFFER.FOR.2 from directory <MCKIE> on
PS: to his connected structure and directory.
@COPY (FROM) PS:<MCKIE>DIFFER.FOR.2 (TO) DIFFER.FOR
PS:<MCKIE>DIFFER.FOR.2 => DIFFER.FOR.1 [OK]
In the above example, suppose directory <MCKIE> on PS: is not
the user's logged-in directory and the protection codes set for
directory <MCKIE> do not allow this COPY function. The user in
this case can give the ACCESS command for the directory <MCKIE>
to gain owner privileges then give the COPY command, providing he
has the password.
DEASSIGN Command
Function
The DEASSIGN command returns a device you previously assigned
back to the pool of available devices.
Format
@DEASSIGN (DEVICE) dev:
dev: is the device name of the device that you want to
deassign, followed by a colon; an asterisk (*)
deassigns all devices (except your log-in terminal
assigned to your job.
Hints
When you are finished using a device, you should DEASSIGN the
device so that it may be accessed by other users.
Use the INFORMATION (ABOUT) AVAILABLE DEVICES command to
determine what devices are assigned to you.
Operation
1. Type DEAS and press the ESC key; the system prints SIGN
(DEVICE).
@DEASSIGN (DEVICE)
2. Type the name of the device that you want to deassign.
@DEASSIGN (DEVICE) MTA2:
3. Press the RETURN key. When the device is deassigned, the
system prints an @ on your terminal.
@DEASSIGN (DEVICE) MTA2:
@
Errors
1. If you have not previously assigned the device to your job,
the system prints the message:
?dev: NOT ASSIGNED TO YOU
then cancels the command.
Characteristics
The DEASSIGN command does not change any program in memory and
leaves your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Restrictions
You must type a device name in the DEASSIGN command; if you
do not give the device name, no default action is taken.
The DEASSIGN command will not deassign a device that is
accessing an open. An error is generated, and the device
is not deassigned until that file is closed or until you
log out. When you log out, all the devices are deassigned.
Examples
The user deassigns magnetic tape unit number 3:
@DEASSIGN (DEVICE) MTA3:
@
The user deassigns all the devices allocated to his job.
@DEASSIGN (DEVICE) *
@
Related commands
ASSIGN for assigning a particular device to
your job
INFORMATION AVAILABLE DEVICES for finding out which devices are
available, and which ones have
already been assigned to your job
MOUNT for mounting a structure or magnetic
tape and assigning the first available
disk drive or tape drive to your job
DEFINE Command
Function
The DEFINE command defines or removes logical name assignments
for your job.
Format
@DEFINE (LOGICAL NAME) logname: (AS) list
logname: is the logical name comprised of up to 39
alphanumeric characters (including hyphen, dollar
sign and underline) followed by a colon. Use an
asterisk * for this arguement to withdraw all
logical names.
list is a series of devices, file structures, directories
file specifications, and/or other logical names;
each item should be seperated from the others by
commas. Default - not specifying a list withdraws
the logical name definition.
Hints
DEFINE in LOGIN.CMD
Your DEFINE command is valid for the current terminal session only. If
there are logical names that you always want to use, put DEFINE
commands into a LOGIN.CMD (or, for batch jobs started by SUBMIT
commands within the control files of other batch jobs, a BATCH.CMD)
file in your log-in directory.
Redefining system logical names
You can use the define command to redefine any system logical name for
your own job. By repeating a system logical name in its own search
list you expand its definition to include the other items, in the order
you specify. Consider the system logical name SYS:, which is searched
whenever you give a program name in place of a TOPS-20 command. If you
redefine SYS: to be str:<directory>, SYS: you can run programs
in str:<directory> by typing just their names. This will work as long
as the program names are not the same as TOPS-20 commands.
Logical names as dummy filespecs
You can use logical names as dummies for filespecs or devices when
writing programs. Then, just before running such a program, use the
DEFINE command to define these as real filespecs or devices, without
changing the program itself.
Restriction
Using Short Logical Names Only
Although logical names can be up to 39 characters long and can
include dollor signs ($), hyphens (-), and underlines (_), some
commands and programs (e.g, programs originally written for the
TOPS-10 operating system) accept a more limited set of logical
names. These can be no more than 6 characters long and cannot
include any special symbols. If all your logical names are of
this kind, they will be acceptable to any TOPS-20 programs and
commands.
Operation
1. Type DEFI and press the ESC key; the system prints NE
(LOGICAL NAME).
@DEFINE (LOGICAL NAME)
2. Type the logical name followed by a colon. If you are
defining the logical name, press the ESC key and the system
prints (AS). If you are removing the logical name, press the
RETURN key.
@DEFINE (LOGICAL NAME) LIB: (AS)
3. Type (you may not use recognition) the file specification(s)
that define the logical name, then press the RETURN key. The
system prints an @.
@DEFINE (LOGICAL NAME) LIB: (AS) <MILLER>,<BOSACK>
@
Errors
1. If you try to remove a non-existent logical name, the system
prints the message:
%Logical name xxx: was not defined
where xxx: is the nonexistent name.
Characteristics
The DEFINE command does not change any program in memory and
leaves your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Examples
The user defines the logical name LIB: as the directories
<FORTRAN-LIB> and <COBOL-LIB>.
@DEFINE (LOGICAL NAME) LIB: (AS) <FORTRAN-LIB>,<COBOL-LIB>
@INFORMATION (ABOUT) LOGICAL-NAMES
LIB => <FORTRAN-LIB>,<COBOL-LIB>
@
The user removes the logical name LIB: which he defined in the
previous example.
@DEFINE (LOGICAL NAME) LIB:
@INFORMATION (ABOUT) LOGICAL-NAMES
@
Related commands
INFORMATION (ABOUT) LOGICAL-NAMES
for finding out the current definitions of logical names
DEPOSIT command
Function
The DEPOSIT command modifies the contents of a specific memory
location.
Format
@DEPOSIT (MEMORY LOCATION) address (CONTENTS) data
where
address is an octal number or a symbol
data is a symbolic or numeriacl expression
Output
Status of pages
When you complete a DEPOSIT command, the system gives you a
message indicating the status of the page you are trying to
change: "[New]" for previously nonexistent pages, "[Shared]"
for those having Copy-on-Write status, or "?Can't write that
page" for other pages. (See also Hints - Setting the
Page-access of Memory pages, below.) However, no message is
printed for deposits made to private pages.
Hints
Using Symbols
For symbols that are defined in multiple modules of a program,
you can be specific by giving the module name followed by an
ampersand (&) and the symbol name.
Using DDT Instead
Usually the DEPOSIT command is unnecessary, as the DDT program
provides more powerful methods for modifying the contents of
memory.
Abbreviating DEPOSIT arguments
The contents of each memory location are represented as two
6-digit octal numbers. By inserting a pair of commas between
these two numbers, you can abbreviate them. For example, to
deposit 000004000050 into memory location 151003, use the
command
@DEPOSIT 151003 4,,50
This is the same as
@DEPOSIT 151003 4000050
Note that you can also insert commas between expressions. For
example, the command
@DEPOSIT 1 1+3,, 5+7
deposits 000004000014 into memory location 1. (Expressions are
considered to be octal unless they contain an 8 or a 9, in
which case they are considered to be decimal and are translated
to octal.)
The DEPOSIT command itself can be abbreviated to the single
letter D.
Deposit Address Defaults to the One Examined, and Vice Versa
The first argument of a DEPOSIT command defaults to the address
examined by your most recent EXAMINE command. (You must press
the ESCAPE key to take this default.) The argument of an
EXAMINE command defaults to the address whose contents were
modified by your most recent DEPOSIT command. Therefore you can
examine a memory location, deposit a new value in it, and verify
your action, while specifiying the location only once. If you
give DEPOSIT commands without intervening EXAMINE commands (or
vice versa), the default address increases by 1 for each
subsequent command.
Setting the Page-access of Memory Pages
If the system responds to a DEPOSIT command with an error
message of the form, "?Can't write that page", give the SET
PAGE-ACCESS COPY-ON-WRITE command for the page. Then give
DEPOSIT again. If the system allows it, you will be given
your own copy of the page to modify.
Using DEPOSIT with Inferior Processes
To modify memory for a process inferior to the one immediately
below the TOPS-20 command processor, you must give the FORK
command to specify this process before using DEPOSIT. Remember
that for an inferior process to run, all superior processes must
be running too. INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS tells you which
processes these are.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The DEPOSIT command changes one location in memory and leaves your
terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Related Commands
DDT for calling a debugging program,
allowing more efficient modification
of memory
EXAMINE for displaying the contents of a
specific memory location
FORK for selecting the process whose
memory you want to modify
INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE for displaying a list of memory pages,
their contants and status
SET PAGE-ACCESS for making it possible to write to
specified pages
Examples
1. Deposit a value in a memory location.
@DEPOSIT 1500 21
@
2. Modify a memory location, using symbols.
@DEPOSIT (MEMORY LOCATION) T3+1 (contents) P+2
@EXAMINE (MEMORY LOCATION) T3+1
T3+1/ P+2 (4/ 21)
@
3. Try to deposit a number into a page of memory that does not
allow it. Examine memory, set the page to Copy-on Write
status, and try again (succeeding this time).
@DEPOSIT 716505 0
?Can't write that page
@INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE
216. pages, Entry vector loc 462207 len 2540000
0-11 Private R, W, E
20 Private R, W, E
400-401 Private R, W, E
402-660 <FIELD-IMAGE>FORTRA.EXE.3 13-271 R, CW, E
700-730 <NEXT-RELEASE>PA1050.EXE.4 1-31 R, E
731-733 Private R, W, E
@SET PAGE-ACCESS 716 COPY-ON-WRITE
@DEPOSIT 716505 0
[Shared]
@EXAMINE 716505
716505/ 0
@
4. Check your program status (the arrow (=>) indicates your
current process (fork)). Select an inferior process, deposit
a value into a memory location, and verify that memory for the
superior process is not changed to this.
@INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS
Used 0:00:05 in 0:10:11
TOPS-20: 0:00:03.5
SET UUO-SIMULATION (FOR PROGRAM)
SET CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY (OF PROGRAM)
=> Fork 1: HALT at 16178, 0:00:00.3
Fork 2: HALT at 472052, 0:00:00.1
@FORK 2
@DEPOSIT 3500 12
@EXAMINE 3500
3500/ 12
@FORK 1
@EXAMINE 3500
3500/ 202200,,1136
@
DIRECTORY Command
Function
The DIRECTORY command prints information about a file or group of
files.
Format
@DIRECTORY (OF FILES) filespec,...,
@@subcommand
@@ .
.
.
where
filespec is the specification of a file about which you
want information
Default - *.*.* in your connected
directory
,... means that, after commas, you can give more
arguments of the kind already shown
@@ means that, after a final comma, you can give
@@ . one or more subcommands on successive lines
.
.
.
subcommand is a keyword, chosen from the list below,
indicating your choice of DIRECTORY command
options
Defaults are shown on the list of
subcommands
Hints
Normally the DIRECTORY command prints the file name, type, and
generation number for each file specified in the command.
You can give subcommands to also do the following:
1. Order the files chronologically by the date of creation,
read, or write (CHRONOLOGICAL).
2. Compress the output (CRAM).
3. Print information about deleted files (DELETED).
4. Print all the information about a file (EVERYTHING).
5. Print the length (in bytes) of the files, and also the byte
size (LENGTH).
6. Omit the heading (NO HEADING).
7. Write the directory listing in a file (OUTPUT) or to the line
printer (LPT).
8. Print the protection codes of the files (PROTECTION).
9. Reverse the order in which the files are printed (REVERSE).
10. Print the size (in pages) of each file.
11. Print the times and dates of creation, read, or write.
For convenience, there are three additional commands that have
exactly the same command format and subcommands as the DIRECTORY
command. They are:
FDIRECTORY (for Full DIRECTORY) automatically prints everything
about the files, without any headings, and compresses the
output. It is the same as giving the DIRECTORY command with
the CRAM (output), EVERYTHING, and NO HEADING subcommands.
TDIRECTORY (for Time-ordered DIRECTORY) orders the files with the
most recent write dates first and prints the write times and
dates. It is the same as giving the DIRECTORY command with
the CHRONOLOGICAL (BY) WRITE, REVERSE (SORTING) and TIMES
(AND DATES OF) WRITE subcommands.
VDIRECTORY (for Verbose DIRECTORY) automatically prints the
protection, size, length, and write time and date for each
file. No headings are printed. It is the same as giving the
DIRECTORY command with the PROTECTION, SIZE, LENGTH (IN
BYTES), TIMES (AND DATES OF) WRITE, and NO HEADING
subcommands.
By giving the proper file specification(s), you can obtain
information about a single file, a group of files, or files in
another directory. The directory can be on your connected
structure or on another online structure.
If the directory is on another structure and the "all user"
protection code does not allow you to list the files in that
directory, you must give the ACCESS or CONNECT command before the
DIRECTORY command. (Remember that once a structure is mounted
you will only have "all user" access privileges to directories on
that structure, including your own directories, until you give an
ACCESS or CONNECT command.
Directory Command Subcommands (Defaults as shown)
The subcommands of the DIRECTORY command request additional
information, modify the printing format, or change where the
directory listing is sent.
ACCOUNT prints the account to which storage fees for the
files are charged
ALPHABETICALLY lists the files in alphabetical order
Default
ARCHIVED restricts the listing to archived files only,
visible and invisible, offline and online
BEFORE (DATE AND TIME) date and time
Lists information only for files written earlier than the
specified date and time. (See the SINCE subcommand.)
CHECKSUM SEQUENTIALLY computes and prints 6-digit octal checksums for
BY-PAGES the files, either
sequentially and without going beyond
the EOF (end-of-file) mark, or
by pages on disk, accounting for holes
in files and pages beyond the EOF mark;
output will be followed by letter P in
this case.
Default - BY-PAGES
CHRONOLIGICAL CREATION lists files in order (oldest first)
WRITE according to
READ
TAPE-WRITE date of creation, or
date they were last changed, or
date they were last read, or
date their tape copy was created
Default - WRITE
CRAM (OUTPUT)
Compresses the output into the least space possible for fast
printing; however it is also more difficult to read and no
headings are included.
DATES CREATION lists for the specified files, the
WRITE
READ date of creation, or
TAPE-WRITE date they were last changed, or
OFFLINE-EXPIRATION date they were last read, or
ONLINE-EXPIRATION date the tape copy was created, or
date of expiration
Default - WRITE
DELETED (FILES ONLY)
Lists information only for deleted files that have not yet
been expunged.
DOUBLESPACE double-spaces the DIRECTORY command
output
EVERYTHING
Lists all the information about the files. This includes the
file name, type, generation number, protection number,
account, size (in pages), length (in bytes), byte size, file
retention count, creation date and time, write date and time,
read date and time, creator and most recent writer.
FIND n prints the specifications of all but the n most
recent generations of the files, omitting any
files having n or fewer generations
Default n - 1
GENERATION-RETENTION-COUNT tells the number of generations of each file
the system will retain in the given directory
HEADING prints a headline labeling each category of
information supplied by the command
Default
INVISIBLE restricts the listing to invisible files only,
both on-line and off-line
LARGER (THAN) number
Lists information only for files larger than the given number
of pages. When used in conjunction with the SMALLER
subcommand, the two subcommands allow files in a certain
range to be listed. For example, a user wants to list all
files whose size is exactly three pages:
@DIR,
SMALLER 4
LARGER 2
LENGTH (IN BYTES)
Lists the length of the file in bytes and the associated byte
size (in parenthesis).
LPT (IS OUTPUT DEVICE)
Prints the directory listing on the line printer.
NO ACCOUNT suppresses the action or information
CHECKSUM associated with the specified
CRAM subcommand
DATES Default - HEADING
DOUBLESPACE
FILE-LINES
GENERATION-RETENTION-COUNT
HEADING
LENGTH
LPT
PROTECTION
REVERSE
SEPERATE
SIZE
SUMMARY-LINES
TIMES
USER
OFFLINE restricts the listing to (visible)
offline files only, both archived
and not archived
ONLINE restricts the listing to on-line files
OUTPUT (TO FILE)
Sends the output to a destination other than your terminal.
dev:name.typ.gen is a single file specification that tells
the system where to send the directory
information. If you omit dev:, the system
uses DSK:. If you omit the name, the system
uses DIR. If you omit the type, the system
uses DIR.
PROHIBIT-MIGRATION restricts the listing to files that are
never migrated, because they were
specified in a SET FILE PROHIBIT command
PROTECTION
Lists the protection number of the files.
RESIST-MIGRATION restricts the listing to files that the
system considers last for migration.
These files were specified in a SET FILE
RESIST command
REVERSE (SORTING)
Orders the files in reverse. Thus, to obtain a list of your
files from the most recent to the least recent give the
subcommands @@CHRONOLOGICAL (BY) WRITE and @@REVERSE
(SORTING). This can also be done with the TDIRECTORY
command.
SEPARATE lists the complete specification for
each file on a separate line (instead of
listing successive generation numbers of
the file on the same line, seperated by
commas; and instead of listing files of
the same name and different type by file
type only, indented under the first
complete file specification)
SINCE (DATE AND TIME) date and time
Lists information only for files written after the specified
date and time. When used in conjunction with the BEFORE
subcommand, the two subcommands allow files written within a
certain period to time to be listed. For example, a user
wants to list only the files written (created) in September
of 1977:
@DIR
SINCE AUG-31-77
BEFORE OCT-1-77
SIZE
Lists the size of the files in pages; a page contains 512
36-bit words.
SMALLER (THAN) number
Lists only files smaller than the given number of pages.
(See the LARGER subcommand.)
TIMES CREATION lists for the specified files, the
WRITE
READ date of creation, or
TAPE-WRITE date they were last changed, or
OFFLINE-EXPIRATION date they were last read, or
ONLINE-EXPIRATION date the tape copy was created, or
date of expiration
Default - WRITE
USER CREATED gives the name of the user who
WROTE
created the file, or
changed the file last
Default - WRITE
Operation
1. Type DIR and press the ESC key; the system prints ECTORY (OF
FILES).
@DIRECTORY (OF FILES)
2. Type the list of file specifications, separated by commas.
Press the RETURN key and the system prints the directory
information. If you want to give one or more subcommands, do
not press the RETURN key; proceed to step 3.
@DIRECTORY (OF FILES)
<LUSE>
EDIT.CTL.2
.LAST.2
.MAC.2
SNOOP.HLP.1
WATCH.MAC.1
TOTAL OF 5 FILES
@
3. To give subcommands, type a comma, then press the RETURN
key. The system prints @@.
@DIRECTORY (OF FILES) *.MAC,
@@
4. Type (or use recognition on) the subcommands, pressing the
RETURN key once again after you are finished.
@DIRECTORY (OF FILES) *.MAC,
@@TIMES (AND DATES OF) WRITE
@@
<LUSE>
WRITE
EDIT.MAC.2 16-JAN-76 03:06:36
WATCH.MAC.1 15-JAN-76 01:16:14
TOTAL OF 2 FILES
@
Output
The system lists the files in alphabetical order, unless you
change this action by giving the REVERSE or CHRONOLOGICAL
subcommands. If two files have the same file name, only the type
and generation number for each succeeding file after the first
are printed. The period before the type is indented three
spaces. If a file is temporary, a ;T is printed after the
generation number.
Characteristics
The DIRECTORY command does not change any program in memory and
leaves your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Related Commands
FDIRECTORY
QDIRECTORY
RDIRECTORY
TDIRECTORY
VDIRECTORY
Special Cases
Asterisks Appearing Before Filespecs
An asterisk (*) appearing before a filename in the response
to a DIRECTORY command indicates a possible hardware-related
error, one caused by a read operation at a marginnally
functional area of disk. If you detach an asterisk (*)
appearing before a filename in responce to a DIRECTORY
command then report the error to User Support on ext 2363
immediately.
Directory-class Commands for labeled Magnetic Tapes
The FDIRECTORY, TDIRECTORY, AND VDIRECTORY commands for labeled
magnetic tapes are equivalent to the DIRECTORY command for
labeled magnetic tape. All these commands rewind the tape
set to the beggining of the first volume, print a directory
of files, then rewind the set again. You can give only
these subcommands when using DIRECTORY-class commands with
labeled magnetic tapes: ALPHABETICALLY, DOUBLESPACE, HEADING,
LPT, NO, OUTPUT, REVERSE, AND SEPARATE.
Effect on memory and Terminal
The DIRECTORY command does not effect memory and leaves your
terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Examples
The user obtains a list of all his files with the type .MAC.
@DIRECTORY (OF FILES) *.MAC
<LUSE>
EDIT.MAC.2
WATCH.MAC.1
TOTAL OF 2 FILES
@
The user obtains a directory listing and stores it in the file
1-16.DIR.
@DIRECTORY (OF FILES) ,
@@OUTPUT (TO FILES) 1-16.DIR.1 !New file!
@@
@
The user obtains a list of his deleted (but not expunged) files.
@DIRECTORY (OF FILES) ,
@@DELETED (FILES ONLY)
@@
<MANUALS>
020EDI.TEM.1
.TMP.1
CHANGE.XEC.2
TOTAL OF 3 FILES
@
The user is connected to his logged-in directory on PS: and
obtains a list of his files on structure STU:.
@DIRECTORY (OF FILES) STU:
STU:<ESTEY>
ADDEM.FOR.1
COMP.FOR.1
.REL.1
TOTAL OF 3 FILES
@
DISABLE command
Function
The DISABLE command suspends any special capabilities, such as those
of Wheel or Operator, that the system manager has given you.
Format
$DISABLE (CAPABILITIES)
@
Characteristics
Resumption of Standard Prompt
The DISABLE command causes the system to resume the standard
at sign prompt (@) in place of the dollar sign prompt ($),
which indicated enabled capabilities.
Warning
Disabling Promptly
Be sure to disable your capabilities as soon as you have
finished using them, so that you or a program you run cannot
accidentally damege the system.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The DISABLE command does not affect memory and leaves your terminal at
TOPS-20 command level.
Related Commands
ENABLE for activating any capabilities that the system manager
has given you.
Examples
1. Disable your capabilities
$DISABLE
@
Note that while you have switched on your capabilities, the
TOPS-20 prompt is dollor sign ($).
DISCARD command
Function
The DISCARD command gives up the tape copy of specified on-line files.
Format
@DISCARD (TAPE INFORMATION FOR FILES) filespec,...
where
filespec is the specification of a file whose tape copy
you want to discard
,... means that after commas you can give more
arguments of the form already shown
Characteristics
Action of DISCARD
The DISCARD command causes the tape pointer in the FDB (File
Descriptor Block) of the specified file to be deleted. It
does not actually destroy the tape copy of the file. (See
also Hints - Undoing DISCARD, below.)
Withdrawing Archive Status of Files
When you give the DISCARD command for an on-line archived file,
you withdraw archive status from the disk copy of the file.
That is, the file becomes an ordinary disk file, which you can
edit or delete if you wish.
DISCARD for Non-archived Files
You can also use the DISCARD command to give up the tape copy of
files that have been migrated to tape (automatically, by the
system) and then retrieved using the RETRIEVE command.
Hints
Undoing DISCARD
You receive a MAIL message from the operator for every file
whose tape copy you discard. The message gives the tape number,
save set number, and file number within the saveset of each tape
copy. If you have given the DISCARD command for a file and
later wish to use the tape copy, you may be able to recover it
using this information, as long as the tapes have not yet been
recycled.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The DISCARD command does not affect memory, and leaves your terminal at
TOPS-20 command level.
Related Commands
ARCHIVE for requesting that a permanent
tape copy of specified files
be made
DELETE (with CONTENTS-ONLY subcommand) for deleting only the disk copy
of files that also have a tape
copy
RETRIEVE for requesting that an off-line
file be restored to disk
Examples
1. Discard the tape copy of a file.
@DISCARD TESTER.EXE
TESTER.EXE.1 [OK]
@
2. Attempt to alter an archived file. When you find out it has
archive status, discard its tape copy (this revokes its archive
status) and perform the alteration. Archive the resulting file
and check its status.
@APPEND FOO.LOG CHIVE.TXT
FOO.LOG.1
?File has archive status, modification is prohibited: CHIVE.TXT
@DISCARD CHIVE.TXT
CHIVE.TXT.1 [OK]
@APPEND FOO.LOG CHIVE.TXT
FOO.LOG.1 [OK]
@
@ARCHIVE CHIVE.TXT
CHIVE.TXT.1 [Requested]
@INFORMATION ARCHIVE-STATUS CHIVE.TXT
CHIVE.TXT.1 Archive requested
@
END-ACCESS comand
Function
The END-ACCESS command terminates your ownership rights to an accessed
directory, as well as group rights borrowed from its owner.
Format
@END-ACCESS (TO DIRECTORY) dev:<directory>
where
dev:<directory> is the directory to which you want to end access
Default dev: - your connected structure
Default <directory> - the directory (on
the specified structure) of the same
name as your connected directory
Hints
Implicit END-ACCESS
You can access only one directory at a time on each mounted
structure. Each ACCESS command ends access obtained by any
previous ACCESS command for a directory on the specified
structure. Therefore you do not need to give the END-ACCESS
command if you access another directory on the structure, or
if the structure is dismounted.
Restoring Previous Rights
END-ACCESS does not restore owner and group rights obtained
by a previous ACCESS command for the specified structure. Give
another ACCESS command to regain these. (Note that you must
access your log-in directory to regain group rights obtained by
the LOGIN command, lost by accessing another directory on PS:.)
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The END-ACCESS command does not affect memory and leaves your terminal
at TOPS-20 command level.
Related Commands
ACCESS for obtaining ownership rights to a directory
and the group rights of the owner
DISMOUNT for decrementing the mount count of a previously
accessed structure
INFORMATION STRUCTURE for finding out who is accessing a structure
Examples
1. Give up your access rights to another user's directory.
@END-ACCESS <J-BLOGGS>
@
2. Access another user's directory, copy a file from it, and
give up your rights to it. Then give a command that depends
on your own group rights. (It fails.) Access your own
directory to establish these, and repeat the command,
successfully this time.
@ACCESS <J-BLOGGS>
Password:
@COPY <J-BLOGGS>DIST.LST
<J-BLOGGS>DIST.LST.2 => DIST.LST.2 [OK]
@END-ACCESS <J-BLOGGS>
@INFORMATION DIRECTORY <A-MOLE.*>,
?No such directory
@ACCESS <J-BLOGGS>
@INFORMATION DIRECTORY <J-BLOGGS.*>,
@@NAME-ONLY
@@
Name PS:<J-BLOGGS.ACCOUNT>
Name PS:<J-BLOGGS.SPECTRO.USERS>
@
3. Mount a structure, and access a user's directory there. Get
a listing of his files of type .TXT. End the access and
dismount the structure.
@MOUNT STRUCTURE MELON:
Structure MELON: mounted
@ACCESS MELON:<PSTAT>
@DIRECTORY MELON:<PSTAT>*.txt
MELON:<PSTAT>
README.TXT.10
------WHATS-HERE------.TXT.2
MAIL.TXT.4
Total of 3 files
EXAMINE command
Function
The EXAMINE command displays the contents of a specific memory location.
Format
@EXAMINE (MEMORY LOCATION) octal or sybolic address
Output
Contents of Memory Location or Message
When you complete an EXAMINE command, the system prints the
memory address examined, followed by a slash (/) and its
contents. If you previously used the SET TYPEOUT MODE SYMBOLIC
command, this information is both in symbolic and, in
parentheses, numeric (octal) format. (The numeric information
will always appear for this setting of the command; symbolic
information will appear if the system finds it is different
from the numeric.)
Generally the numeric format shows two 6-digit octal numbers
separated by a pair of commas (,,). IF you do not see this pair
of commas, only the right half of the memory location is being
displayed; as the left half is 0. However, if you are not
permitted to examine this location, the system prints only a
message telling you of the restriction.
Hints
Using Symbols
For symbols that are defined in multiple modules of a program,
you can be specific by giving the module name followed by an
ampersand (&) and the symbol name.
Abbreviating EXAMINE
The EXAMINE command can be abbreviated by the single letter E.
Default Argument for EXAMINE
The argument of your current EXAMINE command defaults to a value
greater by 1 than the last address examined, allowing you to
inspect a section of memory with only a minimum of typing. But
if you gave a more recent DEPOSIT command, the argument of your
current EXAMINE command defaults to that address, allowing you
to verify the deposit.
Using EXAMINE With Inferior Processes
To examine memory for a process inferior to the one immediately
below the TOPS-20 command processor, you must give the FORK
command to specify this process before using EXAMINE. Remember
that to run an inferior process after examining it, you must
ensure that all superior processes are running too. Give the
FORK 1 and CONTINUE commands to let the top-level process
continue its inferiors.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The EXAMINE command does not affect memory and leaves your terminal at
TOPS-20 command level.
Related Commands
DDT for calling a debugging program,
allowing more efficient examination
or memory
DEPOSIT for changing the contents of a specific
memory location
FORK for selecting the process whose memory
you want to examine
INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE for displaying a list of memory pages,
their contents and status
Examples
1. Examine location 550 of the program in memory.
@EXAMINE 550
550/ 74473,,414155
@
2. Examine location 20, first in numeric typeout mode, then in the
symbolic mode.
@SET TYPEOUT MODE (TO) NUMERIC
@EXAMINE (MEMORY LOCATION) 20
20/ 104000,,58
@SET TYPEOUT MODE (TO) SYMBOLIC
@EXAMINE (MEMORY LOCATION) 20
P+1/ 104000,,.JBBLT+11 (20/ 104000,,56)
@
3. Put a program into memory and find out what pages it occupies.
Examine a location on page 2, and then (using the abbreviated
form of the EXAMINE command) one on page 400.
@GET DMN
@INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE
5. pages, Entry vector loc 4000010 len 254000
0-3 DMN.EXE.1 1-4 R, CW, E
400 DMN.EXE.1 5 R, CW, E
@EXAMINE 2550
2550/ 600170
@E 400550
400550/ 0
@
EXECUTE Command
Function
The EXECUTE command loads your program into memory, compiling
source file if necessary. Then it starts the program.
Format
@EXECUTE (FROM) /switch(es) source/switch(es) object,...
where
switches are keywords chosen from the list below,
indicating your choice of EXECUTE command
options. They have different effects depending
on their position in the command line: placed
before all files in the command line, they act
on defaults on all; otherwise they effect only
the nearest preceding file.
source is one or more source file specifications preceded
and/or followed by switches. You must separate
the source files with plus signs. No spaces or
tabs are allowed. If the filetype is not specified
object is an object file specification. If you do not
give an object file specification, the system uses
the name of the last file in the corresponding
sources and the type .REL.
,... means that, after commas, you can give more arguments
of the form already shown
Special Cases
If you give only EXECUTE-command switches as arguments to an
EXECUTE command, the system appends the arguments you gave in the
last LOAD-class command which contained a file specification or
LINK switch, then executes the command. If there are no
arguments to recall, the system prints the message ?No saved
arguments.
The system will update the object file if it is older than any
one of the corresponding source files. Suppose you give the
command:
@EXECUTE (FROM) NXTLAT.FOR
If NXTLAT.REL does not exist, or if it is older than the most
recent NXTLAT.FOR (i.e., it has a write date before the write
date of NXTLAT.FOR), then the system compiles NSTLAT.FOR to
produce an up-to-date NXTLAT.REL. After producing NSTLAT.REL,
the system loads it into memory.
EXECUTE Command Switches
/68-COBOL compiles the file using the COBOL-68 compiler
Default for files of type .CBL
/74-COBOL compiles the file using the COBOL-74 compiler
/ALGOL
Compiles the file using ALGOL. This is the default for
sources with the extension .ALG.
/BINARY
Generates a binary (object) file for each source program.
Normally, the system generates object files, so this
switch is useful in reversing a global /NOBINARY switch.
/COBOL
Compiles the program using COBOL/68. This is the default for
sources with the extension .CBL.
/COMPILE
(or an object file older than any one of its source files)
Compiles the source program regardless of whether the
object file is up-to-date or not. The /NOCOMPILE switch
causes compilation only if the object file is out-of-date;
the /RELOCATABLE switch causes the system to use an
existing object file, regardless of its date. Normally,
the system assumes the action of the /NOCOMPILE switch.
/CREF
Creates a file containing cross-reference information for
each source file you compile. The name of the file is the
name of the last source file and the file type is .CRF.
Give the CREF command to run the CREF program which reads
this file and prints a listing. If the object file is not
out of date, include the /COMPILE switch in your EXECUTE
command. When a source file contains a COBOL program, the
system produces a listing file (the file type is .LST
instead of .CRF) containing the cross-reference
information; give the PRINT command (instead of CREF) to
print the .LST file.
/FORTRAN
Compiles the file using FORTRAN. This is the default for
sources with the extension .FOR or a non-standard type.
/LANGUAGE-SWITCHES:"/switch(es)"
passes the specified switches to the compiler that will process
the file(s) to which this switch applies. You must include the
switches in double quotation marks (" ").
/LIBRARY
same as /SEARCH
/LIST
Prints a listing of each program you compile. The listing
name is the name of the last source file. Unless you
specify this switch, the system does not print a listing
of your program. If you also include a /CREF switch, the
system ignores the /LIST switch.
/MACRO
Assembles the file using MACRO. This is the default for
sources with the extension .MAC.
/MAP:name.typ
Produces loader maps during the loading process and stores
them in the file name.typ. If you do not give a file name
and type, the system uses nnnLNK.MAP, where nnn is your
job number. The /MAP switch applies to the entire
command, not to just one file. If you use recognition
input in typing the file specification, the system creates
a new generation of the recognized file.
/NOCOMPILE
Compiles a file only if it is out-of-date. Since the
system normally does this, the /NOCOMPILE switch is usful
for turning off a global /COMPILE or /RELOCATABLE switch.
/NOLIBRARY
same as /NOSEARCH
/NOLIST
Inhibits the generation of a listing file. Normally, the
system does not generate a listing file.
/NOOPTIMIZE
Inhibits the generation of optimized object files (FORTRAN
programs only).
/NOSEARCH
Loads all routines in a file, regardless of whether the
routines are called by another module. Normally, the
system loads all routines in an object file, therefore
this switch is useful in reversing a global /SEARCH
switch.
/NOSYMBOLS
Inhibits loading symbols with the program. Normally, the
system loads symbols with all programs.
/OPTIMIZE
Produces optimized object files (FORTRAN programs only).
/RELOCATABLE
Uses the specified object files, even though they may be
out of date, or may have extensions other than .REL. For
example, the command LOAD FILE.FOR/REL would cause
FILE.FOR to be treated as a relocatable file and load it.
It would normally be regarded as a FORTRAN source file.
/SEARCH
requires that the object file library (the file accompanied
by this switch in the commnd line) be searched for modules
called by your program or by a program subroutine. Only these
modules are loaded, along with modules called from system
libraries, which are always searched.
/STAY
Returns your terminal to TOPS-20 command level so that you can
perform other work while the system continues to compile your
program. You immediately receive the TOPS-20 prompt (@ or $)
and can then issue any user command. But be careful with
commands that run programs, because those commands may clear
memory and terminate the current process. Also, you could
easily send incorrect data to programs expecting terminal input.
This switch saves you from having to: issue a ^T to make sure
the compile has begun; give a ^C to halt compilation; and issue
a CONTINUE STAY command to remain at command level during
compilation.
Operation
1. Type EXEC and press the ESC key; the system prints UTE
(FROM).
@EXECUTE (FROM)
2. Type (or use recognition on) the sets of source
specifications, object specifications and switches. Press
the RETURN key. The system executes the specified files.
@EXECUTE (FROM) TEST.FOR,SUB1.FOR
FORTRAN: TEST
FORTRAN: SUB1
SUB1
LINK: Loading
[LNKXCT TEST EXECUTION]
INPUT FILE: T1.IN
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME: 0.14 ELAPSED TIME: 0.47
EXIT
@
Errors
1. If you give a command and one of the source files is missing,
the system continues processing the command and prints the
message:
%SOURCE FILE MISSING - name.typ
where name.typ is the name and type of the source file.
Characteristics
Compiling New Source Only
Before execiting programs, the system ordinarily compiles
any source (and only those sources) whose write date is
more recent than that of the object file of the same name.
You can override this action with the /COMPILE or /RELOCATABLE
switch.
Using Standard File Types
If you specify source files with standard types (.FOR, .MAC,
.CBL, or .ALG) in an EXECUTE command, the system automatically
calls the appropriate compiler when compilation is necessary.
If you specify source files by filename only, the system searches
your connected directory in the above order for a file of this
name and a standrd type. To execute programs from sources that have
nonstandard file type, give a switch to indicate the proper compiler
(/FORTRAN, /MACRO, /COBOL OR /ALGOL). A switch will take precedence
over a standard file type if they indicate different languages.
If no compiler is indicated with either a switch or a standard
file type, The FORTRAN compiler is used.
Hints
Comma Between Filespecs
If you give two or more filespecs separated by commas as arguments
to EXECUTE, the loaded programs exist in memory at the same time
and will act as a single program. You can use this feature to
substitute one module for another under varying conditions or
for different applications.
Plus Signs Between Filespecs
If you give two or more filespecs separated by plus signs (+)
as arguments to EXECUTE, they are treated as a single file
by compilers. Their object module is stored under any filename
given as the "object" argument af the command, or (if none)
under the last filename in the group and file type .REL.
Indirect Files as Arguments
You can store the arguments (source and object filespecs,
switches) of an EXECUTE command in an indirect file, and
specify them by typing an at sign (@) and its filespecs as
an EXECUTE command aargument.
Establishing Default Arguments with the SET Command
You can issue the SET DEFAULT COMPILE-SWITCHES command to set
up default global arguments to the EXECUTE command. Insert this
SET command in your COMAND.CMD file to change your own defaults
permanently.
Running Link Directly
The EXECUTE command automatically runs LINK, the system's loader
program , but if you require control of the loading process you
can run LINK directly. See the TOPS-20 LINK reference Manual.
Restrictions
Switches Requiring Compilation
/CREF
/LANGUAGE-SWITCHES
/LIST
/NOLIST
/NOOPTIMIZE
/OPTIMIZE
The above switches will not take effect unless the EXECUTE
command causes a new compilation of the relevant source file.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The EXECUTE command runs the appropriate translator and the LINK
program, thereby clearing any previous program from memory.
Depending on the way your program operates, your terminal may or
may not be left at TOPS-20 command level.
Related Commands
LOAD, EXECUTE, and DEBUG other LOAD-class commands for performing
related functions
RUN for running executable programs
Examples
1. The user executes his FORTRAN program.
@EXECUTE (FROM) ADDTWO.FOR
FORTRAN: ADDTWO
MAIN.
LINK: Loading
[LNKXCT ADDTWO Execution]
TYPE TWO NUMBERS.
23.5 45.8
ADDING 23.5000000 TO 45.8000000 GIVES
69.3000000
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME: 0.14 ELAPSED TIME: 7.88
EXIT
@
2. Execute a program, indicating the language with a
switch. Specify the /STAY switch to return immediately to TOPS-20
command level.
@EXECUTE TEST/FORTRAN/STAY
@
3. The user combines three FORTRAN programs into one main
program and includes the entire subroutine package TYPE2.
@EXECUTE (FROM) 1+2+3,TYPE2
FORTRAN: 1
MAIN.
FORTRAN: TYPE2
TYPE2
LINK: Loading
[LNKXCT 3 Execution]
THIS IS IT, FOLKS, THE LAST TRY
THIS IS TYPE2.
STOP
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME: 0.009 ELAPSED TIME: 0.47
EXIT
@
4. The user executes his MACRO program and produces
a cross-reference listing file.
@EXECUTE (FROM) TRANSL.SYS/MACRO/CREF
MACRO: TRANSL
LINK: Loading
[LNKXCT TRANSL Execution]
Translate (Directory) EXEC
<EXEC> (IS) [4,111] (A files-only directory)
@
5. The user executes his COBOL program.
@EXECUTE (FROM) COMPUT.CBL
COBOL: MAIN [COMPUT.CBL]
LINK: Loading
[LNKXCT COMPUT Execution]
TYPE A NUMBER: 56
TWICE THAT NUMBER IS: 1.12E2
EXIT
@
INFORMATION command
The INFORMATION command tells you the current status of
various things in the computer.
Format
@INFORMATION (ABOUT) argument
where
argument is keyword chosen from the list below,
indicating your choice of INFORMATION
command options.
Operation
Type 'I' then press the ESC key and 'FORMATION (ABOUT)'
will be filled in for you.
Then press the '?' key and the various options available
to you will be displayed,
e.g.:-
@iNFORMATION (ABOUT) ? one of the following:
ADDRESS-BREAK ALERTS ARCHIVE-STATUS
ARPANET AVAILABLE BATCH-REQUESTS
COMMAND-LEVEL DECNET DEFAULTS
DIRECTORY DISK-USAGE FILE-STATUS
FORK-STATUS JOB-STATUS LOGICAL-NAMES
MAIL MEMORY-USAGE MONITOR-STATISTICS
MOUNT-REQUESTS OUTPUT-REQUESTS PCL-OBJECTS
PROGRAM-STATUS PSI-STATUS RETRIEVAL-REQUESTS
SPOOLED-OUTPUT-ACTION STRUCTURE SUBSYSTEM-STATISTICS
SYSTEM-STATUS TAPE-PARAMETERS TERMINAL-MODE
VARIABLE VERSION VOLUMES
For detail informtion of each of the argument above see under
INFO-Argument.
LOGIN Command
Function
The LOGIN command validates you as a user, and CONNECTS your job
to and ACCESSes your log-in directory.
Format
@LOGIN (USER) user (PASSWORD) pwd (ACCOUNT) acc (SESSION REMARK) remark
where
user is your user name
pwd is the password associated with your user name.
The password is comprised of up to 39 letters and
digits, including hyphen. You should keep your
password secret(when password is typed in, it is
not printed on the terminal).
acc is an account name or number that you are authorized
to use.
remark is an optional comment up to 39 characters, describing
the coming terminal session.
The LOGIN command implicitly CONNECTs to and ACCESSes your
logged-in directory on PS:. If you give the INFORMATION (ABOUT)
STRUCTURE command after you log in, your user name will appear in
both the CONNECTed and ACCESSing user lists. To Obtain a valid
user name, password, and account contact User Support on ext 2363.
Characteristics
Notice of User Mail and System Mail
After the system acknowledges a valid LOGIN command by printing
your job number, terminal number, and the current date and time
it informs you if another user has sent you a message by means
of the system mail programs. Then system mail (sent by
privileged users to all users) that has accumulated since your
last log-in is displayed on your terminal. Note however, that
this mail appears in the log file if a batch job is run for you
between the time the mail is sent and the time you log in.
Typing an Initial CTRL/C or <CR>
Before logging in you may have to type CTRL/C or <CR> (which
will print the system herald or greeting) to get the @ prompt
necessary for typing the LOGIN command. If you are dialing
in by telephone to a line declared autobaud by the system manager,
this initial CTRL/C or a carriage return will enable the system
to determine your terminal's speed setting, as long as the speed
is either 110, 150, or 300.
Rights, Capabilities and Charges
The login command gives you ownership rights to your log-in
directory, and any group rights established for you on the
public structure (usually named PS:), In addition, you are
granted whatever capabilities (for example, maintenance, wheel)
have been awarded to you, and can be sure that any charges
you incur for the use of system resources, such as CPU time
or the batch and printing systems, will be billed to your
user name.
Hints
Commands in Files Executed at Log-in Time
TERMINAL Commands
If you have commands in your LOGIN.CMD file in your
log in directory that control terminal output (e.g.
TERMINAL PAUSE), be sure to put them before the first
command that runs a program. Then they will be in
effect when system mail is displayed.
For Affecting Entire Session or Current Level Only
As soon as you log in, the system executes the commands
contained in your LOGIN.CMD file and then your COMAND
.CMD file in your log-in directory. Commands that
affect the entire job (e.g. TERMINAL and DEFINE) belong
in LOGIN.CMD. Commands that affect only the current
level of TOPS-20 ( e.g. many SET commands) must be put
into COMAND.CMD if you want them to be executed
automatically after every PUSH command as well as after
LOGIN.
For Affecting Batch Jobs
As soon as one of your batch jobs logs in, the system
executes the commands contained in your BATCH.CMD file
and then your COMAND.CMD file in your log-in directory.
Note that certain parameters of the batch job ( e.g.
its time limit and the name of its log file) have
already been set before these commands are executed.
Such parameters are set either to values specified by
switches in the SUBMIT command that starts the batch
job, or to default to valuse in effect for the job
issuing the SUBMIT command.
Must Log In Within Five Minutes
If you do not log in within five minutes of your initial
<CR>, your job will be logged out automatically and
you will have to type <CR> again.
For Affecting Nested Batch jobs
By placing a SET DEFAULT SUBMIT command in a file of specification
BATCH.CMD in your log-in directory you cause these defaults to be
in effect for a nested batch job, i.e., a batch job started by a
SUBMIT command within the control file of another of your batch
jobs. Note that if the control file contains a PUSH command before
the SUBMIT, any SET DEFAULT SUBMIT command in a file of specification
COMAND.CMD in your log-in directory will be in effect instead,
because comands in COMAND.CMD are executed after every PUSH command
as well as log-in time.
A Final TAKE command
To avoid display of a message of the form, "End of file.cmd"
after execution of a command file, make the last command in such
a file TAKE command eith no arguments.
Logging in to Last Available Job Slot
If you attempt to log in to the last available job slot,
the system will not log you in but wil send you and
error message instead. This job slot is intended for
users who wish to attach detached jobs. To log in a
new job you must wait until a current user logs out.
Operation
1. Type LOG and press the ESC key; the system prints IN (USER)
@LOGIN (USER)
2. Type your user name and press the ESC key. The system prints
(PASSWORD). If you type an incorrect user name, the system
immediately prints a ? and returns to command level.
@LOGIN (USER) LANGLEY (PASSWORD)
3. Type your password (it is not printed) and press the ESC key;
the system prints (ACCOUNT).
@LOGIN (USER) LANGLEY (PASSWORD) (ACCOUNT)
4. Type a valid account and press the RETURN key; the system
prints a line containing your job number, terminal number,
and the date and time.
@LOGIN (USER) LANGLEY (PASSWORD) (ACCOUNT) 10400
JOB 27 ON TTY16 16-JAN-76 15:54
@
Errors
1. If you type an invalid (non-existing) user name, the system
responds with a ? immediately and does not let you continue.
Check to see if you are typing the name correctly.
2. If you type an incorrect password, the system prints the
following message and does not log you in.
?INCORRECT PASSWORD
Reissue the command with the correct password.
3. If you type an incorrect account, the system prints the
following message and does not log you in.
@LOGIN (USER) PAVOLA (PASSWORD) (ACCOUNT) 1234567
?
@
Output
Once you have completed the LOGIN command, the system prints a
line that contains your job number, terminal number and the date
and time you logged in.
Next, the system prints any system messages that were created
since the last time you logged in. If you do not want to read
the messages, type a CTRL/O.
If you have exceeded your permanent disk storage allocation, the
system prints the message:
<directory> OVER PERMANENT STORAGE ALLOCATION BY n PAGES
where directory is your logged-in directory and n is the number
of pages by which you have exceeded your quota. You should
delete and expunge enough files so that you are under this quota.
If another user has sent you a message, the system prints: i.p
3,1 YOU HAVE A MESSAGE
Use the RDMAIL program to read your mail. Otherwise, until you
run RDMAIL, you will receive this message every time you log in.
If you have a LOGIN.CMD file and/or a COMAND.CMD file, the system
processes these files and prints:
END OF COMAND.CMD
and/or
END OF LOGIN.CMD
Effect om Memory and Terminal
The LOGIN command is usually the first command that you give
after the initial <CR>; this command leaves your terminal at
TOPS-20 command level. However, commands in command files executed
during log-in will have their usual effect on memory and your terminal.
Restrictions
You can give the LOGIN command only after you type a <CR>.
You cannot use recognition in typing the PASSWORD or ACCOUNT
arguments to a LOGIN command.
The entire LOGIN command must be typed on one line.
Related Commands
ATTACH for joining to your terminal a job that has
already been logged in
LOGOUT for ending your timesharing job
SET ACCOUNT for changing your account during a terminal
session
SET DIRECTORY ACCOUNT-DEFAULT for specifying a default account for
subsequent log-ins
SET SESSION-REMARK for making or changing your session remark
during a terminal session
Examples
The user CONNOLY logs in to the system and finds he has a
message.
@LOGIN (USER) CONNOLY (PASSWORD) (ACCOUNT) 10231
JOB 23 ON TTY34 16-JAN-76 10:27
YOU HAVE A MESSAGE
@
MODIFY Command
Function
The MODIFY command changes and/or adds one or more switches to a
request placed in a batch or output queue.
Format
@MODIFY (REQUEST TYPE) queue (ID) identifier /switch(es)
where
queue is the waiting list in which you placed the original
request, chosen from the following:
BATCH for requests made using the SUBMIT command
PLOT ........................... PLOT .......
PRINT ........................... PRINT .......
In the switch summary and descriptions, the word Output in the
column headed Applicable Quese means all queues except the Batch
queue.
identifier is one of the following:
request ID number the unique identifier assigned
by the system to your request.
This is the number appearing
under the heading "Req#" in the
list of requests shown by the
INFORMATION BATCH-REQUESTS or
INFORMATION OUTPUT-REQUESTS
command.
jobname the jobname of the request,
either the first 6 characters of
the first filename in the
request, or the argument you
supplied to a /JOBNAME switch
when making the original request
This is the name appearing under
the heading "Job Name" in the
list of requests shown by the
INFORMATION BATCH-REQUESTS or
INFORMATION OUTPUT-REQUESTS
command.
/JOBNAME: jobname switch showing the jobname of
the request to modify. You can
specify a particular jobname
when making the original
request. See Special Cases -
/JOBNAME Switch, below.
/SEQUENCE:sequence number switch showing the sequence
number of the request to modify
You can specify a particular
sequence number when making the
original request.
Use an asterisk (*) as identifier to modify all your requests
in the specified queue.
/switches are keywords, chosen from the list below
specifying the paramter you want to
change (and, where applicable, the new
value of this parameter)
Summary of MODIFY Command Switches
Switch Applicable Queues
/AFTER:date and/or time All
/BEGIN:n Batch
/COPIES:n Output
/DELETE Output
/DEPENDENCY-COUNT:n Batch
/DESTINATION-NODE:node name:: All
/FILE:ELEVEN Print
FORTRAN Print
/FORMS:forms name Output
/GENERIC Output
/HEADER Output
/JOBNAME:jobname Batch Output
/LIMIT:n Print
/LOWERCASE Print
/MODE:output mode Output
/NOHEADER Output
/NOTE:12-character message Output
/PAGES:n Batch
/PRIORITY:n All
/REPORT:title Print
/RESTARTABLE:NO Batch
YES
/SEQUENCE:n All
/SPACING:SINGLE Print
DOUBLE
TRIPLE
/TIME:hh:mm:ss All
/TPLOT:n Batch
/UNIQUE:0 or NO Batch
1 or YES
/UNIT:octal number Output
/UPPERCASE Print
/USER:user name All
MODIFY Command Switches
/AFTER:date and/or time, or
day of week (or TODAY)
and/or time
Assures that the job will be run after the specified date and
time.
You can give a day of the week (e.g. MONDAY) or TODAY as argument.
The job will not be printed until the beginning of the following
day. If you follow this argument with a plus sign and a time, the
job will be further delayed by this amount.
/BEGIN:n gives the decimal line number of the
control file at which processing is to
begin (for BATCH), or the decimal page
number of the file at which the output
is to begin (for PLOT & PRINT)
/COPIES:n tells how many copies of the file to
produce
/DELETE deletes the file after processing
/DEPENDENCY-COUNT:n
Sets the job's dependency-count to the new value n. This switch
can be followed by a + or - sign in front of the number which
will increase or decrease the original dependency-count by that
amount. A batch request is not processed until its dependency count is 0.
/DESTINATION-NODE:node name:: specifies the DECnet network node on
whose line printer the log file of
your batch job is to be printed (for
BATCH), or the network node on whose
line printer or other output device
your request is to be processed (PLOT
and PRINT). The node name must be of
six or fewer characters and must be
followed by two colons (::).
/FILE:ASCII specifies that the file consists of
COBOL ASCII text, or COBOL SIXBIT text, or
ELEVEN (ELEVEN) contains four 8-bit bytes in
FORTRAN each 36-bit word; or is FORTRAN ASCII
text, where column 1 of each line is
interpreted as a carriage control
character.
/FORMS:forms name
Asks the operator to cause the printing to be done on the
specified type of paper. The description must be six or fewer
characters, and can denote types such as color of paper, width of
paper, etc.
/GENERIC allows the output to be produced on
any available device (Use along with
argument PRINT to cancel the /LOWERCASE
or /UPPERCASE switch, or with PLOT &
PRINT to cancel the /UNIT switch.)
/HEADER causes the header section containing
the jobname to be plotted or printed
before the file itself is produced.
/JOBNAME:jobname does not change the jobname, but
specifies which job to modify. Same
as jobname in "identifier" argument.
/LIMIT:n
Places a limit of n pages on the output of the job.
/LOWERCASE specifies that the file is to be
produced on a line printer capable
of printing lowercase characters.
/MODE:ARROW designates the mode for printing the
ASCII file. See the /MODE switch in the
OCTAL PRINT command for details.
SUPPRESS
/NOHEADER prevents a header section containing
the jobname from being produced before
the file is produced.
/NOTE:message
Prints a note or message on the header page of the output. The
note can consist of up to 12 alphanumeric characters. The note
must be enclosed in quotation marks if it contains any spaces.
/PAGES:n specifies the decimal number of
spooled line printer pages the
batch job is allowed to print
/PRIORITY:n
Assigns a new number denoting the urgency of the request. The
number can be from 0 to 63 with a higher number being processed
before a lower one.
/REPORT:title scans your files and processes only
those lines whose first characters
are the title you give. This title
can contain up to 12 characters
(including the quotation marks that
must enclose the title if it contains
spaces). The switch is used along
with the COBOL report writer.
/RESTARTABLE: YES or NO
States if your job is to be started again after a system failure.
/SEQUENCE:n
Specifies which job to modify when you have several jobs with the
same name in the queue. It does not change the sequence number
of the job. If you omit this switch and have several jobs with
the same name in the queue, they will all be modified.
/SPACING:DOUBLE determines the spacing between
SINGLE printed lines
TRIPLE
/TIME:hh:mm:ss
Sets the limit for the maximum amount of central processor time
available for the job. This is stated in hours, minutes, and
seconds separated by colons.
/TPLOT:n limits to n the maximum number of
minutes of spooled plotter time
allowed for tne batch job
/UNIQUE:0 or NO
1 or YES
Specifies, if you have submitted two or more BATCH jobs, whether
they are to run concurrently (0) or not (1).
/UNIT:octal number changes your declaration, if two or
more jobs are to use the same connected
directory, whether they must run at
separate times
/UPPERCASE specifies that the file is to be printed
on a line printer that uses uppercase
characters only
/USER:user name specifies the user whose request is to
be modified; for privileged users only.
Characteristics
Modify Effective Only Before processing
The MODIFY command affects a batch or output request only before
processing has begun. After processing has began, you can only
cancel the request with the CANCEL command, and then make a new
request.
Hints
The switches you can change with the MODIFY command depend upon
the type of request you are modifying. Certain switches can be
modified only when using the PRINT command, and other switches
can be modified only when using BATCH commands. There are three
switches that can be modified when using either BATCH or the
PRINT command.
Use INFORMATION (ABOUT) OUTPUT-REQUESTS or the INFORMATION
(ABOUT) BATCH-REQUESTS before and after your MODIFY command to
check the switch values of the jobs in the queue. The /ALL
switch given to these commands will cause more switch information
to be displayed.
The MODIFY command does not alter the contents of memory and
leaves your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
You can use the /DEPENDENCY-COUNT switch to specify the order in which
your batch jobs are processed. Set the dependency count of all but the
first job to some positive value when you submit them, and include
MODIFY commands in each job's control file to bring the next job's
dependency count to 0 at the appropriate time.
Special Cases
/JOBNAME switch
In the singular case when you want to modify several queue
requests of the same jobname using only one command, and that
jobname is purely numerical (e.g. 5045), you must use the
/JOBNAME:jobname switch as second argument to the MODIFY command
Do not also give the request ID or jobname as a command argument
if you give the /JOBNAME:jobname switch.
Effect on Memory and terminal
The modify command does not effect memory and leaves your terminal
at TOPS-20 commnd level
Related Commands
CANCEL for removing batch & output requests
INFORMATION BATCH-REQUESTS for examining entries in the batch queue
INFORMATION OUTPUT-REQUESTS for examining entries in the output
queues
PLOT for placing requests in a plotter output
queue
PRINT for placing requests in a line printer
output queue
SUBMIT for placing requests in the batch input
queue
Operation
1. Type MODIFY and leave a space.
@MODIFY
2. Type the name of the queue you want to modify followed by the
job name and the switches.
@MODIFY BATCH FORD/AFTER:10-SEP-77
[1 job modified]
Examples
1. The user modifies his BATCH job to raise its priority.
@MODIFY BATCH FORD/AFTER:10-SEP-77/PRIORITY:55
[1 job modified]
2. Use the TYPE command to examine some of your control files.
(Notice the use of MODIFY command within these files to ensure
that they are processed in a certain order when submitted
together.) Submit these three control files and verify their
placement in the batch input queue.
@type a%.ctl
a1.ctl
@run testa1
@print testa1.rsm
@modify batch a2/dependency-count:0
a2.ctl
@run testa2
@print testa2.rsm
@modify batch a3/dependency-count:0
a3.ctl
@run testa3
@print testa3.rsm
@print sumjob.rsm
@
@subMIT (BATCH JOB) /afTER:17:00 a1.CTL.1
[Batch job A1 queued, request #2794, limit 0:05:00]
@subMIT (BATCH JOB) /afTER:depENDENCY-COUNT:1 a2.CTL.1
[Batch job A2 queued, request #2795, limit 0:05:00]
@subMIT (BATCH JOB) /depENDENCY-COUNT:1 a3.CTL.1
[Batch job A3 queued, request #2796, limit 0:05:00]
@infORMATION (ABOUT) bATCH-REQUESTS /all/usER:A-MOLE
Batch Queue:
Job Name Req# Run Time User
-------- ------ -------- ------------------------
A1 2794 00:05:00 A-MOLE /After: 1-Oct-85 16:59
/Uniq:Yes /Restart:No /Assist:Yes /Output:Nolog
/Batlog:Super /Seq:1012
A2 2795 00:05:00 A-MOLE /Dep:1 /Uniq:Yes
/Restart:No /Assist:Yes /Output:Nolog /Batlog:Super
/Seq:1013
A3 2796 00:05:00 A-MOLE /Dep:1 /Uniq:Yes
/Restart:No /Assist:Yes /Output:Nolog /Batlog:Super
/Seq:1014
There are 3 jobs in the queue (none in progress)
PRINT Command
Function
The PRINT command places entries into the line printer output
queue.
Format
@PRINT (FILE) /SWITCHES filespecs/switches,...
filespecs - is a list of file specifications separated by commas.
Files with the file type of .LST will be
automatically deleted from your directory as soon as
they are printed.
switches - is a list of switches chosen from the list below. If
you want a file switch to apply to one file only,
place the switch after the particular file
specification; if you want the file switch to apply
to all files in the list, place the switch before the
list of file specifications.
(You can use wildcard characters % and * to specify more
than one file).
To print the contents of the line printer output
queue, give the INFORMATION (ABOUT) OUTPUT-REQUESTS
command.
,.... means that, atfer a comma, you can give more arguments
of the form already shown.
Hints
To just print a file, no switches are necessary.
The line printer output queue is a list of jobs waiting to be
printed.
To examine the contents of the entire queue, give the INFORMATION
(ABOUT) OUTPUT-REQUESTS command; if you want only the entries
for your job (S), include the /USER switch.
If you want your PRINT command to always contain certain
switches, include in your COMAND.CMD file a SET DEFAULT PRINT
command followed by the switches.
If you want to change the value or values of switches for a print
request already in the queue, use the MODIFY command.
If you want to remove entries you have previously placed in the
line printer output, give the CANCEL command.
PRINT Command Switches
Job Switches (Affecting the Entire Command)
/ACCOUNT:account
specifies the acocunt of 39 or fewer characters to charge for your
printing request. This account must be valid for your user name.
Default account - your current account
(check with INFORMATION JOB-STATUS)
/AFTER: date and/or time (or TODAY)
Submits the file for printing after the specified date or time.
The argument for date is in the form day-month-year
(dd-mmm-yy). The argument for time is in the form hh:mm
(24-hour time of day). There is an additional argument for
time in the form +hh:mm which indicates time later than the
current time. (This argument is used without any date.)
Separate the hours from minutes by typing a colon, and the
month, day, and year by typing a hyphen. Separate the date and
time by typing a space.
/DESTINATION-NODE:node name::
Specifies the DECnet node or remote job entry (RJE) station on
whose line printer your request is to be printed. The node name
must be of six or fewer characters and must be followed by
two colons (::). You can use this switch to either send output
to an RJE station or redirect it from a DECnet RJE station.
However, you cannot send output from one DECnet host system
to another by using this switch.
/FORMS:forms name
Ask the operator to mount the specified forms before the system
prints the job. The argument must be six (or fewer)
alphanumeric characters; usually it is either narrow (for 8
1/2 x 11 paper) or normal (for 15 x 11 paper). The default is
usually normal, but it depends on your installation.
/GENERIC
allows any printer, either upper or lower case, and of
any unit number, to be used to satisfy the request.
Use this switch to override a previous /UPPERCASE,
/LOWERCASE, or /UNIT switch.
/JOBNAME:name
Assigns a name (consisting of six or fewer characters) to the
printing job. If you do not type a jobname, the system uses
the first six characters of the first file name in the request.
/LIMIT:n
Places a limit on the number of pages of output of the printing
job.
/LOWERCASE
Directs the printing job to a line printer that uses both
uppercase and lowercase characters.
/NOTE:message
labels the header page of output (i.e. the pagedisplaying the
jobname) with a message ornotation of up to 12 characters.
The memust be eclosed in doubl quotation marks if it
contains spaces or non-alphanumeric characters.
NOTIFY:YES
:NO
Tells the system whether to send a message to your terminal
when the request has been satisfied.
Default argument (if switch is not given) - NO
/PRIORITY:n
Assigns a number to the printing job reflecting the urgency of
the request. The number can be 0 to 63, with the higher value
number being processed before the lower value number.
/SEQUENCE:n
Specifies an identification number for the request. If this
switch is not used, the system automatically assigns a unique
sequence number to your request.
/UNIT:octal number
directs your request to the line printer of the specified octal
unit number.
/UPPERCASE
Directs the printing job to a line printer that uses only
uppercase characters.
/USER:user name
specifies the user who is to be the owner of the
PRINT request. For privileged owners only.
File Switches (Affecting only the Immediately Preceding File
Unless Placed Before All File Specifications)
/BEGIN:n
Begins printing on the nth line of the file. If you omit this
switch, the system always starts at the beginning of the file.
/COPIES:n
Specifies that n copies of the file be printed. The argument n
(the number of copies) must be less than 512. Normally, the
PRINT command makes one copy of each file.
/DELETE
Immediately removes the file from your directory and deletes it
after it has been printed.
/FILE:ASCII
Specifies that the file is in ASCII text format.
/FILE:COBOL
Specifies that the file is in COBOL text.
/FILE:FORTRAN
Specifies that the file is in FORTRAN ASCII text. This is the
default for files whose type is .DAT.
/HEADER
Prints headline pages at the beginning of each file. The
header contains the name of the file, the date of the request
and other useful information. This is the default, the other
option being /NOHEADER.
/MODE: ARROW
ASCII
OCTAL
SUPPRESS
designates the mode for printing the file. ARROW prints the file
literally, but denotes each control character by an up-arrow (^)
and the character, except for the following, which are printed
literally:carriage return, line feed, horizontal tab, vertical
tab, & formfeed. ASCII prints the file literally, without omissions
or substitutions. OCTAL prints each word of the file as insigned
octal integers; 3 groups of 128 words (8 rows of 16 columns each)
appear on a standard line printer page. SUPPRESS prints the file
without any blank lines, causing all verical format characters
(CTRL/K, CTRL/L, CTRL/Q, CTRL/R, CTRL/S & CTRT/T) to be converted
to carriage return/linefeeds & then treating multiple CR/LFs as a
single CRLF.
Default - ARROW
/NOHEADER
Prevents printing of the header page before the file.
/PRESERVE
Saves the file in its directory after it is printed. This is
the default action unless the file type is .LST in which case
the file is deleted.
/REPORT:title
Includes only those lines that begin with the specified code of
up to 12 alphanumeric characters. When these lines are
printed, the system removes the code before printing the line.
/SPACING:single
Specifies no extra space between lines on a printout.
/SPACING:double
Specifies a single line of spacing between lines on a printout.
/SPACING:triple
Specifies a double line of spacing between lines on a printout.
Operation
1. Type PRINT and leave a space.
@PRINT
2. Type the list of file specifications and switches, then press
the RETURN key.
@PRINT CNTRLH..2 /COPIES:4/FORMS:narrow
[LPT:CNTRLH=SEQ:1069/LIMIT:216, 1 file]
@
Output
If you are printing a file, the system prints a message in the
form:
[LPT:JOBNAME=/SEQ:n/LIMIT:p, f files]
Jobname is the name of your job, n is the sequence number, p is
the maximum number of pages in your print request and f is the
number of files in that request.
The INFORMATION (ABOUT) OUTPUT-REQUESTS command prints the
contents of the line printer output queue in the form:
QUEUE JOB SEQ LIMIT USER
LPT CNTRLH 1069 216 SARTINI
/FORMS:narrow
QUEUE is the name of the waiting list. JOB is the jobname; SEQ
is the sequence number; LIMIT is the maximum number of pages in
the request and USER is the name of the user who is printing the
job. The jobname is the one you must specify in a subsequent
CANCEL or MODIFY command pertaining to the specific print
request. The sequence number will also be necessary in a
subsequent MODIFY or CANCEL command, if two requests have the
same jobname, and you want to refer to only one of them.
Characteristics
The PRINT command does not affect memory. It leaves your
terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Special Cases
/SPOOLED-OUTPUT Switch
You can give the special switch, /SPOOLED-OUTPUT, as sole
argument to the PRINT command. This causes any spooled output
accumulated so far during you terminal session to be placed in a
line printer queue immediately, rather than at log-out time.
The /SPOOLED-OUTPUT switch is useful only if the SET SPOOLED-
OUTPUT DEFERRED command is in effect. Programs that you run
(especially FORTRAN programs) create spooled output for the
printer, or you can create it directly by writing to device LPT:
(e.g. by giving the command, COPY filespec LPT:), or giving a
CREF command.
Related Commands
CANCEL for withdrawing print requests
INFORMATION OUTPUT-REQUESTS for examining requests in the output
queues
MODIFY for changing PRINT requests before
processing has begun
SET DEFAULT PRINT for establishing default switches for
subsequent PRINT commands
Examples
The user prints the file DATA.FIL
@PRINT DATA.FIL
[LPT:DATA=/SEQ:101/LIMIT:10, 1 file]
@
The user prints four files with the NOTE RUN 4 on the header
page.
@PRINT INDEP.VAR,DEPEND.VAR,ERROR.DEV,TIMES.VAR/NOTE"RUN 4"
[LPT:INDEP=/SEQ:102/LIMIT:235, 4 files]
The user prints a job in a hurry by assigning a high priority of
60.
@PRINT INDEP/PRIORITY:60/COPIES:4
[LPT:INDEP=/SEQ:1976/LIMIT:784, 1 file]
R Command
Function
The R command clears the contents of memory, and loads and
starts an executable program.
Format
@R (PROGRAM) filespec/switch
filespec is the file specification of the program you want
to run. If you omit the file type, the system
assumes .EXE. If you omit the generation number,
the system uses the highest generation.
/switch is /USE-SECTION:n
specifies the memory section (from 0 to 37
octal) in which your program is to run. You
can use this switch pnly if your program can
be contained in one section.
Characteristics
Necessity of R command
Although in most cases you can run executable programs by simply
typing the program name in place of a TOPS-20 command, the R
command is necessary for running a program whose name is the
same as a TOPS-20 command.
Hints
If you are running another user's program, all you have to do is
type (or use recognition on) the full file specification
including the directory name; you do not have to give the R
command.
To run system programs all you have to do is type their name and
press the RETURN key.
The R command is equivalent to a combined GET and START
command.
If you plan to run a program often, use the LOAD command followed
by a SAVE command, before you give the first R command.
Defining SYS:
If you redeine logical name SYS: to be different from the system-wide
definition, you should include SYS: in the search list if you want to
use the R command to run system programs. For further information,
refer to the DEFINE command description, section "Redefining System
Logical Names".
Operation
1. Type R and press the ESC key; the system prints (PROGRAM).
@R (PROGRAM)
2. Type (or use recognition on) the file specification and press
the RETURN key. The system starts the program.
@R (PROGRAM) TELL
MESSAGES ARE BEING SENT...
DONE.
@
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The R command clears memory and terminates the current process,
then places in memory and starts the specified program, and
leaves your terminal at command level in the program (if any),
or at TOPS-20 command level.
Related Commands
INFORMATION LOGICAL-NAMES for examining the definition of SYS:
RUN for running executable user programs
Examples
The user runs the program TESTER.
@R (PROGRAM) TESTER
THIS IS A TEST OF THE DISK RECOVERY PROCEDURE.
HOW MANY DIRECTORIES? 5
NO ERRORS.
DONE.
@
RECEIVE command
Function
The RECEIVE command notifies the system that you are willing to accept
communication links, or advice from another user, or system messages.
Format
@RECEIVE argument
where
argument is a keyword, chosen from the list below,
naming the kind of communication you are
willing to accept
RECEIVE Command Arguments
LINKS allows communication links established by
another user's TALK command
ADVICE allows both assistance and communication links
initiated by another user's ADVISE or TALK
command
SYSTEM-MESSAGES allows messages of interest to all users sent by
the operator or other privileged users
Default - LINKS
Hints
Typing RECEIVE During Attempted TALK
If your terminal has been set to refuse links and another user
tries to talk to you by using the TALK command, both terminals
will give a series of CTRL/G signals (ringing bells or high-
pitched beeps) indicating the refused attempt. If you give the
RECEIVE LINKS command before these signals are finished, the
TALK command will succeed.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The RECEIVE command does not affect memory and leaves your terminal at
TOPS-20 command level.
Related Commands
ADVISE for sending commands to another user's
job
INFORMATION TERMINAL-MODE for examining your current terminal
settings
REFUSE for refusing communication links,
advice, or system messages
TALK for sending comments to another user
Examples
1. Give the RECEIVE command to accept communication links from
other users.
@RECEIVE LINKS
@
2. Set your terminal to receive links, at the request (sent via
the MAIL program, not shown here) of another user. Begin a
communication session with this user, during which you give
the RECEIVE ADVICE command also, to allow a demonstration of
the UDP program. Afterwards, set your terminal again to
refuse advice.
@RECEIVE
@
LINK FROM J-BLOGGS, TTY 127
@;THANKS, BUT IF YOU LET ME DO AN "ADVISE" I CAN SHOW YOU
@;HOW TO RUN THE PROG BY ACTUALLY DOING IT. OK?
@;SURE, I'LL FIX MY SETTING
@RECEIVE ADVICE
@ADVISE A-MOLE
Escape character is <CTRL>E, type <CTRL>? for help
A-MOLE, PS:<A-MOLE> Job 33 EXEC
[Advising]
UDP
UDP>LIST/DOCUMENTATION:/CREATED-SINCE:1-1-85 0:0
UDP>EXIT
@;YOU'LL GET A PRINTED LISTING
@;DO YOU SEE HOW I DID IT?
@;YES THANKS. BYE.
@
[Advice terminated]
@REFUSE ADVICE
@
REFUSE command
Function
The REFUSE command notifies the system that you are not willing to
accept communication links, or advice from another user, or system
messages.
Format
@REFUSE argument
where
argument is a keyword, chosen from the list below, naming
the kind of communication you are not willing to
accept
REFUSE Command Arguments
LINKS prevents both assistance and communication links
from being established by another user's ADVISE
or TALK command
ADVICE prevents assistance initiated by another user's
ADVISE command
SYSTEM-MESSAGES prevents messages of general interest sent to
all users by the monitor or by the operator or
other privileged users
Default - LINKS and ADVICE
Hints
Typing RECEIVE During Attempted TALK
If your terminal has been set to refuse links and another user
tries to talk to you by using the TALK command, both terminals
will give a series of CTRL/G signals (ringing bells or high-
pitched beeps) indicating the refused attempt. If you give the
RECEIVE LINKS command before these signals are finished, the
TALK command will succeed.
REFUSE to Safeguard Terminal Output
If you want your terminal to print a long file, say, without
interference, use REFUSE LINKS and REFUSE SYSTEM-MESSAGES
commands to prevent all classes of message from being received.
Be sure to use the RECEIVE command afterwards to restore the
previous condition of your terminal.
Special Cases
Implicit Refusal of Advice
If you give the REFUSE LINKS command, your terminal will be set
to refuse advice also. However, the INFORMATION TERMINAL-MODE
command may not display this setting unless you give an explicit
REFUSE ADVICE command as well.
Privileged Disregard of REFUSE
A user with enabled Wheel or Operator capabilities can give the
TALK or ADVISE command for any job.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The REFUSE command does not affect memory and leaves your terminal at
TOPS-20 command level.
Related Commands
INFORMATION TERMINAL-MODE for examining your current terminal
settings
RECEIVE for receiving communication links,
advice, or system messages
Examples
1. Use the REFUSE command to prevent other users from advising
your job.
@REFUSE ADVICE
@
2. Receive a communication link formed by another user's TALK
command. Confer with him briefly, then set your terminal to
refuse all classes of message over which you have control.
LINK FROM J-BLOGGS, TTY 37
@;HELLO, CAN YOU HELP ME WITH PSTAT?
@;SORRY, PLEASE BREAK. I'M JUST ABOUT TO PHOTO SOME SCREEN
@;OUTPUT. I'LL GET IN TOUCH LATER.
@;OK
@;BREAK
@REFUSE ADVICE
@REFUSE LINKS
@REFUSE SYSTEM-MESSAGES
@
REWIND Command
Function
The REWIND command rewinds a magnetic tape to its load point.
Format
@REWIND (DEVICE) dev: /switch
where
dev: is the name of the tape set or magnetic tape drive that
you want to rewind
/switch is one of the following:
/CURRENT-VOLUME-ONLY rewinds the tape set to start of
currently mounted volume
/ENTIRE-VOLUME-SET rewinds tape set to start of
first volume
Default - ENTIRE-VOLUME-START
Note: these switches can only be used for devices of
the form MTn:, not MTAn:.
Hints
Remember to assign the tape drive to your job and have the
operator mount your tape on it.
Be sure you have the correct tape parameters set (check them with
the INFORMATION (ABOUT) TAPE-PARAMETERS command); if necessary,
give the SET TAPE command.
Operation
1. Type REWI and press the ESC key; the system prints ND
(DEVICE).
@REWIND (DEVICE)
2. Type the magnetic tape device name (the colon is optional)
and press the RETURN key. The system prints an @ when the
tape is rewound.
@REWIND (DEVICE) MTA2:
@
Errors
1. If the device is not on line, the system ignores the command
and prints the message:
?Device is not on-line
Use the PLEASE program to contact the operator, then reissue
the command.
2. If you type a CTRL/C to exit from a program that has opened
the magnetic tape drive, and then you give the REWIND
command, the system prints the following message:
%Device MTAn: open on JFN n
%Close JFN? YES
If you answer YES (or just press the RETURN key), the system
closes the file, prints a confirming message, rewinds the
tape, and leaves you at TOPS-20 command level. Continuing
the program that previously opened the magnetic tape may
produce an error because the file has been closed.
@REWIND (DEVICE) MTA1:
?Device MTA1: open on JFN 3
%Close JFN? YES
3 MTA1: [OK]
@
If you answer NO, the system prints the message ?Command
aborted... and does not close the file or rewind the tape.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The REWIND command does not change a program in memory and leaves
your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Restrictions
The REWIND command works only for magnetic tapes.
Related Commands
BACKSPACE for moving a magnetic tape backward a specified number
of files or records
DIRECTORY (when used with a mag tape device) for rewinding a tape
set, printing a directory of its files & again rewinding
the tape set
SKIP for moving a magnetic tape backward a specified number
of files or records
UNLOAD for rewinding a mag tape completely onto the source reel
Examples
The user rewinds his tape on drive 1.
@REWIND (DEVICE) MTA1:
@
SKIP Command
Function
The SKIP command advances a magnetic tape a certain number of
files or records, or to the logical end-of-tape.
Format
@SKIP (DEVICE) dev: x units
dev: is the magnetic tape device name in the form MTAn:
where n is the drive number.
x is the number of files or records over which you
want to skip. If you are skipping to the logical
end-of-tape, you must type a number but it is
ignored.
units is either FILES, or RECORDS, or LEOT (for logical
end-of-tape).
Hints
Remember to assign the tape drive to your job and have the
operator mount your tape.
Be sure to have the correct tape parameters set (check them with
the INFORMATION (ABOUT) TAPE-PARAMETERS command); if necessary,
give the SET TAPE command.
Operation
1. Type SKIP and press the ESC key; the system prints (DEVICE).
@SKIP (DEVICE)
2. Type the device name and leave a space.
@SKIP (DEVICE) MTA3:
If the device is not a magnetic tape, the system ignores the
command and prints the message:
?dev: Device is not a magtape
where dev: is the device name you typed.
If you typed a non-existent device, the system ignores the
command and prints the message: ?No such device.
3. Type the number of files or records and leave a space. If you
are skipping to the logical end-of-tape, you may type any
arbitrary number.
@SKIP (DEVICE) MTA3: 2
4. Type (or use recognition on) the word FILES, RECORDS, or LEOT
(for logical end-of-tape) and press the RETURN key. The
system prints an @ when it finishes advancing the tape.
@SKIP (DEVICE) MTA3: 2 FILES
@
Errors
1. If the device is not on line, the system ignores the command
and prints the message:
?Device is not on-line
Use the PLEASE program to contact the operator, then reissue
the command.
2. If you type a CTRL/C to exit from a program that has opened
the magnetic tape drive, and then you give the SKIP command,
the system prints the following message:
?Device MTAn: open on JFN n
%Close JFN? YES
If you answer YES (or just press the RETURN key), the system
closes the file, prints a confirming message, advances the
tape, and leaves you at TOPS-20 command level. Continuing the
program that previously opened the magnetic tape may produce
an error because the file has been closed.
@SKIP (DEVICE) MTA1: 3 FILES
?Device MTA1: open on JFN 3
%Close JFN? YES
3 MTA1: [OK]
@
If you answer NO, the system prints the message ?Command
aborted... and does not close the file or advance the tape.
Restrictions
The SKIP command works only for magnetic tapes.
RECORDS Argument used for Unlabeled Tapes Only
You cannot use RECORDS argument to the SKIP command when using
a labeled tape, because read and write operations for labeled
tapes always move the tape to the beginning of a file.
Skipping Past (Unlabeled Tapes Only)
If you specify too large a value for n in the SKIP command line,
you can move past the logical end of tape(LEOT). In this case,
the operator may have to intervene before your tape control
commands will have effect again. You must be sure how many files
you have in the tape set if you use SKIP n rather than SKIP LEOT.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The SKIP command does not change any program in memory and leaves
your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Examples
The user skips over three records.
@SKIP (DEVICE) MTA1: 3 RECORDS
@
The user skips over 6 files.
@SKIP (DEVICE) MTA2: 6 FILES
@
The user skips to the logical end-of-tape.
@SKIP (DEVICE) MTA0: 0 LEOT
@
SUBMIT Command
Function
The SUBMIT command places entries into the Batch input queue.
Format
@SUBMIT (BATCH JOB) /switch(es) filespec/switch(es),...
where
filespec - specifies the control file you are submitting to
the BATCH input queue. If you have a number of
files with the same name and different file types
(including one with .CTL), the system will use the
file name with the .CTL file type unless you
specify otherwise.
switches - is a list of switches selected from the list below,
indicating your choice of SUBMIT command options.
Switches given at the beginning of the command
apply to all files specified, and switches given
after a file specification only apply to that
file.
,... - means that after a comma you can give more arguments
(filespec & switches) of the form already shown.
SUBMIT Command Switches
/ACCOUNT:account
Specifies the account of 39 or fewer characters to charge for
your batch job. This account must be valid for your user name.
Default account - your current account (check with INFO JOB-STATUS)
/AFTER: date and/or time, or day of week (or TODAY) and/or time
Submits the job and runs it only after the specified date and
time. The date is in the form dd-mmm-yy (e.g., 10-AUG-77).
The time is in the form hh:mm:ss (24-hour time of day).
If you give both date and time, separate them with a space.
If you wish the job to be processed after certain time then
precede the time with a plus sign (+) and do not specify date
(e.g. after two and a half hour from now - /AFTER:+02:30:00).
/ASSISTANCE:YES
:NO
Tells the system whether your job will require the assistance of
the operator (e.g. to mount a structure or mag tape) when it is run.
Default - YES
/BATCH-LOG:APPEND
:SUPERSEDE
:SPOOL
Tells the system either to append the log file of the batch job to
any existing log file of the same name, or to write a new generation
of the log file, or to send the log file to the spool area only.
Default - APPEND
/BEGIN:n
Begins processing the control file at page n of the file rather
than at the beginning of the file, which is the default.
/CARDS:n
Not applicable - No card punch at MRC
/CONNECTED-DIRECTORY:dev:<directory>
Specifies the connected directory for the batch job.
For privileged users only.
/DELETE
Tells the system to delete the control file after the batch
job has run.
/DEPENDENCY-COUNT:n
Sets the job's dependency-count to n. Because a BATCH job will
not be processed until its dependency count is 0, you can delay
the job by assigning it a positive dependency count, and then
when you want it to run, use the MODIFY command to change the
number to 0.
/DESTINATION-NODE:node name::
Specifies the DECnet remote job entry station on whose line
printer the log file of your batch job is to be printed.
The node name must be of 6 or fewer charcters & must be
followed by 2 colons (::).
/FEET:n
Not applicable - no paper tape punch at MRC
/JOBNAME:name
Is the name (of six or fewer alphanumeric characters) you want
to assign to the BATCh job. If you do not give this switch the
system uses the first six characters of the first file name in
the request.
/LOGDISPOSITION:KEEP
:DELETE
Tell the system whether to delete the log file after it has been
printed.
Default - KEEP
/LOGNAME:filespecs
Specifies a file to receive the log file generated from the
BATCH job. If you do not specify the log-filespec, the system
uses your connected directory, the control file name, and the
file type .LOG.
/NOTIFY:YES
:NO
Tells the system whether to send a message to your terminal when
the batch job has been completed.
Default argument - NO
Default argument (if switch is given) - YES
/OUTPUT:ALWAYS
:ERRORS
:NOLOG
Specifies the condition under which a log file is printed. The
system always prints a log file if the condition is ALWAYS, or
if you do not specify the /OUTPUT switch. If you do not want a
log file printed, use a condition of NOLOG. If you want the
log file printed only if there are errors, use the condition
ERRORS.
/PAGES:n
Permits the job to print up to n pages on the line printer.
Default n - 200
/PRESERVE
Tells the system not to delete the control file after teh batch
has run.
Default
/PRIORITY:n
Assigns a priority to the job, reflecting the urgency of the
request. This number can be 0 to 63, with a higher number
being processed before a lower number.
Default - 10.
/READER
Tells the system that your control file is composed of
card images, including control cards, on disk.
/RESTARTABLE:YES
:NO
Determines whether the job should be started again after a
system failure.
/SEQUENCE:n
Specifies a sequence number for the job. If you do not specify
this switch, the system assigns a number.
/TAG:label
Starts processing the job at the first line containing the
specified label (an alphanumeric name consisting of up to six
characters).
/TIME:hh:mm:ss
Specifies the maximum amount of central processor time the job
may use. The argument is in the form hh:mm:ss,
(hours:minutes:seconds).
Default time limit - 5 minutes if switch not given
- 60 minutes if switch is given without colon
or argument.
/TPLOT:n
Permits the job to use up to a given number of minutes of
plotter time.
Default n - 200
/UNIQUE:NO ( or 0)
:YES (or 1)
States, if you have SUBMITted two or more BATCH jobs, whether
they are allowed to run concurrently (designated by using 0 or NO) or
not (designated by using 1 or YES).
Default - YES
/USER:user name
specifies the user who is to be the owner of the batch request.
For privileged users only.
Operation
1. Type SUBMIT and leave a space.
@SUBMIT
2. Type the arguument to the SUBMIT command, then press the
RETURN key.
@SUBMIT TEST.CTL
[INP:TEST=/SEQ:1026/TIME:00:05:00]
@
Output
As soon as you complete a valid SUBMIT command, the system reponds by
printing, on your terminal, the jobname, request ID, & time limit for
the job. Each control file you submit is a seperate batch request, &
is described on a seperate line.
The INFORMATION (ABOUT) BATCH-REQUESTS command prints the
contents of the queue in the form:
JOB SEQ USER
FORD 9142 SARTINI /AFTER:29-AUG-77
JOB is the jobname, SEQ is the sequence number, and USER is the
name of the user who created the job. The jobname is the one you
must specify in a subsequent MODIFY or CANCEL command pertaining
to the specific SUBMIT request. The sequence number will also be
necessary in a subsequent MODIFY or CANCEL command if two
requests have the same jobname and you want to refer to only one
of them.
Characteristics
Ordinary Operation - No Switches
For most purposes you can use the SUBMIT command with just a
filespec,or s series of filespecs, for arguments.
Disposition of Log Files
The 3 SUBMIT command switches /BATCH-LOG, /LOGDISPOSITION, &
/OUTPUT, control what happens to the log filr of your batch
job.
Where Written
The log file is always written as the job runs, either to the
batch job's connected directory, or to a directory specified as
argument to the /LOGNAME switch, or th the system's output
spooling area (it is written to the spooling area only if you
give the /BATCH-LOG:SPOOL switch). If the /DESTINATION-NODE
switch is also given, the log file will be written into a
directory or spooling area at the specified node. Remember
that a batch job's connected directory is ordinarily defined
to be your connected directory at the time of the SUBMIT
command; privileged users may specify a batch job's connected
directory by using the /CONNECTED-DIRECTORY switch.
How Written, When Printed
The /BATCH-LOG switches APPEND & SUPERSEDE arguments desrcibe
the manner in which the log file is to be written: either it is
appended to any existing file of the same name (usually produced
by a previous running of the batch job) or it is written as a
new generation of the file. The /LOGDISPOSITION switch tells
the system whether to keep this file, wherever it is written,
once the batch job is finished. The /OUTPUT switch specifies
when you want a listing of the log ifle to be printed: either
always, or never, or only if errors occur when the batch is run.
By using combinations of these switches you can cause any
desirable action. Giving /OUTPUT:ALWAYS along with
/LOGDISPOSITION:DELETE allows a record of your batch job
with only a temporary use of your disk area, & permits you to
monitor the progress of the job while it is running (give TYPE
commands to view the file at you terminal). Giving just the
/BATCH-LOG:SPOOL switch allows a record without any use of your
disk area, although then you must wait for the printed output
to see this record.
Hints
To submit a simple Batch job, no switches are necessary.
The Batch input queue is a list of jobs waiting to be run by the
BATCH system.
To examine the contents of the entire queue, give the INFORMATION
(ABOUT) BATCH-REQUESTS command; if you want just the information
about your job(s), include the /USER switch.
If you want your SUBMIT command to always contain certain
switches, include a SET DEFAULT SUBMIT command with the switches
in your COMAND.CMD file.
You can include the MAIL program commands in your BATCH control
file and have the MAIL message inform you when your BATCH job is
finished. Refer to the MAIL program for a complete description.
If you want to change the value of a switch in, or add a switch
to in a previous SUBMIT command, give the MODIFY command.
If you want to remove entries you have previously placed in the
Batch input queue, give the CANCEL command.
Using SET DEFAULT SUBMIT
If there are switches that you always or usually supply when
using SUBMIT, give the SET DEFAULT SUBMIT command to establish
them as defaults for the reaminder of your terminal session.
The switches will then behave as if you had typed them directly
after the word SUBMIT. You can supersede any of these default
switches by actually supplying the switch, with another value,
when you give the SUBMIT command.
For Future Terminal Sessions
Put SET DEFAULT SUBMIT commands into a file of specification
COMAND.CMD or LOGIN.CMD in your log-in directory if you want
these defaults switches to be in effect for batch jobs you
submit during future terminal sessions as well. If both files
exist, the system reads LOGIN.CMD first.
For Nested Batch Jobs Only
Put SET DEFAULT SUBMIT commands into a file of specification
BATCH.CMD in your log-in directory if you want them to be in
effect at the log-in time of a "nested" batch job only, i.e.
a batch job started by a SUBMIT command within the control file
of another of your batch jobs. Note, however, that the system
also reads COMAND.CMD at the log-in time of a batch job if the
file exists in your log-in directory. It reads this file after
BATCH.CMD.
Restrictions
For Specifying Control Files and Log files
You cannot use the ACCESS commands to obtain the right to submit
control files from another directory, because your batch jobs
are logged in with rights only to your connected directory and
to directories to which you have access as a group member. The
control file, if not in your connected directory, must be in one
to which you have read access as a group member; the log file
specification , if you give one, must be for your connected
directory or for one to which you have write access as a group
member.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The SUBMIT command does not affect memory. It leaves your
terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Related Commands
CANCEL for withdrawing SUBMIT requests
INFO BATCH-REQUESTS for examining the batch input queue
MODIFY for changing SUBMIT requests before processing
has begun
SET DEFAULT SUBMIT for establishing default switches for subsequent
SUBMIT commands
Examples
The user submits a Batch job.
@SUBMIT FORD.CTL
[INP:FORD=/SEQ:58/TIME:0:05:00]
The user submits a Batch job and assigns it an alternate name.
The job cannot be started until two hours from the time the
command is given. The log file will not be printed.
@SUBMIT FORD.CTL/JOBNAME:TEST/AFTER:+2:00:00/OUTPUT:NOLOG
[INP:TEST=/SEQ:60/TIME:0:05:00]
The user cancels a job waiting in the Batch input queue.
@CANCEL BATCH TEST
[1 JOB KILLED]
The user lists the jobs running under the Batch system.
@INFORMATION (ABOUT) BATCH-REQUESTS
JOB SEQ USER
--- --- ----
FORD 63 SARTINI NOW RUNNING
SYSERR 8 SNYDER /AFTER:26-SEP-77 23:59:59
@
The user then cancels the running job.
@CANCEL BATCH FORD
[NO JOBS KILLED, 1 JOB CANCELLED]
TERMINAL Command
Function
The TERMINAL command changes various terminal parameters such as:
1. Input/output speed,
2. Handling of lowercase characters,
3. Length and width of the terminal page, and
4. Handling of the RUBOUT key.
Format
@TERMINAL (MODE IS) argument
argument is any one of the arguments listed below:
33 35 37 EXECUPORT
FLAG FORMFEED FULLDUPLEX HALFDUPLEX
HELP IMMEDIATE INDICATE LA120
LA30 LA36 LA38 LENGTH
LINE-HALFDUPLEX LOWERCASE NO PAGE
PAUSE RAISE SPEED SYSTEM-DEFAULT
TABS TERMINET TI TYPE
VK100 VT05 VT100 VT125
VT50 VT52 WIDTH
For detailed information of one of the above argument,
see under:
Terminal-Argument
where argument is any one of the switch
from the argumentt list given above.
Hints
The TERMINAL command helps make typing on the terminal more
convenient. When you want to temporarily stop output from your
terminal, set the PAGE parameter; you can then stop printing by
typing a CTRL/S and resume printing by typing a CTRL/Q.
If you use a video terminal, you can have the system erase
deleted characters from the screen, rather than printing the
character followed by a backslash. Do this by giving the
TERMINAL command with your terminal type as an argument. If you
use this type of terminal often, place the command in your
LOGIN.CMD file.
You can print the current values of your terminal parameters by
giving the INFORMATION (ABOUT) TERMINAL-MODE command.
Special Cases
Occasionally, your terminal may not work. If typing CTRL/Cs does
not work, try the following procedures before contacting the
operator:
1. Type a CTRL/T. This will not hurt any work you have done and
causes the system to print a line of information. If the
line prints, your terminal is working correctly; if the line
does not print, continue.
2. Type a CTRL/Q, then a CTRL/T. If the line prints, the
terminal has page mode set; if the line does not print,
contact the operator.
Operation
1. Type TERM and press the RETURN key; the system prints INAL
(MODE IS).
@TERMINAL (MODE IS)
2. Type (or use recognition on) the parameter you want to set.
If you do not have to give a parameter argument, press the
RETURN key. If you have to give one or more parameters,
press the ESC key, type (or use recognition on the argument),
then press the RETURN key.
@TERMINAL (MODE IS) LOWERCASE (EXISTS ON TERMINAL)
@TERMINAL (MODE IS) LENGTH (OF PAGE IS) 30
@
You can use TERMINAL commands after an initial <CR> but before logging
in, to adjust your terminal's characteristics.
Using Split Speeds
If you have a terminal that allows split speeds, you can set
the input & output speeds to different values. This will allow
you to take advantage of fast system response, for example,
without providing a needlessly fast input line. A setting of
150 2400 eill accomplish this. Note that using split
speeds on VT100, VT125 or VK100 terminals may cause the
"smooth scrolling" feature to malfunction. Refer to the
appropriate terminal manual,e.g. VT100 User's Guide.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The TERMINAL command does not change any program in memory and
leaves your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Examples
The user sets the width of his terminal line to 65.
@TERMINAL (MODE IS) WIDTH (OF LINE IS) 65
@
The user sets terminal page mode with a page length of 20.
@TERMINAL (MODE IS) PAGE (MODE) 20
@
The user tells the system to change all lowercase output to
uppercase.
@TERMINAL (MODE IS) NO LOWERCASE (EXISTS ON TERMINAL)
@
The user tells the system to change any lowercase characters he
types to the corresponding uppercase character.
@TERMINAL (MODE IS) RAISE (TERMINAL INPUT)
@
RENAME Command
Function
The RENAME command changes the file specification, account
descriptor, and protection number of a file.
Format
@RENAME (EXISTING FILE) filespec (TO BE) filespec;Pprot;Aaccount
filespec is the source file specification of the
file you are renaming. If you do not
specify a generation number for the
source file specification, the system
uses an *, which causes all generations
of the source file to be renamed.
filespec;Pprot;Aaccount is the new file specification,
protection number, and account
descriptor of the source file. The
system sets up defaults which are used
if you do not specify a complete new
file specification. The device defaults
to your connected structure; the
directory defaults to your connected
directory; the file name and file type
default to those of the source file;
and the generation defaults to -1, which
searches the directory in the new file
specification and assigns a generation
number one higher than the highest
existing generation number for a file
with the same file name and type.
Hints
The most efficient method of moving files from one directory to
another on the same structure is to rename them rather than copy
them. That way, the system just changes the file specifications
as opposed to the larger task of actually creating new files
containing the information from the source files. You also have
to give one less command, since after the COPY command you would
normally give a DELETE command that is not necessary after a
RENAME command. Note, however, that you cannot RENAME files
across structures. Use the COPY command to move files on one
structure to a different structure.
If the new file specification refers to an existing file, the
contents of the renamed file supersede the contents of the
existing file. You cannot recover the contents of the existing
file.
To change just the account descriptor or protection number of a
file, use the SET FILE command.
Operation
1. Type RENA and press the ESC key; the system prints ME
(EXISTING FILE).
@RENAME (EXISTING FILE)
2. Type (or use recognition on) the file you want to rename and
press the ESC key (if you did not use recognition). The
system prints (TO).
@RENAME (EXISTING FILE) TEST2.DAT.* (TO)
If you type an incorrect file name, type or generation
number, the system prints one of the following messages.
Find the correct source file and reissue the command.
?No such filename
?No such file type
?File not found
3. Type (or use recognition on) the new file specification and
(if you want to change them) the new protection number and
account descriptor, then press the RETURN key.
@RENAME (EXISTING FILE) TEST2.DAT.* (TO) TEST1.DAT.1
TEST2.DAT.1 => TEST1.DAT.2 [OK]
@
If you want the same file name and type as the source file,
and a new generation number, press the ESC key (if you want
the defaults printed on your terminal), then press the RETURN
key. These defaults are useful when you are copying files
from another directory.
If you want a new file name, but want the default file type,
press the ESC key at the end of the file name. The system
prints the rest of the file specification and creates a new
generation of the file. Press the RETURN key to confirm the
command.
If you want to create a new generation of the file, press the
ESC key after typing the file type, or simply omit the file
type and press the RETURN key. The system creates a new
generation number according to the files in the directory
which will contain the new file.
Output
If the source file specification or the new file
specification has a wildcard character, the system prints
each source file specification, an arrow =>, and the
corresponding new file specification. When the renaming of a
file is complete, the system prints [OK]. If the rename
fails, the system prints a reason; often it is: Source file
is not closed.
If there are no wildcard characters in the source file
specifications and you use recognition on the new file
specification, the system prints one of the following
messages describing the new file specification.
!Old generation! if you are superseding an existing file.
!New generation! if you are creating a new generation of
an existing file.
!New file! if you are creating a new file.
Errors
1. If the source file you specify is open or mapped into memory,
the system prints the message:
?Source file is not closed
Give the RESET command before renaming the file. If this
does not help try the POP command and RESET again.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The RENAME command does not change any program in memory and
leaves your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Restrictions
Renaming Open or Mapped File
You cannot rename a file that is open or mapped into memory, First
give the RESET command, or POP followed by RESET, if this is the case.
Renaming Between Structure
You cannot rename a file from one structure to another, but must use
the COPY command to reproduce its contents on the new structure,
then the DELETE command to remove it from the old structure.
Renaming Archived Files
You can rename an archived file by specifying it as the first
(or old) argument of a RENAME command. It will then have the
second (or new) argument as its specification and will remain
an archived file. However, you cannot give the specification
of an archived file as the second argument of a RENAME command
as this would replace the file's contents. If you attempt to
do so, the file you specify as the first argument will be
renamed to a generation higher by 1 than the highest existing
generation of the archived file, leaving the archived file
intact.
Warning
Replacing Previous Contents of Files
If you rename a file into a specification (including generation
number) that already exists, the previous contents of the new
file are replaced and cannot be recovered. However if you accidently
overwrite one of your files then ask the operator to recover the
overwritten file from system dump.
Examples
The user renames the file DUMPER.TXT to be DUMPER.OLD.
@RENAME (EXISTING FILE) DUMPER.TXT.* (TO BE) DUMPER.OLD.-1
DUMPER.TXT.55 => DUMPER.OLD.1 [OK]
@
The user renames all files with the file type .TXT to have the
file type .FIL.
@RENAME (EXISTING FILE) *.TXT.* (TO BE) *.FIL
10.TXT.7 => 10.FIL.1 [OK]
7.TXT.23 => 7.FIL.1 [OK]
7A.TXT.61 => 7A.FIL.1 [OK]
MAIL.TXT.1 => MAIL.FIL.1 [OK]
NEWBAT.TXT.1 => NEWBAT.FIL.1 [OK]
SAVE.TXT.3 => SAVE.FIL.1 [OK]
SET.TXT.1 => SET.FIL.1 [OK]
SUBMIT.TXT.3 => SUBMIT.FIL.1 [OK]
TERMIN.TXT.2 => TERMIN.FIL.1 [OK]
VTED.TXT.16 => VTED.FIL.1 [OK]
WORDS.TXT.1 => WORDS.FIL.1 [OK]
@
The user obtains a file from the directory MILLER.
@RENAME (EXISTING FILE) <MILLER>GTJFN.MAC.* (TO BE)
<MILLER>GTJFN.MAC.221 => GTJFN.MAC.1 [OK]
@
The user changes the name of a set of files.
@RENAME (EXISTING FILE) TEST.LEM.* (TO BE) TEST2.LEM.*
TEST.LEM.1 => TEST2.LEM1 [OK]
TEST.LEM.2 => TEST2.LEM.2 [OK]
TEST.LEM.3 => TEST2.LEM.3 [OK]
@
DDT Command
Function
The DDT command loads or merges a debugging program into memory
(unless one is already there), then starts it.
Format
@DDT/switch
where
switch is /USE-SECTION:n
specifies the memory section (from 0 to 37 octal) into which
the debugging program is to be loaded, run or merged.
Characteristics
IF a Debugging programis already loaded
If you have already loaded a debugging program into memory along
with your program, the DDT command starts the debugging program
IF your program, but not a debugging program is already loaded
If a program containing symbols is in memory without a debugging
program, the DDt command merges SYS:UDDT.EXE into memory, then starts
this debugging program.
IF there is no current program
If you do not have a program in memory, or if your program does not
contain symbols, the DDT command puts SYS:SDDT.EXE into memory and
starts it.
Hints
The DDT command is useful when you want to halt a program by
typing two CTRL/Cs, then continue running the debugger.
To find out if you have a debugger loaded, examine memory
location 74; type 74/. This command examines the contents of
memory location 74. If the system prints 0, or ?NO SUCH PAGE,
you do not have the debugger loaded yet. The DDT command causes
DDT to be loaded.
Operation
1. Type DDT and press the RETURN key; the system starts the
debugger, or loads and starts DDT.
@DDT
ENTERING FORDDT
>>
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The DDT command merges DDT into memory (if required) and leaves
your terminal at command level in the debugging program.
Related command
DEBUG for loading your program along with a particular debugging
program (e.g., FORDDT)
Examples
The user wants to debug his program; he has no debugger loaded,
so the system loads and starts DDT.
@DDT !The user types the DDT command.
DDT !The system loads and starts
!DDT.
The user starts debugging his FORTRAN program.
@DDT !The user types the DDT command.
ENTERING FORDDT !FORDDT is loaded, so the
!system starts it.
>> !Once the system prints >>,
!the user can give any FORDDT
!command.
DEBUG Command
Function
The DEBUG command loads your program and a debugger into memory,
Compiling the source file first if necessary, Then starts the debugger.
Format
@DEBUG (FROM)/switch source /switch object,......
switches are keywords chosen from the list below, indicating your
choice of DEBUG command options. They have different effects
depending on their position in the command line: placed
before all files in the command, they act as defaults for all;
otherwise they affect only the nearest precing file.
source is the file specification of the source program. The filename
must be of 6 or fewer characters, and the file type of 3 or
fewer characters; you cannot use a generation number. This
arguement is not necessary if you supply an object filespec.
a space separates the source file specifications from the
object file specification. If you do not give an
object file specification, you must not leave a
space.
object is the file specification of the object program. The
filename must be of 6 or fewer characters, and the file type
must be .REL; you cannot use a generation number. This
argument is not necessary if you supply a source filespec.
Default (if you give neither source nor object filespecs)
last filespecs and associated switches you gave in a LOAD
class command
,..... means that, after commas, you can give more arguments
(source, switches, and object) of the form already shown.
DEBUG Command Switches
/ALGOL
COmpiles the file using ALGOL, then loads and starts the
DDT debugging program. This is the default for sources
with the extension .ALG.
/BINARY
Generates a binary (object) file for each source program.
Normally, the system generates object files, so this
switch is useful in reversing a global /NOBINARY switch.
/COBOL
/COBOL-68
Compiles the program using COBOL, then loads and starts
the COBDDT debugging program. This is the default for
sources with the extension .CBL.
N.B No Cobol compiler at CRC at present
/COMPILE
Compiles the source program regardless of whether the
object file is up-to-date or not. Use this switch with
/LIST or /CREF switch to obtain listings when you have
current object files.
/CREF
Creates a file containing cross-reference information for
each source file you compile. The name of the file is the
name of the last source file and the file type is .CRF.
Give the CREF command to run the CREF program which reads
this file and prints a listing. If the object file is not
out of date, include the /COMPILE switch in your DEBUG
command. When a source file contains a COBOL program, the
system produces a listing file (the file type is .LST
instead of .CRF) containing the cross-reference
information; give the PRINT command (instead of CREF) to
print the .LST file.
/DDT
Loads the DDT debugger along with the program.
/DEBUG
Provides additional debugging information in the object
program (FORTRAN only and only if not using /OPTIMISE)
/FORTRAN
Compiles the file using FORTRAN, then loads and starts the
FORDDT debugging program. This is the default for sources
with the extension .FOR.
/LAGUAGE-SWITCHES:"/switch(es)"
passes the specified switches to the compiler that will process
the file(s) to which this switch applies. You must include
the switches in double quotation marks (" ").
/LIBRARY
Loads only the routines from the object file that are
called by the main program or another subroutine. The
system libraries are always searched.
/LIST
Prints a listing of each program you compile. The listing
name is the name of the last source file. Unless you
specify this switch, the system does not print a listing
of your program. If you also include a /CREF switch, the
system ignores the /LIST switch.
/MACRO
Assembles the file using MACRO, then loads and starts the
DDT debugging program. This is the default for sources
with the extension .MAC.
/MAP
Produces loader maps during the loading process and stores
them in the file object.MAP, where object is the name of the
module containing the start address; or (if no start address)
the system uses nnnLNK.MAP, where nnn is your
job number.
/NOBINARY
inhibits the generation of a binary (object) file. This
switch is useful along with the /CREF or /LIST switch to
produce listings without additionally producing an object
file.
/NOCOMPILE
Compiles a file only if it is out-of-date. Since the
system normally does this, the /NOCOMPILE switch is usful
for turning off a global /COMPILE or /RELOCATABLE switch.
/NODEBUG
Omits loading debugging information with the program
(FORTRAN only).
/NOLIST
Inhibits the generation of a listing file. Normally, the
system does not generate a listing file.
/NOOPTIMIZE
Inhibits the generation of optimized object files (FORTRAN
programs only).
/NOSEARCH
Loads all routines in a file, regardless of whether the
routines are called by another module. Normally the
system loads all routines in an object file, therefore
this switch is useful in reversing a global /SEARCH
switch.
/NOSYMBOLS
Inhibits loading symbols with the program. Normally, the
system loads symbols with all programs.
/OPTIMIZE
Produces optimized object files (FORTRAN programs only).
Do not use /DEBUG if using this switch.
/RELOCATABLE
switch causes the system to use an existing object file,
regardless of its date. Normally, the system assumes the
action of the /NOCOMPILE switch.
/SEARCH
Is identical to the /LIBRARY switch.
/SYMBOLS
Loads the program with its appropriate symbol table.
Normally, the system loads all programs with symbols.
/STAY
returns your terminal to TOPS-20 command level so that you
can perform other work while the system continues executing
the DEBUG command. You may immediately receive the TOPS-20
prompt and can then issue any other commands. Be careful with
commands that run programs because those commands may clear memory
and terminate the current process. Also, you could easily send
incorrect data to programs expecting terminal input. This switch
saves you from having to : issue a ^T to make sure the debugger
has begun; give a ^C to halt debugging; and issue a CONTINUE STAY
command to remain at command level during debugging.
Characteristics
Debug Command with No Arguments
If you give only DEBUG-command switches as arguments to a DEBUG
command, the system appends the arguments you gave in the last
LOAD-class command that contained a file specification or LINK
switch, then executes the command. If there are no arguments to
recall, the system prints the message ?No saved arguments.
Using Standard File Types
If you specify source files with standard types (.FOR,.MAC,.CBL,
.ALG) in a DEBUG command, the system automatically calls the
appropriate compiler when compilation is necessary. If you
specify sources files by filename only, the system searches
your connected directory in the above order for a file of this
name and standard type. To debug programs from sources that have
nonstandard file types, give a switch to indicate the proper
compiler (/FORTRAN, /MACRO, /COBOL, /ALGOL). A switch will take
precedence over a standard file type if they indicate different
languages. If no compiler is indicated with either a switch or a
standard file type, the FORTRAN compiler is used.
Compiling New Sources Only
The system will update the object file if it is older than any
one of the corresponding source files. Suppose you give the
command:
@DEBUG (FROM) NXTLAT.FOR
If NXTLAT.REL does not exist, or if it is older than the most
recent NXTLAT.FOR (i.e., it has a write date before the write
date of NXTLAT.FOR), then the system compiles NSTLAT.FOR to
produce an up-to-date NXTLAT.REL. After producing NSTLAT.REL,
the system loads it into memory. Refer to Section 8.3.3 which
describes the manner in which object files are updated.
Name of Debuggung Program Loaded by DEBUG
Ordinarily the DEBUG command causes the appropriate debugging
program to be loaded along with your program (FORDDT with
FORTRAN programs). Use /DDT switch to specify that DDT be
used.
Hints
Comma Between Filespecs
If you give two or more filespecs separated by commas as arguments
to DEBUG, the loaded programs exist in memory at the same time
and will act as a single program. You can use this feature to
substitute ane module for another under varying conditions
or for diffrent applications.
Plus Signs Between Filespecs
If you give more filespecs separated by plus signs (+) as
arguments to DEBUG, they are treated as a single file
by compilers. Their object module is stored under any
filename given as the "object" argument of the command,
or (if none) under the last filename in the group and
file type .REL.
Indirect Files as Argument
You can store the arguments (source and object filespecs,
switches) of a DEBUG command in an indirect file, and
specify them by typing an at sign (@) and its filespec
as a DEBUG command argument.
Establishing Default Arguments with the SET Command
You can issue SET DEFAULT COMPILE-SWITCHES command to set up
default global argument to the DEBUG command. Insert this
SET command in your COMAND.CMD file to change your own
defaults permanently.
Including all FORTRAN Debugging information
If you are debugging a FORTRAN program and you wish to examine
line numbers of DO loops, or use statement tracing or array
dimension checking, give the /DEBUG and /COMPILE switches
with the DEBUG command to include the necessary information.
Related Command
COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE Other LOAD-class commands for performing
related functions.
DDT For loading and starting the DDT debugging
program, or for starting the debugging
program you have already loaded.
Operation
1. Type DEBU and press the ESC key; the system prints G (FROM).
@DEBUG (FROM)
2. Type (or use recognition on) the sets of source
specifications, object specifications and switches. Press
the RETURN key. The system loads the file and starts the
debugger.
@DEBUG (FROM) TEST.FOR
FORTRAN: TEST
LINK: Loading
[LNKDEB FORDDT EXECUTION]
ENTERING FORDDT
>>
Errors
1. If you give a command and one of the source files is missing,
the system continues processing the command and prints the
message:
%SOURCE FILE MISSING - name.typ
where name.typ is the name and type of the source file.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The DEBUG command minimally runs the appropriate translator and
the LINK program, thereby clearing any previous program from
memory. Your terminal is left at command level in your debugging
program.
Examples
The user debugs a simple MACRO program.
@DEBUG (FROM) TRANSL.MAC
MACRO: TRANSL
LINK: Loading
[LNKDEB DDT Execution]
DDT
The user combines three FORTRAN programs into one main program
and includes the entire subroutine package TYPE2.
@DEBUG (FROM) 1+2+3,TYPE2
FORTRAN: 1
MAIN.
FORTRAN: TYPE2
TYPE2
LINK: Loading
[LNKDEB FORDDT Execution]
ENTERING FORDDT
>>
The user debugs his COBOL program.
@DEBUG (FROM) COMPUT.CBL
COBOL: MAIN [COMPUT.CBL]
LINK: Loading
[LNKDEB COBDDT Execution]
STARTING COBOL DDT
*
PUNCH command
The PUNCH command has been removed from the system as it has
become redundent. However if you wish to know the function of
the command, refer to TOPS-20 Command Reference manual.
MERGE Command
The EOF command has been removed from the system as it has become
redundent, however the function and discription of the command is
as below.
Function
The MERGE command places an executable program in memory, combining it
with whatever program (if any) is already there.
Format
@MERGE filespec/switch
where
filespec is the file specification of any executable program
Default file type - .EXE
/switch is /USE-SECTION: n
specifies the memory section (from 0 to 37
octal) into which your program is to be merged.
You can use this switch only if your program
can be contained in one section.
Hints
The INFORMATION (ABOUT) MEMORY-USAGE command is useful in
checking the operation of the MERGE command.
Special Cases
Generally, any currently assigned memory is left intact except
where pages of the new file overlap the pages of the existing
memory. In that case, the pages of the new file replace the
pages of memory.
Operation
1. Type MERG and press the ESC key; the system prints E
(PROGRAM).
@MERGE (PROGRAM)
2. Type (or use recognition on) the file specification, then
press the RETURN key. The system prints an @ when the merge
is complete.
@MERGE (PROGRAM) TOPTAP.EXE.1
@
Errors
1. If the program is not in the form of an .EXE file, the system
may print the message:
?UNEXPECTED END-OF-FILE TRAP IN EXEC AT n
Make sure you have specified the correct file (n is a
particular location in memory.)
2. If the program is not in the form of an .EXE file, the system
may merge it. However, later you may receive the message:
?ENTRY VECTOR IS NOT LESS THAN 777
Make sure you have specified the correct file.
Characteristics
The MERGE command changes the contents of memory and leaves your
terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
The MERGE command does not alter the entry vector if the file
being merged is in proper .EXE file format.
Examples
The user merges the program TESTOP.EXE with the program currently
in memory.
@MERGE (PROGRAM) TESTOP.EXE
@
The user places the RTRANS program in memory, checks it by giving
the INFORMATION command, merges the PA1050 program, then finally
checks the contents of memory again.
@GET (PROGRAM) SYS:RTRANS.EXE.20
@INFORMATION (ABOUT) MEMORY-USAGE
4. PAGES, ENTRY VECTOR LOC 140 LEN 254000
0-3 <OLD>RTRANS.EXE.20 2-5 R, CW, E
@MERGE (PROGRAM) SYS:PA1050.EXE.395
@INFORMATION (ABOUT) MEMORY-USAGE
27. PAGES, ENTRY VECTOR LOC 140 LEN 254000
0-3 <OLD>RTRANS.EXE.20 2-5 R, CW, E
700-726 <SUBSYS>PA1050.EXE.395 1-27 R, E
@
EOF Command
The EOF command has been removed from the system as it has become
redundent, however the function and discription of the command is
as below.
Function
The EOF command writes an end-of-file mark on the specified
magnetic tape. Use this command for unlabeled tapes only.
Hints
Remember to assign the tape drive to your job and have the
operator load your tape.
Be sure to have the correct tape parameters set (check them with
the INFORMATION (ABOUT) TAPE-PARAMETERS command); if necessary,
give the SET TAPE command.
EOF seldom needed
Because tape-writing programs and commands automatically write
end-of-file marks in the apropriate places, you do not ordinarily
need the EOF command. But it can be usefull if such program
is interrupted (by your CNTRL/C or by a system failure
and restart) and you want to preserve the information
already written. Also, you can shorten files on an existing
tape by giving an EOF command at the desired point.
Format
@EOF (DEVICE) dev:
dev: is the magnetic tape device name in the form
MTAn:, where n is the drive number.
Operation
1. Type EOF and press the ESC key; the system prints (DEVICE).
@EOF (DEVICE)
2. Type the device name and press the RETURN key. The system
prints an @ after it writes the EOF.
@EOF (DEVICE) MTA3:
@
Errors
1. If the device is not on line, the system ignores the command
and prints the message:
?Device is not on-line
Use the PLEASE program to contact the operator; then reissue
the command.
2. If a tape is not mounted on the drive, the system may print
the message:
?Device or data error
Use the TMOUNT program to contact the operator; then reissue
the command.
3. If you type a CTRL/C to exit from a program that has opened
the magnetic tape drive, and then give the EOF command, the
system prints the following message:
?Device MTAn: open on JFN m
%Close JFN? YES
If you answer YES (or just press the RETURN key), the system
closes the file, prints a confirming message, writes the
end-of-file mark, and leaves you at TOPS-20 command level.
Continuing the program that previously opened the magnetic
tape may produce an error because the file has been closed.
@EOF (DEVICE) MTA2:
?Device MTA1: open on JFN 3
%Close JFN? YES
3 MTA1: OK
@
If you answer NO, the system prints the message ?Command
aborted...and does not close the file or write the
end-of-file mark.
Characteristics
The EOF command does not change any program in memory and leaves
your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Restrictions
EOF with open files
If you have given a CTRL/C to exit from a program that has
opened a magnetic tape drive and you then give the EOF
command for that tape drive, the system will first allow
you to close the associated file. You must do so for the
EOF command to succeed, but you will probably be unable
to continue the program from that point, because the file
will now be closed.
The EOF command works only for magnetic tapes.
Related command
BACKSPACE
REWIND
SKIP
UNLOAD
Examples
The user writes an EOF on the tape mounted on drive 3.
@EOF (DRIVE) MTA3:
@
SET FILE EPHEMERAL Command
Function
@SET FILE EPHEMERAL filespecs
This command changes a .EXE file attributes to "ephemeral"(!). Using
this command with non-executable files should have no effect. If a
.EXE file is set ephemeral, then after it has completed running, it no
longer resides in memory. INFO MEMORY will reveal that it is no longer
in memory.
Example
@SET FILE EPHEMERAL TEST.EXE
TEST.EXE.1 [OK]
@TEST
CPU time 0.13 Elapsed time 0.31
@INFORMATION MEMORY
No program
@SET FILE NO EPHEMERAL TEST.EXE
TEST.EXE.1 [OK]
@TEST
CPU time 0.13 Elapsed time 0.40
@INFORMATION MEMORY
60. pages, Entry vector loc MAIN. len 254000
0-3 Private R, W, E
4-5 TEST.EXE.1 5-6 R, CW, E
512-515 Private R, W, E
516-577 US:<SUBSYS>FORO10.EXE.6 2-63 R, CW, E
@
ERUN Command
Function
The ERUN command places in memory and starts an executable program,
as an ephemeral process.
Format
@ERUN (PROGRAM) filespec/switch
where
filespec is the file specification of any executable program
Default dev:<dir> - SYS:
Default .typ - .EXE
/switch is /USE-SECTION:n
specifies the memory section (from 0 to 37
octal) in which your program is to run. You
can use this switch pnly if your program can
be contained in one section.
Hint
It is possible to run a program so that it behaves more like a command,
that is, so that it does not destroy the previous memory image.
If this is the normal mode of operation of the program, then it is
probably better to set the file ephemeral, so that it can be run by
name, e.g.:-
@SET FILE EPHEMERAL FRED.EXE
@FRED
:
Effect on Memory & Terminal
The ERUN command places in memory & starts the specified program, &
leaves your terminal at command level in the program (if any), or at
TOPS-20 command level. On completion of the program, the memory is left
as it was before the program was run.
Related Commands
EXECUTE for running source or object programs
GET for placing an executable program in memory
R for running executable programs stored on SYS:
SAVE for saving a program in executable (.EXE) format
START for starting the program currently in memory
Example
Run one of your executable programs
@ERUN TESTF1.EXE
:
@I MEM
No program
@